Kitchen Renovations

Transcript

PROJECT MANUAL for JENSEN BEACH ELEMENTARY SCHOOL KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA MCSD 100Ϯ-0-2016JC Bid Documents Architect FLORIDA ARCHITECTS, INC. 924 Delaney Avenue Orlando, Florida 32806 Phone: 407-370-5555 Fax: 407-370-5550 Structural Engineer TRC WORLDWIDE ENGINEERING, INC. 1230 North University Drive Plantation, FL 33322 Phone: (954) 484-7777 Fax: (954) 484-7834 License Number AA0002730 Plumbing/Mechanical/Electrical Engineer FORT PIERCE ENGINEERING, INC. 315 South 7th Street Fort Pierce, Florida 34950 Phone: (772) 672-4636 Fax: (772) 672-4637 FLA Project No. 4176-05 Date Issued: September 15, 2015 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1002-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 000500 - TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 16 Structure Demolition DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE 03 21 00 Reinforcement Bars 03 24 00 Fibrous Reinforcement 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 13 Concrete Resurfacing DIVISION 4 – MASONRY 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 – METAL 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 13 Elastomeric Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 – OPENINGS 08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames 08 14 16 Flush W ood Doors 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 81 00 Glass and Glazing DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09 22 16 Non-structural Metal Framing 09 24 00 Cement Plastering 09 24 25 Plastic Lathing, Furring and Finishing Components 09 29 00 Gypsum Board 09 30 00 Tiling 09 51 23 Acoustical Tile Ceilings 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring 09 91 00 Painting 09 96 00 High Performance Coatings DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10 14 00 Signage 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11 40 00 Foodservice Equipment DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS NOT USED DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED September 15, 2015 000500 - Table Of Contents Page 1 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1002-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 22 05 00 Common Work Results For Plumbing 22 05 23 General-duty Valves For Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping 22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping 22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 00 Common Work Results For HVAC 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements For HVAC Equipment 23 05 29 Hangers And Supports For HVAC Piping And Equipment 23 05 48 Vibration And Seismic Controls For HVAC Piping And Equipment 23 05 53 Identification For HVAC Piping And Equipment 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 31 13 Metal Ducts 23 31 16 Nonmetal Ducts 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 34 13 Axial HVAC Fans 23 34 16 Centrifugal HVAC Fans 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles 23 37 14 Louvers 23 38 13 Commercial-kitchen Hoods 23 41 00 Particulate Air Filtration 23 81 26 Split-system Air-conditioners 23 82 16 Air Coils DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 Common Work Results For Electrical 26 05 19 Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables 26 05 23 Control-voltage Electrical Power Cables 26 05 26 Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification For Electrical Systems 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers 26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers 26 51 00 Interior Lighting DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 Common Work Results For Communications 27 10 00 Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 13 Conductors And Cables For Electronic Safety And Security 28 31 11 Digital, Addressable Fire-alarm System September 15, 2015 000500 - Table Of Contents Page 2 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1002-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 31 16 Termite Control September 15, 2015 000500 - Table Of Contents Page 3 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 100-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 02 41 16 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. B. C. D. 1.2 Demolition and removal of designated structures or portions thereof and removal of materials from site, to include foundations, footings and slabs-on-grade, and other associated building materials. Disconnecting, removal, and reconnection of underground conduits, tanks, storm, sewer, and utility piping. Exercise of sustainable building practices to include salvage and recycling of selected materials to greatest extent practical Protection of existing structures to remain. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 1.3 Section 01 35 53 - Security Procedures. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals Section 31 21 00 - Off Gassing Mitigation. Section 31 23 00 - Excavation and Fill. Section 31 22 00 - Grading. Section 32 31 13 – Chain Link Fencing REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. 1.4 See Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, definitions, abbreviations, and acronyms. Florida Building Code 2010. NFPA 1, Chapter 29. NFPA 241, Standard for Safeguarding Construction Alteration and Demolition Operation, 2000 Edition. Florida Fire Prevention Code. SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. E. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Shop Drawings: Indicate demolition and removal sequencing plan and storage locations for salvageable items, if maintained on site; location and construction of barricades, fences and temporary work. Submit dust management plan to indicate methods and procedures for dust mitigation during demolition. Use of Owner’s water supply will be permitted. Submit erosion management plan to indicate type and details of silt barriers and site plan locating silt barrier locations during demolition Submit materials recycling plan. Recycled materials shall include concrete, block, steel, drywall, acoustical tile, carpeting, asphalt pavement and base, wiring, and other equipment shall be salvaged. September 15, 2015 024116 - Structure Demolition Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 100-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Comply with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. 1. 1.6 Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, subsurface obstructions, and structures remaining within work area. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 1.7 A.Demolition Firm: Company currently specializing in performing structural demolition of equivalent work scope with minimum five years continuous documented experience. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. B. Conform to applicable codes for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, dust control, runoff and erosion control, and disposal of demolished materials. Obtain required permits from authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2. C. D. E. 1.8 Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. Owner will obtain lead and asbestos tests for buildings scheduled for demolition prior to start of demolition. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or fire hydrants, without permits and coordinating with Owner’s Project Manger. Comply with applicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials. Immediately contact Owner’s Project Manger. Owner will be responsible for removal of hazardous materials. Demolition may occur during school hours with written permission of Owner’s Project Manager, upon review and approval of demolition area protective fencing plan and life safety plan ensuring safety and requried egress of occupied building occupants. NOTIFICATION OF UTILITY PROVIDER A. B. 1.9 Notify Utility Companies and Utility Locator Service Providors of impending work so that existing conduits, wires, pipes or equipment affected by demolition work will be located. Arrange for removal or relocation of affected items and pay fees or costs in conjunction with removal or relocation, except as otherwise noted. PROTECTION A. Prior to starting demolition operations, provide to Owner protection plan of existing buildings or other items to remain. 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Indicate temporary envelope barriers and construction type separating and protecting existing structure to remain and structure to be demolished. Envelope barriers shall resist wind, moisture, dust, mildew and heat migration and mitigate noise intrusion into the structure. Barriers shall maintain existing means of egress to afford safety of occupants. Provide construction barriers beyond the structural barriers consisting of chain link fencing outer barrier and perforated plastic barrier located ten feet inside chain link fencing to provide double construction barrier. Owner may continuously occupy site immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. If Owner continues to occupy site, comply with following requirements: September 15, 2015 024116 - Structure Demolition Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3. C. D. E. 1.10 A. PROJECT COORDINATION School Activities: 2. 3. A. B. C. 1.12 A. 1.13 A. B. Conduct demolition work in a manner that will minimize or eliminate disruption of Owners normal operations. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and general public to and from occupied portions of the site. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of demolition activities that will impact Owners normal operations. Obtain specific approval from Owner’s Project Manager for work that could impact Owner’s operations. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items to be demolished. Conditions at time of commencement of contract will be maintained by Owner insofar as practical. Protect exposed existing finish work that is to remain during demolition operations. Take precautions necessary for noise and dust abatement to minimize impact on occupied areas. 1. 1.11 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 100-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Coordinate utility outages to minimize disruption of school activities such as school opening and closing so that students, bus, and student car drop-off and pick-up traffic are not impeded. Coordinate with school staff to minimize disruption of regular instructional programs and periodic student testing. Fire alarm, intercom, voice and data function and connectivity shall be maintained during facility occupancy. Systems may be disrupted only after hours during periods of non occupancy, if approved, in advance, by Fire Department and Owner’s Project Manager. ABATEMENT Owner will provide abatement survey. Owner or abatement contractor will remove ACM friable or potentially ACM friable hazardous material. Owner's contractor will also remove other hazardous material. Owner will pay costs of abatement, except for disposal of fluorescent tubes and ballasts which shall be demolition contractor’s responsibility. SALVAGE Demolition contractor is responsible for implementing materials recycling plan. Materials such as concrete products, steel, acoustical tile, carpeting, asphalt pavement and base, wiring, and other equipment shall be salvaged to greatest extent practical. DEMOLITION Demolition may be accomplished by Owner under separate contract, or under GC/CM contract, as indicated. No explosives are allowed during demolition or construction except by written request to Owner’s Project Manager. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIALS A. Fill Material shall be in accord with Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill. September 15, 2015 024116 - Structure Demolition Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 TEMPORARY FENCING A. See Sections 31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing and 32 31 13 – Fencing for temporary fencing requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. B. C. D. 3.2 Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. Protect existing landscaping materials, appurtenances, structures that are not to be demolished. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and shoring. Mark location of utilities. DEMOLITION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures. B.Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify Architect and Owner. Do not resume operations until directed by Owner’s Project Manager. C.Coordinate operations with minimum interference to facility operations, student, staff and public access to facilities. Maintain continuous fire and emergency egress and access. D.Obtain written permission from adjacent property owners when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. Make videotape record of adjacent property structures to assess physical condition prior to starting demolition operations. Sprinkle work area with water at regular intervals to minimize dust. Provide hoses and water connections for this purpose. Owner’s potable water is available for this use. Disconnect, remove and cap, and identify designated utilities within demolition areas. Remove foundation walls and footings to a minimum of two feet below finished grade beyond area of new construction. Remove concrete slabs on grade. Empty buried tanks located within demolition area, remove tanks, components, and piping from site. Dispose of materials removed from tanks per applicable codes and regulations. Remove materials to be re-installed or retained in manner to prevent damage. Store and protect in accordance with requirements of Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Requirements. Backfill areas excavated as a result of demolition, in accord with Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill. Rough grade and compact areas affected by demolition to maintain site grades and contours. Remove demolished materials from site, and suitably dispose of materials off-site per applicable codes and regulations. Do not burn or bury materials on site. Leave site in clean condition. Remove temporary work. Make repairs to adjacent structures outside work area damaged during demolition operations. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 024116 - Structure Demolition Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 03 21 00 - REINFORCEMENT BARS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. 1.2 Concrete and masonry reinforcement where indicated. RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcing Steel. Section 03 24 00 – Fibrous Reinforcing. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Section 03 50 00 - Cementitious Decks and Toppings. Section 32 13 00 - Rigid Paving. REFERENCES A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. 2. 3. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. AWS DI.4-11: Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): 1. 2. 1.4 ACI 117/117R-10: Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materails. ACI 301-10: Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. ACI 315-99: Details and Detailing for Concrete Reinforcement. ACI 318-08: Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. ACI 439.3R-07: Mechanical Connection of Reinforcing Bars. American Welding Standards (AWS): 1. D. ASTM A1064/A1064M-15: Standard Specification for Carbon Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed for Concrete. ASTM A615/615M-15a: Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A775/775M-7b(2014): Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. th Manual of Standard Practice, 27 Edition. th Placing of Reinforcing Bars, 9 Edition. SUBMITTALS A. A. September 15, 2015 Comply with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. 032100 - Reinforcement Bars Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. Submit fabricator’s shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. 1. 2. C. D. Comply with ACI 315-99 indicating bar schedules stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement and accessories. Include special reinforcement at openings through concrete structures. Shop Drawings of structural drawings is not acceptable. Splicing Selection: 1. Compression splices shall be either welded or mechanical in accord with ACI 318-08: a. b. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. G. Where staggered lap splices are used, provide mixture of bar sizes as appropriate where vertical bar size changes on drawings. Where different bar sizes are lap spliced, length of bar splice shall be based on smaller bar size. Where larger quantity of smaller bar size, splice length shall be based on larger bar size. Reinforcing bar detailer shall concrete strength at point of bar splice, bar position, bar spacing, and confinement position based on ties, stirrups or edge condition in selecting proper lap length. Increase laps for bundled bars in accord with ACI 318-08, with number based on total bars in group, including lapped bars. Shop drawings shall indicate splice lap lengths and where they occur. Bar diameter lap tables or other references are not acceptable. Stagger bar laps, as required, to keep space between bars within splice zone with 1” (25.4mm) or one bar diameter clearance. Detailing Bar Placement: 1. 2. H. Bars may be lapped at one section up to 4% steel. Half of bars may be lapped up to 5.3% steel. One third of bars may be lapped up to 6% steel. Use other splice choices above 6% steel. Splicing Detailing: 1. 2. F. Mechanical compression connectors in accord with ACI 439.3R-07, staggered ½ Class B lap length and maintaining minimum ¼ total tensile capacity of any column face. Full penetration welds staggered minimum 18 bar diameters. Total steel at lap splices shall not exceed 8% for columns or shear wall cores containing spliced bars. a. b. c. d. E. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 For bars not located at edge condition or between edge condition or openings, or other locations where bar can’t be shifted longitudinally, dimensions shall be indicated on drawings from identifiable building grid, wall or edge to at least one end of bar. In congested areas where bars are less than two bar diameters clear or where placement of bars in one member requires critical templating to allow bar placement in intersecting members, provide details that indicate clearances, spacing, and arrangement for proper bar placement. Accessories: 1. Indicate accessories, supports, chairs, bolsters, and spacers required to complete installation. September 15, 2015 032100 - Reinforcement Bars Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. I. Where supports are beyond scope of CRSI detailing standards and require custom designed supports, provide engineering calculations indicating capacity of support system proposed Welding of Reinforcing Bars: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Provide welding procedure in accord with AWS D1.4-11. Certified chemical analysis of steel to be welded. Carbon equivalence calculations in accord with AWS D1.4-11. Welder qualification certificates current within one year of project start. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Comply with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 1. 2. 1.6 Reinforcement manufactured in ISO 9001:2000 certified facility. Minimum 10-year satisfactory performance history of reinforcement products specified. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. Comply with Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Requirements. Deliver reinforcement bars to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened bundles, undamaged, with labels clearly identifying product name, and identification numbers, and code approvals. Storage: 1. D. Store reinforcement above grade, clean and dry condition to prevent oxidation until ready for use. Handling: Protect reinforcement during handling and placement to prevent contamination. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. B. Comply with Chapter 5 of ACI 301-10. Reinforcing Steel: 1. 2. 3. C. D. Bars #3 through #11 shall be deformed bars in accord with ASTM A615/A615M-15a, Grade 60 or ASTM A706, Grade 60. Welded wire fabric is not approved for use. See Section 03 24 00 – Fibrous Reinforcing. Unless otherwise indicated, minimum concrete protective cover shall be as specified in ACI 301-10. Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Bars: Comply with ASTM A775/A775M-15a. Form Saving Splice Connectors: Flanged products allowing insertion of threaded reinforcing bars into previously formed face from following approved manufacturers: 1. Erico International Corp., 31700 Solon Rd., Solon, OH 44139; Tel: 440-248-0100; Fax: 440-349-2996; Website: www.erico.com. a. September 15, 2015 Product: Lenton® Form Saver Couplers. 032100 - Reinforcement Bars Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. Dayton Superior Threaded Splicing Systems, Div. of Salit Steel Corp., 7771 Stanley Ave., Box 837, Niagara Falls, Ontario, Canada NT L2E 6V6; Tel: 905-354-5691, 800-263-7110; Fax: 905-356-0809; Website: www.salitsteel.com. a. 3. E. F. G. Product: DB-SAE Dowel Bar Splicer System. Williams Form Engineering Corp., 8165 Graphic Dr., Belmont, MI 49306; Tel: 616-0815, 770-948-8300; Fax: 770-949-2377; Website: williamsform.com. a. 4. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Product: C2D Rebar Flange Coupler. Other manufacturers requesting product approval shall comply with Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Mechanical Connectors and Splice Devices: Proprietary products suitable for use intended, and listed in accord with ACI 439-3R. Steel Wire: In accord with ASTM A1064/A1064M-15. Prefabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats: In accord with ASTM A1064/A1064M-15. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLACING AND FINISHING A. Placing and finishing concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 032100 - Reinforcement Bars Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 03 24 00 - FIBROUS REINFORCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. 1.2 Macro synthetic polypropylene fibers used as concrete secondary reinforcement for concrete slabs. RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 03 21 00 - Reinforcing Steel. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Section 03 50 00 - Cementitious Decks and Toppings. Section 32 13 00 - Rigid Paving. REFERENCES A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. 2. B. C. 1.4 ASTM C94/C94M-15: Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. ASTM C1116/C1116M-10a (2015): Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete. Southwest Certification Services (SWCS), Omega Point Laboratories No. 8662-1. UL Report File No. R8534-11. SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. Comply with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, including application rate and mixing instructions. Samples: Submit manufacturer’s sample of synthetic fiber reinforcement. Manufacturer’s Certification: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.5 Submit manufacturer’s certification that synthetic fiber reinforcement complies with specified requirements. Submit evidence of manufacturer’s ISO 9001:2000 certification. Submit evidence of satisfactory performance history of synthetic fiber reinforcement. Submit certification of fiber's antimicrobial properties. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: September 15, 2015 032400 - Fibrous Reinforcing Page 1 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 1.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Synthetic fiber reinforcement manufactured in ISO 9001:2000 certified facility. Minimum 10-year satisfactory performance history of specified synthetic fiber reinforcement. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. Delivery: Deliver synthetic fiber reinforcement in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name, unique identification number, code approvals, directions for use, manufacturer, and weight of fibers. Storage: 1. 2. C. Store synthetic fiber reinforcement in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Keep packaging sealed until ready for use. Handling: Protect synthetic fiber reinforcement during handling to prevent contamination. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. B. C. 2.2 Fibermesh 650 manufactured by Propex Concrete Systems Corp., 6025 Lee Highway, Ste 425, PO Box 22788, Chattanooga, Tennessee 37422. Toll Free (800) 621-1273. Phone (423) 892-8080. Fax (423) 892-0157. Website www.fibermesh.com. E-mail: [email protected]. Strux 90/40 synthetic macro fiber reinforcement manufactured by W. R. Grace & Co. Construction Products Division, 62 Whittenmore Ave., Cambridge, MA 02140: Tel: 1-877423-6491; Website: graceconstruction.com. Other manufacturers may submit requests for substitutions per Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. SYNTHETIC FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Fiber Reinforcement: Fibermesh 650. 1. 2. 3. Material: 100 percent virgin homopolymer polypropylene multifilament fibers, containing no reprocessed olefin materials. Conformance: ASTM C 1116, Type III. Fire Classifications: a. b. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. UL Report File No. R8534-11. Southwest Certification Services (SWCS), Omega Point Laboratories No. 8662-1. Fiber Length: graded lengths. Alkali Resistance: Alkali proof. Absorption: Nil. Specific Gravity: 0.91. Melt Point: 324 degrees F (162 degrees C). PART 3 - EXECUTION September 15, 2015 032400 - Fibrous Reinforcing Page 2 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.1 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 MIXING A. Application Rate: Add synthetic fiber reinforcement to concrete mixture in accord with manufacturer’s instructions. 1. 2. B. C. 3.2 Provide 3 lbs./cu. yd. (1.8kg/m² ) for concrete slabs on grade. Provide 4 lbs./cu. yd. (2.4kg/m² ) for concrete slabs over metal decking. Add synthetic fiber reinforcement at batch plant into concrete mixer before, during, or after batching other concrete materials. Mix synthetic fiber reinforcement in concrete mixer in accord with mixing time and speed of ASTM C 94 to ensure uniform distribution and random orientation of fibers throughout concrete. PLACING AND FINISHING A. Placing and finishing concrete shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 032400 - Fibrous Reinforcing Page 3 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. B. C. D. E. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. 1.3 Cast-in-place concrete building members, floors, foundation walls, and footings. Curing agents, admixtures, bonding agents, expansion joint fillers and leveling compounds. Floor slabs and sidewalks on grade with fibrous concrete reinforcement. Equipment pads, and locker bases. Concrete surface protective materials as required. Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 03 24 00 – Fibrous Reinforcing. Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. ACI 301-10: Structural Concrete for Buildings. ACI 302.1R-04: Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. ACI 304R-00: Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. ACI 305R-10: Guide to Hot Weather Concreting. ACI 306R-10: Guide to Cold Weather Concreting. ACI 308R-01: Guide to Curing Concrete. ACI 347-04: Guide to Formwork for Concrete. ACI 318-11: Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. ACI 544.1R-96(2009): Report of Fiber Reinforced Concrete. ACI 544.2R-88(2009): Measurement of Properties of Fiber Reinforced Concrete. B. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. ASTM A494-13: Standard Specification for Castings, Nickel and Nickel Alloy. ASTM A615-14: Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM B221-13: Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Wire, Shapes and Tubes. ASTM C31-12: Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Specimens in the Field. ASTM C33-13: Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. ASTM C39-14a: Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. ASTM C94-14: Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. ASTM C143-12: Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. ASTM C150-12: Standard Specification for Portland Cement. ASTM C172-14: Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. September 15, 2015 033000 - Cast In Place Concrete Page 1 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 ASTM C231-10: Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete. ASTM C260-10a: Standard Test Method for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. ASTM C330-14: Standard Specification for Light Weight Aggregates for Structural Concrete. ASTM C494-13: Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. ASTM C618-12a: Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Concrete. ASTM C948-81 (2009): Standard Test Method for Dry and Wet Bulk Density, Water Absorption and Apparent Porosity of Thin Sections of Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Concrete. ASTM D994-11: Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type). ASTM C1017-13: Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Producing Flowing Concrete. ASTM C1116-10a: Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete. ASTM D1751-04 (2013)e1: Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). ASTM D1752-04a (2013): Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber, Cork, and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. ASTM E1155-96 (2008): Standard Test Method for Determining F F Floor Flatness and F L Floor Levelness Numbers. ASTM D1745-11: Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slab. C. Florida Building Code, 2010 Edition. D. Florida Department of Transportation - Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction E. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. 2. 1.4 ASCE 7-10: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures. ASCE 9-91: Standard Practice for the Construction and Inspection of Composite Slabs. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design shall be in accord with 2010 Florida Building Code, ACI 318-11 and ACI 301-10. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data in accord with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Comply with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. C. Submit manufacturer's printed product data and installation instructions. Indicate installation procedures and interface required with adjacent work. D. Concrete supplier shall certify amount of fibrous concrete reinforcement material in each batch of concrete delivered to project site. Certificate shall have copies of batch delivery tickets; indicating trade name, manufacturer's name, and weight per cubic yard of fibrous concrete reinforcement material in batch. E. Submit fiber manufacturer's facility's Certificate of Registration, providing ISO 9002 compliance. F. Submit admixture product specifications and letter attesting chloride ion content in admixuture do not exceed 0.05%. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with Section 01 43 39 – Mockups. B. Comply with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. C. Perform work per ACI 301-10 – Standards and Specifications. September 15, 2015 033000 - Cast In Place Concrete Page 2 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 D. Mix and deliver ready mixed concrete per ASTM C94-14. E. Acquire cement, reinforcing and aggregate from same source throughout work. F. Perform work per ACI 305R-10 for work in hot weather and ACI 306R-10 for work in cold weather. G. Preinstallation Conference: 1. 2. 3. Conduct project meeting at least with 15 days prior to start of concrete placement with Owner’s Project Manager, Contractor’s Superintendent, Materials Testing Lab, Concrete Supplier, Architect and Structural Engineer. Meeting attendees shall review proposed mix designs, proposed concrete placement methods, materials testing, scheduling and procedures to be employed for project. Meeting Minutes shall be recorded, typed and printed for distribution to attendees within three working days from date of meeting. H. Concrete Mix Design: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Submit manufacturer’s product specifications with applicable installation of concrete admixtures, bonding agents, waterstops, joint systems, chemical floor hardeners, and dry slake products. Submit concrete mix reports for each concrete strength and type proposed for work. Submit lab test reports for concrete materials and mix designs. Mix design adjustments may be considered by Architect when materials, job conditions, weather, test results or other conditions warrant. Slump limits: a. b. c. d. 6. I. Maintain copies of mix designs on site for review. Concrete Materials Tests: 1. 2. 3. 4. J. Ramps, slabs and sloping surfaces: 3” (76mm). Slabs: 4” (101mm). Reinforced foundation systems: 1-3” 25-76mm). Concrete with high range, water reducing admixtures (superplasticizers):8” after adding admixture to site-verified 3” (76mm) maximum slump concrete. Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C33-13. Light Weight Concrete: ASTM C330-14. Portland Cement: ASTM C33-13. Submit written reports for each material tested prior to start of work identifying project, contractor, testing lab, material suppliers, specified values and tested results. Concrete Testing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Coordinate with testing lab selected by Owner in performing field quality control testing. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172-14 except as modified for slump complying with ASTM C94-14. Slump: ASTM C143-12, one test per load at point of discharge. Air Content: ASTM C231-10, pressure method; one for alternating concrete loads at point of discharge. Compressive Tests: ASTM C31-12; one set of four standard cylinders for each 100 yds³ (76 m³) or fraction thereof of each mixed design placed per day at point of discharge. a. b. c. September 15, 2015 Tests shall occur at 7 days (one cylinder), 14 days (one cylinder), 28 days (one cylinder). Remaining cylinder shall be tested at 28 days if first 28 day test fails design strength. Test concrete temperature hourly when air temperature exceeds 80°F (26.7º C) or falls below 40°F (4.4º C). 033000 - Cast In Place Concrete Page 3 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 6. 7. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Placed concrete failing design specifications may be retested to verify in-situ strength. Cost of tests failing design specifications shall be borne by Contractor. Copies of test results shall be maintained on site for review. K. Concrete Strength (fc, psi) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Sidewalks and playcourts: 2,500 psi (175.8 kg/cm²). Building Slabs on grade and Footings: 3,000 psi (211kg/cm²). Building Slabs with stained and polished finish: 3500 psi (246 kg/cm²). Columns and beams: 4,000 psi (281 kg/cm²). Weight Room Floors (and other floors with high impact loads): 5,000 psi (31.5 kg/cm²). L. Maximum Water Cement Ratio Compressive Strength (fc, psi) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.7 Non air entrained Air entrained 2,500 (175.8 kg/cm²) 3,000 (211 kg/cm²) 0.58 0.46 4,000 (281 kg/cm²) 0.50 0.44 5,000 (351.5 kg/cm²) 0.42 0.42 Super plasticizers, fly ash, and water reducers shall be used to obtain required slump while maintaining maximum water-cement ratio. MOCKUPS A. Comply with Section 01 43 39 – Mockups. B. Construct field samples for decorative concrete walls, panels, stained and polished concrete floor surfaces for each color or pattern indicated to receive special treatment or finish. C. Sample Panels: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Colored concrete floor finishes and cast in place decorative concrete. Sufficient size to indicate special treatment or finishes required. Obtain Owner’s acceptance of resultant surface finishes prior to installing special treatments or finishes. Accepted sample panel is considered basis of quality for the finished work. Keep sample panel exposed to view for duration of concrete work Locate sample panels where directed Owner’s Project Manager. Colored concrete finish mock-ups may not remain as part of Work, and shall be located in area to receive secondary finish such as carpet or vct. Approved decorative concrete walls and panels may remain as part of finished work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. B. C. D. 2.2 Cement: ASTM C150-12, Type 1 – Normal, Portland type. Fine and course aggregate: ASTM C33-13. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330-14. Water: Potable. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT A. Fibrous reinforcing quantities and materials shall be in accord with Section 03 24 00 – Fibrous Reinforcing. B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615-14, Grade 60, Deformed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. September 15, 2015 033000 - Cast In Place Concrete Page 4 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 CURING COMPOUND APPROVED PRODUCTS A. ASTM C309-11, Type 1, Class B with 18% minimum solids content: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.4 Safe Cure and Seal (J-18), Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corp., 4226 Kansas Ave., Kansas City, KS 66016; Tel: 913-233-1750; Fax 913-279-4806; Web Site: www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com. Diamond Clear VOX, Euclid Chemical Co. 19218 Redwood Rd., Cleveland, 44110; Tel: 216-531-9222, 1-800-321-7628; Fax: 216-531-9596; web site: www.euclid.com. Kure-N-Seal, BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Drive, Shakopee, MN 55379; Tel: 952-496-6000; Fax: 952-496-6062; web site: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. L & M Cure R, L & M construction Chemicals, Inc., 14851 Calhoun Rd., Omaha, NE 68152; Tel: 402-453-6600; Fax: 402-453-0244; Web Site: www.lmcc.com JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS A. Joint Filler: ASTM D 1751-04: Asphalt impregnated fiberboard. B. Joint Filler: ASTM D 1752-04a: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, resiliency recovery of 95% if not compressed more than 50% or original thickness. C. Construction Joint Devices: Integral galvanized steel; formed to tongue and groove profile, with removable top strip exposing sealant trough, ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge. D. Expansion and Contraction Joint Devices: See Section 07 95 13 – Expansion Joint Devices. E. Sealant and Primer: Type as specified in Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants. F. Sealant: Cold applied. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion, Polyvinyl acetate, Latex emulsion, Two component modified epoxy resin, Non-solvent two component polysulfide epoxy, Mineral filled polysulfide polymer epoxy , Mineral filled polysulfide polymer epoxy resin or Versamid cured epoxy. 1. 2. 3. 4. Adbond (J40), Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corp., 4226 Kansas Ave., Kansas City, KS 66016; Tel: 913-233-1750; Fax 913-279-4806; Web Site: www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com. Eucoweld, Euclid Chemical Co., 19218 Redwood Rd., Cleveland, 44110; Tel: 216-5319222, 1-800-321-7628; Fax: 216-531-9596; web site: www.euclid.com. Everbond, L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., 14851 Calhoun Rd., Omaha, NE 68152; Tel: 402-453-6600; Fax: 402-453-0244; Web Site: www.lmcc.com. Intralock, W. R. Meadows, Inc., P.O. Box 338; Hamshire, IL 60140-0338; Tel: 847-2142100; Toll Free Tel: 800-342-5976; Fax: 847-683-4544; Web Site: wrmeadows.com. B. Bond Breaker: 1. 2. 3. Debond From Coating, L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.,14851 Calhoun Rd., Omaha, NE 68152; Tel: 402-453-6600; Fax: 402-453-0244; Web Site: www.lmcc.com. Euco Super Slip, Euclid Chemical Co., 19218 Redwood Rd., Cleveland, 44110; Tel: (216)531-9222, 1-800-321-7628; Fax: (216) 531-9596; web site: www.euclid.com. Cast-Off, BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Drive, Shakopee, MN 55379; Tel: 952-496-6000; Fax: 952-496-6062; web site: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. C. Concrete Patching Compound: Single component cement based, polymer modified patching mortar with low slump properties. September 15, 2015 033000 - Cast In Place Concrete Page 5 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 ThoRoc SD2 & ThoRoc Polymer Liquid, BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Drive, Shakopee, MN 55379; Tel: 952-496-6000; Fax: 952496-6062; web site: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. Intralok, W R Meadows, Inc., P.O. Box 338; Hamshire, IL 60140-0338; Tel: 847-2142100; Toll Free Tel: 800-342-5976; Fax: 847-683-4544; Web Site: wrmeadows.com. Perma Patch V/O, Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corp., 4226 Kansas Ave., Kansas City, KS 66016; Tel: 913-233-1750; Fax 913-279-4806; Web Site: www.daytonsuperiorchemical.com. D. Leveling Concrete Underlayment: One-component, cement based trowel grade. Compressive strength: 4250 psi (298.8 kg/cm²) at 28 days; Flexural strength: 1000 psi (70.3 kg/cm²) at 28 days; Tensile Strength: 650 psi (45.7 kg/cm²) at 28 days. 1. 2. 3. Durathin, L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.,14851 Calhoun Rd., Omaha, NE 68152; Tel: 402-453-6600; Fax: 402-453-0244; Web Site: www.lmcc.com. Sonoskim, BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Drive, Shakopee, MN 55379; Tel: 952-496-6000; Fax: 952-496-6062; web site: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. Duracrete, L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.,14851 Calhoun Rd., Omaha, NE 68152; Tel: 402-453-6600; Fax: 402-453-0244; Web Site: www.lmcc.com E. Chemical Hardener and Dustproofer: Sealer, densifier and hardener complying with ACI 302 Class 1 thru 4 concrete floors, VOC compliant color less solution, 100% active sodium silicate chemicals with non-acid pernetrant. 1. 2. Chem Hard, L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.,14851 Calhoun Rd., Omaha, NE 68152; Tel: 402-453-6600; Fax: 402-453-0244; Web Site: www.lmcc.com. Lapidolith, BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Drive, Shakopee, MN 55379; Tel: 952-496-6000; Fax: 952-496-6062; web site: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. F. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, inert 10 mm polyethylene sheet with minimum perm rating of 0.1. 1. 2. 3. Moistop Ultra 15, Fortifiber Corp., 419 West Plumb Lane, Reno, NV 89509; Tel: 800-7734777, 775-333-6400; Fax: 775-333-6411; Web Site: www.fortifiber.com. Vapor Block 15, Raven Industries, Inc. P.O. Box 5107, Sioux Fall, SD 57117-5107; Tel: 800-635-3456, 605-335-0174; Fax: 605-331-0333; Web Site: vaporblock.com. Perminator 15 mil, W. R. Meadows, Inc., P.O. Box 338; Hamshire, IL 60140-0338; Tel: 847-214-2100; Toll Free Tel: 800-342-5976; Fax: 847-683-4544; Web Site: wrmeadows.com.Griffllyn Industries, Inc. G. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound of non-metallic aggregate, cement water reducing ad plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. H. Temporary Flooring Protection: Ram Board 46 mil thick heavy duty flex-fiber reinforced reusable paper manufactured by Ram Board, Inc., 716 South Flower St., Burbank, CA 91502; Tel: 818848-0400; Fax: 818-0099; Website: www.ramboard.com. 2.6 CONCRETE ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260-10a (Not to Exceed 3%). 1. AEA-92 and Air Mix 200, Euclid Chemical Co., 19218 Redwood Rd., Cleveland, 44110; Tel: (216)531-9222, 1-800-321-7628; Fax: (216) 531-9596; web site: www.euclid.com. September 15, 2015 033000 - Cast In Place Concrete Page 6 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 MB-VR or MB-AE, BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Drive, Shakopee, MN 55379; Tel: 952-496-6000; Fax: 952-496-6062; web site: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. Sika AER, Sika Corp., 201 Polito Rd., Lyndhurst, NJ 07071; Tel: (201) 933-8800; Fax: (201) 933-6225; web site: sikaconstruction.com. B. Water Reducing: ASTM C494-13, Type A, water reducing, and containing not more than 0.05% chloride ions: 1. 2. 3. Eucon WR-75 or Eucon WR-91, Euclid Chemical Co., 19218 Redwood Rd., Cleveland, 44110; Tel: (216)531-9222, 1-800-321-7628; Fax: (216) 531-9596; web site: www.euclid.com. Pozzolith 322N, Master Builders, Inc.,23700 Chagrin Blvd., Cleveland, OH 44122; Tel: 800 628-9990; Fax: 905 792-0651; web site: www.masterbuilders.com. Plastocrete 160, Sika Corp., 201 Polito Rd., Lyndhurst, NJ 07071; Tel: (201) 933-8800; Fax: (201) 933-6225; web site: sikaconstruction.com. C. High Range Water Reducing (Superplasticizer): ASTM C494-13, Type F or Type G and containing not more than 0.05% chloride ions: 1. 2. 3. Eucon 37, Euclid Chemical Co., 19218 Redwood Rd., Cleveland, 44110; Tel: (216)5319222, 1-800-321-7628; Fax: (216) 531-9596; web site: www.euclid.com. Rheobuild 1000, Master Builders, Inc. 23700 Chagrin Blvd., Cleveland, OH 44122; Tel: 800 628-9990; Fax: 905 792-0651; web site: www.masterbuilders.com. Sika Viscocrete 2100, Sika Corp., 201 Polito Rd., Lyndhurst, NJ 07071; Tel: (201) 9338800; Fax: (201) 933-6225; web site: sikaconstruction.com. D. Accelerant: ASTM C494-13, Type C or E, and containing not more than 0.05% chloride ions: 1. 2. Accelguard 80, Euclid Chemical Co., 19218 Redwood Rd., Cleveland, 44110; Tel: (216)531-9222, 1-800-321-7628; Fax: (216) 531-9596; web site: www.euclid.com. Pozzutec 20+, BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Drive, Shakopee, MN 55379; Tel: 952-496-6000; Fax: 952-496-6062; web site: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. E. Retardent: ASTM C494-13, Type D, and, and containing not more than 0.05% chloride ions: 1. 2. 3. Eucon Retarder 75, Euclid Chemical Co., 19218 Redwood Rd., Cleveland, 44110; Tel: (216)531-9222, 1-800-321-7628; Fax: (216) 531-9596; web site: www.euclid.com. Pozzolith100XR Retarder, BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Drive, Shakopee, MN 55379; Tel: 952-496-6000; Fax: 952-496-6062; web site: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. Plastiment, Sika Corp. 201 Polito Rd., Lyndhurst, NJ 07071; Tel: (201) 933-8800; Fax: (201) 933-6225; web site: sikaconstruction.com. F. Fly Ash: ASTM C618-12a, Type C may be substituted for up to 20% of Portland cement in concrete mixes unless noted otherwise. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions per Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. B. Verify positioning and locations of reinforcement, anchors, seats, plates, conduit, and items to be cast into concrete. September 15, 2015 033000 - Cast In Place Concrete other Page 7 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent per manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Where new concrete is indicated to be doweled into existing work, drill holes in existing concrete; insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. C. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of from accessories. D. Remove foreign matter and water from forms and structural excavations. E. Inspect and test soil at bottoms of excavations and slabs for specified compaction. F. Place expansion and construction joints, and keyways to provide straight, parallel and uniform to preclude degradation of strength and appearance of concrete. 1. 2. 3. 4. Set and secure continuous pre-molded joint filler for joints abutting walls, adjacent precast or previously placed material surfaces in the same or different plains. Locate expansion joints 30’ (9212mm) maximum on center for walks and curbs unless indicated otherwise. Joint fillers shall be full width and depth of material being placed with top surface even and uniform with top profile of concrete. Avoid construction joints in hallways and corridors running parallel to long dimension. G. Set formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other trades that is attached to or supported by concrete per written directions of embed supplier. 3.3 FORMWORK A. Coat contact form surfaces with low VOC, form coating compound prior to placement of reinforcing. B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with existing concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply per manufacturer’s written installation instructions. C. Do not use steel forms. D. Foundations shall be formed to sizes and shapes indicated. Earth forms are not allowed, unless approved by Architect. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Notify Building Official, Architect and Owner’s Project Manager minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concrete placement. B. Ensure that formwork, reinforcement and embedded items are correctly located. C. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. D. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. E. Comply with ACI 304R-00: Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete, and as specified. F. Hot weather placement. 1. When air temperature is 85-90° F (30-32° C), reduce normal mixing and delivery time from 90 minutes to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90° F (32° C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2. Water may be added if slump does not comply with mix design and water is placed before tests samples are taken. 3. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90° F (32° C). 4. Ice may be used to chill water to control temperature provided total allowable mixing water is not exceeded. 5. Fog spray forms reinforcing steel and subgrade just prior to concrete placement. September 15, 2015 033000 - Cast In Place Concrete Page 8 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 G. Deposit and consolidate concrete in continuous operation in lifts not exceeding 24” (608mm) within forms or between construction joints until placement is complete, avoiding cold joints and aggregate segregation. H. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibration, supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Mechanical vibration shall comply with ACI 309R-96. I. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. J. Install vapor retarder under all slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6” (152mm) and seal watertight by taping edges and ends. K. Repair vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lay over damaged areas minimum 6” (152mm) and seal watertight. L. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Place joint filler in floor slab to required elevations and to resist movement by wet concrete. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within ¼" (61mm) of finished slab surface and apply sealants in accord with Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection for installation of preformed joint seals, joint sealants and expansion controls. Install joint devices in accord with manufacturer's instructions and in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. Install joint device anchors maintaining correct position to allow joint cover to be flush with floor and wall finish. Install joint covers in one-piece length, when adjacent construction activity is complete in accord with Section 07 90 00 - Joint Protection. M. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and test samples taken. N. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints. O. Do not interrupt concrete placement or permit cold joints to occur. P. Place floor slabs in checkerboard or saw cut pattern indicated. Q. Saw cut joints: 1. 2. 3. Within 24 hours after placing horizontal concrete, saw cut construction joints in patterns indicated, or if not indicated, provide saw cuts in grid not exceeding 20’ (6100 mm) on 3 center using / 16 " (46mm) thick blade, cut to ¼ depth of slab thickness. Concrete curbs and gutters shall be cut in not more than 6’ (1830 mm) sections. Where stained and polished concrete finish is indicated, follow joint lines of patterns indicated. R. Protect concrete exposed concrete surfaces from damage. Replace damaged concrete (See Section 03 35 19-Colored Concrete Finishing). 3.5 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Provide smooth rubbed finish on scheduled concrete surfaces that have received smooth formed finish not later than 1 day after form removal. B. Moisten concrete surface and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until producing uniform color and texture. C. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by rubbing process. D. Tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces shall be struct smooth and finished with a texture matching the adjacent formed surface, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 MONOLITIC SLAB FINISHES A. Finishes on slabs on grade for random traffic floors shall comply with ASTM E1155. September 15, 2015 033000 - Cast In Place Concrete Page 9 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. Floor finish for slabs on grade with floor coverings (VCT, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile): a. b. 2. Specified Overall Value: F F 38/F L 25. Minimum Local Value: F F 19/F L 13. Floor finish for slabs on grade with stained and polished finish: a. b. 3. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Specified Overall Value: F F 50/F L 33. Minimum Local Value: F F 25/F L 17. Use motorized steel trowel to finish interior exposed slab surfaces or surfaces to be covered with VCT, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, wood, paint, or other flooring finish. B. Nonslip Heavy Broom Finish: Apply nonslip heavy broom finish to exterior concrete ramp surfaces and H/C curb cuts with fiber bristle broom, perpendicular to traffic direction. C. Broom finish sidewalk, exposed stair treads and other exterior surfaces, not otherwise noted with light broom finish, perpendicular to traffic direction. D. Wood float surfaces that will receive quarry and ceramic tile with full bed setting system. E. In areas with floors sloping to drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 1:50 ratio. 3.7 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE A. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete for passage of work by other trades, after work of other trades is complete with same materials and finish of adjacent concrete. B. Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs, equipment bases and foundations to match adjacent concrete. Chamfer exposed edges ¾” (19.3mm). C. Set anchor bolts for equipment bases and foundations per diagrams and templates furnished by equipment manufacturers. 3.8 SEPARATE FLOOR TOPPINGS A. Prior to placing floor topping, roughen substrate concrete surface and remove deleterious material. Broom and vacuum clean. B. Place required dividers, edge strips, reinforcing, and other items to be cast in concrete. C. Apply bonding agent to substrate in accord with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Place concrete floor toppings where indicated to required lines and levels. Place topping in checkerboard panels with dimensions not exceeding 20' (6080mm). E. Screen toppings level, maintaining surface flatness per Para. 3.06. 3.09 OTHER CONCRETE FINISHES F. A.Formed concrete surfaces left exposed including concrete walls, columns, beams, and joists with smooth rubbed finish. 3.9 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period required for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete to design standards indicated. C. Cure floor surfaces in accord with ACI 308R-01. D. Apply curing compound in accord with manufacturer’s written application instructions. 3.10 SHORES AND SUPPORTS September 15, 2015 033000 - Cast In Place Concrete Page 10 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 A. Comply with ACI 347-04 for shoring and reshoring and Structural Engineer’s Threshold Inspection Reporting requirements if building is designated Threshold Building per FBC Para. 109.3.6. B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with Owner’s Threshold Building Inspector and Materials Testing Company. C. Extend shoring from first floor to roof for cast-in-place structures and re-shoring. D. Remove shores and re-shore in planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured concrete. Locate and provide re-shoring to support work without excessive deflection. E. Maintain re-shoring in place 14 days after placing upper tier or longer if required until concrete has attained design strength and heavy construction loads have been removed. 3.11 REMOVING FORMS A. Form work not supporting weight of concrete including sides of beams, walls and columns may be removed after 24 hours from time of placement, providing concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal, and concrete curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Form work supporting weight of concrete including beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements may not be removed within 14 days of placement or until concrete reaches 75 percent of design strength at 28 days. C. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only after shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without loosening shores or supports. 3.12 REUSING FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged forms, shall be replaced. Apply new form–coating compound on new formwork. B. Before reusing undamaged forms, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins, laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. C. Align and secure joints to provide straight and uniform joints and provide smooth interior form surfaces. 3.13 PATCHING A. Repair and patch defective concrete surfaces with cement mortar immediately after removing forms in accord with ACI 301-10. B. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing #16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. C. Remove honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over ¼” (61mm) wide or deep and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete. D. Thoroughly clean void, dampen with water, apply bonding agent and place mortar before bonding agent has dried. E. For exposed surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that patching mortar matches surrounding concrete color. F. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. G. Cure patched areas for 72 hours. 3.14 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances, strength, or specified requirements shall either be repaired to the same structural condition and finish as accepted work or be removed and replaced at no additional cost to Owner. B. Repairs for non-conforming concrete shall be submitted to Architect for review and acceptance before repairs are undertaken. September 15, 2015 033000 - Cast In Place Concrete Page 11 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 C. If Architect deems repairs will be insufficient to render material structurally sound, concrete work shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to Owner. D. Patching, filling, touch-up repairs shall not be made prior to inspection and approval of Architect. Unauthorized work will be deemed non-conforming and shall be replaced at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 033000 - Cast In Place Concrete Page 12 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 03 32 00 - CONCRETE RESURFACING AND REHABILITATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. 1.2 Concrete sealer. RELATED SECTIONS A. 1.3 Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. REFERENCES A. B. 1.4 ASTM F 1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. ASTM F 2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. SUBMITTALS A. B. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. 2. 3. Preparation instructions and recommendations. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Installation methods. a. b. C. 1.5 Equipment Materials Shop Drawings: Details of construction and relationship with adjacent construction. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. 1.6 Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. 1.7 Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years manufacturing concrete resurfacing and rehabilitation products. Installer Qualifications: Minimum two years installing similar products. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. September 15, 2015 033200 - Concrete Resurfacing And Rehabilitation Page 1 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. B. 2.2 Acceptable Manufacturer: MAPEI Americas U.S.A., 1144 E. Newport Center Rd., Deerfield Beach, FL 33442; ASD. Toll Free Tel: 800-42-MAPEI; Tel: 954-246-8888; Fax: 954-246-8801; Email: [email protected]; Web: www.mapei.com Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. APPLICATIONS/SYSTEM A. 2.3 Reducing Moisture Vapor Emission Rate (MVER): Moisture Reduction Barrier. INTERIOR PRODUCTS A. Moisture Reduction Barrier for Concrete Substrates: Suitable moisture reduction barrier to treat substrate moisture levels that exceed the manufacturers of subsequent flooring recommendations. 1. 2. Acceptable Product: Planiseal VS Fast: Rapid curing A two-component, 100 percent solids epoxy, one-coat moisture barrier for concrete slabs that exhibit moisture vapor emissions rates (MVER) up to 25 lbs per 1000 square feet per 24 hours and reduces transmission rates to less than 3 lbs. Testing: Prior to use, test using procedures as noted in 1.3 above, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. 3.2 Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. PREPARATION A. B. C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. Properly prepared concrete substrate that has an International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) concrete surface profile (SCP) of # 3 or less. Substrates should not exceed a SCP of # 3. 1. 2. 3.3 For direct application without mechanical profiling, concrete must be porous, have a surface CSP of #2 to #3, and be in pristine condition with no contamination present. If conditions in the preceding paragraph are not present, the surface must be mechanically profiled using dustless, approved methods to obtain a CSP of #2 to #3. Ensure that all old adhesives, contaminants, curing compounds, oils, silicates, dust and other bond breakers are completely removed. Inadequate surface preparation may lead to pinholing, bubbling, bond loss and subsequent failure of the moisture barrier. INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. September 15, 2015 033200 - Concrete Resurfacing And Rehabilitation Page 2 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PROTECTION A. B. Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products after Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 033200 - Concrete Resurfacing And Rehabilitation Page 3 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 04 22 00 -CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. 1.2 Concrete masonry units, precast concrete lintel beams, steel reinforcement, anchorage, grout and accessories required for complete masonry system. RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. 1.3 Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 -Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 43 39 – Mockups. Section 01 45 00 -Quality Control. Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 03 21 11 – Plain Steel Reinforcement Bars. Section 03 30 00 – Cast in Place Concrete. Section 04 05 16 – Masonry Grouting. Section 07 62 00 – Flashing and Sheet Metal. Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping. Section 07 92 13 – Elastomeric Joint Sealers. REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. S. T. See Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, abbreviations, definitions and acronyms. American Concrete Institute (ACI): ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402– Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602-Specifications for Masonry Structures. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): ASCE 7 -Wind Loads. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): ASTM A82 -Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A123 -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. ASTM A525 -General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. ASTM A615/A615M -Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars For Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A641/A641M – Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. ASTM C90-Standard Specification for Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Florida Building Code, 2010 Edition. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC): IMIAC -Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. IMIAC -International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specification for Hot Weather Masonry Construction. September 15, 2015 042200 - Concrete Unit Masonry Page 1 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA U. 1.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL): UL -Fire Resistance Directory. SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. E. F. 1.5 Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Shop Drawings: Indicate bars sizes, spacing, locations, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting schedules, supporting and spacing devices for reinforcement and accessories. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement. Samples: Submit samples of block units to illustrate color, texture and dimensions. Design Data: Indicate required mortar strength, masonry unit assembly strength in all planes with supportive test data. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. 1.6 Comply with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Perform work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1. Maintain one copy of each document on site. QUALIFICATIONS A. 1.7 Manufacturer: Company shall specialize in manufacturing products specified with minimum five years documented experience. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. B. C. D. 1.8 Design and construction shall comply with ASCE 7–10 Wind loads, FBC, ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402, and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Conform to applicable UL Design number for fire rated masonry construction. Provide lateral support for block walls, both vertical and horizontal. Vertical heights of masonry between horizontal supports shall be in accord with wall lateral support requirements per FBC table 2107.1 MOCKUPS A. B. C. D. 1.9 Comply with Section 01 43 39 -Mockups. Construct masonry wall panel sized 6' long by 6' high, to include mortar and accessories, backup, wall openings, flashings, wall insulation, air barrier, vapor barrier, and parging. Locate where directed by Owner’s Project Manager. Mockup to remain intact and protected until the Punch List is completed or until Owner’s Project Manager agrees in writing to removal. Mockup may not remain as part of work. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. 1.10 Meet two weeks prior to commencing work, in accord with Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING September 15, 2015 042200 - Concrete Unit Masonry Page 2 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. 1.11 A. B. C. D. 1.12 A. B. C. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Store, protect and deliver products to site in accord with Section 01 66 00 – Project Storage and Handling Requirements. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC -Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. Hot Weather Requirements: IMIAC -Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Hot Weather Masonry Construction. COORDINATION Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Coordinate the masonry work with installation and trades of adjacent construction activities, and work that is imbedded or attached to masonry. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. B. C. D. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. 2.3 Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641/A641M Class 3 after fabrication, 3/16" side rods with 9-ga cross ties. Reinforcing Steel: A615/A615M, Grade 40 or Grade 60; deformed carbon bars as specified in Section 03200, unfinished. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shape, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123 B2 finish. Wall Ties: Corrugated formed sheet metal, gauge thick, adjustable, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M B2 steel finish. Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, gage thick, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M B2 steel finish. Dovetail Anchors: Bent steel strap, galvanized to ASTM A123/ASTM 123M B2 finish. MORTAR AND GROUT A. B. 2.4 Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Type II – Non-Moisture Controlled. Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): ASTM C90-90, Type II – Non-Moisture Controlled. Block installed in fire rated walls and partitions shall be classified units or certified for the intended use in accord with FBC and Life Safety Codes (current editions). Size; 8” x 8” x 16”. Provide reinforced U-shaped units where indicated. Concrete Grout: 3000 psi strength. Mortar Grout: 1200 psi normal strength. SEALANTS See Section 07 90 00 – Sealants. Fill joints at doors, openings ACCESSORIES September 15, 2015 042200 - Concrete Unit Masonry Page 3 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Cleaning Solutions: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. C. D. 3.2 Verify that field conditions are acceptable and area is ready to receive work. Start of work indicates acceptance of working conditions and surfaces. Verify items provided by other trades are properly sized and located. Verify that built-in items are in correct locations, and ready for roughing into masonry work. PREPARATION A. B. C. 3.3 Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors, reinforcement, or inserts supplied by other trades. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent bracing. COURSING A. B. C. D. E. 3.4 Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension, with vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. Concrete Masonry Units: Coursing: Running bond with one unit and one mortar joint to equal 16". Mortar Joints: Tooled Concave. PLACING AND BONDING A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. 3.5 Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. Wall Intersections: Butt new wall into existing walls. Tie new wall into existing wall with metal wall ties at alternate course heights. Pour concrete grout into existing hollow masonry unit cells at intersections. Place pencil rod reinforcing rods into filled cells. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with power tools to provide straight, clean, un-chipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges. Replace damaged masonry units. Tool mortar joints back ½” at wall intersections to allow for sealant application. REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES A. B. C. Install reinforcing bars in accord with CRSI -Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute -Manual of Standard Practice. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16" oc. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings, and extend minimum 16" each side of opening. September 15, 2015 042200 - Concrete Unit Masonry Page 4 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA D. E. F. 3.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6". Fill cells in masonry lintel grade beam at first course above slab with concrete grout. Provide filled cells in masonry as indicated. LINTELS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. Install pre-cast concrete lintels over openings. Openings Up to 42" wide: Place two, No. 4 reinforcing bars 1" from bottom. Openings From 42" Up to 78" wide: Place two, No. 5 reinforcing bars 1" from bottom. Do not splice reinforcing bars. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within ½" of dimensioned position. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports. Maintain 4" minimum bearing on each side of opening. Splice reinforcement in accordance with Section 03 20 0. Wet masonry unit surfaces in contact with grout just prior to grout placement. Grout with course grout using high or low lift grouting techniques. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout 1½" below top of upper masonry unit to form a positive key for subsequent grout placement. Low Lift Grouting: 1. 2. O. High Lift Grouting: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 3.7 Place first lift of grout to a height of 16" and rod for grout consolidation. Place subsequent lifts in 8" increments and rod for grout consolidation. Provide cleanout opening no less than 4" high at the bottom of each cell to be grouted by cutting one face shell of masonry unit. In double wythe walls, omit every second masonry unit in one of the wythes for clean out and cell inspection purposes. In double wythe walls, construct vertical grout barriers or dams between the masonry wythes, with masonry units every 30' maximum. Clean out masonry cells and cavities with high-pressure water spray. Permit complete water drainage. Request three days advance notice for inspection of cells and cavities. After cleaning and cell inspection, seal openings with masonry units. Pump grout into spaces. Maintain water content in grout to intended slump without aggregate segregation. Limit grout lift to 60" and rod for grout consolidation. Wait 30 to 60 minutes before placing next lift BUILT-IN WORK A. B. C. As work progresses, install built-in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal frames, window frames, wood nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections. Install built-in items plumb and level. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. 1. 2. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12" from framed openings. September 15, 2015 042200 - Concrete Unit Masonry Page 5 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.8 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.9 From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32". From Plane of Wall: ¼" in 10' and ½" in 20' or more. From Plumb: ¼" per story non-cumulative, ½" in two stories or more. From Level Coursing: ." in 3' and ¼" in 10', ½" in 30'. Variation of Joint Thickness: ." in 3'. From Cross-Section Thickness of Walls: ¼". CUTTING AND FITTING A. B. 3.10 A. B. Cut and fit masonry for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves and grounds. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location. Obtain Architect’s approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. CLEANING Clean work to be coated with Bituminous Dampproofing in accord with manufacturer’s printed cleaning instructions. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. 1. 2. C. D. Replace defective mortar and match adjacent work. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. 1. 2. 3. E. 3.11 A. B. Mortar streaks and/or stains that cannot be removed by light cleaning shall be replaced. Do not use Abrasives for rubbing or scraping off mortar stains. Use only cleaning products approved by the Architect and applied in direct conformance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Use of muratic acid is not allowed for cleaning masonry. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK Protect finished work until project final acceptance. Replace or repair to Architect’s approval work damaged during construction. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 042200 - Concrete Unit Masonry Page 6 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF W ORK A. B. C. 1.2 Structural steel framing members, support members, sag rods and struts. Base plates, shear stud connectors, and expansion joint plates Grouting under base plates RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. 1.3 Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. Section 04 21 13 – Brick Masonry. Section 04 28 00 – Concrete Form Masonry Units. Section 05 21 00 – Steel Joist Framing. Section 05 31 00 – Metal Decking. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. Section 05 51 00 – Metal Stairs. REFERENCES A. B. See Section 01 42 00 – References for additional references, definitions, acronyms and abbreviations. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. 2. 3. 4. C. D. AISC - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. AISC - LRFD Manual of Steel Construction. AISC – ASD/LRFD Steel Construction Manual. AISC - Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): ASCE 7-10, W ind Loads. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. ASTM A36/A36M-12, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. ASTM A53-12, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless. ASTM A108-13, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, and Alloy, Cold-Finished. ASTM A123/A123M-13, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. ASTM A153/A153M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. ASTM A242/A242M-13, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel. ASTM A307-12, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. ASTM A325-10e1, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. September 15, 2015 051200 - Structural Steel Framing Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. E. 1.4 ASTM A449-10, Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts, and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use. ASTM A490-12, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. ASTM A500-13, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed W elded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round and Shapes. ASTM A501-01, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. ASTM A514/A514M-13, Standard Specification for High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for W elding. ASTM A529/A529M-05(2000), Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality. ASTM A563-07a, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. ASTM A568/A568M-13ae1, Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, Structural, and HighStrength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled Sheet and Cold-Rolled Sheet, General Requirements for. ASTM A992/A992M-11, Standard Specification for Structural Steel Building. American National Standards Institute/American W elding Society (ANSI/AW S): 1. 2. F. G. H. I. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 AW S A2.4 - Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination. AW S D1.1/D1.1M - Structural W elding Code. Factory Mutual (FM): Roof Assembly Classifications. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): SSPC Paint Manual. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL): Fire Resistance Directory. Florida Building Code (FBC), 2010 Edition. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. B. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Shop Drawings: 1. 2. 3. C. SUBMITTALS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.5 Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing and locations of structural members, openings, attachments and fasteners, connections, cambers and loads. Indicate welded connections with AW S A2.4 welding symbols, along with net weld lengths. State of Florida Licensed Professional Structural Engineer shall date, sign and seal and attest to correctness and completeness of Shop Drawings. Comply with Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. Mill Test Reports: Submit indicating structural strength, destructive and non-destructive test analysis. Welders' Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AW S qualifications within the previous 12 months. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. D. Comply with Section 01 43 00 – Quality Assurance. Fabricate structural steel members in accord with AISC Code of Standard Practice. Maintain one copy of each referenced document on site. Fabricator and Erector: Provide documentation that each Company specializes in performing work indicated with minimum five years continuous documented experience. September 15, 2015 051200 - Structural Steel Framing Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. B. 1.7 Structural steel design and construction shall comply with FBC, ASCE 7-10, W ind Loads, and American Institute of Steel Construction, AISC "Specifications for Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings, 9th Edition." Conform to UL and FM requirements for fire and smoke penetrations. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Comply with Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Requirements for equipment transport, handling, storage and protection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. 2.2 A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36 and A992/A992M, Grade 50. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. ASTM A501. Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B. Shear Stud Connectors: ASTM A108, Grade 1015, headed, uncoated. Bolts, Nuts, and W ashers: ASTM A307, A325 and A490 galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M for galvanized members. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307 and A36. Welding Materials: AW S D1.1; type required for materials being welded. Sliding Bearing Plates: Teflon coated. Grout: Non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of nonmetallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1. Provide uniform dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC 20 Type I Inorganic. FABRICATION A. B. C. D. 2.3 Continuously seal joined members by intermittent welds and plastic filler. Grind exposed welds smooth. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut and washer connectors. Develop required camber of members. FINISH A. B. Prepare structural component surfaces in accord with SSPC SP-20. Shop prime structural steel members. 1. 2. 3. C. D. Do not prime surfaces receiving fireproofing or field welds. Do not prime surfaces in contact with concrete. Do not prime surface of high strength bolts. Galvanize structural steel members to ASTM A123/A123M; provide minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. All structural or miscellaneous steel exposed to earth or weather shall be hot dipped galvanized (G90). September 15, 2015 051200 - Structural Steel Framing Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS A. Provide shop testing and analysis of structural steel sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. 3.2 Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. Start of work shall indicate erector’s acceptance of project conditions. ERECTION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 3.3 Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. Field-weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings. Field-connect members with threaded fasteners; torque to required resistance. Do not field cut or alter structural members without prior approval of Architect. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. Grout under base plates. Trowel grouted surface smooth, splay neatly to 45°. Provide nuts and lock washers for connection of the kitchen hood hangers. Do not hang ceilings, pipes, or other building elements from metal deck or bottom truss chords. Attach to top chords of steel truss/joists, or hang from deck above with anchorage systems specially designed to support weight of other building elements. Provide protection of structural steel from corrosion – base plates, anchor angles embedded in concrete or soil. ERECTION TOLERANCES A. B. 3.4 Maximum Variation from Plumb: ¼" (61mm) per floor, non-cumulative. Maximum Offset from True Alignment (horizontal or vertical): ¼" (61mm). FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. B. C. Comply with Section 01 43 00 - Quality Assurance: Owner may require field inspection, testing of bolt torque, welds and torque of fasteners. Failed tests shall be paid by Contractor/CM. Remedial W ork shall be performed to quality standards indicated at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 051200 - Structural Steel Framing Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. B. 1.2 Exterior and interior load-bearing wall framing, exterior and interior loaded non-load-bearing wall framing, floor joist framing, roof rafter framing, and ceiling joist framing. Accessories, attachments and connections required for complete installation. RELATED DOCUMENTS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures Section 01 31 00 - Project Coordination Section 01 42 00 – Reference Standards Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Section 05 44 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Trusses Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications Section 07 21 16 – Blanket Insulation Section 09 21 16.23 - Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies Section 09 22 16 - Non-Structural Metal Framing REFERENCE STANDARDS A. B. C. See Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, definitions, abbreviations and acronyms. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): ASCE 7-10 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Specifications and Standards: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. D. AISI S100 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. AISI S200 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – General Provisions. AISI S201 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Product Standard”. AISI S202 – Standard Practice for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Steel Structural Framing, 2011 Edition. AISI S211 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Wall Stud Design. AISI S212 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Header Design. AISI S213 - North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Lateral Design. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM). 1. 2. 3. 1.ASTM E119-12a – Standard Test Method for Building Construction and Materials. 2.ASTM E329-11c – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection. th E. Florida Building Code (FBC): 5 Edition. September 15, 2015 054000 - Cold-formed Metal Framing Page 1 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SUBMITTALS A. B. C. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings prepared by cold-formed metal framing manufacturer.] 1. 2. 3. D. Welding certificates and qualifications. 1. 2. E. Steel sheet. Expansion anchors. Power-actuated anchors. Mechanical fasteners. Research/Evaluation Reports: For cold-formed steel framing. 1. 1.5 AWS D1.1/D1.1M – Structural Welding Code – Steel. AWS D1.3/D1.3M – Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that each of the following complies with the requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products: 1. 2. 3. 4. F. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis and detailed shop drawings signed and sealed by structural engineer, who shall be licensed in the State of Florida and shall be responsible for their preparation. Metal stud manufacturer to have a 3rd party evaluation report for its products that are th compliant with Florida Building Code 5 Edition. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Comply with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member in good standing of Steel Framing Industry Association (SFIA). 1. C. Engineering Responsibility: 1. 2. D. E. Products shall be certified by independent third party inspection program administered by agency accredited by IAS to ICC-ES AC98 IAS Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Agencies. Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data shall by Structural Engineer licensed in State of Florida, experienced in providing engineering services of type indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for project in material, design, and extent. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified in accord with ASTM E329-11c for testing indicated. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness. September 15, 2015 054000 - Cold-formed Metal Framing Page 2 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2. G. 1.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel". AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel". Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119-12 by displaying classification labels from testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. B. C. D. E. 1.7 Testing: Owner may engage qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to CM/Contractor and Architect. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. Additional testing and inspecting, at CM/Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. Comply with Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling. Protect and store cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling as required in AISI's Code of Standard Practice. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. A.Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal framing products equal to those specified below: 1. B. Manufacturers’ listed below are approved providing their products are equal to those specified as the basis of design: 1. C. 2.2 ClarkDietrich Building Systems. Inc., 9100 Centre Point Dr., Suite 210, West Chester, OH 45069; Tel; 513-870-1100, 800-543-7140; Fax: 513-870-1300; Website: www.clarkdietrich.com. Marino/WARE, Inc., 400 Metuchen Rd., South Plainfield, NJ 07080; Tel: 800-627-4661, 908-757-9000; Fax: 908-753-8763; Website: www.marinoware.com. Other manufacturers shall request product substitution in accord with Section 01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Engage qualified professional engineer, as defined in Paragraph 1.05.C to design cold-formed steel framing system. September 15, 2015 054000 - Cold-formed Metal Framing Page 3 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. C. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing in accord with Florida Building Code, for design of live and dead loads and Chapter 16 Wind Loading, capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions for project location indicated. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than following limits: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D. E. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of wall height under horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft.. Floor Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/480 for live loads and 1/360 for total loads of span. Roof Rafter Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of horizontally projected span. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of span. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: 1. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Upward and downward movement of [1/2 inch] COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. B. C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and G60coating weight and thickness required by structural performance. Steel Sheet for Clips: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. 2. 2.4 Grade: 50. Coating: G90. LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2. 3. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows: 1. 2. C. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538” (16 gage Flange Width: 2” (200 Section Properties: Shall be determined by metal framing fabricator’s Engineer for minimum allowable calculated section modulus, moment of inertia, and allowable moment. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538” Match steel studs. Flange Width: 2” (51 mm) Headers and Jambs - Heavy-Duty Stud: Manufacturer's proprietary shape used to form header beams and jambs, columns or posts, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges and as follows: September 15, 2015 054000 - Cold-formed Metal Framing Page 4 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3. 4. D. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch Leg Width x Leg Length: 1.5” x 6” (152 mm). Opening Framing: 1. 2. 3. 2.5 Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch. Flange Width: 2”. Section Properties: Header design shall be based on effective section properties. Steel L Headers: Manufacturer's standard L-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, and as follows: 1. 2. F. Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems; Heavy Duty Stud (HDS) and Header Bracket (HDSC), ProX Header. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538” atch steel studs. Web and Flange Widths, Type HDS: 6” by 3” by 2.25” by 0.75” (152 mm by 76.2 mm by 57.2 by 19.1 mm). Web and Flange Widths, Type HDSC: 5.875” by 3.0625” by 2”. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2. 3. E. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 RedHeader RO framing may be used for exterior openings subject to requirements of code evaluation reports and/or shop drawings with engineering calculations signed and sealed by Florida registered PE (Professional Engineer). Minimum Material Thickness: As required by design. Minimum Flange Width: As required by design. FLOOR JOIST FRAMING A. Steel Floor Joists: Manufacturer's proprietary cold-formed galvanized steel joists, of web depths indicated, featuring large extruded holes and as follows: 1. 2. B. Steel Joist Rim Track: Manufacturer’s standard U-shaped steel joist track; punched with clip angles at required joist spacing, of web depths indicated; with stiffened webs and as follows: 1. 2. C. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch Flange Width: 1.25”top,2.5”bottom minimum. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated, unpunched or punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. D. Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems; TradeReady Steel Joists. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch. Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems joists where indicated. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538” Flange Width: 2”, minimum. Joist design shall be based on effective section properties. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch Flange Width: 1.25”. September 15, 2015 054000 - Cold-formed Metal Framing Page 5 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING A. Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Built-up Members: Built-up members of manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel section with stiffened flanges, nested into a U-shaped steel section joist track, with unstiffened flanges; unpunched or punched with service holes of web depths indicated; and as follows: 1. 2. 2.7 Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch Flange Width: 2”, minimum. Section Properties: Rafter design shall be based on effective section properties. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: .0538 inch 2. Flange Width: 2” minimum. CEILING JOIST FRAMING A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's [standard C-shaped steel sections] [proprietary joist system], of web depths indicated, punched with enlarged service holes, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.8 Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch. Flange Width: 2” minimum. Section Properties: Joist design shall be based on effective section properties FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. B. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 2.9 Supplementary framing. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking: ClarkDietrich Building Systems; Spazzer 5400 Bridging Bar (SPZS) and Spazzer Bar Guard (SPBG). Web stiffeners: ClarkDietrich Building Systems; QTWS. Anchor clips. End clips. Foundation clips. Gusset plates. Stud kickers and knee braces. Joist hangers and end closures. Hole reinforcing plates. Backer plates. ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbonsteel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. September 15, 2015 054000 - Cold-formed Metal Framing Page 6 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. D. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws. 1. E. 2.10 A. B. C. 2.11 A. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 per ASTM A780. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. FABRICATION Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, in accord with referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. 3. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. 4. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 5. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads. B. C. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 0.125” 3.18 mm) inch in 10’ and as follows: 1. 2. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 0.125” (3.18 mm from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to maximum out-ofsquare tolerance of 0.125” (3.18 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. September 15, 2015 054000 - Cold-formed Metal Framing Page 7 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PREPARATION A. 3.3 Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. B. C. D. Install cold-formed framing in accord with ASTM C1007 and AISI S200 "North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions". Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Install shop or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. E. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. 2. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. Install insulation, specified in Section 07 21 16 – Blanket Insulation, in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 0.125” (3.18 mm) in 10’ and as follows: 1. 3.4 Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 0.0625” (1.6 mm). Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 0.125” (3.18 mmfrom plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows: September 15, 2015 054000 - Cold-formed Metal Framing Page 8 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. B. D. E. F. G. 2. 3. 2. 3. 3.5 If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced vertically minimum of 48”. Fasten at each stud intersection. Bridging shall be as follows: 1. J. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. Single proprietary jamb member designed specifically for purpose of supporting the header may be used in lieu of multiple members. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. 1. I. Stud Spacing: 16”. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 1. H. Anchor Spacing: 24” o match stud spacing indicated on Shop Drawings]. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 0.125” (3.18 mm) between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. 1. C. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Bridging: Steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with minimum of two screws into each flange of clip angle for framing members up to 6” deep. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars may be used in accord with manufacturer's written instructions. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide complete and stable wallframing system. JOIST INSTALLATION A. B. Install in accordance with AISI's S210 "North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Floor and Roof System Design". Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings. September 15, 2015 054000 - Cold-formed Metal Framing Page 9 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track. 1. 2. D. E. F. 3. 3.6 Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above. Install bridging at minimum intervals of one third span of joist or as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows: 1. 2. H. I. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1.5”. E.Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings. F. Space joists as indicated but not more than 2” from abutting walls. G.Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated on Shop Drawings. 1. G. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist webs. Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps. Minimum size of flat steel straps: 1.5” (38 mm) by 0.0329” (0.84 mm) width and thickness indicated with solid blocking joist-track of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly. REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. B. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written instructions. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, to ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05 40 00 September 15, 2015 054000 - Cold-formed Metal Framing Page 10 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY - SECTION 06 10 53 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Section includes: 1. 2. 1.2 Miscellaneous wood grounds, framing, sheathing, nailers, field fabricated expansion joints, roof curbs, cants and copings, window openings, blocking for mounting accessories, equipment, and other items where indicated. Preservative treatment of wood where indicated. RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 1.3 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Section 01 66 00 – Project Storage and Handling. Section 07 52 00 – Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing. Section 07 41 13 – Metal Roof Panels. Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. Section 08 05 00 – Common Work Results for Openings. Section 10 05 00 - Common Work Results for Specialties. REFERENCES A. B. C. See Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, definitions, abbreviations, and acronyms. American National Standards Institute: ANSI A208.1 - Mat-Formed Wood Particleboard. American Wood-Preservers Association: 1. D. E. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau: SPIB - Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber. U. S. Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology: 1. 2. 3. 1.4 AWPA Standard U1, UC 3 - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. DOC PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. DOC PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels. DOC PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. SUBMITTALS A. B. Comply with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Product Data: Submit technical data for: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. Wood /Plywood Fasteners and Anchors Wood preservative treatment materials and application instructions. MSDS of treatment materials. Samples: September 15, 2015 061053 - Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 1.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Fastener types: Two (2) of each type Material Samples, if requested by Architect. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accord with following: 1. 2. B. 1.6 Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by DOC PS 20. Lumber: DOC PS 20. Perform Work in accord with 2010 Edition, Florida Building Code requirements. PRODUCT HANDLING A. B. C. Keep wood products in dry area above ground during delivery, storage, and handling. Protect from exposure from weather and contact with wet or damp surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood to provide air circulation within stacks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber for Miscellaneous Framing/Blocking: 1. 2. B. Plywood Sheathing/Decking: 1. C. 2. 2.2 APA/EWA Structural I, 5/8” thickness (unless otherwise noted), Grade: CDX; pressure treated with preservative where indicated. Exposure Durability: Exposure 1. Fasteners and Anchoring: 1. D. SPIB Stress Group D 1x and 2x No. 2 Grade Southern Yellow Pine species, 19 percent maximum moisture content. Manufacturer and applicator of pressure preservative treatment shall be marked on wood. Provide size and type as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards for nails, crews, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices. Provide hot-dipped galvanized anchors and hardware installed in contact with concrete, masonry, and roofing. Asphalt Building Felt Underlayment: #15 asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated per ASTM D226. ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. 2. 3. Stainless steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, hot dipped galvanized steel elsewhere. Nails: ASTM F1667; ring-shanked, except as otherwise directed. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolt or ballistic fastener for anchorages to steel. September 15, 2015 061053 - Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PRESERVATIVE TREATED WOOD A. B. C. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment) for wood (exterior, above ground): AWPA U1, use category 3 (UC3) using water borne preservative with 4.0 kg/m³ (0.25 pcf) of wood product. Wood preservatives shall not contain arsenic or arsenate. Wood preservative shall be borate product as manufactured by Robbins Lumber Co., 13001 N. Nebraska Ave., Tampa, FL 33612-4456; Tel: 813-971-3030; Website; www.robbinslumber.com. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Verify substrate conditions are ready to receive pressure treated lumber nailers, blocking, curbing, framing or sheathing. PREPARATION A. 3.3 Coordinate placement of wood grounds, blocking, curbing and framing items with openings required by other trades. INSTALLATION A. General: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B. Discard material with defects which might impair quality of work and units which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown or as required by recognized standards. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work. Use fasteners and anchorages as indicated. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; pre-drill as required. Holes drilled oversized or wallered out, shall be re-drilled. Place horizontal members, crown side up. Construct blocking members in openings of solid wood sections. Do not install roof nailers, curbs, copings, or sheathing more than one day in advance of roofing membrane installation. Install dry-in felt over wood nailers, cants, copings, and sheathing in roofing locations. Install dry-in felt under wood in contact with cementitious substrates. Replace wood splintered or damaged by fastener installation. Wood Grounds, Nailers, Blocking and Sleepers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Coordinate curb extensions and installation of wood nailers with roof construction work. Provide blocking and edging wherever shown and where required for attachment to other work. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. Construct curb members of single pieces to greatest extent possible. Curb roof openings [except where prefabricated curbs are provided] shall have corners formed by alternating lapping side members. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts with washers flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. September 15, 2015 061053 - Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 7. 8. 9. C. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Where new members are doubled, ends shall be lapped and thoroughly spiked to each other and to bearing members. Where new members bear on concrete, securely fasten by bolts or lag screws staggered on centers as indicated. Provide heads of bolts or lag screws with large-head washers. Countersink bolts to clear wood surfaces. Round edges and corners of wood plates where flashing occurs. Plywood Sheathing (wall and fascia as applicable): 1. 2. Install sheathing properly framed to required lines, level and rigidly secured in place. Cut sheathing sections to fit. Leave 1/8” clearance between panels at side laps. Cover sheathing with dry-in felt and seal top horizontal edge. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 061053 - Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 07 62 00 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. 1.2 Flashing, counter-flashing, roofing grounds and nailers, and fabricated sheet metal items for roofing intersections with vertical surfaces, copings, curbs, gutters, eaves, roof drains, scuppers, vents and other roof penetrations. RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 03 52 16 – Lightweight Insulating Concrete. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry. Section 05 31 23 – Steel Roof Decking. Section 07 11 13 – Bituminous Dampproofing. Section 07 52 00 – Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing Section 07 61 13 – Standing Seam Metal Roofing. Section 07 72 00 – Roof Accessories. Section 07 92 13 – Elastomeric Joint Sealants. REFERENCES A. B. C. See Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, abbreviations, definitions, and acronyms. ANSI-SPRI/ES-1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D. E. ASTM A240/A240M-15a: Standard Specification for Heat-resisting Chromium and Chromium-nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels ASTM A653/A653M-13: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process ASTM A755/A755M-15: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot Dipped Process (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process. ASTM D4586/D4586M-07(2012)e1: Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free. ASTM B32-08(2014): Standard Specification for Solder Metal (Lead Free). Florida Building Code (FBC), 5th Edition. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) “Roofing and Waterproofing Manual” Detail for installation of units. Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractor’s National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual”, latest Edition. Details for fabrication of units, including flanges and installation to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. September 15, 2015 076200 - Flashing And Sheet Metal Page 1 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SUBMITTALS A. B. C. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submit Shop Drawings on flashing and sheet metal work. Samples: 1. 2. 1.5 Submit 8” (203mm) x 8” (203mm) square samples of each specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces. Submit each samples of factory fabricated products exposed as finished work, complete with specified factory finish. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. D. 1.6 Comply with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Regulatory Requirements: Ensure flashing and sheet metal complies with requirements of Florida Building Code, NRCA, SMACNA, and ANSI-SPRI/ES-1. Coordinate application of flashings with application of roofing, protruding material, and roof accessories to provide a complete weather tight installation under provisions of the specified warranty requirements. Perform work in accord with referenced standards and manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. B. Comply with Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Meeting Format: 1. 2. 3. Pre-installation meeting shall occur after approval of Shop Drawings by Contractor/CM and accepted by AE. Meeting shall convene minimum of one week before starting work. Required Attendees: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 4. 5. Contractor/CM. Roof flashings installer. Roofing and roofing equipment manufacturers. Installers of deck or substrate construction to receive roofing work. Installers of roof-top mechanical, plumbing or electrical items or other work in and around roofing that must precede or follow roofing work Other subcontractors associated with work. Architect. Owner’s Project Manager. Contractor/CM shall make arrangements for meeting and notify parties required to attend. Agenda shall include: a. b. c. d. e. f. September 15, 2015 Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. b.Review roof, roof equipment, doors, and window system requirements (drawings, specifications, and other contract documents). Review Shop Drawings and associated submittals. Review manufacturer's technical materials. Review and finalize construction schedule related to work and verify availability of materials, personnel, equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. Review required inspection, testing, certifying and material usage accounting procedures. 076200 - Flashing And Sheet Metal Page 2 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 g. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions, including temporary roofing. Meeting may be combined with roofing pre-installation meeting. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. B. Comply with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Provide installer’s five (5) year written warranty for flashings indicated. 1. 2. C. D. Flashings shall resist design wind speeds required by Florida Building Code, Chapter 16, in which installer agrees to repair or replace flashing components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Flashing failures shall include water leaks, fasteners, accessories, flashing and sheet metal, grounds/nailers, gutters and downspouts, scuttles and vents, curbs, and other flashing components of roofing system. See Roofing Specifications for additional warranties that shall also apply. Warranty shall be a term type, with no conditions, exclusions, including exclusions of remedies by Owner, deductibles or limitations on coverage amount. Conditions, exclusions, or dollar limits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. B. Manufactured flashing and sheet metal products are to contain recycled content. Sheet Material: 1. 2. 3. C. Fastening Devices: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.2 Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, 22 gage, complying with ASTM A167. Flashing for Pipes, Conduits, and Round Equipment Supports: Type 304 stainless steel, 26 gage, 2B, complying with ASTM A240. Solder: Per ASTM B32. 1.Stainless steel fasteners compatible with metal and roofing system. Use of powderactivated fasteners is prohibited. Attach sheet metal to wood with exposed fastenings: No. 10 x 1-1/4” (31.8mm) pan head stainless steel sheet metal screws. Provide neoprene sealant washers and stainless steel washers under screw heads. Attachment of sheet metal to masonry or concrete: No. 10 x 1-1/4” (31.8mm) pan head stainless steel masonry screws. Provide neoprene sealant washers and stainless steel washers under screw heads. Roofing Cement: Plastic roofing cement complying with requirements of ASTM D2822 or as appropriate and as recommended by roofing manufacturer. ACCESSORIES A. B. Roof Drain Flashing: Minimum 4 lb (1.82 Kg) per ft² lead sheet flashing, 36” (91.44cm) x 36” (91.44cm) installed in accord with NRCA specifications. Cants: 1. Pre-fabricated 16-gage, galvanized, minimum 4” (101mm) vertical height, formed at 45° angle to walls and parapets. September 15, 2015 076200 - Flashing And Sheet Metal Page 3 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. C. 2. 3. 4. 5. 3. 4. Fabricate from stainless steel to fit duct curbs and ducts projecting from curbs. Provide 4” (101mm) vertical flange to cover top edge of bituminous base flashings. Form flange bottom towards curb, with ¼” (6.3mm) bottom edge bent ¼” (6.3mm) out and hemmed. At top of curbs bend metal 90° and extend horizontally over to duct, then bend upward and extend vertically not less than 3” (71.2mm) from top edge of flashing out 3/8” (9.5mm) to receive sealant. Provide for field soldered lap joints at corners and 1” (25.4mm) lap joints at horizontal miter splices. Edge Drips: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. F. Fabricate in approximately 10’ (3m) sections using sheet 22-gage stainless steel to detail as indicated. Provide continuous 16-gage stainless steel outer hold-down cleat with punched holes at 6” (152mm) on center and face fasten at inward facing parapet components with removable fasteners as required for sheet metal. Provide 8” (203mm) wide joint covers. Manufacturer: SBC Industries, North Miami, Florida. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedures. Curb to Duct Flashing and Counter Flashing: 1. 2. E. Manufacturer: Concrecel USA; Product: ARBS (Alternative Roof Blocking System). Substitutions: Comply with Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedures. Copings: 1. D. Fabricate using sheet 22-gage stainless steel drip edge to detail indicated, in not over 10’ (3m) sections. Provide continuous 16-gage stainless steel continuous cleat with punched holes spaced as necessary. If cleat extends 6” (152mm) or more below top fastener, provide second row of punched holes spaced as necessary. Provide 4” (101mm) roof flange, and extend bottom drip not less than 1” (25.4mm) below bottom of roof sheathing, with bottom ¾” (19mm) kick-out to drip water away from finish wall. Manufacturer: Concrecel USA; Product: ARBS (Alternative Roof Blocking System). Substitutions: Request for substitutions shall be in accord with Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedures. Pipes, Conduits, Wires, and Round Equipment Supports Penetrating Roofing or Resting on Roofing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Type 304 stainless steel, 26-gage, complying with ASTM A240. Form tubular stainless steel sleeves sized to shape of penetration, not less than 8” (202mm) above finished roofing with 4” (101mm) wide base flange welded to water-tight to sleeve. Shop punch flanges. Seal flashing and cover with protective umbrella. Pre-manufactured roof penetration seals. a. 6. G. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Manufacturer: SBC Industries, North Miami, Florida. Substitutions: Request for substitutions shall be in accord with Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedures. Sanitary Vent Stack Flashings: September 15, 2015 076200 - Flashing And Sheet Metal Page 4 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3. 4. H. 4. Fabricate using stainless steel to profiles and details shown. Lock seam corners, solder water-tight and hem outer exposed edges. Provide 4” (101mm) wide minimum flanges formed to fit cants, decks and vertical wall surface. Shop punch flanges for fastenings at 6” (152mm) on center. Gutters: 1. 2. 3. 4. J. 4 lb (1.82 Kg) per ft² lead flashing. Form tubular lead flashing sleeve not less than 8” (202mm) high with diameter ½” (12.7mm) larger than vent stack. Provide 4” (101mm) wide flange soldered water-tight. Provide vandal-proof vent covers. Scuppers: 1. 2. 3. I. Gutters shall be minimum 6” (152mm) wide x 6” (152mm) deep, 24-gage stainless steel with mill finish. Gutter straps shall be 1” (25.4mm) wide rolled stainless steel located at 24” o.c. (61cm) and pop riveted to gutter. Gutter brackets shall be 1.25” wide by 0.125” thick stainless steel with mill finish located at 2’-6” o.c. Gutters shall be in minimum 10’-0” long sections formed to provide flush exterior seams between gutter sections. Joints between gutter sections shall be 1/2” wide with 6” wide cover plates and support brackets to allow for expansion and contraction. Joints shall be fully bedded in sealant on inside joints. Downspouts: 1. Downspouts: a. b. 2. Downspouts shall be 5” by 5” square 0.125” thick stainless steel with mill finish fabricated in one continuous piece down to kick-out diverter section at bottom of downspout. Sections shall be welded and ground smooth. Downspout bracket/straps: a. b. c. K. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Straps shall be 1” wide by 0.125” thick located not more than 4’-0” apart with top and bottom brackets located not more than 12” from ends of downspouts. Brackets shall be attached to structure with two .025”diameter Zamac drive pins per bracket. Bracket shall be attached to gutter with two #10 sheet metal screws each side of bracket and calked with sealant. Stucco Stop with Counter-flashing (2-piece): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1.Fabricate in approximately 10 ft sections using sheet stainless steel to details indicated. Provide receiver with 1.5” wall flange, 0.75” sloping stucco stop, and 0.75” flange bend downward with 0.50” hem. Shop punch wall flange for fastening. Provide shop fabricated soldered corner splices extending 4” each way. Provide counterflashing with 1.5” 45° top flange with 0.35” kick back at top and 4” bottom flange formed inward ¾” towards wall with hemmed 0.25” kick at bottom. Provide 1.5” x 4” storm cleats. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by following manufacturer: September 15, 2015 076200 - Flashing And Sheet Metal Page 5 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA a. 8. L. SBC Industries, North Miami, Florida. Substitutions: Request for substitutions shall be in accord with Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedures Stucco Top with Counter-flashing (1-piece for re-roofing): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Fabricate in approximately 10 ft sections using sheet stainless steel to details as indicated. Provide counterflashing with 0.50” 45° leg for sealant with 1.5” wall flange with a 4” bottom flange formed inward 0.75” towards wall with hemmed 0.50” kick at bottom. Shop punch wall flange for fastening. Provide shop fabricated soldered corner splices extending 4 inches each way. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the specified requirements, provide products by the following manufacturer: a. 6. M. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SBC Industries, North Miami, Florida. Substitutions: Substitutions: Request for substitutions shall be in accord with Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedures Surface Mounted Flashing (1-piece): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Fabricate in approximately 10 ft sections using sheet stainless steel to detail as indicated. Provide flashing with 1.50” wall flange with 0.25” kick at top to receive sealant, 0.50” 135° sloping top flange and 4” bottom flange formed inward 0.75” towards wall with hemmed 0.50” kick at bottom. Shop punch wall flange for fastening to meet wind loads per FBC. Provide shop fabricated corner splices extending 4”. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with the specified requirements, provide products by following manufacturers: SBC Industries, North Miami, Florida. Substitutions: Request for substitutions shall be in accord with Section 01 25 13 - Product Substitution Procedures PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Do not proceed with work until conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work have been corrected in acceptable manner. INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. Lap, rivet, lock, or seal joints, as field conditions require. Provide necessary reinforcement, miscellaneous fittings, and accessories. Apply flashing and sheet metal work including miscellaneous fittings and accessories to even, smooth, sound, thoroughly clean and dry surfaces that are free from defects that might affect application. Prime metal flanges that receive bitumen under provisions of FBC and manufacturer’s requirements. Perform soldering work slowly, with properly heated coppers to thoroughly heat seam material and sweat solder through full width of seam that shows no less than 1” of evenly flowed solder. Solder under provisions of ASTM B 32. 1. Start soldering immediately after application of flux. September 15, 2015 076200 - Flashing And Sheet Metal Page 6 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. E. F. G. H. 2. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2. 3. 4. 5. 3. 4. 5. 6. Prime roof drain flanges before applying roof felts. Set lead in full bed of cold bitumen over intermediate plies or cap sheet. Strip lead cover with 2 layers of roofing felts in solid coats of hot bitumen. Roof penetration materials at pipes, conduits and round equipment supports. 1. O. Install continuous 20 gage stainless steel cleat. Set 22 gage stainless steel edge drip roof flanges in full bed of roofing cement over completed roofing. Lap splices 4” minimum and seal top horizontal surface laps with cold bitumen. Stagger nails at flange to roof deck at 4” on center. Cover roof flanges with 2-ply felt stripping set in full bed of roofing cement. Locate drip bottom not less than 0.75” away from finished vertical surfaces. Roof Drains: 1. 2. 3. N. Install flashings after ducts through curbs are in place and after bituminous base flashings are completed. Place flashings in place on curbs and solder corners and corner miter laps water-tight. Secure counterflashings to vertical edge of curb nailers with No. 10 stainless steel sheet metal screws through sealant washers at not over 12” on center. Secure vertical upturned duct flashing to duct with No. 10 stainless steel sheet metal screws through sealants washers at not over 6” on center. Seal joint between flashings and ducts with sealant per Section 07 92 13 – Elastomeric Joint Sealants. Edge Drips: 1. 2. M. Secure outer hold-down cleat to woodblock at 6 inches on center with ring shank roofing nails. Install coping over cleat. Allow 0.125” space between each coping section. Secure inside face of coping with removable grommet type fasteners. Provide 1” to 12” slope at coping to inner parapet wall. Install joint covers in full bed of sealant. Curb to Duct Flashing and Counterflashing: 1. L. Set flashing tight against wall and with roof flange set on aluminum deck in bed of sealant. Secure roof flanges to metal deck with No. 10 x 0.50” stainless steel sheet metal screws at 6” on center maximum. Provide sealant washers and stainless steel washers under screw heads. Cants Strips: Install at transitions of roof membrane with flat vertical surfaces. Copings: 1. K. Solder flat locked seam. Isolate dissimilar metals with accepted isolation paint or other accepted materials. Make flashing and sheet metal work water and weather tight, with lines, arises and angles sharp and true and plane surfaces free from waves and buckles. Provide sufficient fasteners and related hardware to ensure a complete and weather tight system. Base Flashings at Aluminum Walkway Covers Abutting Concrete and Masonry: 1. I. J. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 After preliminary examination install conical sealant cover with sealant. Sanitary Vent Stack Flashings: September 15, 2015 076200 - Flashing And Sheet Metal Page 7 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. P. 2. 3. Set scuppers in full bed of roofing cement over completed base flashing and roof membrane. Secure to masonry walls and concrete decks with stainless sheet metal screws in lead shields at 6” on center. Secure to wood nailers with stainless steel sheet metal screws at 6” on center. Stucco Stop with Counterflashing (2-piece): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. R. Install in accord with NRCA specifications. Scuppers: 1. Q. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Set receiver on masonry and concrete walls where indicated. Lap spices 4 inches minimum and seal laps with sealant. Secure to wall with No. 10 x 1.25” minimum Tap-Con screws 12” on center maximum. Check for membrane/bitumen seal on top of felt flashing before counterflashing installation. Attach storm cleats at 30” on center and with 1 cleat at each joint. Insert counterflashing into receiver, and secure tightly with storm cleats. Surface Mounted Flashing (1-piece): 1. 2. 3. 4. Set on masonry and concrete walls over base flashing where indicated. Lap splices 4” minimum and seal laps with sealant. Secure to wall with No. 10 x 1-1/4 inch Tap-Con pan head screws at 12 inches on center maximum. Provide neoprene sealant washers and stainless steel washers. Where corrugated metal wall occurs, place premolded neoprene filler strip on wall immediately above top of metal base flashing. a. b. c. 5. Set filler strip in sealant and seal abutting edges of filler strip with sealant. Place counterflashing over filler strip set in sealant and secure flashing to metal wall through filler strip with No. 10 x appropriate length stainless steel sheet metal screws at 6 inches on center maximum and centered on wall flutes. Provide sealant washers and stainless steel washers under screw heads. Check for membrane/bitumen seal on top of felt flashing before flashing installation. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 076200 - Flashing And Sheet Metal Page 8 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - 1.1 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK A. 1.2 Firestopping at penetrations in fire rated assemblies, fire-resistive joints and intersections with fire rated walls, floors and roofs, perimeter fire containment systems in fire rated spaces, fire and smoke seals for doors and corridors. RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. S. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Section 01 31 13 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 43 39 – Mockups. Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Section 01 66 00 – Project Storage and Handling Requirements. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry. Se ct ion055000 - Metal Decking. Section 07 21 00 - Building Insulation. Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. Section 08 44 00 - Curtain Wall and Glazed Assemblies. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (work requiring firestopping). Division 26 – Electrical (work requiring firestopping). Division 27 – Communications (work requiring firestopping). REFERENCES A. B. See Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, definitions, abbreviations, and acronyms. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. 2. 3. C. American National Standards Institute/Underwriter’s Laboratory (ANSI/UL): 1. 2. D. E. 1.4 ASTM C920-11: Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. ASTM E1399-13e1: Standard Test Method for Cyclic Movement and Measuring the Minimum and Maximum Widths of Architectural Joint Systems. ASTM E 1996-00: Standard Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems. ANSI/UL 1479: Fire Test of Though Penetration Firestops. ANSI/UL 2079: Test for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. th Florida Building Code, 5 Edition. th Florida Fire Prevention Code, 5 Edition. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS September 15, 2015 078400 - Firestopping Page 1 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. 1.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Provide products that upon curing, do not re-emulsify, dissolve, leach, breakdown or otherwise deteriorate over time from exposure to atmospheric moisture, sweating pipes, ponding water or other forms of moisture characteristic during and after construction. Provide firestop sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate motion such as pipe vibration, water hammer, thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage to seal. Pipe insulation shall not be removed, cut away or otherwise interrupted through wall or floor openings. Provide products appropriately tested for thickness and type of insulation utilized. Openings within walls and floors designed to accommodate voice, data and video cabling shall be provided with re-enterable products specifically designed for retrofit. Penetrants passing through fire-resistance rated floor-ceiling assemblies contained within chase wall assemblies shall be protected with products tested by being fully exposed to fire outside of chase wall. Systems within UL Fire Resistance Directory that meet criterion are identified with words "Chase Wall Optional". Provide fire-resistive joint sealants sufficiently flexible to accommodate movement such as thermal expansion and other normal building movement without damage to seal. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants designed to accommodate specific range of movement and tested for purpose in accord with cyclic movement test criteria as outlined in Standards, ASTM E-1399, ASTM E-1966 or ANSI/ UL 2079. Provide through penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems and conduct air leakage test in accord with Standards, ANSI/UL1479 and ANSI/UL2079, respectively, with published L-Ratings for ambient and elevated temperatures as evidence of ability of through penetration firestop system or fire-resistive joint system to restrict movement of smoke. SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. Submit in accord with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog data for specified products demonstrating compliance with referenced standards and listing numbers of systems in which each product is to be used. Shop Drawings: Contractor and Sub-contractor shall submit a schedule of opening locations and sizes, penetrating items, and required UL listed design numbers to seal openings to maintain fire resistance rating of adjacent assembly. Submittal shall be made in booklet format and be submitted to Authority Having Jurisdiction as a method of tracking any and all penetrations in fire and/or smoke rated partitions. Certificates: 1. 2. E. 1.6 Product certificates signed by firestop system manufacturer certifying material compliance with applicable code and specified performance characteristics. Certification of Installer's Qualifications. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Comply with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Products/Systems: Provide firestopping systems that comply with following requirements and as specified in Paragraph 1.04 - Performance Criteria. 1. 2. C. Firestopping tests shall be performed by qualified, testing and inspection agency, UL approved, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspection agency. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have five continuous previous years of experience in performing work specified, and is certified or approved by firestopping manufacturer as having required training to install firestop products specified. September 15, 2015 078400 - Firestopping Page 2 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA D. Mock-Ups: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. E. Comply with Section 01 43 39 – Mockups. Install mockup using acceptable products and manufacturer approved installation methods. Apply one of each unit type of firestopping material, such as penetrations through fire rated partition, to representative application. Locate where directed. Maintain mockup during construction for workmanship comparison. Remove and legally dispose of mockup when no longer required. Preinstallation Meeting: 1. 2. 3. 1.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Comply with Section 01 31 13 – Project Coordination. Contractor/CM shall coordinate and conduct meeting with applicable installers to verify project requirements, review substrate conditions, plan and schedule work progress, determine phasing and layout of work with other trades to minimize conflicts. Review manufacturer's printed installation instructions, and warranty requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. D. 1.8 Comply with Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Requirements. Deliver products in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers, identification labels intact identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspection agency's classification marking; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. Handle and store products in accord with manufacturer's written recommendations published in technical materials. Leave products wrapped or otherwise protected and under clean and dry storage conditions until required for installation. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Do not install firestopping products when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limitations recommended by manufacturer. Do not install firestopping products when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of materials Do not use materials containing flammable solvents. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems. Schedule installation of firestopping after completion of penetrating item installation but prior to covering or concealing of openings. Schedule installation of safing materials in linear opening at curtain wall prior to construction that limits access to safing slot. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS September 15, 2015 078400 - Firestopping Page 3 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. C. 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Approved Manufacturer: Specified Technologies Inc., 200 Evans Way; Somerville, NJ 08876; Tel: 800-992-1180; Tel: 908-526-8000; Fax: 908-526-9623; Website: www.stifirestop.com. Other manfacturer’s shall make requests for product substitutions in accord Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Single Source: Obtain firestop systems for each type of penetration or joint opening and construction condition indicated from single manufacturer. MATERIALS A. B. Use firestopping products that have been tested for specific fire-resistance-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type or joint opening width and movement capabilities, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance. Latex Sealants: STI SpecSeal Series single component latex formulations that upon cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture. Following products are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. Firestop Devices: STI SpecSeal Series factory-assembled steel collars lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific outside diameter of penetrating item. Following products are acceptable: 1. 2. D. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) EZ-PATH Fire Rated Pathway. Wrap Strips: STI SpecSeal Series single component intumescent elastomeric strips faced on both sides with plastic film. Following products are acceptable: 1. 2. 3. H. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSP Firestop Putty. Fire Rated Cable Pathways: STI EZ-PATH device modules comprised of steel raceway with intumescent foam pads allowing 0 to 100 percent cable fill. Following products are acceptable: 1. G. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSP Firestop Putty Pads. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series EP PowerShield Insert Pads. Firestop Putty: STI SpecSeal Series intumescent, non-hardening, water resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers or silicone compounds. Following products are acceptable: 1. F. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSC Firestop Collars. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series LCC Firestop Collars. Wall Opening Protective Materials: STI SpecSeal Series intumescent, non-curing pads or inserts for protection of electrical switch and receptacle boxes to reduce horizontal separation to less than 24 inches (610mm). Following products are acceptable: 1. 2. E. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSS Intumescent Sealant. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series LCI Intumescent Sealant. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series LC Endothermic Sealant. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series AS Elastomeric Spray. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series ES Elastomeric Sealant. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series RED Wrap Strip. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series BLU Wrap Strip. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series BLU2 Wrap Strip. Firestop Pillows: STI SpecSeal Series re-enterable, non-curing, mineral fiber core encapsulated with an intumescent coating contained in flame retardant poly bag. Following products are acceptable: September 15, 2015 078400 - Firestopping Page 4 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. I. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSM Firestop Mortar. Silicone Sealants: STI SpecSeal Series moisture curing, single component, silicone elastomeric sealant for horizontal surfaces (pourable or nonsag) or vertical surface (nonsag). Following products are acceptable: 1. 2. K. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Series SSB Firestop Pillows. Mortar: STI SpecSeal Series Portland cement based dry-mix product formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a non-shrinking, water-resistant, homogenous mortar. Following products are acceptable: 1. J. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) Pensil 300 Silicone Sealant. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) Pensil 300 SL Self-Leveling Silicone Sealant. Silicone Foam: STI SpecSeal Series multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers, that when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, non-shrinking foam. Following products are acceptable: 1. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) Pensil 200 Silicone Foam. L. Silicone/Urethane Sealants: STI SpecSeal Series moisture curing, single component, silicone/urethane hybrid elastomericsealant for horizontal surfaces. Following products are acceptable: 1. M. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI) SpecSeal Fast Tack Firestop Spray. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. C. D. 3.2 Before beginning installation, verify that substrate conditions previously installed under other sections are acceptable for installation of firestopping in accord with manufacturer's printed installation instructions and technical bulletins. Surfaces shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, scale, laitance, rust, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may inhibit optimum adhesion. Provide masking and temporary covering to protect adjacent surfaces. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION A. B. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in accord with Performance Criteria and in accord with conditions of testing and classification as specified in published design. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. 2. 3. 4. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions for installation of firestopping products and following. Seal openings or voids made by penetrations to ensure air and water resistant seal. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager, and damper manufacturer prior to installation of through-penetration firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains to duct work. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. September 15, 2015 078400 - Firestopping Page 5 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.3 5. Apply suitable bond-breaker to prevent three-sided adhesion in applications where conditions might occur such as intersection of gypsum wallboard/steel stud wall to floor or roof assembly where joint is backed by steel ceiling runner or track. 6. Where joint application is exposed to elements, fire-resistive joint sealant shall be approved by manufacturer for use in exterior applications and shall comply with ASTM C-920-11: Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. B. 3.4 Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by authorities having jurisdiction. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping products to comply with requirements. ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. B. 3.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. Clean surfaces adjacent to sealed openings to be free of excess firestopping materials and soiling as work progresses. SCHEDULES END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 078400 - Firestopping Page 6 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 07 92 13 - ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. 1.2 Work includes elastomeric joint sealants, joint backer materials and accessories needed to ensure complete and durable weather tight seal at locations indicated. RELATED WORK A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures Section 01 42 00 – References Section 01 43 39 – Mockups Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control Section 01 66 00 – Project Storage and Handling Requirements Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 04 21 13 – Brick Masonry Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07 81 00 - Applied Fireproofing Section 08 44 00 - Curtain Wall and Glazed Assemblies Section 09 21 00 – Plaster and Gypsum Board Assemblies REFERENCES A. B. See Section 0 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, abbreviations, definitions and acronyms. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. 2. C. 1.4 ASTM C920-14a: Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. ASTM C1193-13: Standard Guide for Use of Sealants. NSF/ANSI - Standard 61-Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects SUBMITTALS A. B. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Product data: 1. 2. 3. C. D. Materials list of items proposed to be provided. Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to ensure compliance with requirements. Shop Drawings or catalog illustrations in sufficient detail to show installation and QUALITY ASSURANCE Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen trained and experienced in trade and familiar with requirements and methods required for proper performance of work. Applicator qualifications: September 15, 2015 079213 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants Page 1 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. E. 2. G. Obtain joint sealants from single manufacturer for each different product required to ensure compatibility. Manufacturer shall instruct applicator in procedures for intersecting sealants. Perform work in accord with ASTM C1193-13 Standard Guide for Use of Sealants except where more stringent requirements are indicated or specified. Pre-construction compatibility and adhesion testing: 1. 2. H. Applicator shall have three years experience installing materials of types specified and shall have successfully completed three projects of similar scope and complexity. Applicator shall designate single individual as project foreman who shall be on site during installation. Single source responsibility for joint sealants: 1. F. Submit to joint sealant manufacturer samples of actual materials that will contact or affect their joint sealants in the Work for compatibility and adhesion testing. This testing will not be required where sealant manufacturer is able to furnish data acceptable to Architect based on previous testing for adhesion and compatibility to materials matching those of the Work. Mockups: 1. 2. Comply with Section 01 43 39 – Mockups. Pre-construction field adhesion testing: a. b. c. d. 3. b. c. 4. Use manufacturer's standard field adhesion test methods and methods proposed for joint preparation to verify proper priming and joint preparation techniques required to obtain optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrate. Evaluate and report results of field adhesion testing. Do not use joint preparation methods or sealants that produce less than satisfactory adhesion to joint substrates during testing. Standard of acceptance: a. b. 1.5 Prior to general installation, conduct field-tests for adhesion of joint sealants to actual joint substrates using proposed joint preparation methods recommended by manufacturer. Conduct tests for each type of sealant and substrate. Locate field-test joints where inconspicuous or as approved by Architect. Include areas typical of those requiring removal of existing sealants and utilize methods proposed for sealant removal that have been pre-approved by Architect. Testing: a. I. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Joints installed during pre-construction field adhesion testing that are accepted by Architect shall be retained as standard of acceptability and incorporated into Work of that area during general installation. At least one such standard of minimum 5 feet (1.52m) in length shall be established for each type of sealant and substrate. Schedule applications of waterproofing, water repellents and preservative finishes after sealant installation unless sealant manufacturer approves otherwise in writing. Ensure that installed sealant is allowed to cure sufficiently prior to subsequent applications. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING September 15, 2015 079213 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants Page 2 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. C. 1.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Comply with Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Requirements. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with labels intact and legible at time of use. Store materials in accord with manufacturer's written recommendations with proper precautions to ensure fitness of material when installed. SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS A. General: 1. 2. 3. 1.7 Provide joints properly dimensioned to receive approved sealant system. Provide joint surfaces that are clean, dry, sound and free of voids, deformations, protrusions and contaminants which may inhibit application or performance of joint sealant. Where expansion joints having preformed joint fillers are scheduled to be sealed, provide reservoir to accept the sealant such as by molded breakaway joint cap or removable block out. WARRANTY A. B. Comply with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Deliver to Architect signed copies of the following written warranties against adhesive and cohesive failure of the sealant and against infiltration of water and air through the sealed joint for a period of 3 years from date of project’s substantial completion. 1. 2. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering sealant materials; Applicator's standard warranty covering workmanship. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. C. Other manufacturers shall submit requesst for substitution per Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Compatibility: 1. 2. D. Tremco Sealants, Div. of RPM international, Inc.,3735 Green Rd., Beachwood, OH 44122; Tel: 216-292-5000; Fax: 216-766-5543; Website: www.tremcosealants.com. Percora Corp., 165 Wambold Rd., Harleysville, PA 19438; Tel: 215-723-6051, 800-5236688; Fax: 215-721-0286; Website: www.percora.com. Sika Corp. 201 Polito Ave., Lyndhurst, NJ 07071; Tel: 800-923-7452; Fax: 201-933-6225; Website: www.sika-corp.com. Sonneborn Building Products Div. of BASF Building Systems, 889 Valley Park Drive, Shakopee, MN 55379; Tel: 800-433-9517, 800-243-6739, 952-496-6000; Website: www.BASFbuildingsystems.com Provide joint sealants, joint fillers and accessory joint materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under project conditions. Install joint sealants, joint fillers and related joint materials that are non-staining to visible joint surfaces and surrounding substrate surfaces. Provide colors selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range. September 15, 2015 079213 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants Page 3 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Sealant Type A: 1. For exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces such as, but not limited to: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2. 3. Control and expansion joints in concrete tilt walls. Joints between architectural precast concrete units. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry and stucco. Butt joints between metal panels. Joints between stone panels or EIFS sections. Joints between different materials listed above. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows, storefronts, louvers and similar openings. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces. Provide single-component or multi-component, low-modulus, non-sag sealant; comply with ASTM C920-14a, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25.(Class 50 ?), Class 100/50 Approved Sealants: a. Urethanes 1) Single Component a) b) c) 2) Multi Component a) b) c) d) e) b. 6. Vulkem 227. Dymeric 240/240FC. Sealant Type C: For exterior and interior joints in horizontal and sloped traffic surfaces such as, but not limited to: a. b. c. d. e. 5. Dymeric 240/240FC. Vulkem 227. Dymonic. Dymonic FC. Vulkem 116. Multi Component Urethane 1) 2) 3) 4. Vulkem 116. Dymonic. Dymonic FC. Control, expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete. Control, expansion and isolation joints in structural precast concrete units. Joints between architectural precast concrete paving units. Tile control and expansion joints. Joints between different materials listed above. Provide single-component or multi-component polyurethane or silicone sealant having a Shore A hardness of not less than 15 or more than 50 and plus-or-minus 25 percent joint movement capability; comply with ASTM C920-14a, Type S or M, Grade P or NS, Class 25. Approved Sealants: September 15, 2015 079213 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants Page 4 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA a. b. c. d. e. B. THC-900/901. Vulkem 45/45 SSL. Vulkem 227. Spectrem 800. Spectrem 900. Sealant Type E: 1. 2. 3. For exterior and interior joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces of potable water storage areas. Provide single-component or multi-component polyurethane sealant certified by National Sanitation Foundation as conforming to the requirements of NSF Standard 61-Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects; comply with ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade P or NS, Class 25; select color from the NSF listing. Approved Sealants: a. b. C. Single Component: Vulkem 921. Multi Component: Vulkem 245. Sealant Type F: 1. 2. 3. For interior joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces where incidental food contact may occur. Provide single component or multi-component sealant complying with United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) guidelines for incidental food contact with the cured sealant; comply with ASTM C920-14a, Type S or M, Grade P or NS, Class 25; select color from listing of those approved. Approved Sealants: a. Urethanes: 1) 2) 3) b. Proglaze. Tremsil 200. Spectrem 1. Tremsil 600. Spectrem 2. Spectrem 3. Sealant Type G: 1. 2. 3. E. Vulkem 116. Dymonic. Dymonic FC. Silicones: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) D. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 For exterior joints in horizontal concrete surfaces such as airport runways, refueling aprons, highways and other areas subject to fuel spillage. Provide multi-component, self-leveling, jet-fuel resistant polyurethane sealant meeting Federal Specification SS-S-200E, Type H. Approved Sealant: Vulkem 202. Sealant Type H: 1. 2. 3. 1.For exterior vertical joints in Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems. 2.Provide a single-component or multi-component sealant; comply with ASTM C920-14a, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25, comply with EIMA 300.01. Approved Sealants: September 15, 2015 079213 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants Page 5 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA a. Urethanes: 1) 2) b. 2. For interior or exterior joints in vertical surfaces between laps in fabrications of sheet metal. Approved Sealants: a. b. Tremco Butyl Sealant. Tremco Acoustical Sealant. Sealant Type J: 1. 2. For exterior vertical joints under metal thresholds and saddles or as bedding sealant for sheet metal flashing and frames of metal or wood. Approved Sealants: a. Urethanes: 1) 2) 3) b. c. Spectrem 2. Proglaze. Spectrem 3. Other sealants: 1) 2) Tremco Butyl Sealant. Tremco Acoustical. Sealant Type K: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. I. Vulkem 116. Dymonic. Dymonic FC. Silicones: 1) 2) 3) H. Spectrem 1. Spectrem 3. Spectrem 4-TS. Sealant Type I: 1. G. Dymeric 240/240FC. Dymonic FC. Silicones: 1) 2) 3) F. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Preformed Foam Sealant: Tremco’s standard preformed, pre-compressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from high-density urethane foam impregnated with nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produced in pre-compressed sizes in roll to fit joint widths indicated. Coated on one side with pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping. Develops watertight and airtight seal when compressed to degree specified by manufacturer. Approved Sealant: Illmod 600. Acoustical Sealant: 1. Precora Corp BA-98. September 15, 2015 079213 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants Page 6 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Tremco, Inc. Tremco Acoustical Sealant. ACCESSORIES A. B. C. D. E. 2.4 Joint cleaner: Cleaner as recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrates indicated. Joint primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrates, conditions and exposures indicated. Bond breaker: Polyethylene tape or other adhesive faced tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to prevent sealant contact where it would be detrimental to sealant performa Joint backer: Closed cell or soft rod Polyethylene foam rod or other compatible non-waxing, non-extruding, non-staining resilient material in dimension 25 percent to 50 percent wider than joint width as recommended by sealant manufacturer for conditions and exposures indicated. Masking tape: Non-staining, non-absorbent tape product compatible with joint sealants and adjacent joint surfaces that is suitable for masking. OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for complete and proper installation, as selected by Contractor/CM and approved by sealant manufacturer as compatible, subject to review of Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. B. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. Applicator shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. 1. 2. 3. 3.2 Verify conformance with manufacturer's requirements; Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Architect; Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. PREPARATION A. B. Prepare surfaces to receive sealants in accord with sealant manufacturer's instructions and recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Thoroughly clean joint surfaces using cleaners approved by sealant manufacturer whether primers are required or not. 1. 2. 3. 4. C. Remove traces of previous sealant and joint backer by mechanical methods, such as by cutting, grinding and wire brushing, in manner not damaging to surrounding surfaces. Remove paints from joint surfaces except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer. Remove wax, oil, grease, dirt film residues, temporary protective coatings and other residues by wiping with cleaner recommended for that purpose. Use clean, white, lint-free cloths and change cloths frequently. Remove dust by blowing clean with oil-free, compressed air. Provide joint backer material uniformly to depth required by sealant manufacturer for proper joint design using blunt instrument. September 15, 2015 079213 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants Page 7 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. D. E. Use and apply primer according to sealant manufacturer’s printed recommendations. Confine primers to sealant bond surfaces. Do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. Taping: 1. 2. 3.3 Fit securely by compressing backer material 25 percent to 50 percent so no displacement occurs during tooling. Avoid stretching or twisting joint backer. Provide bond-breaker where indicated or recommended by sealant manufacturer, adhering strictly to the manufacturers installation requirements. Prime joint substrates where required. 1. 2. F. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Use masking tape where required to prevent sealant or primer contact with adjoining surfaces that would be permanently stained or otherwise damaged by such contact or the cleaning methods required for removal. Apply tape so as not to shift readily and remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Do not start installation until Architect’s approval of mockups. Provide approved sealant system where indicated, and in accord with manufacturer's recommendations as approved by Architect. Install sealants immediately after joint preparation. Mix and apply multi-component sealants in accord with manufacturer's printed instructions. Install sealants to fill joints completely from the back, without voids or entrapped air, using proven techniques, proper nozzles and sufficient force that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint surfaces. Install sealants to uniform cross-sectional shapes with depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Tool sealants in manner that forces sealant against back of joint, ensures firm, full contact at joint interfaces and leaves a finish that is smooth, uniform and free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded impurities. 1. 2. 3. H. I. Dry tooling is preferred. Tooling liquids that are non-staining, non-damaging to adjacent surfaces and approved by sealant manufacturer may be used if necessary when care is taken to ensure that liquid does not contact joint surfaces before sealant. Provide concave tooled joints unless otherwise indicated to provide flush tooling or recessed tooling. Provide recessed tooled joints where the outer face of substrate is irregular. Remove sealant from adjacent surfaces in accord with sealant and substrate manufacturer recommendations as work progresses. Protect joint sealants from contact with contaminating substances and from damages. Cut out, remove and replace contaminated or damaged sealants, immediately, to remove contamination or damage at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 079213 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants Page 8 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. B. C. 1.2 Hollow steel doors and steel frames, frame components including sidelites, transom frames, borrowed lites, and louvers as indicated. Attachments including screws, bolts, expansion shields and related prep work. Door Hardware. RELATED WORK A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures Section 01 42 00 – References Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals Section 04 05 16 – Masonry Grouting Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry Section 08 14 29 - Prefinshed Wood Doors Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware Section 08 81 00 – Glazing Section 09 22 13 – Metal Furring Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board Section 09 91 00 – Painting REFERENCES A. B. C. See Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, abbreviations, definitions and acronyms. ASCE 7-10 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. 2. 3. 4. D. E. ASTM A568A/568M-14: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold Rolled, General Requirements for ASTM A653/A653M-13: Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. ASTM A1008/A1008M-15: Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled Carbon Structural High Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable ASTM E-90-09 – Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. DHI (Door Hardware Institute) - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 2. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. September 15, 2015 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors And Frames Page 1 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA F. G. H. th Florida Building Code, 5 Edition. th Florida Fire Prevention Code, 5 Edition. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. I. ANSI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 – Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. ANSI A250.10 – Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. ANSI A115.IG – Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. ANSI A250.11 – Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL): 1. 2. 1.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 UL 10B - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. UL 10C – Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. D. 1.5 Comply with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Conform to requirements of ANSI A250.8 SDI-100 – Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames, or as amended herein if more restrictive. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified with minimum of three years continuous documented experience manufacturing products indicated. Product Approval: Door / Frame Assemblies shall meet current Florida Building Code Product Approval System or Miami-Dade Code Compliance Office requirements for High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) or Notice of Approval (NOA) product approval. SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. E. F. 1.6 Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submit Product Approvals for Door / Frame Assemblies certifying compliance with current Florida Building Code Product Approval System or Miami-Dade Code Compliance Office requirements for High Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) or Notice of Approval (NOA) product approval. Submit shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's literature and installation instructions. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements and details of joints and connections. Indicate door and frame configuration, anchor spacing, anchor types, location of cutouts for hardware and glazing, and internal reinforcement. Performance Requirements: Provide hollow metal doors and frame assemblies that comply with performance requirements as demonstrated by testing manufacturer’s assemblies in accordance with ASCE 7-10. Submit manufacturer’s written installation instructions. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION: A. B. C. Comply with Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Requirements. Deliver doors and frames marked to identify each door, frame and opening in which they are located per numbers indicated. Store doors and frame in dry area on end with minimum ¼” spacers between units to allow ventilation. September 15, 2015 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors And Frames Page 2 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA D. E. F. 1.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Frames shall be shipped and stored with temporary stiffeners and spacers in place to prevent distortion. Doors and frames shall be kept covered with water resistant, breathable fabric to prevent moisture intrusion on surfaces and allow ventilation. Replace doors and frames damaged during delivery, storage or construction. WARRANTY: A. B. C. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Provide manufacturer's five-year warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal doors and frames that become corroded or rust within warranty period. Warranty shall include installation and finishing that is required due to repair or replacement of doors and frames. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. B. C. D. E. 2.2 CECO DOOR, Division of Assa Abloy, 9159 Telecom Dr., Milan, TN 38353; Tel: 731-686-8345; Fax: 731-686-4211; Website: www.cecodoor.com. STEELCRAFT, 9017 Blue Ash Rd., Cincinnati, OH 45242; Tel: 800-243-9780; Fax: 513-7456657; Website: www.steelcraft.com. th Curries Manufacturing, Inc., 1502 12 St. NW, Mason City, IA 50401; Tel: 641-423-1334; Fax: 641-424-8305; Website: www.curries.com. Windsor Republic Doors, 155 Republic Dr., McKenzie, TN 38201; Tel: 800-733-3667; Website: www.republicdoor.com. Other manufacturer’s shall comply with Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. DOORS AND FRAMES A. Material: Electro-Zinc coat bonderized conforming to ASTM A653/A653M-13. 1. 2. B. C. D. Core: 20-gage cold rolled sheet steel vertical stiffeners in a "Z" configuration, spaced not more than 6" o.c. (16mm) and spot welded to face sheet. Vertical stiffeners extend full length of door cavity, except in areas of reinforcement. Fill core between stiffeners with rigid polyurethane chemically bonded to interior surfaces with minimum value of R10. Door Face: 16-gage. Door Reinforcement: 1. 2. E. F. G. H. Exterior doors and frames: Factory applied G-90 (275 g/m²) electro plated zinc finish. Interior doors and frames: Factory applied G-60 (182 g/m²) electro plated zinc finish. Hinge reinforcement shall be minimum 10 ga. plate, 1.5” (318 mm) by full height of door. Tops and bottom reinforcement shall be minimum 16 ga. full width of door welded to both face sheets. Frame Gage: 16-gage for interior frames, 14-gage for exterior frames. Fire Rated: Provide fire rated assembly where scheduled or required by Code. Installations shall be in accord with NFPA 80. Insulated Doors: “U” value of 0.10 for polyurethane core for exterior metal doors. Fire Rated Doors: 1. Test Doors in accord with UL 10B, UL 10C and NFPA 252. September 15, 2015 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors And Frames Page 3 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Doors shall have UL labels, applied by authorized agent, in accord with independent testing agency. Stairwell doors shall have 250°F (121°C) temperature rise rating with fire rating label on doors. ACCESSORIES A. B. C. D. 2.4 Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single frames and two silencers on heads of double frames. Jamb Anchors: Provide minimum four anchors on both hinge and latch jambs. Provide 14gage galvanized sheet steel, angle anchors welded for each jamb which extend to floor, punched for minimum of two 0.25" (6.4mm) diameter bolts. Spreader: Provide frames with temporary steel spreader bars tack welded to jamb bottoms to maintain full rigidity and proper alignment during installation. Astragals: Provide steel astragals (removable) as scheduled or indicated. PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. B. C. D. 2.5 Frames: Provide with full immersion dip coat of rust-inhibitive metal primer for complete coverage including hidden surfaces. Doors: Provide full coverage electrostatic spray coat of rust-inhibitive metal primer. Dry frames and doors in baking oven process. AwlGrip Max Cor CF Primer manufactured by AkzoNobel Corp., 2270 Morris Ave., Union, NJ 07083; Tel: 908-686-1300; Fax: 908-964-2219; Website: www.akzonobel.com/us.: FABRICATION: A. B. C. D. Door Fabrication: Fully welded seamless construction. No metal tabs will be accepted. Frame Fabrication: Fully welded mitered corners ground smooth. Interior intersection of jambs shall be fully welded. Integral stops minimum 0.675” (16mm) depth and minimum 2.5" (63.5mm) width. Punch frames to receive silencers three on strike jamb of single leaf jambs. Provide 26gage sheet metal grout guards at hinges, lock, bolts, door closer, foot, and silencer locations. Frame Reinforcement: Hinge reinforcing steel plate 3/16" (4.8mm) thick x 1.5"(43mm) wide x 10" (254mm) long and secured by a minimum of six spot-welds. Door closer foot shall be 10gage steel reinforcing plate, 14" (356mm) long x stop width anchored by minimum of 8 spot welds in hinge corner of head section of jamb. Hardware Location: Locate door hardware in accord with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware" published by National Builder's Hardware Association. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Examine new and existing adjacent framing and rough opening preparation for conditions, which would prevent quality installation of doors and frames. Immediately notify Contractor/CM of conditions precluding successful installation. Proceeding with installation indicates installer’s acceptance of conditions. Install frames in accord with NAAMM CHM-1-74 and ASCE 7-10. Install doors in accord with SDI-100, DHI and ASCE 7-10. Coordinate with masonry wall construction for anchor placement. Install roll-formed-steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor. Fully grout interior and exterior hollow metal frames with non-shrink grout. September 15, 2015 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors And Frames Page 4 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PAINTING A. B. 3.3 Comply with Section 09 91 00 – Painting for door and frame finishes. Exterior Door Frames: Air spray Max Cor DF AwlGrip, two component, anti-corrosive, chromate free epoxy primer on inside of door frame profiles of exterior doors prior to installation in accord with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. TOLERANCES: A. B. C. D. E. 3.4 Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 0.06375" (7.8mm) measured with straight edge, corner to corner. Clearance between door and frame head and jambs shall be uniform 0.125” (15.6mm). Clearance between meeting edges of pairs of doors shall be 0.1875” (23.4mm)+/- 0.6375” (7.8mm). For fire rated applications, clearance between meeting stiles shall be 0.125” (15.6mm) +/- 0.06375” (7.8mm). Bottom of door clearance shall be 0.50” (12.7mm) minimum and 0.75” (19mm) maximum floor clearance. Clearance between face of door and door stop shall be minimum 1/16” (7.8mm) to maximum 0.125” (15.6mm). ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. B. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors And Frames Page 5 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 No. 710-03-10 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. 1.2 Flush wood doors with stain grade wood veneer, fire-rated and non-rated, solid core with and without glazing as indicated. RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Request for Substitution. Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling. Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry Section 06 40 00 - Architectural Woodwork Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 70 00 - Finish Hardware Section 08 80 00 - Glazing REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. B. See Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, abbreviations, acronyms and definitions. National Fire Protection Association. 1. 2. C. D. Florida Building Code, 2010 Edition. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1. 2. E. Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 9-Doors, 2009 Edition. Wood Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA): 1. 1.4 UL 10 B -Fire Tests for Door Assemblies - Neutral Pressure. UL 10C - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies - Positive Pressure. American Woodwork Institute (AWI): 1. F. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods for Fire Assemblies. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. WDMA I.S.1-93 for Architectural Wood Flush Doors. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Comply with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Door Standards: September 15, 2015 081416 - Flush Wood Doors Page 1 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. C. AWS Quality Standards Edition 1 for Custom Grade. ANSI/WDMA I.S.6-A.08 (Window and Door Manufacturers Association). Labeling Agencies: 1. 2. 1.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL10B for neutral pressure and UL10C for positive pressure for rated doors. Intertek Testing Services-Warnock Hersey (ITS-WH) (Ratings for both Neutral pressure and Positive pressure rated doors). SUBMITTALS A. B. Submit in accord with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Shop drawings shall include: 1. 2. 3. Door type. Door size. Fire rating. a. b. 4. 5. 6. C. D. E. F. 1.6 Neutral pressure. Positive pressure. Hardware types and locations. Lite opening size and location. Prefinished system type and approved color(s). Product Data: Indicate door core materials, thickness, construction, veneer may be ash, birch or maple species. See WDMA “A Specifier’s Guide to Door Face Veneers” for cut and matching requirements, factory machining and factory finishing criteria. Construction samples: Submit one or more manufacturer’s standard samples demonstrating door construction. Finish samples shall illustrate range of color and grain of specified door face materials. Manufacturer’s full lifetime warranty DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING AND SITE CONDITIONS A. B. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under in accord with Section 01 66 00 – Delivery, Storage and Handling. Comply with WDMA’s Appendix Section “Care and Installation at Job Site”. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.7 Store doors flat and off floor on level surface in dry, well ventilated building. Protect doors from exposure to light, dirt, water and abuse. Storage area in building shall have operational HVAC system maintaining temperature between 50° F (10°C) and 80° F (26.7°C) and 25%-55% relative humidity. When handling doors, lift and carry. Do not drag across other doors or surfaces. Handle with clean hands or gloves. Mark each door on top rail with opening number. Accept doors on site in manufacturer’s standard packaging. Inspect for damage. COORDINATION A. B. Coordinate work in accord with Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Coordinate work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation with in pre-installation conference. September 15, 2015 081416 - Flush Wood Doors Page 2 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1.8 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty to include: 1. 2. Interior Solid Core Doors: "Full Life of Original Installation" including rehanging and refinishing if door(s) do not comply with warranty tolerance standards. Include coverage for delamination, warping, bow, cup and telegraphing of core construction beyond warranty tolerances. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERs A. B. C. D. E. 2.2 Eggers Industries, Inc.,164 North Lake St., Neenah, WI 54956; Tel: 920-722-6444; Fax: 920722-0357; website: www.eggersindustries.com. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., 1001 perry St., Algoma, WI 54201; Tel: 920-487-5221; Fax: 920-4873636; website: www.algomahardwoods.com. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc., 1401 East Fourth St., Marshfield, WI 54449-3667; Tel: 800-8693667; website: www.marshfielddoors.com. th Graham Wood Doors, Div. of Assa Abloy; 525 9 St. SE, Mason City, IA; Tel: 641-423-2444; Website: www.grahamdoors.com. Other manufacturers shall make requests for substitutions in accord with Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. B. 2.3 Comply with WDMA I.S. 6A Quality Standards. Fabricate doors to “Custom Grade” per AWI quality standards. FABRICATION A. Non Fire Rated Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber Core (SCLC) engineered hardwood composite complying with WDMA minimum performance levels for interior applications: a. b. c. d. 2. Core Materials: a. b. c. 3. Screw holding strength: 540 lbs. minimum. Modulus of rupture: Average of 4,000 psi. Modulus of elasticity: Average of 600,000 psi. Density: Minimum 38 lbs./cu. ft. of Staves engineered with single species hardwood composite core. Stiles (Vertical Edges): Same species as face veneer. Rails (Horizontal Edges): Structural composite lumber (SLC) as specified in core section per minimum requirements. Stiles, rails, and mullions shall be joined with both ½” wooden dowels, and cope and stick joints and bonded with glue. Veneers: a. September 15, 2015 Flush Wood Veneer Door Facing: veneers. White Birch (no heartwood), plain sliced 081416 - Flush Wood Doors Page 3 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA b. c. d. B. Veneer Matching: Book Match. Assembly of Spliced Veneers: Running book match. Doors in Pairs or Sets: Pair Match required. Door schedule shall reflect pairs and sets by door numbers, including doors separated by mullions. Fire Rated Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber Core (SCLC) engineered hardwood composite complying with WDMA minimum performance levels for interior applications: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. Screw holding strength: 540 lbs. minimum. Modulus of rupture: Average of 4,000 psi. Modulus of elasticity: Average of 600,000 psi. Density: Minimum 38 lbs./cu. ft. of Staves engineered with single species hardwood composite core. Core and Edge Construction shall utilize non-combustible mineral composite materials and intumescents required for ¾, 1, and 1-1/2 hour ratings per Door Schedule. 20-minute fire-rating: ANSI A208. a. Positive Pressure: Category A (concealed intumescent). 1) 2) 4. 5. b. c. Fire rated doors are indicated in Door Schedule. Lite openings shall be furnished with same species wood lite beads. Metal astragals and door edge may be used for pairs of fire doors. VERTICAL EDGES (STILES) 1. 2. Non-rated and 20-minute rated doors shall have edges to match face veneer. 20-minute rated pairs (No metal edges or astragal required). a. 3. Manufacturer’s standard as required for fire approval. (May include veneer banding with structural composite lumber backers or inner plies). Fire Resistant Composite Core a. E. Sound Transmission Class (STC) specified shall be certified by manufacturer based on tests conducted at independent testing agency in accord with ASTM E90-90 and E413-87 (earlier tests are not acceptable). Acoustical doors with lites shall be factory glazed to maintain STC rating. Provide STC rating as indicated on Drawing Door Schedule. Lite and Astragal Details 1. 2. D. Category A (concealed intumescent). Acoustical: a. 6. Structural Composite Lumber; SCL-20 Staves with one species per core; SLC-20 45, 60, or 90-minute mineral core fire-rated as noted. a. C. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Manufacturer’s standard as required for fire approval. Veneered edge of matching/compatible veneer to face veneer. HORIZONTAL EDGES (RAILS) September 15, 2015 081416 - Flush Wood Doors Page 4 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. F. Supply hardware reinforcement for surface applied hardware where required by manufactured to eliminate use of through bolts. MACHINING 1. 2. 3. 2.4 Face Adhesive: Type 1 INNER BLOCKING FOR FIRE RESISTANT COMPOSITE CORE FIRE DOORS 1. H. Manufacturer’s standard. (MDF top and bottom rails not permitted). Meet positive pressure ratings. ADHESIVES 1. G. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Factory fit and machine doors for frame and finish hardware in accord with hardware and NFPA 80 requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Apply appropriate fire labels. Do not trim positive pressure rated doors for width. ACCESSORIES A. GLAZING STOPS 1. 2. Non-Rated and 20 minute: Manufacture’s Standard Metal Vision Frames. Fire-Rated 45 minutes and above: a. b. 3. 4. B. C. Metal edge and astragal or metal edges. Meet positive pressure requirements for Category A (concealed intumescent). APPLIED MOLDINGS 1. 2. 2.5 Verify compatibility of glazing system with positive pressure requirements. Glazing per Section 08 80 00 - Glazing. Glass and Glazing in Wood Doors: Provided by manufacturer. MEETING EDGES FOR PAIRS OF FIRE RATED DOORS 1. 2. D. Manufacturer’s Standard Metal Vision Frames. Verify compatibility of glazing system with positive pressure requirements. As selected from manufacturer’s standard profiles and install as detailed. Applied moldings to be affixed to doors without use of nails or staples. fasteners are permitted. No visible FACTORY FINISH A. B. C. D. E. Doors to be factory finished shall meet WDMA I.S. 1-A-04 specifications for TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane finish system or AWS section 5 specifications for UV curable polyester urethane finish system. Factory Finish (Basis of Design): Eggers’ Gardall - water based stain and UV curable polyester urethane finish system complying with applicable Federal and State regulations for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) and Hazardous Air Pollutants (HAP) emission limitations per EPA Clean Air Act. Stain color shall be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. Submit approved samples for factory finishing. Factory finished doors to be installed just prior to substantial completion. September 15, 2015 081416 - Flush Wood Doors Page 5 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. C. 3.2 Verify substrate opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable and ready to receive work. Notify Contractor/CM of any conditions preventing successful installation. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance for size or alignment. Start of installation indicates installer’s acceptance of conditions. Use three hinges for doors 7’-6” (2.286m) in height or less and one additional hinge for each incremental 30” (76.2cm) of height over 7’-6” (2.286m). INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. 3.3 Install fire-rated and non-rated doors in accord with NFPA 80, Manufacturers’ printed instructions and ITS-WH/UL requirements. Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum 0.75” (19mm). Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accord with fire rating requirements. Allow fitting clearance of 0.125” (3.33mm) at each side and at top of door. Do not trim Positive Pressure rated doors for width. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes using templates provided by hardware manufacturer. Use threaded through bolts for half surface hinges. Exercise caution when drilling pilot holes and installing hinges to ensure pilot holes are not overdrilled and screws are not over-torqued. Follow Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions for Positive Pressure doors. Do not use self-drilling or combination wood/metal screws on wood doors. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. Install door louvers and light kits plumb and level. Reseal or refinish any doors that require site alteration. WARRANTY TOLERANCES A. 3.4 Conform to WDMA standards and testing methods for warp, cup, bow and telegraphing. ADJUSTING A. 3.5 Adjust doors and hardware for proper function, smooth operation, proper latching and balanced door movement, without force or excessive clearances. CLEANING A. 3.6 Clean doors immediately after installation in accord with manufacturer’s written Care and Handling Instructions. PROTECION A. B. Protect installed doors from damage. Replace or repair doors damaged during construction, as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 081416 - Flush Wood Doors Page 6 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. Section 08 14 29 - Prefinished Wood Doors. Section 08 41 00 – Entrances and Storefronts. REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. 1.4 See Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, abbreviations, definitions and acronyms. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute. BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute. Florida Fire Prevention Code. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. SDI - Steel Door Institute. Florida Building Code (FBC), 2010 Edition. COORDINATION A. 1.5 Hardware for wood and hollow steel doors. Lock Cylinders for gates, folding partitions, wire cages and doors. Thresholds. Gaskets. Screws, bolts, expansion shields and related prep work. Hardware layout templates. Coordinate hardware installation with other affected trades in accord with Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. QUALITY ASSURANCE September 15, 2015 087100 - Door Hardware Page 1 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. C. 1.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD FLA Project No. 4176-05 Manufacturers: Company shall specialize in manufacturing door hardware with five years continuous experience. Hardware Supplier: Company shall specialize in supplying institutional door hardware with five years continuous documented experience, approved by manufacturer. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) on project. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. B. 1.7 Conform to Florida Building Code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors, frames, and accessibility for physically disabled. Conform to Florida Fire Prevention Code and applicable sections of NFPA 101. CERTIFICATIONS A. B. 1.8 Architectural Hardware Consultant shall inspect complete installation and certify that hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accord with manufacturer's printed instructions and as specified. Provide two copies of certifications to Architect. SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. 1.9 Submit schedules, samples, parts lists, templates, installation instructions and product data per Section 01 33 00 - Submittals. Submittals shall identify each door and each set number following numbering system noted on Drawings. Manufacturing order shall not be placed until hardware schedule has been submitted and reviewed by Architect. Furnish templates to facilitate work schedule. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. Submit samples of hinge, latch set, exit device, door closer, and thresholds, illustrating style, color and finish. Project samples may be incorporated in Work. Submit manufacturer, supplier, fabricator and installer's qualifications in accord with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. B. 1.10 A. B. C. Submit operation and maintenance data in accord with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Include data on operating hardware, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver, store and protect products in original packaging to site in accord Section 01 66 00 – Project Storage and Handling Requirements. Hardware Packaging 1. 2. D. Items shall be individually labeled and identified with door opening code and hardware group to match hardware schedule. Each item shall identify door location by number identified on Door Schedule. Hardware manufacturers shall deliver via security shipping following items to District Maintenance Dept., 2485 SE Dixie Hwy., Stuart, FL 34996: September 15, 2015 087100 - Door Hardware Page 2 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. E. 1.11 A. B. 1.12 A. B. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD FLA Project No. 4176-05 Two copies of factory key biting schedule. Permanent building keys and construction key voiding devices. Protect hardware from theft by cataloging and storing in secured area. WARRANTY Provide five-year warranty period in accord with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for locksets, latch sets, exit devices hinges and items listed in the hardware schedule excluding overhead door closers. Provide ten-year warranty period in accord with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals for overhead door closers. MAINTENANCE MATERIALS Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to different or special hardware component. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. B. C. Manufacturers not listed may submit requests for substitution except as noted in accord with Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Obtain each kind of hardware from one manufacturer. Acceptable products and manufacturers are listed below: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 2.2 Hinges: Ives, Hager, Stanley, Bommer. Locks and Latches: Best Access (No Substitution Permitted). Cylinders, Keys, Keying: Best Access (No Substitution Permitted). Door Closers: LCN (No Substitution Permitted). Wall/Floor Stops/Flush Bolts: Ives, Rockwood, and Glynn Johnson. Kick Plates: Ives, Rockwood, Quality. Thresholds/Weather-stripping: National Guard, Zero, Pemko. Silencers: Ives, Rockwood, Quality, Glen Johnson. HARDWARE FINISH A. Hardware shall have the following finishes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.3 Exterior Hinges: Stainless Steel (32D). Interior Hinges/Locks/: Satin Chrome (26D). Door Closers: Aluminum. Flat Goods: Stainless Steel (32D) or Satin Chrome (26D). Thresholds: Mill Finish Aluminum. HINGES AND PIVOTS A. Exterior butts shall be stainless steel (32D). Butts on all out-swinging doors shall be furnished with non-removable pins (NRP). Size: 4½" wide x 4½" high, for exterior doors up to 42” wide and heavy weight 4½" wide x 4½" high hinges for doors over 42” wide. September 15, 2015 087100 - Door Hardware Page 3 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. C. 2.4 MCSD FLA Project No. 4176-05 Interior butts shall be steel, standard weight 4½" wide x 4½" high hinges doors up to 42” wide and heavy weight 4½" wide x 4½" high hinges for doors over 42” wide. Doors less than 5’-0” high shall have two (2) butts. Furnish one (1) additional butt for each 2’-6” of height or fraction thereof. KEYING A. B. C. D. E. F. Pre-Order Meeting: Hardware supplier shall meet with District’s Maintenance Lock Dept. Representative to establish keying order before lock order is placed. Locks shall be construction master keyed using split key method keyed to School District’s restricted keyway. Hardware supplier shall meet with District’s Maintenance Lock Dept. Representative will establish final count of locks and cylinders, and transmit release order to Best Access Systems Lock Company for production in amounts established with Hardware Supplier. Construction keys in following quantities: 12 master keys Supply permanent keys in following quantities: 1. 2. Six keys for each lock with maximum of 12 keys of keyed alike sets. Five master keys for each building or area grouping. Key groups include: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 3. 4. G. Five (5) Grandmaster keys for Elementary Schools and Ancillary Projects. Ten (10) Grandmaster Keys for Middle Schools. Twenty (20) Grandmaster keys for High Schools. Keys shall be stamped “DO NOT DUPLICATE”. Key Function 1. Supply locksets with following key functions: Location Function a. b. c. d. e. 2.5 Auditorium/Multipurpose/Stage (including adjacent support spaces). Food Service (including Kitchen and adjacent support spaces). Media Center (including adjacent support spaces). Administrative Offices (including adjacent support spaces). Classrooms, Resource Rooms and Labs (including adjacent storage area) subdivided into subgroups by floor level or building(s). Mechanical/Electrical Rooms. Custodial/Receiving Areas. Grand master keys shall be supplied based on size of facility as follows: a. b. c. Passage Privacy Classroom/Office Storage/Mechanical Rm Electronic Lever Lockset N L R D DEL LOCKSETS A. 2.6 PROJECT MANUAL Lever Lock: Best Access Lock Company, heavy duty cylindrical type, Best 93K Series, Lever Design 15D DOOR CLOSERS September 15, 2015 087100 - Door Hardware Page 4 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 2.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD FLA Project No. 4176-05 Door closers shall be LCN 4040/4041 Series with non-ferrous covers, forged steel arms, separate valves for adjusting back check closing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Furnish closers with parallel arm mounted on door openings into egress spaces, mounted to permit 180 degree door swing where wall conditions permit, and have non-hold open arms unless otherwise noted. Door closer cylinders shall be high strength cast iron construction. Door closers shall be tested in accord with ANSI/BHMA A156.4 by BHMA certified testing laboratory and attest in writing that closers have successfully completed one million cycles. Door closers shall utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature ranges of 120˚ F (49˚C) to -30˚F (-34˚C), without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close door. Closers for fire rated doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid complying with UCB 7-2 (1997) and UL 10C. Door closers shall incorporate tamper resistant non-critical screw valves of V-slot design to reduce clogging form particles within closer. Closers shall have separate and independent screw valve adjustments for latch speed, general speed, and hydraulic back check. Back checks shall be located to effectively slow swing of door at minimum of 10 degrees in advance of dead stop location to protect door frame and hardware from damage. DOOR TRIM A. 2.8 Plates shall be two (2”) inches less than door width with beveled edges, sized as follows: 1. Kick plates 10" high x 2" less than door width mounted 2” from door bottom. DOOR STOPS A. Door stops shall be furnished for doors to prevent door and hardware damage. Wall bumpers are preferred. Provide floor stops where wall bumpers are not practical. Where neither wall nor floor stops are practical, use surface mounted overhead stops as follows: 1. 2.9 Wall Stops: Ives WS407CVX Series. THRESHOLDS, WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS A. 2.10 A. 2.11 A. Thresholds and weather-stripping shall be as listed in Hardware Schedule. DOOR SILENCERS Door Silencers: Ives SR64 Two (2) per door pair and three (3) per single door frame. AUTOMATIC FLUSH BOLTS, SURFACE BOLTS AND COORDINATORS Door Bolts: 1. Manufacturer; H. B. Ives. a. b. B. Non Fire-rated: FB458. Fire-rated: FB53. Coordinators: 1. Manufacturer: H. B. Ives: COR September 15, 2015 087100 - Door Hardware Page 5 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.12 A. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD FLA Project No. 4176-05 OVERHEAD RAIN DRIP Rain Drip; National Guard 16 A at exterior HM Steel door locations or as scheduled herein. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. B. 3.2 Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. Beginning of installation shall indicate installer’s acceptance of existing conditions. INSTALLATION A. B. C. Install hardware in accord with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of DHI. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: 1. 2. 3. 4. D. E. 3.3 Locksets: Push/Pulls: Dead Locks: Exit Devices: 38 inches. 42 inches. 48 inches. 40 inches. Conform to of Florida Bldg. Code: Accessibility, 2010 Edition. Set door thresholds in full bed of butyl rubber. ADJUST AND CLEAN A. B. C. D. E. 3.4 Adjust and check operation of each item of hardware and door, to ensure proper function of every item. Replace items that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. Final adjustment shall be made after ventilating systems are in operation. Clean hardware and adjacent surfaces after hardware installation. Instruct Owner's personnel in adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes. PROTECTION A. B. 3.5 Protect installed hardware from damage. Replace damaged hardware. HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. B. C. D. Attached Schedule is furnished for guidance in preparing Bidder’s cost proposal and should not be considered as totally inclusive. Bidders shall use drawings to prepare hardware quantities. Variations between this schedule and drawings shall be communicated to Architect for resolution. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors or for each single door. Hardware Schedule was prepared by: Hardware Consultant’s Name, Address, FAX and Phone Number and email address. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 087100 - Door Hardware Page 6 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD FLA Project No. 4176-05 DOOR HARDWARE Section 087100 PROJECT:Jensen Beach Elementary School Kitchen Renov. ARCHITECT: Florida Architects 924 Delaney Ave. Orlando Florida 32806 Prepared By: Stephen F. St. Amour AHC, CDT Stanley Security 6161 E. 75th Street Indianapolis Indiana 46250 Date: September 17, 2015 September 15, 2015 087100 - Door Hardware Page 7 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD FLA Project No. 4176-05 Manufacturer List Code BE IV LC PE ST September 15, 2015 Name Best Access Systems Ives LCN Closers Pemko Stanley 087100 - Door Hardware Page 8 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD FLA Project No. 4176-05 Finish List Code AL 626 US26D US32D September 15, 2015 Description Aluminum Satin Chromium Plated Chromium Plated, Dull Stainless Steel, Dull 087100 - Door Hardware Page 9 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD FLA Project No. 4176-05 Option List Code CS UL WS 12" B4E STK TBSRT CORMAX PATENTED KEYING September 15, 2015 Description Countersunk Holes (per Plate) UL Approved Kickplate Wind Storm Listed (Miami-Dade/Florida) 12" ROD LENGTH 4 BEVELED EDGES (16" & Under) Standard Strike Package TBMS & SRT Package Cormax Patented Keying 087100 - Door Hardware Page 10 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD FLA Project No. 4176-05 Opening List Opening 003B 003C 004C 004G 004J Hdw Set 1 2 3 5 4 September 15, 2015 Opening Label -20 --20 Door Type F F F HG F 087100 - Door Hardware Frame Type 1 1 1 1 1 Page 11 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD FLA Project No. 4176-05 Hardware Sets SET #1 3 1 1 1 3 Hinges Privacy Set Closer Kickplate Door Silencer SET #2 6 Hinges 2 Flush Bolt 1 Lockset 1 Closer 1 Smoke Seal FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 9K3-0L15D STK WS 4040 XP CUSH TBSRT 8400 10" x 34" B4E CS UL SR64 US26D 626 AL US32D ST BE LC IV IV FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 FB458 12" 9K3-7D15D PATD CORMAX PATENTED KEYING STK WS 4040 XP REG/62A TBSRT (Active Leaf) S88D @ Head & Jambs US26D US26D 626 ST IV BE AL LC PE NOTE: Metal Astragal at inactive leaf by Door Manufacturer. Operation: Door is normally closed and locked. Active leaf by key, In-Active leaf by manual flushbolts. SET #3 3 Hinges 1 Lockset 1 1 1 3 Closer Kickplate Wall Bumper Door Silencer SET #4 3 Hinges 1 Lockset 1 Closer 1 Smoke Seal FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 9K3-7R15D PATD CORMAX PATENTED KEYING STK WS 4040 XP REG TBSRT 8400 10" x 34" B4E CS UL WS407CVX SR64 FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 9K3-7D15D PATD CORMAX PATENTED KEYING STK WS 4040 XP REG/62A TBSRT S88 D (HEAD AND JAMBS) US26D 626 ST BE AL US32D US32D LC IV IV IV US26D 626 ST BE AL LC PE US26D 626 ST BE AL US32D US32D LC IV IV IV NOTE: Mount Closer on Push Side of door SET #5 3 Hinges 1 Lockset 1 2 1 3 Closer Kickplate Wall Bumper Door Silencer FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 9K3-7T15D PATD CORMAX PATENTED KEYING STK WS 4040 XP REG TBSRT 8400 10" x 34" B4E CS UL WS407CVX SR64 NOTE: Mount Closer on Push Side of door September 15, 2015 087100 - Door Hardware Page 12 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 08 81 00 - GLASS GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. 1.2 Flat glass materials and glazing accessories required for complete and fully functional glazing system as indicated. RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Section 01 43 39 – Mockups. Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Requirements. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 07 92 13 – Elastomeric Joint Sealants. Section 08 11 00 - Metals Doors and Frames. Section 08 14 00 - Wood Doors. Section 08 41 13 – Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts. Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows. Section 08 44 13 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall. Section 08 88 13 – Fire Resistant Glazing. Section 10 28 13 – Toilet Accessories. REFERENCES A. B. C. D. See Section 01 42 00 for additional reference standards, abbreviations, definitions and acronyms. ASCE-7-10 – Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Glazing Materials Used in Buildings -- Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. American society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. ASTM C162 – 05: Standard Terminology of Glass and Glass Products. ASTM C864 – 05(2011): Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers. ASTM C1036 – 11e1: Standard Specification for Flat Glass. ASTM C1048 – 12e1: Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass. ASTM C1172 – 09e1: Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. ASTM C1193 – 13: Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. ASTM E283 – 04(2012): Standard Test Method For Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. ASTM E330 – 02(2-10): Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. ASTM E1300 – 12ae1: Standard Practice for Determining the Minimum Thickness and Type of Glass Required to Resist a Specified Load. ASTM E1996 – 12a: Standard Specification for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes. September 15, 2015 088100 - Glass Glazing Page 1 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 11. E. 1.4 ASTM E2025 – 99(2006): Standard Test Method for Evaluating Fenestration Components and Assemblies for Resistance to Impact Energies. Glass Association of North America (GANA): 1. 2. 3. F. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Glazing Manual. Sealant Manual. Laminated Glazing Manual. 2010 Florida Building Code with Florida Fire Code. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design requirements: 1. 2. 3. 1.5 Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass in accord with 2010 Florida Building Code. Limit glass deflection to 1/180 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. Thickness of glazing shall comply with FBC Chapters 24-Glass and Glazing and Chapter 18 Wind Loads required at project location and as indicated. SUBMITTALS A. B. Submit per Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Provide manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. 2. 3. C. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. Verification Samples: 1. E. 1.6 Preparation instructions and recommendations. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Installation methods. Flat Glass Materials: Two 4” (102 mm) by 4” (102 mm) samples of each glass type specified. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying material compliance with specified performance characteristics and criteria, and physical requirementComply with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals for warranty documents specified. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. D. E. F. Comply with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Manufacturer Qualifications: Document minimum last five consecutive years documented experience producing glass products specified. Installer Qualification: Document minimum experience of five similar project scope installing glazing units specified, and be pre-approved installer by glazing manufacturer. Glazing shall bear labels indicating manufacturer, type and thickness. Do not remove labels until inspected and approved. Each type of glazing and accessory products indicated shall be from one manufacturer. Preinstallation Conference: 1. Comply with Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. September 15, 2015 088100 - Glass Glazing Page 2 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. G. Contractor/CM shall coordinate meeting with glazing installer and related trades at least one week prior to work start to preplan and schedule glazing activities so as to minimize conflicts with other trades. Mockups: comply with section 01 43 39 – Mockups. 1. 2. 3. 1.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Install glazing in window and curtain wall applications in locations identified by Owner’s Project Manager for approval of quality of product and its installation. Mockups to indicate acceptable quality standard shall be erected to indicate quality level of work, and shall be protected from damage. Approved mockup(s) may remain as part of project. Water intrusion testing of glazing and seals shall be performed by Owner’s testing lab to verify water tightness of glazing installation. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. 1.8 Store products in manufacturer's original, unopened packaging until ready for installation. Store and protect glazing products from adverse environmental conditions and damage. Provide additional material to replace damaged materials. Suitably dispose off site excess solvent-based materials, and other glazing materials, in accord with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. B. C. 1.9 Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. Environmental Requirements: Installation of glass products at ambient air temperature below 50° F (10° C) is prohibited. Field Measurements: When construction schedule permits, verify field measurements with drawing dimensions prior to fabrication of glass products. WARRANTY A. B. C. D. Comply with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Warranty for Laminated Glass: Provide ten year warranty from manufacturer and fabricator to replace laminated glass units that display edge separation, delamination, or blemishes exceeding those allowed by ASTM C1172-09e1 within five (5) years from date of project’s date of substantial completion. Warranty for Float Glass: Provide ten year warranty from manufacturer to replace float glass units that exhibit damage or deterioration or blemishes of glass within ten (10) years from date of project’s date of substantial completion. Installer’s Warranty: Signed by glass products installer, agreeing to replace glass products that deteriorate, or that exhibit damage or deterioration of glass or glazing products due to faulty installation within two (2) years from date of project’s date of substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Approved Glazing Manufacturers: September 15, 2015 088100 - Glass Glazing Page 3 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3. B. 2.2 Pilkington - NSG Group, 811 Madison Ave. P. O. Box 799; Toledo, OH 43697-0799; Tel: 800-221-0444; Tel: 419-247-3731; Fax: 419-247-4517; Web Site: www.pilkington.com. Guardian Industries, 14600 Romine Rd., Carleton, MI 48117, Tel: (800) 521-9040; Fax: (734) 654-0935; Website: sun-guardglass.com. PPG Industries, Inc. Glass Technology Center, Guys Run Rd., Pittsburgh, PA 15238; Tel: (888) 774-4332; Website: www.ppgideascapes.com. Other manufacturers requesting material substitutions shall comply with Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. EXTERIOR LAMINATED GLAZING MATERIALS A. 9/16” ( mm) Gray Monolithic Laminated Glass: 1. 2. 3. Inner and Outer Plies: PPG Solargray®, 1/4” (6.4mm). Description: Annealed tinted float glass meeting requirements of ASTM C1036-11e1, Type 1, Class 2, Quality Q3. Minimum Performance Properties: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 4. 5. 6. 2.3 Visible Light Transmittance: 22%. Visible Light Reflectance In: 5%. Visible Light Reflectance Out: 5%. Total Solar Energy Transmittance: 18 percent. UV Transmittance: 0. Summer U-Value:0.85. Winter U-Value: 0.93. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.41. Shading Coefficient: 0.48. Polyvinyl Butyral (PVB) Interlayer: 0.03” (0.76mm) Saflex SG41 Solar Absorbing PVB. Minimum Performance Properties: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. Solar Transmittance: 37%. Solar Reflectance: 5%. Solar Absorptance: 58%. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.64. Shading Coefficient: 0.64. Light to Solar Gain (LSG): 1.40. U-factor: 1.00 BTU/hr-ft²-F (5.66 W/m²-K). UV Transmittance: <0.01. Visible Light Transmittance: 76%. Visible Light Reflectance: 7%. MONOLITHIC FLOAT GLASS INTERIOR UNITS A. Uncoated Clear Float Galls Units SG #1: 1. Class 1 (clear) float glass, ¼” (6.4mm) minimum thickness. a. b. 2.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Annealed. Kind FT (fully tempered where indicated or required). FIRE RATED GLAZING September 15, 2015 088100 - Glass Glazing Page 4 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. 2.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 See Section 08 88 13 – Fire Rated Glazing. GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. B. C. D. E. F. 2.6 Setting Blocks: ASTMC 864-05(2011), neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; length 4” (100 mm), width of glazing rabbet space less 1/16” (1.5 mm), height required for glazing method, pane weight, and pane area. Spacer Shims: ASTM C864-05(2011), neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; length 3” (75 mm), one half height of glazing stop, thickness required for application, one face selfadhesive. Glazing Tape: Butyl compound tape with integral resilient tube spacer, 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness, black color, coiled on release paper; widths required for specified installation. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864-05(2011), resilient polyvinyl chloride, extruded shape to fit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. Sealants: Specified in Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants. Mirrors: See Section 10 28 13 – Toilet Accessories. FABRICATION A. Acceptable Architectural Glass Fabricators: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Heat-Strengthened Glass: 1. 2. C. Cut float glass materials to indicated sizes and provide cut-outs and holes, if indicated, before heat strengthening. Heat strengthen float glass materials in accord with ASTM C1048-12e1, Kind HS. Tempered Glass: 1. 2. D. Any manufacturer noted in Para. 2.01.A. Globe-Amerada GlassCo., 2001 Greenleaf Ave., Elk Grove, IL 60007; Tel: 800-323-8776, 847-364-2900; Fax:847-364-2909; Website: www.globeamerada.com. Viracon, 800 Park Dr., Owatonna, MN 55060; tel: 507-451-9555; Website: www.viracon.com Trulite, 800 Fairway Dr., Suite 200, Deerfield Beach, FL 33441; Website: www.trulite.com. Cut float glass materials to indicated sizes and provide cut-outs and holes, if indicated, before heat strengthening. Fully temper float glass materials in accord with ASTM C1048-12e1, Kind FT. Laminated Glass: 1. Cut float glass materials to indicated sizes and provide cut-outs and holes, if indicated, before heat strengthening. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. Verify that openings for glazing are correct size and within tolerance. Verify that glazing channels and recesses are clean and free of obstructions, that weeps are clear, and that channels and recesses are ready for glazing. September 15, 2015 088100 - Glass Glazing Page 5 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. D. E. 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Confirm that minimum required face and edge clearances will be maintained. Immediately contact Contractor/CM if existing project conditions prevent successful work completion. Proceeding with glazing installation shall be deemed acceptance of conditions. Examine glazing units for edge or face damage. Discard units that will impede performance of unit, or that will be visible when installed. PREPARATION A. B. C. 3.3 Clean contact surfaces to receive sealant with solvent; wipe dry. Seal porous glazing channels and recesses with primer or sealer compatible with substrate. Prime surfaces to receive sealant in accord with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions. GLAZING INSTALLATION A. Install in accord with glazing manufacturer's printed instructions, and GANA Glazing Manual. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Tape Glazing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C. Place tapes on fixed stops positioned to be flush or protrude slightly when compressed by glass. Install tapes continuously. Form butt joints at corners and where required, and seal tape joints with approved sealant. Apply heal bead of glazing sealant along intersection of permanent stop and frame for continuity of air and vapor seal. Set glass lites centered in openings on setting blocks. Install removable stops, and insert dense compression gaskets at corners, working toward center of lites, compressing glass against tape on fixed stops. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape or gasket on exterior of glass unit. Sealant Glazing: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D. Install setting block of size and in locations required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in bed of approved sealant. Provide spacers for glass lites as recommended, based on size of glass units. Comply with glass manufacturer’s limits on edge pressures. Ensure that glazing units are set with proper and consistent orientation of glass units toward interior and exterior. Provide edge blocking where recommended. Install sealants in accord with Section 07 92 13 – Elastomeric Joint Sealants. Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops. Install cylindrical sealant backing where recommended to provide proper depth and width of sealant bead. Ensure sealant does not block weep system. Install sealant under pressure to completely fill glazing channel without voids, with full bond to glass and channel surfaces. Tool sealant bead to proper profile providing slope away from glass. Gasket Glazing: 1. 2. Fabricate gaskets to fit openings exactly. Allow for stretching of gaskets during installation. Set soft compression gasket against fixed stop or frame and secure with bonded miter joints at corners. September 15, 2015 088100 - Glass Glazing Page 6 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Set glass lites centered in openings on setting blocks. Install removable stops, and insert dense compression gaskets at corners, working toward centers of lites, compressing glass against soft compression gaskets and to produce weathertight seal. Seal joints in gaskets. Allow gaskets to protrude past face of glazing stops. CLEANING A. B. C. 3.5 Remove excess glazing materials and suitably remove and dispose off site. Remove non permanent labels after glass installation is complete. Clean glass surfaces, frames and other adjacent surfaces immediately prior to Substantial Completion inspection. Use glass manufacturer’s recommended cleaning methods. PROTECTION A. B. C. 3.6 Protect installed products from damage or contamination during construction until project’s substantial completion. Attach streamers or tape to framing members, away from contact with glass. Repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion inspection. Refer to Glass Type Schedule on Drawings for different glass types used and their locations. SCHEDULES A. B. C. D. E. Interior Windows: CH – Clear heat strengthened glass. Exterior Entrances, Windows and sidelites: TT – Tinted tempered glass. Interior Vision Panels: CF - Clear Float glass. Interior Non-Fire Rated Metal Doors: CT - Clear tempered glass. Interior Fire Rated Metal Doors Windows and Sidelites: CF - Clear fire resistant glass. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 088100 - Glass Glazing Page 7 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 09 22 16-NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. 1.2 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. B. Related Requirements: 1. 1.3 Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. Section 05 40 00 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. 2. B. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. b. C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. D. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inchminimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. September 15, 2015 092216 - Non-structural Metal Framing Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. E. 3. 2.2 Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inchuncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inchwide flanges. 1. 2. G. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. 2. F. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. B. C. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inchin diameter. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inchand minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. D. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. b. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. B. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide [one of] the following: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inchthick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION September 15, 2015 092216 - Non-structural Metal Framing Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. 3.2 Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION A. 3.3 Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. 2. B. C. D. 3.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. B. C. D. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. 2. E. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. Direct Furring: 1. 2. F. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. Screw to wood framing. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 incheso.c. Z-Furring Members: September 15, 2015 092216 - Non-structural Metal Framing Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3. G. 3.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Erect insulation, specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 incheso.c. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inchesfrom corner and cut insulation to fit. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inchfrom the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. 2. 3. B. C. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. 3. 4. D. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09 22 16 September 15, 2015 092216 - Non-structural Metal Framing Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 09 24 00 - CEMENT PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. 1.2 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. B. Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 1.3 Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring included in portland cement plaster assemblies. Section 06 16 00 "Sheathing" for sheathing and water-resistant barriers included in portland cement plaster assemblies. Section 09 24 25 “Plastic Lathing, Furring and Finishing Components” ACTION SUBMITTALS A. B. C. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated. 1. D. 1.4 Provide samples to match existing stucco texture. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory-prepared textured finish coat indicated; 12X12 inches, and prepared on rigid backing. 1. Provide samples to match existing stucco texture. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. 2. B. 1.5 Portland cement plasterwork (stucco). Install mockups for each type of finish indicated. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING September 15, 2015 092400 - Cement Plastering Page 1 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. 1.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. B. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. Plasterwork: 1. 2. 3. C. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F . Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental conditions for applying finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LATH A. Plastic Lath: Fabricated from high-impact PVC. 1. 2.2 See specification section 09 24 25 ACCESSORIES A. B. General: Coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. Plastic Accessories: Fabricated from high-impact PVC. 1. 2.3 See specification section 09 24 25 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. B. C. D. 2.4 Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. Fasteners for Attaching Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063. PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. B. C. D. Color for Finish Coats: Gray. Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1328. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. September 15, 2015 092400 - Cement Plastering Page 2 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. E. Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: White. Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents, and proprietary ingredients. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle Company; Marblesil Stucco Mix. El Rey Stucco Company, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Premium Stucco Finish. Florida Stucco; Florida Stucco. LaHabra, a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Exterior Stucco Color Coat. Omega Products International, Inc.; ColorTek Exterior Stucco. QUIKCRETE; QUIKCRETE Finish Coat Stucco, No. 1201. Shamrock Stucco LLC; Exterior Stucco. USG Corporation; Oriental Exterior Finish Stucco. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. B. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows: 1. Portland and Plastic Cement Mixes: a. b. C. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part portland cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part portland cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For ready-mixed finish-coat plasters, comply with manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. 3.2 Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. September 15, 2015 092400 - Cement Plastering Page 3 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. 3.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926. INSTALLING LATH A. Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 1. 2. 3. 3.4 Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install 3/8-inch rib lath. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-mesh lath. INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. B. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. Reinforcement for External Corners: 1. C. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, or if not shown on drawings, in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect as follows: 1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes: a. b. 2. 3. 4. 5. 3.5 Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. . Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. . At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2:1. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change. PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. 1. 2. 3. B. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork; 3/4 inch thick over substrate. 1. C. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated. Portland and plastic cement mixes. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions. September 15, 2015 092400 - Cement Plastering Page 4 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PLASTER REPAIRS A. 3.7 Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. END OF SECTION 09 24 00 September 15, 2015 092400 - Cement Plastering Page 5 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 09 24 25 - PLASTIC LATHING, FURRING AND FINISHING COMPONENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 1.3 Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. Section 09 22 13 – Metal Furring. Section 09 24 00 - Portland Cement Plaster. Section 09 90 00 - Painting. REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 1.4 Plaster and Stucco Lathing, Furring and Finishing Components to include lath, trim, control and expansion joints as indicated. See Section 01 References for additional reference standards, definitions, abbraviations and acronyms. ASTM C 1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster. ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. ASTM D 648 - Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position. ASTM D 696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30C and 30C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. ASTM D 1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. ASTM D 4216 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Related PVC and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Building Products Compounds. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. SUBMITTALS A. B. Submit per Section 01 33 00 - Submittals. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. 2. 3. Preparation instructions and recommendations. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Installation methods. September 15, 2015 092425 - Plastic Lathing, Furring And Finishing Components Page 1 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. D. 1.5 Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's approved shop drawings detailing size and type of each product specified. Coordinate locations of components with the Finish Schedules listed in the Contract Drawings. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and styles. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. D. Comply with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten (10) years experience. Installer Qualifications: Products listed shall be installed by single installer with minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience in installing products of same type and scope as specified. Mock-Up: Provide a mockup in accord with Section 01 43 39 – Mockups. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.6 Store products offsite in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Remove unused materials from site and dispose of materials removed in construction activities to approved disposal site, in accord with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. 1.8 Mockup will be evaluated for surface reparation techniques, application, and workmanship. Finish areas shall be full length or height of stucco joint designated by Architect. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by Architect. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. Approved mockup area may be incorporated into work area. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. 1.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Work shall be conducted within environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. B. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. WARRANTY A. B. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owner’s Representative an executed copy of manufacturer's standard warranty against manufacturing defect, outlining terms, conditions, and exclusions from coverage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. B. Plastic Components, Inc., 9051 N.W. 97th Ter.; Miami, FL 33178; Tele: 800-327-7077; 305885-0561;Fax: 305-887-2452; Website: plasticomponents.com. Other manufacturers requests for substitutions shall be in accord with Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. September 15, 2015 092425 - Plastic Lathing, Furring And Finishing Components Page 2 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.2 MATERIALS A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): 1. Tensile Strength - ÅSTM D 638 (psi): a. At 0 F (-18C): 8100. 1) 2. 3. At 0 F (-18C): 1.1 At 72 F (22C): 3.4 Heat Distortion Temp at 254 F (123 C) - ÅSTM D 648 (psi): 160 F (71C). Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion - ÅSTM D 648 (in/in F x 10E5): 3.45. Fire Tunnel Test - ÅSTM E 84: a. b. c. d. 9. At 0 F (-18C): 497,000. At 72 F (22C): 415,000. Izod Impact - ÅSTM D 256 (ft-lbs/in): a. b. 6. 7. 8. At 0 F (-18C): 16,500. At 72 F (22C): 11,200. Flexural Modulus - ÅSTM D 790 (psi): a. b. 5. At 0 F (-18C): 425,000. At 72 F (22C): 360,000. Flexural Strength - ÅSTM D 790 (psi): a. b. 4. At 72 F (22C): 5900. Tensile Modulus - ÅSTM D 638 (psi): a. b. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Flame Spread: 18. Fuel Contribution: ND. Smoke Density @ 35 Mils: 250. Fire Rating: Class A. Reaction to Stucco or Plaster: None LATH A. ULTRA-LATH 1. 2. B. PAPER-BACKED ULTRA-LATH 1. 2. C. ICC-ES Number: 94182 Sheet Dimensions: 27 inches x 96 inches (686mm x 2438mm). ICC-ES Number: 94182 Sheet Dimensions: 27 inches x 96 inches (686mm x 2438mm). STRIP-LATH 1. Roll Dimensions: 8 inches wide x 96 inches (203mm x 2438mm). September 15, 2015 092425 - Plastic Lathing, Furring And Finishing Components Page 3 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA D. CASING BEADS 1. Corner Bead: a. b. E. Model: 1058 - 5/8 inch (16mm) depth x 1 3/4 inch (44mm) tall vertical leg. Model: 1075 - 3/4 inch (19mm) depth x 1 3/4 inch (44mm) tall vertical leg. Model: 1078 - 7/8 inch (22mm) depth x 1 3/4 inch (44mm) tall vertical leg. CONTROL JOINTS A. "M" Control Joint: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. 2. 3. 4. C. Model: 2150X - 1/2 inch (13mm) depth / 1/4 inch (6mm) opening width / 3/4 inch (19mm) finish width. Model: 2158X - 5/8 inch (16mm) depth / 1/4 inch (6mm) opening width / 3/4 inch (19mm) finish width. Model: 2175X - 3/4 inch (19mm) depth / 1/4 inch (6mm) opening width / 3/4 inch (19mm) finish width. Model: 2178X - 7/8 inch (22mm) depth / 1/4 inch (6mm) opening width / 3/4 inch (19mm) finish width. "V" Control Joint: 1. Model: 2050 - 1/2 inch (13mm) depth / 3/8 inch (10mm) opening width / 4 1/8 inch (111mm) overall width. Model: 2058 - 5/8 inch (16mm) depth / 3/8 inch (10mm) opening width / 4 1/8 inch (111mm) overall width. Model: 2075 - 3/4 inch (19mm) depth / 3/8 inch (10mm) opening width / 4 1/8 inch (111mm) overall width. Model: 2078 - 7/8 inch (22mm) depth / 3/8 inch (10mm) opening width / 4 1/8 inch (111mm) overall width. Floor Line Control Bead w/Drip Edge: 1. 2. 2.5 Model: 1A135 - 2.5 inches by 2.5 inches (64mm x 64mm) Angled Flange. Model: BN1A - 2.5 inches by 2.5 inches (64mm x 64mm) Bullnose Flange. Wide Flange Casing Bead: 1. 2. 3. 2.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Model: 2078-50 - 1/2 inch (13mm) depth x 3 1/2 inch (89mm) tall vertical leg. Model: 2078-58 - 5/8 inch (16mm) depth x 3 1/2 inch (89mm) tall vertical leg. SCREEDS A. Bridge Screed / Reveal: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Model: 520-50 - 1/2 inch (13mm) depth / 2 inch (51mm) leg length with 7/8 inch (21mm) opening / 1 to 1 1/4 inch (25-32mm) movement. Model: 520-58 - 5/8 inch (16mm) depth / 2 inch (51mm) leg length with 7/8 inch (21mm) opening / 1 to 1 1/4 inch (25-32mm) movement. Model: 520-75 - 3/4 inch (19mm) depth / 2 inch (51mm) leg length with 7/8 inch (21mm) opening / 1 to 1 1/4 inch (25-32mm) movement. Model: 520-78 - 7/8 inch (22mm) depth / 2 inch (51mm) leg length with 7/8 inch (21mm) opening / 1 to 1 1/4 inch (25-32mm) movement. Foundation Sill Screeds: September 15, 2015 092425 - Plastic Lathing, Furring And Finishing Components Page 4 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 2.6 Slip Joint: 1. 2. B. Model: 2081 - 3/4 inch (19mm) depth / 2 inch (51mm) leg length / 0 to 5/8 inch (15mm) movement. Model: 501-78 - 7/8 inch (22mm) depth / 2 inch (51mm) leg length / 5/8 to 1 1/8 inch (15-29mm) movement. Inside Corner Slip Joint: 1. 2. Model: 501-75 - 3/4 inch (19mm) depth / 2 inch (51mm) leg length with 3/4 inch (19mm) inside corner exposure / 3/4 to 1 1/4 inch (19-32mm) movement. Model: 501-78 - 7/8 inch (22mm) depth / 2 inch (51mm) leg length with 3/4 inch (19mm) inside corner exposure / 3/4 to 1 1/4 inch (19-32mm) movement. ULTRA-TRAC REVEAL SYSTEM A. ULTRA-TRAC System Plaster Reveal: 1. 2. B. Model 707-75: 1/2 inch width x 3/4 inch depth (13mm x 19mm). Model 708-75: 3/4 inch width x 3/4 inch depth (19mm x 19mm). "F" Plaster Reveal: 1. 2. 2.8 Model: 631-75 - 3/4 inch (19mm) depth / 2 1/2 inch (64mm) leg length / FHA. Model: 631-78 - 7/8 inch (22mm) depth / 2 1/2 inch (64mm) leg length / FHA. SLIP JOINTS A. 2.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Model F707-75: 1/2 inch width x 3/4 inch depth (13mm x 19mm). Model F708-75: 3/4 inch width x 3/4 inch depth (19mm x 19mm). ULTRA-TRAC INTERSECTIONS A. 90 Degree Angle Intersection: 1. 2. 3. B. Cross Intersection: 1. 2. 3. C. Reveal: 3/4 inch (19mm). Depth to match specified components. Reveal: 1 inch (25mm). Depth to match specified components. Reveal: 1 1/2 inches (38mm). Depth to match specified components. End Stop for Intersection: 1. 2. 3. D. Reveal: 3/4 inch (19mm). Depth to match specified components. Reveal: 1 inch (25mm). Depth to match specified components. Reveal: 1 1/2 inches (38mm). Depth to match specified components. Reveal: 3/4 inch (19mm). Depth to match specified components. Reveal: 1 inch (25mm). Depth to match specified components. Reveal: 1 1/2 inches (38mm). Depth to match specified components. Inside Corners: 1. 2. Reveal: 3/4 inch (19mm). Depth to match specified components. Reveal: 1 inch (25mm). Depth to match specified components. September 15, 2015 092425 - Plastic Lathing, Furring And Finishing Components Page 5 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Reveal: 1 1/2 inches (38mm). Depth to match specified components. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. 3.2 PREPARATION A. B. 3.3 Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. INSTALLATION A. B. C. 3.4 Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. Install lath and accessories in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Apply lath with ribbed surface facing substrate. Attach lath with fasteners approved by manufacturer at 6 inches (152mm) on center into framing members. Where cementitious materials are present, space fastener rows 16 inches (406mm) apart. PROTECTION A. B. Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 092425 - Plastic Lathing, Furring And Finishing Components Page 6 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. 1.2 Standard gypsum board, fire resistant gypsum board, mold and moisture resistant gypsum board, abuse resistant gypsum board, high impact resistant gypsum board, cement board, partition wall attachments, accessories, and finishing system components. RELATED WORK A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Section 01 66 00 – Storage and Handling Requirements. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 07 21 16 – Blanket Insulation. Section 07 21 29 – Sprayed Insulation. Section 07 44 63 – Fabricated Faced Panel Assemblies. Section 07 84 00 – Fire Stopping. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. Section 09 22 16 – Non Structural Metal Framing. Section 09 91 00 - Painting. REFERENCE STANDARDS A. B. C. D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): ANSI A 108.11 – Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units. ANSI A 118.9 – American National Standard Specification for Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. ASTM C 473 – Standard Test Method for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products. ASTM C 754 – Standard Specifications for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. ASTM C840 - Standard Specifications for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products. ASTM C919 – Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Sealants. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer Units. ASTM C1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. ASTM C1629 - Standard Classification for Abuse Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber Reinforced Glass Mat Gypsum Panels. ASTM C1658 - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels. September 15, 2015 092900 - Gypsum Board Page 1 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 11. 12. E. ASTM D 3273 – Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Gypsum Association (GA): 1. 2. 1.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 GA-214 – Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. GA-216 – Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board (in all areas exposed to student occupancy). 1. 2. 3. B. 1.5 Classification: Level 2 - Moderate Duty in accord with ASTM C 1629 Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Non-decorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels Wall Assembly Fire-Resistance Rating: Non-rated. Wall Assembly STC: 50. Gypsum board systems work shall be in accord with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. SUBMITTALS A. B. C. 1.6 Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submit documentation that products used meet GREENGARD children and School Certification. Submit documentation that products proposed use 100% recycled paper on front, back and long edges of gypsum boards. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. B. Comply with Section 01 66 00 – Storage and Handling Requirements. Store materials off floor in dry and secure area to prevent damage from moisture and to reduce handling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER / PRODUCTS A. B. Basis of Design: Products of National Gypsum Company, 2001 Rexford Rd., Charlotte, NC 28211; Tel: 704-365-7300; website: www.nationalgypsum.com. Approved Manufacturers: 1. 2. C. United States Gypsum Company, Inc. (USG), 550 W. Adams St., Chicago, IL 60661; Tel: (312) 606-4000; Fax: website: www.usg.com. Cetainteed Gypsum, Inc.4300 W. Cypress St., Suite 500, Tampa, FL 33607; Tel: 800-233-8990; Fax: 610-341-7940; website: www.certainteed.com. Other manufacturers shall comply with Section 01 25 13 – Substitution Procedures for approval of products. September 15, 2015 092900 - Gypsum Board Page 2 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 GYPSUM BOARD WITH ENHANCED MOLD AND MILDEW RESISTANCE (At rated and non-rated walls exposed to moisture) A. B. Basis of Design: Gold Bond® XP® Fire-Shield® Gypsum Board Type X, Panel Physical Characteristics 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.3 Core: Mold and moisture resistant, fire-resistance rated gypsum core Surface paper: 100% recycled content moisture/mold/mildew resistant paper on front, back and long edges Long Edges: Tapered. Overall thickness: 5/8“ (12.7mm). Panel complies with Type X requirements of ASTM C 1396 Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. Mold/Mildew Resistance: 10 when tested in accord with ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber ABUSE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD (Student Occupied Spaces). A. B. Basis of Design: Gold Bond Hi-Abuse® XP® Gypsum Board Panel Physical Characteristics 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.4 Core: Fire resistance rated gypsum core, with additives to enhance, surface indentation resistance and impact resistance Surface paper: abrasion resistant, 100% recycled content moisture/mold/mildew resistant paper on front, back and long edges Long Edges: Tapered. Overall thickness: 5/8 inch Mold/Mildew Resistance: score of 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. Water Absorption: Not greater than 8% when tested for 24 hours in accord with ASTM C 473 Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products CEMENT BOARD (Toilets, Kitchens, Janitor’s Closets, Showers). A. B. C. Cement Backerboard Basis of Design: PermaBase® Cement Board. Panel Physical Characteristics 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.5 Core: Cementitious, water-durable. Surface: Fiberglass mesh on front and back Long Edges: Tapered Overall Thickness: 5/8” (15.9mm). Panel complies with requirements of ASTM C 1325 Standard Specification for NonAsbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer Units and ANSI A118.9 Water Absorption: Not greater than 8% when tested for 24 hours in accord with ASTM C 473 Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical sealant: 1. Conform to ASTM C 919 Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. September 15, 2015 092900 - Gypsum Board Page 3 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. Conform to ASTM E 90 Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. Products/Manufacturer: a. b. c. B. Comply with Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping. Products/Manufacturer: STI SpecSeal SSP Firestop Putty. Fasteners use with cement board with for 14 ga to 20 ga steel framing complying with ASTM C 1002 Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs: 1. PermaBase Cement Board drill point screws (No. 8). a. b. D. Grabber Acoustical Sealant GSC. STI SpecSeal Smoke N Sound Caulk. BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. Firestopping: 1. 2. C. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Wafer head, corrosion-resistant. Overall Length: 1-5/8” (41.3mm). Joint Treatment 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Tape: 2-1/16” (52.4mm) wide paper reinforcing tape (ProForm Brand Joint Tape). Tape: 2” (50.8mm) wide paper reinforcing tape with metal strips laminated along center crease to form inside and outside corners (ProForm Brand Multi-Flex Tape Bead). Tape: 2” (50.8mm) wide self adhering fiberglass tape (ProForm Brand Fiberglass Mesh Tape). Compound: Drying type pre-mixed vinyl base compound (ProForm Brand All Purpose Joint Compound, Regular grade and machine grade, ProForm Brand XP joint Compound, ProForm Brand Multi-Use Joint Compound, ProForm Brand Lite Joint Compound, and ProForm Brand Ultra Joint Compound. Compound: Drying type job mixed vinyl base compound (ProForm Brand Triple-T Compound). Compound: Drying type vinyl base topping compound, pre-mixed (ProForm Brand Topping Compound). Compound: Drying type vinyl base topping compound, pre-mixed (ProForm Brand Taping Joint Compound). Compound: Setting type job mixed chemical-hardening compound (ProForm Brand Sta-Smooth Joint Compound, ProForm Brand Sta-Smooth Lite Joint Compound, And ProForm Brand Sta-Smooth HS Joint Compound). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. C. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut hollow metal or aluminum door and window framing, and other structural framing affecting work for installation tolerances or other conditions detrimental to successful work completion. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Building shall be dried-in prior to work start. Proceeding with installation shall indicate installer’s acceptance of existing conditions. September 15, 2015 092900 - Gypsum Board Page 4 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 COORDINATION A. B. 3.3 Coordinate work with other trades for required openings and penetrations through walls. Contractor/CM shall conduct pre-installation meeting with trades affected by gypsum board work. Contractor shall notify Architect and Owner’s Project Manager of Meeting time and location 72 hours prior to meeting. INSTALLATION (GENERAL) A. B. C. 3.4 Install gypsum boards in accord with manufacturer’s printed recommendations and ANSI A108.11. Install panels with face side out. Wall sound proofing where indicated shall be in place prior to start of gypsum board installation. INSTALLATION (HIGH IMPACT GYPSUM BOARD) A. Install in accord with manufacturer’s written recommendations. 1. 2. 3. 4. 3.5 Stagger vertical joint on each side of wall Apply Hi-Impact XP Gypsum Board vertically to one side of metal studs using 1” (25.4mm) Type S screws, 12” o.c. Apply face layer of Type X gypsum board vertically using 1.625” (41mm) Type S screws, 12” (304mm) o.c. Opposite side: Apply Type X gypsum board gypsum board vertically using 1” Type S screws, 12” (304mm) o.c.. Stagger vertical joints 24” (608mm) each layer and opposite sides. TRIM ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. B. 3.6 Corner Beads: Install galvanized metal corner beads on external corners with screws spaced 8” (408mm) o.c. each side. Trim: Install galvanized metal trim at exposed terminations and edges of gypsum board panels with fasteners spaced 8” (408mm) o.c. on panel face. FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. B. C. 3.7 Finish joints, interior corners, fastener depressions, and finishing trim on face-layer gypsum board, including gypsum in ceiling plenums. Pre-fill, tape, fill, and finish joints in accord with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Sand finish coat and leave surfaces smooth, uniform, and free of fins, depressions, cracks, and other imperfections. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. B. C. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. Protect finished work from damage and deterioration until final completion. Repair damaged or deteriorated work to match undamaged surfaces. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 092900 - Gypsum Board Page 5 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 09 30 00 - TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. 1.2 Glazed wall tile, ceramic mosaic tile, paver tile, quarry tile, marble thresholds, waterproof membrane, underlayments, setting beds, grout, ceramic accessories and trim. RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. Section 06 61 19 – Quartz Surfacing Fabrications. Section 07 84 00 – Fire Stopping. Section 07 92 13 – Elastomeric Joint Sealants. Section 10 11 00 – Toilet Accessories. REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. S. T. U. ANSI A108.1A, 1999 - Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI A108.1B, 1999 - Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI A108.1C, 1999 - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar -or- Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI A108.4, 1999 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Organic Adhesives or WaterCleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive. ANSI A108.5, 1999 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI A108.6, 1999 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical-Resistant, WaterCleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy. ANSI A108.8, 1999 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical-Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout. ANSI A108.9, 1999 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. ANSI A108.10, 1999 - Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework. ANSI A118.1, 1999 - Standard Specification for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI A118.3, 1999 - Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive. ANSI A118.4, 1999 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI A118.5, 1999 - Chemical-Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout. ANSI A118.6, 1999 - Standard Ceramic Tile Grouts. ANSI A118.7, 1999 - Polymer Modified Cement Grouts ANSI A118.8, 1999 - Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout. ANSI A118.9, 1999 - Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units ANSI A118.10, 1999 - Load bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thinset Ceramic Tile and Dimensional Stone. ANSI A118.11, 1999 - Exterior Grade Plywood (EGP) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI A136.1, 1999 - Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile. ANSI A137.1, 1988 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile. September 15, 2015 093000 - Tiling Page 1 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA V. W. X. Y. Z. AA. BB. CC. DD. 1.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 ASTM C50 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. ASTM C241 - Test Method For Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic. ASMT C503 - Specification for Marble Building Stone (Exterior). ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath. ASTM C1028 - Test method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction or Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull meter Method. ASTM D4397 - Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. TCA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of America, Inc. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: Tile on walkway surfaces shall be provided with following values as determined by testing per ASTM C 1028. 1. 2. 3. 1.5 Level Surfaces: Minimum of 0.6 (Wet). Step Treads: Minimum of 0.6 (Wet). Ramp Surfaces: Minimum of 0.8 (Wet). SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. E. Comply with Section 01 33 00 - .Submittal Procedures. Submit manufacturer's data sheets on each product, preparation instructions and installation recommendations. Submit storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details. Selection Samples: Color charts illustrating full range of colors and patterns. 1. 2. F. G. 1.6 Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on plywood panels, 16 inches (400mm) by 16 inches (400mm) in size illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements for each shipment, type and composition of tile provide Master Grade Certificate signed by the manufacturer and the installer certifying that products meet or exceed the specified requirements of ANSI A137.1. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. Maintain one copy each of Referenced standards and specifications on site. Include TCA Handbook, ANSI A108 Series, ANSI A118 Series ANSI A136.1 and ANSI A137.1 and others as specified under paragraph References. Installer Qualifications: Company shall specialize in performing work indicated and shall be currently in business for five continuous years. Single Source Responsibility: 1. 2. Obtain each type and color of tile from single source. Obtain each type and color of mortar, adhesive and grout from same source. September 15, 2015 093000 - Tiling Page 2 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA D. 1.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Comply with 2007 Florida Building Code with 2009 Amendments, Chapter 11 for handicapped accessibility requirements. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. 1.8 Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Protect adhesives and liquid additives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Store tile and setting materials on elevated platforms, under cover and in a dry location and protect from contamination, dampness, freezing or overheating. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. B. 1.9 Do not install adhesives in unventilated environment. Maintain ambient and substrate minimum temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation of mortar materials. WARRANTY A. B. Comply with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Provide two (2) year warranty for products and installation from date of project substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE MANUFACTURERS A. B. C. Acceptable Manufacturer: DalTile Corporation, 7834 C.F. Hawn Fwy. P. O. Box 170130 ; Dallas, TX 75217; Toll Free Tel: 800-933-TILE; Tel: 214-309-4535; Fax: 214-309-4584;Website: www.daltileproducts.com . Other tile manufacturers shall comply with Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Tile shall comply with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions and other characteristics indicated. Provide tile in locations and of types colors and pattern indicated. 1. 2. 3. 2.2 Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected under Submittal of samples, blend tile in factory and package so tile taken from one package shows same range of colors as those taken from other packages. Mounting: For factory mounted tile, provide back or edge mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless otherwise specified. Factory Applied Temporary Protective Coatings: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces. GLAZED CERAMIC WALL TILE A. B. C. D. E. Product: Daltile Keystones 4-1/4” (107 mm ) x 4-1/4” (107mm ) x ¼” (6mm) in Toilets and 6”(150mm) x 6” (150mm) in Kitchen/Serving Lines. Tiles shall be selected from manufacturer’s standard colors in price groups as follows: Field: Price Group 2. Accent Panels: Price Group 3. Edges: Cushioned. September 15, 2015 093000 - Tiling Page 3 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA F. G. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Surface Finish: Semi-gloss. Trim Units: Matching bead, bullnose, cove, trim and base shapes in sizes coordinated with field and accent tiles. UNGLAZED CERAMIC MOSIAC FLOOR TILE A. B. C. D. E. Product: Daltile Keystones 2” (50 mm ) x 2” (50mm ) x ¼” (6mm) in Toilets. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent. Edges: Cushioned. Surface Finish: Unglazed without abrasive admixture, coefficient of friction equal to or exceeding 0.6 wet. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer’s standard colors in patterns indicated from following color groups: 1. 2. F. G. 2.4 Field: Price Group 1. Accent Panels: Price Group 3. Mounted Sheet Size: 12 by 24 inches (305 by 610 mm). Trim Units: Matching bead, cove, and surface bullnose shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. UNGLAZED QUARRY TILE A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 2.5 Product: Daltile Suretread; moisture absorption less than 3.0 percent; raised tread pattern; 6 inch (152 mm) square, nominal. Size and Shape: 6 inch (150 mm) square, nominal. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). Edges: Cushioned. Coefficient of Friction: Equal to or exceeding 0.6 wet. Surface Finish: Textured. Surface Type: Treadplate. Colors: (Architect shall select one of the following colors); Red (OQ81), Gray (OQ76) or Golden Brown Suretread (OQ75). Trim Units: Matching bullnose, cove, cove base, and window sill or step nosing shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 1. 2.6 Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. SETTING MATERIALS A. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset bond type; use Type I in areas not exposed to prolonged moisture. September 15, 2015 093000 - Tiling Page 4 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. C. Urethane adhesive for wet areas including showers, drying rooms, locker rooms, wet environmental instruction spaces, kitchens, and serving lines: Quartz-Lock Grout manufactured by StarQuartz Industries, Inc., 1300 Russell St., Baltimore, MD 21230; Tel: 410-783-0100; Fax: 410-783-2604; Website: www.starquartz.com. Mortar Bed Materials: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D. 4. 5. G. H. I. J. Portland cement: ASTM C150, type 1, gray or white. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. Sand: ASTM C144, fine. Latex additive: As approved. Water: Clean and potable. Mortar Bond Coat Materials: 1. 2. 3. E. F. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Dry-Set Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.1. Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4. Standard Grout: Cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI A118.6; color as selected. Polymer modified cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI A118.7; color as selected. Silicone Sealant: Silicone sealant, moisture and mildew resistant type, white; use for shower floors and shower walls. Cleavage Membrane: Polyethylene film, ASTM D4397, 4.0 mil thickness Waterproofing Membrane at Floors: Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet with polyester fabric reinforcing per ANSI A118.10. Membrane at Walls: Membrane at Walls: 4 mil (0.1 mm) thick polyethylene film, ASTM D4397. Reinforcing Mesh: 2 by 2 inch (50 by 50 mm) size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric, galvanized. Metal Lath: ASTM C847, Flat expanded diamond mesh, not less than 2.5 lbs/SY, galvanized finish. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI A118.9; High density, 1/2 inch (13mm). cementitious, glass fiber reinforced with 2 inch (50 mm) wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. B. C. D. 3.2 Verify that wall surfaces are free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials, smooth and flat within tolerances specified in ANSI A137.1, and are ready to receive tile. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free, and free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces, and are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in ANSI A137.1. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. PREPARATION A. B. C. D. Protect surrounding work from damage. Remove any curing compounds or other contaminates. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. September 15, 2015 093000 - Tiling Page 5 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA E. F. 3.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry-set mortar to a feather edge. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. GENERAL INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. 3.4 Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Arrange pattern so that a full tile or joint is centered on each wall and that no tile less than 1/2 width is used. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. Install thresholds where indicated. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS A. B. C. D. 3.5 Over interior concrete substrates in dry areas, install per TCA Handbook Method F113, dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. Install waterproofing membrane in showers, locker rooms, kitchen and serving lines where indicated, install per TCA Handbook Method F122, with latex-portland cement grout. C.Install epoxy bond coat and grout in Kitchen, Serving Lines, Showers, Locker Bench Seats where indicated,per TCA Handbook Method F131. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F143. INSTALLATION - FLOORS - MORTAR BED METHODS A. B. C. D. E. F. 3.6 Over interior concrete substrates, install per TCA Handbook Method F111 or F114, with cleavage membrane, unless otherwise indicated. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, with standard grout or no mention of grout type, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F121. Where urethane based grout is indicated, install per TCA Handbook Method F132, bonded. Cleavage Membrane: Lap edges and ends. Waterproofing Membrane: Install as specified in ANSI A108.13. Mortar Bed Thickness: 1-1/4 to 2 inch (32 to 51 mm) maximum, unless otherwise indicated INSTALLATION - WALL TILE A. B. C. D. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install per TCA Handbook Method W244, using membrane at toilet s, kitchen and serving line walls. Over gypsum wallboard on metal studs install per TCA Handbook Method W243, thin-set with dry-set or latex-portland cement bond coat, unless otherwise indicated. Where mortar bed is indicated, install per TCA Handbook Method W222, one coat method. Over interior concrete and masonry install per TCA Handbook Method W202, thin-set with dryset or latex-portland cement bond coat. September 15, 2015 093000 - Tiling Page 6 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA E. 3.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Over metal studs without backer install per TCA Handbook Method W241, mortar bed, with membrane where indicated. CLEANING A. 3.8 Clean tile and grout surfaces. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. B. C. 3.9 Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 72 hours after installation. Cover floors with kraft paper and protect from dirt and residue from other trades. Where floor will be exposed for prolonged periods cover with plywood or other similar type walkways TILE SCHEDULE A. B. SCHEDULE OF AREAS TO BE TILED and types of tile to be installed shall be submitted with shop drawings by the General Contractor to indicate understanding of project conditions. Contractor to match existing conditions of setting bed and tile type. Color match shall be as close as possible to existing color with Contractor to submit a minimum of three (3) color ranges for Owner/Architect to select. List shall be as follows for EACH SPACE: 1. SPACE: (name and number of room) a. Floor Tile: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) b. Wall Tile: 1) 2) 3) 4) c. D. Tile Type: ____. Installation Method: TCA ____. Bond Coat Mortar Type: ANSI ______. Grout Type/Color: ____. Miscellaneous Tile: 1) 2) 3) 4) C. Tile Type: ____. Tile Base: ____. Installation Method: TCA ____. Bond Coat Mortar Type: ANSI ______. Grout Type/Color: ____. Tile Type: ____. Installation Method: TCA ____. Bond Coat Mortar Type: ANSI ______. Grout Type/Color: ____. General Contractor to arrange meeting with Tile sub-contractor, Tile manufacturer’s rep, Owner/Architect and Tile Installer to cover all outstanding issues prior to tile mock-up and installation. Contractor shall cover all items in bid and there shall be no extras allowed for failure to cover all conditions. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 093000 - Tiling Page 7 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 09 51 23 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. B. 1.2 Ceiling tiles, metal grid, ceiling suspension system and related accessories required for complete and functioning ceiling system. Removal and recycling of existing acoustical tile ceilings in renovation projects. RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry. Section 09 21 00 – Plaster and Gypsum Board Assemblies. Section 09 22 00 – Supports for Plaster and Gypsum Board. Section 23 37 00 – Air Outlets and Inlets. Section 26 09 23 – Lighting Control Devices. Section 26 51 00 – Interior Lighting. Section 27 60 00 – Sound reinforcement System. REFERENCES A. B. Comply with Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, abbreviations, definitions and acronyms. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. ASTM C423-09: Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method ASTM C635-13: Standard Specification the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. ASTM C636-13: Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels ASTM C641-09: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire ASTM A653-13: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (galvanized) or Zinc-Iron AllyCoated (galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM E84-14: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM E119-12a: Standard Test Method for Fire Test of Building Construction and Materials ASTM E795-05(12): Standard Practice for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests ASTM E1264-08e1: Standard Classification of Acoustical Ceiling Products ASTM E1414-11a: Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum ASTM E1477-98a (2013): Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of Integrating Sphere Reflectometer September 15, 2015 095123 - Acoustical Tile Ceilings Page 1 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association (CISCA): 1. 2. D. 3. 1.4 Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice. Ceiling Systems Handbook. International Organization of Standardization (ISO): 1. 2. E. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 ISO 11654:1997 – Sound Absorbers for use in Buildings – Rating of Sound Absorption ISO 14024:1999 – Environmental Labels and Declarations- Type I Environmental Labeling – Principles and Procedures ISO 14025:2006 – Environmental Labels and Declarations- Type III Environmental Labeling – Principles and Procedures Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL): Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submit product data for each type of product specified. Submit samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected. 1. 2. 1.5 Submit 150 mm (6") square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color. Submit two (2) 300 mm (12") long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. Comply with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Comply with CISCA “Ceiling Systems Handbook” and “Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings in accord with ASTM indicated: 1. 2. D. E. 1.6 ASTM E 84-14: Flame Spread of 25 or less, and Smoke Developed of 50 or less. ASTM E 1264-08e1: Tile products rated Class A. Single Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of Work. Single Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of Work. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. D. E. Comply with Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling. Deliver acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store in fully enclosed space. Protect from damage due to moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. Before installation, permit tiles to reach room temperature and attain stabilized moisture content Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units. Replace damaged units. September 15, 2015 095123 - Acoustical Tile Ceilings Page 2 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. 1.8 Environmental Limitations: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until interior spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet finish work is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity are continuously maintained per manufacturer’s printed product installation instructions. EXTRA MATERIALS A. B. 1.9 Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish two boxes of 2’ (608mm) x 2’(608mm) replacement tiles on project site for Owner’s use upon completion of work. WARRANTY A. B. C. Comply with Section 01 78 00 – Submittal Documents. Submit printed warranty executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace acoustic panels from sagging or warping, grid system from rusting or other manufacturing defects for ten years from date of project’s substantial completion. Warranty shall not cover abuse or acts of God. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. B. C. D. 2.2 Armstrong World Industries, Inc., P.O. Box 3001, Lancaster, PA 17604; Tel: 877-276-7876; Fax: 800-572-8324; Website: www.armstrong.com USG Interiors, subsidiary of USG Corp., 550 West Adams St.. Chicago, IL 60661-3637; Tel: 800-950-3839; Website: usg.com. Certainteed Corporation, subsidiary of Saint Gobain, P.O. Box 860, 750 East Swedesford Rd., Valley Forge, PA 19482; Tel: 800-233-8990, 610-341-7777; Website: www.certainteed.com. Other manufacturers may request approval in accord with Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. PRODUCTS A. B. Tiles shall be 24" (608mm) x 24" (608mm) x ¾” (19.5mm) thick white, non-directional, with 15/16” (23.8mm) wide white grid unless noted otherwise. Ceiling Tile Locations: 1. ACT-1 (Non wet areas such as Custodial Rooms, Offices, Cafeteria): a. b. c. 2. Armstrong World Industries "Fine Fissured" Square Lay-in. CertainTeed Corp. "Baroque" USG Interiors Radar Climaplus ACT-2 non-perforated (Wet areas such as Kitchen & Serving Lines): a. b. September 15, 2015 Scrubbable USG "Astro Climaplus Ceiling Panels". Scrubbable Armstrong World Industries, “Ceramaguard Un-perforated". 095123 - Acoustical Tile Ceilings Page 3 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS A. B. C. 2.4 Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: ASTM E 1264-08e1 classifications as designated by reference to types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E 400 (plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4” (400 mm) away from the test surface) per ASTM E 795-05(12). Colors and Patterns: Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated under each product type. SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. B. C. D. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: comply with applicable ASTM C 635-13 requirements. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory applied finish for type of system indicated. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635-13, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: ASTM C 641-09, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 1. E. F. 2.5 Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635-13, Table 1, Direct-Hung), will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 2.69 mm (0.106") diameter wire. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. Provide column surround trim at round columns. Retention Clips (For Fire Rated Ceiling Assemblies): Armstrong #414 or equal by other approved acoustical panel manufacturers. NON-FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED DIRECT-HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Wide-Face Capped Double-Web Steel Suspension System: Main and cross-runners roll-formed from pre-painted or electrolytic zinc-coated cold-rolled steel sheet, with pre-finished 23 mm (15/16") wide metal caps on flanges; other characteristics as follows: 1. 2. 3. 2.6 Structural Classification: Intermediate Duty System. End Condition of Cross-Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type, as standard with manufacturer. Cap Material and Finish: Steel sheet painted white. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Tile Adhesive: Type recommended by tile manufacturer, bearing UL label for Class 0-25 flame spread. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches or abuts, with Installer, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system. September 15, 2015 095123 - Acoustical Tile Ceilings Page 4 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Proceeding with installation shall be deemed installer’s acceptance of surface conditions to which ceiling system is attached or abutting. PREPARATION A. B. C. 3.3 Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other sections. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination of other work. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. INSTALLATION A. B. General: Ceiling systems installation shall be in accord with manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook", and Standard for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: ASTM C 636-13. Arrange acoustical units as indicated. 1. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. D. E. Where ACT units are installed, provide retention clips in accord with ceiling panel manufacturer’s recommendations. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interferes with location of hangers at spacing required to properly support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye-screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in manner that will not cause deterioration or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye-screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for structure to which hangers are attached and for type of hanger involved, and in manner that will not cause deterioration or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. Space hangers not more than 48" (1216 mm) along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown, and provide hangers not more than 8" (200 mm) from ends of each member. Lighting, speakers or other items inserted into ceiling tiles shall be supported by building structure and not by ceiling tile or grid. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. September 15, 2015 095123 - Acoustical Tile Ceilings Page 5 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 CLEANING A. B. C. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09 51 23 September 15, 2015 095123 - Acoustical Tile Ceilings Page 6 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 09 65 13-RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. 1.2 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. E. 1.4 Product Data: For each type of product. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 incheslong. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 incheslong. Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 1.5 Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. 1.7 Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 1.6 Resilient base. Resilient molding accessories. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg For more than 90 deg F. FIELD CONDITIONS September 15, 2015 096513 - Resilient Base And Accessories Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 2. 3. B. C. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 48 hours before installation. During installation. 48 hours after installation. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 1. 2. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). Style and Location: a. C. D. E. F. G. H. 2.2 Thickness: 0.125 inch. Height: 4 inches. Lengths: . Outside Corners: Preformed. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. Colors: As selected by Owner from full range of industry colors. RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. B. C. D. 2.3 Style B, Cove:. Description: Rubber nosing for carpet, nosing for resilient flooring, reducer strip for resilient flooring, joiner for tile and carpet, transition strips. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in areas indicated. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Owner from full range of industry colors. INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated. September 15, 2015 096513 - Resilient Base And Accessories Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. C. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stairtread manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. 3.2 Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. PREPARATION A. B. C. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. D. 3.3 Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. September 15, 2015 Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 096513 - Resilient Base And Accessories Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. B. 3.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. C. D. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish. 1. E. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. Apply [one][two][three] coat(s). Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09 65 13 September 15, 2015 096513 - Resilient Base And Accessories Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 09 65 19 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. 1.2 Work consists of vinyl composition tile flooring, vinyl base, accessories and surface preparation required for complete installation. RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 43 39 – Mockups. Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Section 01 66 00 – Project Storage and Handling Requirements. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. REFERENCES A. B. See Section 01 42 00 – References for abbreviations, acronyms, definitions and reference standards. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 1.4 D570-98 (2010)e1: Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. D2047-11: Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine. E648-14: Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. E662-13d: Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. F510-14: Standard Test Method for Resistance to Abrasion of Resilient Floor Covering Using an Abrader with a Grit Feed Method. F710-11: Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and Other Monolithic Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. F970-07(2011): Standard Test Method for Static Load Limit. F1066-04(2010)e1: Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile, except Section 5 - Materials and Manufacture. E1428-99 (2009): Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Performance of Antimicrobials in or on Polymeric Solids Against Staining by Streptoverticillium Reticulum. F925-09 (2014): Standard Practice for Monitoring the Calibration of Ultraviolet Visible Spectrometer whose Bandwidth does not Exceed 2nm. F1515-03 (2008): Standard Test Method for Measuring Light Stability of Resilient Flooring by Color Changes. F1869-11: Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. G21-13: Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. SUBMITTALS September 15, 2015 096519 - Resilient Tile Flooring Page 1 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. C. D. E. F. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submit product data, including installation instructions before starting work. Submit manufacturer's standard size samples of each type, color, and finish of resilient flooring and required accessories including full range of flooring color and pattern variations available from proposed manufacturer. Manufacture's Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for adhesive. Submit manufacturer's printed documentation indicating compliance to slip-resistant coefficient requirements. Submit manufacturer's written instructions for recommended maintenance practices for installed resilient flooring to include: 1. 2. 3. 1.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Schedule: Frequency and type of maintenance defined. Equipment: Equipment and tools specified by generic language or manufacturer's name. Materials: Chemicals required to maintain flooring by brand name, quantities, and proper solutions. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Comply with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Resilient tile flooring systems shall have minimum slip-resistant coefficients: a. b. c. 2. 3. C. D. 2. Conduct meeting at site prior to commencing tile work related to installation with parties associated with work. Review site conditions, procedures, and coordination required with related work. Mockups: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.6 Non-compliance of slip-resistant coefficient factor will be grounds for removal and disposal of installed flooring system, properly preparing floor substrate and installation of required slip-resistant flooring system at no additional expense. Taber Abrasionmeter Testing: Weight loss of each tile shall average no more than 0.60 grams when ten tiles are abraded with aluminum oxide grit and S-39 leather wheel for 2000 cycles according to ASTM F510-14. Installer shall provide documentation of five years successful experience completing similar resilient tile installations. Preinstallation Conference: 1. E. 0.5 for leveled floors such as assembly areas including cafeterias, multipurpose spaces and music rooms. 0.6 for accessible routes such as interior corridors. 0.8 for inclined floors such as ramps. Comply with Section 01 43 39 – Mockups. Provide mockup of each type of installation using approved materials and installation procedures. Obtain A/E’s acceptance of mock-up prior to start of resilient tile installation. Approved mockup may be incorporated into project. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. Comply with Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling. Deliver products in manufacturer's unopened original dry packaging, with tags and labels intact. September 15, 2015 096519 - Resilient Tile Flooring Page 2 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. D. 1.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Provide equipment and personnel to handle materials to prevent damage from dropping, careless storage, and handling. Store material in weather protected space with temperature between 65°- 90° F (18° – 32° C). SITE CONDITIONS A. B. 1.8 Maintain room and material temperature between 65° F (18° C). and 90° F (32° C) for 48 hours before, during, and 48 hours after installation. Maintain minimum 65° F. (18° C) thereafter. Prior to installation, painting shall be completed, air-conditioning system is operational, and exterior thresholds are installed. WARRANTY A. B. C. Comply with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Documents. Furnish manufacturer's warranty covering manufacturing defects for a period of 2 years and 10 years for traffic wear resistance, excluding abusive treatment. Installer shall warrant in writing to correct conditions due to faulty installation or replace defective materials after project completion, including loss of adhesion to substrate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. B. Products and manufacturers specified are approved for project. Other manufacturers may submit requests for product substitution in accord with Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT) Flooring: 1. Product/Manufacturers: a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. Size: 12” (305mm) x 12” (305mm) x 0.125” (3.18mm) thick. Patterns on surface of tile shall be dispersed uniformly throughout thickness of tile to back of tile without significant change. Color and Pattern: a. b. 5. 6. Standard Excelon by Armstrong World Industries, 2500 Columbia Ave., Lancaster, PA. 17603; Tel: 717-397-0611; Website: www.armstrong.com. Essentials by Mannington, P.O. Box 12281, Calhoun, GA 30303-7004; Tel: 800241-2262; Website: www.Mannington.com. iQ Granit by Tarkett Commercial, 2728 Summer St., Houston, TX 77253, Tel: 800366-2689, Ext. 6; Website: www.tarket.com. Floor tile patterns are indicated on Drawings. Colors selected by A/E are based on Armstrong’s Standard Excelon standard color selection. Other approved manufacturers are required to match colors/patterns. Colors and patterns shall be judged accepted equivalent, as determined by A/E. Water Absorption of Tile: <0.15% per ASTM D570-98 (2010)e1. Tile shall comply with: a. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1) September 15, 2015 E648-14 (NFPA 253): Critical Radiant Flux (CRF) of not less than 0.45 watts per square centimeter. 096519 - Resilient Tile Flooring Page 3 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2) 3) C. Manufacturers: a. b. c. d. e. 2. Manufacture: a. 2. Johnsonite Inc., 16910 Munn Rd., Chagrin Falls, OH 44023; Tel: 800-899-8916, 440-543-8916; Fax: 440-543-8920; Website: johnsonite.com. Stair Treads with Integrated Riser: a. VIRTR-SQ (Visually Impaired) rounded square raised disk pattern rubber stair treads with integrated riser, 2” (5.08mm) hinged, square nose configuration, .210” (5.33mm) to .153” (3.89mm) tapered 13” (33cm) tread depth with 7” (17.8cm) integral riser. Accessories: 1. 2. Manufacturer (Basis of Design): Armstrong World Industries, 2500 Columbia Ave., 3001, Lancaster, PA. 17603; Tel: 717-397-0611; Website: www.armstrong.com. Transition Strips: Homogeneous vinyl, tapered edges in colors selected by A/E. a. b. c. 3. Carpet to tile reducer: VT0. Carpet to concrete: VT2. Tile to concrete: VT8. Tile Adhesive: Non-toxic with zero VOC content, waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by resilient tile flooring manufacturer. Subfloor Filler: 1. G. 0.125" (3.18mm) thick, 4” (101 mm) high, Type TP rubber base with cove profile. Colors shall be judged equivalent, as determined by A/E. At corners, provide inside/outside corners as applicable to specific corner, to extend 4” (101mm)(minimum) beyond corners. Stair Covering: 1. F. Armstrong World Industries, 2500 Columbia Ave., Lancaster, PA. 17603; Tel: 717397-0611; Website: www.armstrong.com. th Flexco Corp., 1401 East 6 St., Tuscumbia, AL 35674;Tel: 800-633-3151; Fax: 800-346-9075; Website: flexcofloors.com. Tarkett Collection by Johnsonite, Inc., 16910 Munn Rd., Chagrin Falls, OH 44023; Tel: 800-899-8916, 440-543-8916; Fax: 440-543-8920; Website: johnsonite.com. Burke Mercer Industries, Inc., 2250 South Tenth St., San Jose, CA 95112; Tel: 800-447-8442; Website: burkemercerflooring.com. Roppe Corp., 1602 N. Union St., P.O. Box 1158, Fostoria, OH 44830-1158. Base: a. b. c. E. E662-13d (NFPA 258): Smoke density < 450. Static Load Limit: 125 psi minimum. Resilient Tile Base: 1. D. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Leveling concrete patching compound and leveling concrete underlayment shall be in accord with Section 03 30 00 – Concrete, Para. 2.05. Floor Wax and Sealer: September 15, 2015 096519 - Resilient Tile Flooring Page 4 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 ISHINE Product #4055 manufactured by Spartan Chemical Co., Inc., 1110 Spartan Dr., Maumee, OH 43537; Tel: 419-531-5551, 800-537-8990; Fax: 419-536-8423; Website: www.spartanchemical.com. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. B. C. D. 3.2 Notify Contractor/CM of work surface conditions detrimental to proper installation of work. Do not proceed until conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer. Substrate surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of debris and have been reviewed for flatness and levelness per Section 03 30 00 – Concrete. Surface irregularities shall be filled or leveled as required. Verify condition of substrate by testing concrete in accord with ASTM F1869-11 and obtain results of 5lbs. (2.27 kg) or less of vapor transmission (MVER), surface alkali of 9 or less as measured by ph test paper, and be free of carbonization and dust. Proceeding with installation indicates installer’s acceptance of substrate conditions. PREPARATION A. B. C. D. E. 3.3 Comply with ASTM F710-11, manufacturer’s printed recommendations, and as specified for surface preparation. Concrete flatness and levelness shall comply with Section 03 30 0 – Concrete Para. 3.06. Grind down ridges and irregularities, or fill to comply with requirements. Remove loose impediments from substrate with power vacuum. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with cementitious based or underlayment as noted in Part 2 Products. Remove paint, oils, bond breakers, waxes, and sealers from surface. Inorganic solvents shall not be used. INSTALLATION A. B. Lay resilient flooring, base and accessories with adhesive cement in accord with manufacturer's recommendations in patterns indicated. Layout: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. D. E. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings, and edges. Scribe, as necessary, around obstructions to produce neat joints, laid tight, even, and straight. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, into closets, and similar openings. Install border tiles next to walls of not less than one half tile and of approximately equal size around the perimeter of room. Fill surface imperfections such as cracks, depressions, or rough areas with underlayment. Provide ventilation in areas where adhesive is being used. When natural ventilation is inadequate, use safety-spark-proof fans and prohibit smoking. Transition (Edge) Strips: 1. 2. Install vinyl transition (edge) strips wherever exposed edges of resilient flooring materials occur. Where resilient flooring stops at doorways, set transition thresholds directly under doors in closed position. September 15, 2015 096519 - Resilient Tile Flooring Page 5 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 CLEANING, POLISHING AND PROTECTION A. B. C. D. E. F. Remove excess adhesive and other soilings from floors and adjacent surfaces, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. Do not use acids or other caustic solutions as cleaning agents. Clean and apply six (6) coats of liquid wax floor finish in accord with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Prohibit traffic on floors for 48 hrs. Protect installed flooring from damage by covering with clean, heavy duty building paper from time of cleaning until work area is complete. Do not allow movement of heavy objects over flooring which could damage flooring or finish. Replace flooring damaged by subsequent construction operations. END OF SECTION 09 65 19 September 15, 2015 096519 - Resilient Tile Flooring Page 6 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Surface preparation and field application of paints and coatings. 1. 2. 3. B. C. D. E. F. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. Exposed interior items and surfaces. Surface preparation, priming and finish coats specified are in addition to shoppriming and surface treatment specified elsewhere. Paint exposed surfaces, except where paint schedule indicates surfaces or materials to remain unpainted. If paint schedule do not specifically mention items or surfaces, paint to match adjacent materials or surfaces. If paint schedule does not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select color or finish from manufacturer’s standard colors or finishes. Painting includes field painting of exposed and covered pipes and ducts, color coding, hangars, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed building surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory finished components: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following normally concealed spaces: a. b. c. d. 3. Furred areas. Ceiling plenums. pipe chases. Duct shafts. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. b. c. 4. Architectural woodwork and casework. Acoustical wall panels. Metal lockers. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. Light fixtures. Distribution cabinets. Anodized aluminum. Stainless Steel. Pre-finished aluminum or steel. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following items: a. b. c. d. September 15, 2015 Valve and damper operators. Linkages. Sensing devices. Motor and fan shafts. 099100 - Painting Page 1 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA G. 1.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Do not paint over Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels, equipment names, identification, performance rating, or other nomenclature plates. RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Request for Substitution. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 10 14 00 – Signage. Section 21 05 53 – Identification for fire Suppression Piping and Equipment. Section 22 05 53 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. Section 32 17 23 – Pavement Markings. REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. F. G. See Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, acronyms, abbreviations and definitions. ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. ASTM D4442 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) - Industrial Maintenance Painting. NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) - Guide to U.S. Government Paint Specifications. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) - Painting - Architectural Specifications Manual. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Steel Structures Painting Manual. 1. 2. 3. 1.4 SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning. SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. SP 3 - Power Cleaning. SUBMITTALS A. B. Comply with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s specifications and data sheets for each paint and coating product indicating the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C. Product Characteristics. Surface preparation instructions. Primer requirements. Storage and handling requirements. Application methods. Precautionary requirements. Provide a list of required coatings indicating each material and cross referencing each specific coating, finish system and application by manufacturer’s product number, color and classification. 1. Include manufacturer’s technical information, label analysis and application instructions for each product. September 15, 2015 099100 - Painting Page 2 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. D. 2. F. 1.5 Provide certification that products comply with regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC). Samples: 1. E. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Submit manufacturer’s color charts indicating full range of colors for each product indicated. Submit two 9" x 9" samples of each product illustrating selected colors, sheens and textures for each product. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures, substrate conditions requiring special attention. Provide manufacturer’s warranties for each product used. QUALIFICATIONS A. B. 1.6 Manufacturer: Company shall specialize in manufacture of the products specified with minimum five years documented manufacturing experience. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with five years minimum documented experience on similar project scope. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. 1.7 Conform to applicable codes for flame and smoke rating requirements for finishes. MOCK UP PANELS A. B. C. D. E. F. 1.8 Comply with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Provide a complete room field sample illustrating coating color, texture, and finish. Provide exterior mock-up at outside corner condition with finish extending minimum 10' both directions and 10’ height. Locate mockups where directed by Architect and Owner’s Project Manager. Work samples that are accepted may remain as part of completed work. Work is not to proceed until mockups are approved. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. D. 1.9 Comply with Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Requirements for delivery, storage, protection and handling of products. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. Container label to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, batch date, color name and number, surface coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, environmental issues, VOC content, and instructions for mixing. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45° F (7° C) and maximum of 90° F (32° C) in ventilated area and as required by manufacturer's instructions. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. B. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside temperature ranges required by paint product manufacturer. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or when relative humidity is outside humidity ranges required by paint product manufacturer. September 15, 2015 099100 - Painting Page 3 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. D. E. F. 1.10 A. B. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45° F (7° C) for interiors 50° F (10° C) for exterior unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Stain Finishes: 65° F (18° C) for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. Provide lighting level of 80 foot-candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. Dispose of waste in accord with applicable regulations. PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING Comply with Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination for sequencing of trades to allow timely work start and completion. Pre-installation meeting shall be held minimum of one week prior to scheduled work start to verify acceptable condition of substrate surfaces to be painted, sequencing and protection of work until substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. B. 2.2 The Sherwin-Williams Company, 101 Prospect Avenue NW, Cleveland, OH 44115; Tel: 1 800-321-8194; Fax: 216-566-1392; website: www.sherwin-williams.com. Other manufacturers may submit their products for approval per Section 01 25 13 – Substitutions Procedures. Manufacturers shall specify which Sherwin Williams products conform to products proposed for substitution. MATERIALS A. Paintings and Coatings: 1. 2. 3. B. 2.3 Ready mixed, unless otherwise indicated. Process pigments to soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to homogeneous coating; good flow and brushing properties. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. Accessory Materials: Coating application accessories shall be in accord with manufacturer’s recommendations for patching materials, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, primers, sanding paper, clean up materials, and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve specified finishes. FINISHES A. B. Refer to schedule in Paragraphs 3.07 and 3.08 for exterior and interior surface finishes. Paint colors will be selected by Owner. Contractor/CM shall submit color samples to Architect who shall prepare color board for Owner’s review and approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION September 15, 2015 099100 - Painting Page 4 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. C. D. E. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper paint application. Do not begin work until surfaces are ready to receive paint coatings. Start of work indicates acceptance of surfaces. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12%. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12%. Interior Wood: 15%, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. Exterior Wood: 15%, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. Concrete Floors: 8%. PREPARATION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. Correct defects and clean surfaces that affect work. Remove existing coatings that exhibit loose surface defects. Seal surface marks which may bleed through surface finishes. Remove mildew on surfaces per manufacturer’s written recommendations. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high-pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by power tool, wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime base steel surfaces. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand lightly between coats. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dust, grit and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after prime coat has been applied. Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit and foreign matter; seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking compound after sealer has been applied. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer and paint per Schedule. September 15, 2015 099100 - Painting Page 5 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 APPLICATION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 3.4 Apply products in accord with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Do not apply paint coatings finishes to surfaces that are not dry, immediately before or after rain, during foggy conditions, or when temperature is less than 50° F(10° C). Apply each coat to uniform finish. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. Sand wood and metal lightly between coats to achieve required finish. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. Use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint. Prime concealed surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25% with mineral spirits. FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 3.5 Coordinate with Mechanical and Electrical Specifications and Drawings for schedules of colorcoding and identification banding of equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. Paint shop primed equipment. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, in finished areas, except where items are pre-finished. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to visible surfaces. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles and to match face panels. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accord with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows, names, and numbering. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons and fittings removed prior to finishing. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. 3.6 Field inspection and testing will be performed in accord with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. CLEANING A. B. 3.7 Clean work under provisions of 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management. Collect cotton waste material that may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. PAINT TYPE AND NUMBER OF COATS A. B. Painting schedules are intended to identify type of finishes which are required for various surfaces, and to identify surfaces to which each finish is to be applied. Refer to Room Finish Schedule. Requirements for quality, function, size, gauges, grades, textures, and color of materials are designated by manufacturer’s brands, types, and number of coats required and other requirements that are to be furnished to conform to requirements of work. September 15, 2015 099100 - Painting Page 6 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. D. E. 3.8 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Where specific finishes are indicated by code designation, refer to identified types of coatings. Primers indicated under Material Identification is intended for particular substrate surface specified. Where same numbered finish are scheduled, but for another substrate, provide primer compatible with substrate and finish. Where substrate has compatible and satisfactory prime coat applied, prime coat specified for numbered finish may be omitted. Test prime coat for compatibility before applying additional coats. EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE (Based on Sherwin Williams numbers)(Mil thickness is wet and dry film thickness per coat.) Where more than one paint finish is indicated (flat, satin, semigloss or gloss) finishes will be determined upon review of paint submittals. A. Concrete Surfaces (Poured in Place, precast walls, columns, cement stucco, cementitious siding and soffits). 1. Satin Finish: a. b. c. 2. Gloss Finish: a. b. c. B. 1st Coat:S-W Acrylic Masonry Primer, A24W8300 Series (8.0 mils wet/3.2 mils dry). 2nd Coat:S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series (4mils wet/1.4 mils dry). 3rd Coat:S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series (4mils wet/1.4 mils dry). Masonry Surfaces (Concrete Block). 1. Satin Finish: a. b. c. 2. 3. 1st Coat:S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 Series (75-100 s.f./gal.3.6 mils). 2nd Coat:S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils wet). 3rd Coat:S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils wet). Semi Gloss Finish: a. b. c. 1st Coat:S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 Series (75-100 s.f./gal.3.6 mils). nd 2 Coat:S-W Metalatex Semi Gloss Coating, B42 Series (3-5 mils dry per coat). rd 3 Coat:S-W Metalatex Semi Gloss Coating, B42 Series (3-5 mils dry per coat). Gloss Finish: a. b. c. C. 1st Coat:S-W Acrylic Masonry Primer, A24W8300 Series (8.0 mils wet/3.2 mils dry). 2nd Coat:S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). 3rd Coat:S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). 1st Coat:S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 Series (75-100 s.f./gal.3.6 mils). 2nd Coat:A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series (4 mils wet/1.3 mils dry). 3rd Coat:A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series (4 mils wet/1.3 mils dry). Exposed Metal Surfaces (Aluminum, Galvanized Metal). 1. Satin Finish: a. b. 2. st 1 Coat:S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). nd 2 Coat:S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). Semi-Gloss Finish: September 15, 2015 099100 - Painting Page 7 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA a. b. 3. Semi-Gloss Finish: a. b. c. 2. 1st Coat:S-W ProCryl Universal Primer , B66-310 Series (5-10 mils wet/2-4 mils dry). 2nd Coat:S-W A-100 Metalatex Semi Gloss Coating, B42 Series (3-5 mils dry per coat). rd 3 Coat:S-W A-100 Metalatex Semi Gloss Coating, B42 Series (3-5 mils dry per coat) Gloss Finish: a. b. c. 1st Coat:S-W ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5-10 mils wet/2-4 mils dry). 2nd Coat:S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils wet). rd 3 Coat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils wet) Wood Surfaces (Framing, Joists, Columns, Siding, Trim, Doors, and Windows). 1. Satin Finish: a. b. c. 2. b. c. 3. 1st Coat:S-W Exterior Latex Wood Primer, B42W804 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). 2nd Coat:S-W Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). 3rd Coat:S-W Exterior Latex Satin, A82 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). Semi Gloss Finish: a. 1st Coat:S-W Exterior Latex Wood Primer, B42W804 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). 2nd Coat:S-W Metalatex Semi Gloss Coating, B42 Series (3-5 mils dry) 3rd Coat:S-W Metalatex Semi Gloss Coating, B42 Series (3-5 mils dry). Gloss Finish: a. b. c. 3.9 1st Coat:S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). 2nd Coat:S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). Ferrous Metal (Structural Iron and non-galvanized Steel, Tanks, Window frames, sashes and trim). 1. E. 1st Coat:S-W Metalatex Semi Gloss Coating, B42 Series (3-5 mils dry per coat). 2nd Coat:S-W Metalatex Semi Gloss Coating, B42 Series (3-5 mils dry per coat). Gloss Finish: a. b. D. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 1st Coat:S-W Exterior Latex Wood Primer, B42W804 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). 2nd Coat:S-W Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). 3rd Coat:S-W Exterior Latex Gloss, A8 Series (4 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Surfaces (Poured Concrete, Pre-Cast Concrete, Cast-In-Place Concrete, Tilt-Wall Concrete Panels, Concrete Beams, Ceilings, Stairs, Joists, and Columns). 1. Egg Shell Finish (Low Odor/Low VOC): September 15, 2015 099100 - Painting Page 8 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA a. b. c. 2. b. c. b. c. 1st Coat:S-W Loxon Acrylic Masonry Primer, A24W8300 Series (8.0 mils wet/3.2 mils dry). 2nd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Flat, B30W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.3 mils dry). 3rd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Flat, B30W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.3 mils dry). Masonry (CMU- smooth, split, scored and fluted concrete units). 1. Flat Finish: a. b. c. 2. c. 3. 1st Coat:S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 Series (75-125 s.f./gal.). 2nd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Flat, B30W651 (4.0 mils wet/1.8 mils dry). 3rd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Flat, B30W651 (4.0 mils wet/1.8 mils dry). Egg Shell Finish: a. b. 1st Coat:S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 Series (75-100 s.f./gal.3.6 mils). 2nd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B20W2200 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). 3rd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B20W2200 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). Semi Gloss Finish: a. b. c. C. 1st Coat:S-W Loxon Acrylic Masonry Primer, A24W8300 Series (8.0 mils wet/3.2 mils dry). 2nd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi Gloss, B31W2200 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.3 mils dry). 3rd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi Gloss, B31W2200 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.3 mils dry). Flat Finish (Low Odor/Low VOC): a. B. 1st Coat:S-W Loxon Acrylic Masonry Primer, A24W8300 Series (8.0 mils wet/3.2 mils dry). 2nd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Enamel, B20W3200 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). 3rd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Enamel, B20W3200 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). Semi Gloss Finish (Low Odor/Low VOC): a. 3. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 1st Coat:S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25 Series (75-125 s.f./gal.). 2nd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi Gloss, B31W600 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). 3rd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi Gloss, B31W600 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). Metal Surfaces (Aluminum if not prefinished, Galvanized Steel metal doors, frames, railings, exposed ductwork, pipes and conduits and ferrous metal surfaces). 1. Flat Finish: a. September 15, 2015 1st Coat:S-W Industrial ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5-10 mils wet/24 mils dry). 099100 - Painting Page 9 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA b. c. 2. b. c. 1st Coat:S-W Industrial ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5-10 mils wet/24 mils dry). 2nd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B20W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). 3rd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg-shel, B20W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). Metal (Exposed Structural Steel Columns, Trusses, Beams, Miscellaneous Ornamental Iron and Ferrous Metals). 1. Flat Finish: a. b. c. 2. b. c. 3. 1st Coat:S-W Industrial ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5-10 mils wet/24 mils dry). 2nd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Flat, B30W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.8 mils dry). 3rd Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Flat, B30W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.8 mils dry). Egg Shell Finish: a. 1st Coat:S-W Industrial ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5-10 mils wet/24 mils dry). 2nd Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B20W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). 3rd Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel, B20W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). Semi Gloss Finish: a. b. c. E. 2nd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi Gloss, B30W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.8 mils dry). 3rd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi Gloss, B30W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.8 mils dry). Egg Shell Finish: a. D. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 1st Coat:S-W Industrial ProCryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5-10 mils wet/24 mils dry). 2nd Coat:S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi Gloss, B31W600 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). 3rd Coat: S-W ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi Gloss, B31W600 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). Wood Surfaces (Windows, Sills, Door Trim, Wall Paneling and other wood surfaces not factory finished or indicated otherwise). 1. Flat Finish: a. b. c. 2. 1st Coat:S-W PrepRite ProBlock Latex, B51 Series, (4.0 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). 2nd Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Flat, Series B30W651(4.0 mils wet/1.8 mils dry). 3rd Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Flat, Series B30W651(4.0 mils wet/1.8 mils dry). Egg Shell Finish: a. September 15, 2015 1st Coat:S-W PrepRite ProBlock Latex, B51 Series, (4.0 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). 099100 - Painting Page 10 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA b. c. 3. c. 1st Coat:S-W PrepRite ProBlock Latex, B51 Series, (4.0 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). 2nd Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, Series B31W600 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry) 3rd Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, Series B31W600 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry) Stain and Varnish Satin Finish: a. b. c. F. 2nd Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel, Series B20W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry) 3rd Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel, Series B20W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry) Semi Gloss Finish: a. b. 4. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 1st Coat: S-W MinWax 250 VOC Oil Stain. 2nd Coat:Wood Classics® Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish (4mils wet/1.0 mil dry). 3rd Coat:Wood Classics® Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish (4mils wet/1.0 mil dry). Drywall and Plaster Surfaces (Walls, columns, ceilings, soffits, bulkheads, light shelfs and soffits). 1. Flat Finish: a. b. c. 2. Egg Shell Finish: a. b. c. 3. 1st Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Primer, Series B28W8200 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.5 mils dry). 2nd Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Flat, Series B30W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). 3rd Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Flat, Series B30W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.4 mils dry). 1st Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Primer, Series B28W8200 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.5 mils dry). 2nd Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Eg-Shel, Series B30W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). 3rd Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Flat, Series B30W651 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). Semi Gloss Finish: a. b. c. 1st Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Primer, Series B28W8200 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.5 mils dry). 2nd Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, Series B31W600 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). 3rd Coat:ProGreen 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss, Series B31W600 Series (4.0 mils wet/1.6 mils dry). END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 099100 - Painting Page 11 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 099600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. 1.2 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and application of high-performance (epoxy) coating systems on the following substrates: 1. Interior Substrates: a. B. Related Requirements: 1. 1.3 Gypsum board or CMU at kitchen and toilet room spaces and as may be additionally noted in finish schedules. Division 09 painting Sections for special-use coatings and general field painting. DEFINITIONS A. 1.4 Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. ACTION SUBMITTALS A. B. C. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. 2. 3. 1.5 Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. Label each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application area. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. VOC content. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each coating system indicated to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. September 15, 2015 099600 - High-performance Coatings Page 1 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each coating system specified in Part 3. a. b. 2. 4. 1.6 Wall Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. 3. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. 2. 1.7 Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. FIELD CONDITIONS A. B. C. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. Do not apply exterior coatings in rain, fog, or mist. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. 2.2 Sherwin-Williams Company (The). (Basis of Design) Benjamin Moore & Co. ICI Paints. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. Pratt & Lambert. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL A. B. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and are listed in "MPI Approved Products List." Material Compatibility: September 15, 2015 099600 - High-performance Coatings Page 2 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3. C. 2.3 Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated. Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior coatings applied at project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. D. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. Colors: As selected by Owner/Architect from manufacturer's full range if not listed in schedules. INTERIOR PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Primer Sealer: 1. 2. 2.4 Gyp Bd/Plaster: ProGreen 200 Low VOC Primer. CMU: Heavy Duty Block Filler EPOXY COATINGS A. Two (2) Top Coats: 1. 2. Gyp Bd/Plaster: ProIndustrial Hi-Bild WB Catalyzed Epoxy CMU: ProIndustrial Hi-Bild WB Catalyzed Epoxy, semi-gloss (level 5) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: a. b. c. B. C. D. E. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. Cement Plaster: 12 percent. CMU: 12 percent Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. September 15, 2015 099600 - High-performance Coatings Page 3 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 3.2 Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. PREPARATION A. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. C. 3.3 After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce coating systems indicated. APPLICATION A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1. 2. 3. 4. B. C. D. 3.4 Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness. 1. 2. 3.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating manufacturer's written recommendations. CLEANING AND PROTECTION September 15, 2015 099600 - High-performance Coatings Page 4 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. C. D. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. END OF SECTION 099600 September 15, 2015 099600 - High-performance Coatings Page 5 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 10 14 00 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Signage includes renumbering interior and exterior room signage where new work is indicated and includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Required sign types: 1. 2. 3. C. Tactile/raised letter plastic signs 8” x 8”. Building number followed by room number: 02-301 (example). Space name: Individual plastic characters signs. Signs of silk-screened characters on plastic. Interior room, space and area ID signs. International symbols of accessibility for accessible spaces and exits. Hazard and safety signs Location of new signs: 1. All renovated spaces within Building 02. a. 1.2 Bid shall be based on sixteen (16) interior room signs and an exterior sign at the north entrance to the Kitchen RELATED DOCUMENTS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Requirements. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry. Section 09 22 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. REFERENCES A. B. C. D. 1.4 Comply with Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, definitions, abbreviations and acronyms. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable By Physically Handicapped People. Florida Building Code, 2010 Edition, Chapter 11 and Section 423.14.2. NFPA 101-00: Para. 7.10.1.3. SUBMITTALS A. Submit Shop Drawings per Section 01 33 00 - Submittals. September 15, 2015 101400 - Signage Page 1 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. C. D. E. F. 1.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Shop Drawings: Indicate sign styles, lettering font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign and anchorage. Sign Schedule: Provide complete interior and exterior sign schedule showing sign type, location, and verbiage. Samples: Submit two sample signs in size illustrating type, style, letter font and colors specified method of attachment. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation template and attached devices. Colors: Sign colors shall be tan or blue background with white letters and figures. Colors shall be selected by the Owner/Architect. QUALIFICATIONS A. 1.6 Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified with minimum three years continuous documented experience. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. B. 1.7 Conform to applicable codes for requirements for the physically handicapped, safety and egress. Manufacturer shall conform to tactile, Braille, letter size, and other requirements as required by Florida Building Code for Handicapped Accessibility and ANSI A117.1. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. 1.8 Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site per Section 01 66 00 –Product Storage and Handling Requirements. Package signs, labeled in name groups. Store adhesive attachment tape at ambient room temperatures. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. B. Do not install signs when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. Maintain recommended temperature during and after installation of signs. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLORIDA INVENTORY OF SCHOOL HOUSES (FISH) A. B. C. D. 2.2 Numbering system shall comply with Owner’s and Florida Department of Education FISH numbering system. Each space in each building shall be numbered in sequential numerical and alphabetical order using double digit number per building followed by dash and three digit space numbers. Ancillary spaces such as Storage Rooms accessed from main space may have alphabetical suffixes following number of main space such as 01-101A (only where floor level contains more than 99 spaces). Spaces on first floor shall start with number one (01) and upper floors shall start with the story number (02, 03, etc). MANUFACTURER September 15, 2015 101400 - Signage Page 2 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. Identifying devices shall be as manufactured by Architectural Sign Crafters, 5340 SE Sterling Circle, Stuart, FL 34997; Tel: 866-690-7446; Fax: 866-291-0180; Website: www.architecturalsigncrafters.com. Products of following manufacturers are acceptable providing their products equal or exceed the quality specified for signs of type, size, finish, letter style, and arrangement specified or required. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Images Graphic Specialties, Inc., 11803 Metro Parkway, Ft. Myers, FL 33912. Tel: 239561-6406 & 1-800-321-3718; Fax: 239-561-6407; website: www.imagesgs.com Gold Coast Signs & Designs, Inc., 1705 Donna Rd, #9, West Palm Beach, FL 33409; Tel: 561-689-7446; Fax: 561-687-1643; Website: [email protected]. Creative Sign Designs, 12801 Commodity Place, Tampa, FL 33626; Tel: 813-749-2301; website: creativesigndesign.com. Andco Industries Corp., 4100 Sheraton Court, Greensboro, NC 27410. Tel: 336-2994511 & 1-800-476-4700; Fax: 336-299-4700; website: andco.com. Best Sign Systems, Inc., 1202 N. Park Ave., Montrose, Colorado 81401. Tel: 1-800-2352378; Fax: 970-249-0223; website: bestsigns.com. Other sign manufacturers requesting approval shall submit documentation in accord with Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. BUILDING INTERIOR SIGNAGE A. B. Letter style shall be Helvetica Medium unless noted otherwise. Colors (except as noted in Paragraph ‘G’): Letters shall be white and background sign colors shall be either tan or blue as selected by Owner from manufacturer's standard colors. 1. 2. 3. 4. C. Color match shall be based on Sherwin Williams paint chips: Sign Background Color(s): SW 6116 - Tatami Tan, or SW 6783 - Amalfi Sign Letters: SW 7006 – Extra White. If project is addition to existing facility, match existing signage colors. Toilet Room Handicapped Signs 1. Furnish and install one sign depicting National Handicapped Symbol (wheelchair) at each toilet room, equipped with facilities for the handicapped. Size shall be 6" (153mm) by 6" (153mm) with 3/8” (9.5mm) radius corners. a. b. c. d. e. D. Material: 1/8" (3.175mm) thick matte acrylic plastic with edges eased. Graphic Process: Raised letters and Braille shall be formed as integral part of sign face or surface applied to sign face. Letters: Letters and numbers shall have width to height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a stroke width to height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. Letters and numbers shall be raised 1/32" (0.79mm) upper case Helvetica font type with Grade 2 Braille. Raised characters shall be 2” (51mm) high. Pictograms shall be accompanied by equivalent verbal description placed directly below pictogram. Mounting shall be with non-removable oval head screws at locations directed by Architect, 5’-0” (1520mm) AFF to centerline of sign. Characters and backgrounds shall be eggshell, matte or other non-glaze surface. Room Name and Number Signs 1. Signs shall include permanent building number above, room number and room name below with space for Instructor’s name insert below room name: a. September 15, 2015 Sign shall typically be 8” (203mm) wide x 8” (203mm) high except when name exceeds 10 letters and sign may be increased up to 12” wide (305mm). 101400 - Signage Page 3 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA b. 2. 3. 4. b. 6. 7. 8. b. 10. E. Location shall typically be located on latch side of room entrance door and mounted 5’-0” (1520mm) AFF to center of sign or as indicated on reviewed Shop Drawings. If typical location is glazed or otherwise unsuitable for sign mounting, sign may be relocated to hinged side of door. Spaces listed in Finish Schedule shall have at least one sign, or equal to number of doors accessing that space. Material: 1/8" (3.175mm) thick matte acrylic plastic with all edges eased. Graphic Process: Engraved letters and raised Braille letters shall be formed as an integral part of sign face or surface applied to sign face. Letters: a. 9. Name inserts will be provided by Owner. Insert space shall have clear covering and accommodate 7/8” (22 mm) high name inserts. Provide 3/8" (9.5mm) radius corners. Mounting: Non-removable oval head screws, using rawl plugs where mounted on masonry. Sign Locations: a. 5. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Letters and numbers shall be ¾” (19mm) high and have width to height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and stroke width to height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. Letters and numbers shall be raised 1/32" (0.79mm) upper case Helvetica font type with Grade 2 Braille. Raised characters shall be 2" (51mm) high. Pictograms shall be accompanied by the equivalent verbal description placed directly below pictogram. Characters and backgrounds must be eggshell, matte or other non-glaze surface. Storage Signs: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Provide and install at mechanical and electrical rooms signs mounted on doors to read as follows: "COMBUSTIBLE STORAGE NOT PERMITTED". Signs shall be matte acrylic plastic, red background with white letters 3” (76mm) high by width needed for copy and Braille, with 3/8" (9.5mm)radius corners. Mount on doors with non-removable oval head screws. Verify number signs required. Graphic Process: Raised letters and Braille shall be formed as an integral part of sign face. Letters: a. b. c. d. 6. Letters and numbers shall be ¾” (19mm) high and width to height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and stroke width to height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. Letters and numbers shall be raised 1/32" (0.79mm) upper case sans serif or simple sans serif type with Grade 2 Braille. Raised characters shall be 2" high. Pictograms shall be accompanied by equivalent verbal description placed directly below pictogram. Characters and backgrounds must be eggshell, matte or other non-glaze surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: September 15, 2015 101400 - Signage Page 4 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. C. D. E. 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Install signs in accord with manufacturer's written installation instructions and Florida Building Code Accessibility requirements. Room signs to be mounted 60" (152mm) to center above finish floor on walls adjacent to the latch side of door openings. Signs shall be attached with vandal resistant fasteners. Exterior signs shall be capable of withstanding wind speed per Florida Building Code for site location. Mounting locations for buildings shall be per approved Shop Drawings. CLEANING A. 3.3 After installation, graphic surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and damaged material shall be restored to original condition or replaced with new material. WARRANTY A. B. Warranty materials and labor for one (1) year from date of Substantial Completion for defects in workmanship or materials and promptly correct or replace faulty work when notified. Replace or reinstall undamaged signage failing to adhere for the warranty period for any reason. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 101400 - Signage Page 5 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 10 28 13 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Types of toilet accessories are as indicated and include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. 1.2 Attachment hardware and accessories required for complete installation. RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Section 01 66 00 – Product Storage and Handling Requirements. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 01 91 00 – Commissioning. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry. Section 06 10 53 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry. Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. Section 09 30 00 – Tiling. Section 10 21 16 – Shower and Dressing Compartments. REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. F. See Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, abbreviations, definitions and acronyms. 2014 Florida Building Code. 2014 Florida Fire Prevention Code. ANSI A117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped. ADA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) (Current Edition) – Provisions for Children. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. 2. 1.4 Soap Dispensers (Staff, Student and Public Toilets and at Kitchen, Workrooms and Classrooms sinks). Toilet Paper Dispensers. Framed Mirrors. Grab bars (H/C Toilets). Mob and Broom Holder (Custodial Closets). Under-lavatory Guards (Sinks with Hot Water). ASTM A123-13 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. ASTM B456-11e1 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. QUALITY ASSURANCE September 15, 2015 102813 - Toilet Accessories Page 1 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. 1.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Comply with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Manufacturer: Furnish products of each type from same manufacturer for project. FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. 1.6 Verify that field measurements are per applicable codes and standards, and as indicated in manufacturer’s product data. SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. E. 1.7 Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions on each material and component part, including data substantiating materials comply with project requirements. Samples: Submit one sample of each type of accessory required. Accessories will be returned for use in project. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each type of accessory indicated. Include sections of typical installations and dimensioned elevations referencing mounting heights. Indicate anchorage materials, grounds, reinforcement and installation details. Certification: Submit Manufacturer's certification that materials furnished comply with specified requirements. WARRANTY A. B. C. Comply with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Mirror Warranty: 15 years from Substantial Completion, for replacement of mirror and frame other than acts of abuse or vandalism. Other Accessory Warranty: 5 year warranty for replacement units due to manufacturer’s defects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. B. 2.2 Model Numbers indicated are basis of design from each approved manufacturer. Manufacturers or products not listed shall comply with Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Toilet and Bath Accessory Manufactures: 1. 2. 3. 4. American Specialties, Inc., P. O. Box 910, Harrison, AK 72602-0910; Tel: (870) 7432200; Fax: (870) 743-1908; Web Site: www.americanspecialities.com. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc., 1117 Bowers Ave., P. O. Box 1000, New Philadelphia, OH 44663-5100; Tel: (330) 343-8825; Fax: (330) 343-9515; Web Site: www.bobrick.com. Bradley Corporation, W142 N9101 Fountain Blvd., Minomonee Falls, WI 53051; Tel: 1 800 272-3539; Fax: 262-251-5817; Web Site: www.bradleycorp.com. Georgia Pacific, Inc., 133 Peachtree St. NE, Atlanta, GA 30303; Tel: 404-652-4000, 800-839-2588; Fax: 901-; Website: www.gp.com. September 15, 2015 102813 - Toilet Accessories Page 2 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. Mirrors (M1, M2): 1. 2. 3. C. 2. Bobrick: B-6806.99 x 24” (GB1); B-6806.99 x 36”(GB2); B-6806.99 x 42” (GB3); B6806.99 x 48” (GB4). Bradley: 812-7 24” (GB1); 812-7 36”(GB2); 812-7 42”(GB3); 812-7 48” (GB4). SOAP DISPENSERS A. Soap Disperser (SD). 1. 2.4 Manufacturer: Deb SBS Inc., 1100 South Stanley, NC 28164; Tel: 704-263-4240; Fax: 704-263-3632; Website: www.debsbe.com. a. Model: Proline 1-Liter Blank White Dispenser with SBS Green Antibacterial Lotion Soap with PCMX. UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Underlavatory Guards Manufacturers: 1. 2. 2.5 Brocar Products, Inc., 4335 River Rd., Cincinnati, OH 45204, Tel: 1 800 827-1207; (513) 922-2288; Fax: (513) 922-5777; Web Site: www.brocar.com. Truebro, Inc., 202 Industrial Park Land, P. O. Box 440, Collierville, TN 38017, Tel: 1 800 489-4848, Fax: (901) 259-8048; Web Site: www.truebro.com. MATERIAL FABRICATION A. B. C. D. E. 2.6 Bobrick: 2860. American Specialties: 8522. Bradley: 2493. Grab Bar (GB1), (GB2), (GB3), (GB4). 1. 2.3 Bobrick: B-2860. Georgia Pacific: 59493. American Specialties: 0042. Bradley: 5424. Paper Towel Dispenser (PTD3)(without waste receptacle in single toilets: 1. 2. 3. E. Bobrick: B-165 1824(M1); B-165 1830 (M2)(Handicapped Locations). American Specialties: 0600-18 x 24(M1); 0600-18 x 30 (M2). Bradley: 780-1824 (M1); 780-1830 (M2). Toilet Tissue Dispensers (TTD): 1. 2. 3. 4. D. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Weld and grind joints of fabricated metal components, smooth. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end attachment flanges. Form bar with 1-1/2" (3.81 cm) clear of wall surface. Knurl grip surfaces. Shop assembled components and package complete with anchors and fittings. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. KEYING September 15, 2015 102813 - Toilet Accessories Page 3 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. 2.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Supply four keys for each keyed accessory scheduled to Owner’s Project Manager. Master key all keyed accessories noted in the schedule. FINISHES A. B. C. D. E. F. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 to 1.25-oz/sq yd. Galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pre-treat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and baked. Enamel: Pre-treat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B456, Type SC 2 satin finish. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin luster finish. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. B. 3.2 Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabricate where possible, to ensure proper fit of work. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay work. INSTALLATION A. B. C. 3.3 Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated and in accord with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation. Coordinate job-site assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories, join parts with neat, precision fit. Comply with 2010 Florida Building Code – 2012 Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction. ADJUST AND CLEAN A. B. Verify that accessories required for each unit are properly installed and that operating units function properly. Clean surfaces and trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions leaving ready for use. PART 4 - SCHEDULE 4.1 ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. B. Symbols indicated herein shall be used to identify Toilet Accessories on Drawings. ITEM SYMBOL CATALOG NO.DESCRIPTION 1. 2. TPD MH September 15, 2015 GP 59493 B-223 x 36 Surface mounted toilet paper dispenser. Surface mounted stainless steel mop holder. (Provide at each Custodial Closet) 36" long unless otherwise noted. 102813 - Toilet Accessories Page 4 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. SD FSD PTD1/2/3 FND M1 M2 GB1 B-680 Deb Proline B-2860 B-254 B-290 1830 B-290 1836 B-6806 10. GB2 B-6806 11. GB3 B-6806 12. GB4 B-6806 13. SCR1 B-207 14. SCR2 B-207 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. TH SS WR HD ICS SD B-2116 B-5181 B-39603 XL-W B-2210 B-680 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Stainless steel soap dish. Wall mounted foam soap dispenser. Surface mounted roll paper towel dispenser Surface mounted feminine napkin disposal. Laminated glass mirror 18" x 30". Laminated glass mirror 18" x 36". 24” x 1½" diameter peened grip horizontal grab bar with concealed mounting; stainless steel. 30” x 1½" diameter peened grip horizontal grab bar with concealed mounting; stainless steel. 36” x 1½" diameter peened grip horizontal grab bar with concealed mounting; stainless steel. 48" x 1½" diameter peened grip horizontal grab bar with concealed mounting; stainless steel. 36” heavy-duty shower curtain rod with concealed mounting with Model No. 204-3 Vinyl shower curtain and 7 No. 204-1 Stainless steel shower curtain hooks. 72” heavy-duty shower curtain rod with concealed mounting with Model No. 204-3 Vinyl shower curtain and 12 No. 204-1 Stainless steel shower curtain hooks. Towel hook. Folding shower seat. Surface mounted waste receptacle. Surface mounted hand or hand dryer. Folding wall mount infant changing station. Soap dish. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 102813 - Toilet Accessories Page 5 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 10 44 00 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work consists of labor, material and related items necessary to complete following installation: 1. 2. 3. 1.2 Fire extinguishers. Cabinets. Accessories. RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 1.3 Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 70 00 – Execution and Closeout Requirements. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry. Section 09 21 00 – Plaster and Gypsum Board Assemblies. QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. B. C. D. E. F. 1.4 Comply with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Comply with Florida Fire Prevention Code, 2010 Edition. Conform to NFPA 10-2013: Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.. Use skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced and familiar with specified requirements and methods required for the work. Provide fire extinguishers, cabinets, fire blankets and accessories by single manufacturer. Identify listing and labeling organization, fire test, and performance standard that fire extinguishers meet and shall be clearly marked on each fire extinguisher. REFERENCES A. B. Comply with Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, definitions, abbreviations and acronyms. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. 2. 3. C. D. Carbon Dioxide Types: ANSI/UL 154-14, Carbon-Dioxide Fire Extinguishers. Dry Chemical Types: ANSI/UL 299-12: Dry Chemical Extinguishers. Water Types: ANSI/UL 626-12: Water Fire Extinguishers. UL 711-2004: Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 2001-12, Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems, latest edition. September 15, 2015 104400 - Fire Protection Specialties Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA a. 2. E. F. 1.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Portable fire extinguishers shall be listed and labeled and meet or exceed requirements of ANSI/UL 711. NFPA 10-2013: Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers. Florida Building Code, 2010 Edition. Florida Fire Prevention Code, 2010 Edition. SUBMITTALS A. B. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Submittals shall include following information for review: 1. 2. 3. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed cabinets, wall bracket mounting measurements and locations. Dimension drawings to depict space required, and interface with work of other trades. Product Data: a. b. c. d. 4. 1.6 Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, anchorage details. Manufacturer's brochure, specifications, and other data to prove compliance with specified requirements. Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which will become basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used in Work. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions indicating special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements. Maintenance Data: requirements. Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification WARRANTY A. B. Provide manufacturer’s warranty agreeing to repair or replace fire protection devices that fail due to materials or workmanship for six years from date of project substantial completion. Failures shall include defects and failures of cabinets and protection devices due to noncompliance with regulatory compliance, hydrostatic testing, faulty operation, pressure gages, valves and release levers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 1. 2. 3. B. Larsen's Manufacturing Co., 7421 Commerce Lane N.E., Minneapolis, MN 55432; Tel: 763-571-1181, 800-527-7367; Fax: 763-571-6900; Website: www.larsensmfg.com. th Potter Roemer, Division of Acorn Engineering Co., 8306 NW 14 St., Miami, FL 33126; Tel: 866-961-3473; Fax: 866-960-0844; Website: www.potterroemer.com. th J.L. Industries, Inc., Division of Activar Construction Group, 4450 W. 78 Street Circle, Bloomington, MN 55435;Tel: 800-554-6077; Fax: 952-835-2218; Website: www.activarcpg.com. Cabinets: September 15, 2015 104400 - Fire Protection Specialties Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3. C. 2.2 Larsen’s: 2409-6R, 2-1/2” (6.35cm) , semi recessed aluminum with full acrylic view panel. Potter Roemer:7042, 2-1/2” (6.35cm), semi recessed aluminum with full acrylic view panel J.L. Industries:1027, 2-1/2” (6.35cm), semi recessed aluminum with full acrylic view panel Fire Extinguishers (in cabinets): 1. 2. 3. D. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Larsen’s: Potter Roemer: J.L. Industries: MP5. 3005. Cosmic 5E. Products of other manufacturers shall comply with Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. EXTINGUISHERS A. B. Multi-purpose Dry Chemical Type: UL 299, Enameled steel tank with pressure gauge size and classification as scheduled, or if not scheduled, provide 2-A: 10-B:C units. Extinguisher Finish: 1. 2.3 Multi-purpose units: Heavy-duty, DOT steel cylinders with corrosion and impact resistant polyester/epoxy paint finish. CABINETS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. 2.4 Metal: Formed sheet aluminum; 3” (7.62cm) trim, 2-1/2” (6.35cm) deep semi-recessed type, per drawing details and locations, sized to accommodate required extinguishers, and accessories. Trim Type: Semi-recessed unit. Door: Aluminum, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch with full glazed access panel. Door Glazing: Plastic, clear, 1/8" (3.18mm) thick acrylic. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet and extinguisher size and weight. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Formed perimeter trim and door stiles. Pre-drill for anchors and accessories. Hinge doors for 180° opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon catch. Glazed door with resilient channel gasket glazing. Cabinet Exterior Finish, Trim and Door: Satin chrome aluminum finish. Cabinet Interior Finish: Aluminum. ACCESSORIES A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chromed finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Verify rough openings, dimensions and clearances are correctly sized and located prior to start of installation. September 15, 2015 104400 - Fire Protection Specialties Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. C. 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Examine areas and conditions under which work will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Verify servicing, charging and tagging of fire extinguishers. Include servicing information on tags attached to each fire extinguisher. INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. Occupancy hazard protection shall be provided by fire extinguishers suitable for fire potentials as might be present and as indicated on drawings and schedules. Area protected and travel distances shall be based on fire extinguishers installed in accord with NFPA 10. Coordinate with other trades to ensure proper installation. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings in accord with NFPA 10, original design, approved Shop Drawings and manufacturer's written installation procedures. Anchor components firmly into position for long life under hard use. Secure cabinets rigidly in place without degrading fire rating of wall. Do not install extinguishers until Substantial Completion inspection date or immediately prior to building and fire officials inspection. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets or on wall brackets as indicated. Inspection tags shall be current, as of date of Substantial Completion, for period of one year. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 104400 - Fire Protection Specialties Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 10 51 26 - SOLID PLASTIC LOCKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. B. Related Sections: 1. 2. 1.2 Solid plastic lockers. a. 12”X12”X12” units; 18 Lockers Division 01: Administrative, procedural, and temporary work requirements.. Division 03: Concrete Locker Base SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. 2. 3. 1.3 Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned layout, elevations, trim, closures, and accessories. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive data. Samples: 3 x 3 inch samples showing available colors. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. 1.4 Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in manufacture of solid plastic lockers with products in satisfactory use under similar service conditions. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in work of this Section. WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer’s 25 year warranty against breakage, corrosion, and delamination under normal conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. B. 2.2 Contract Documents are based on products by Scranton Products. (www.scrantonproducts.com) Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. MATERIALS A. Solid Plastic Panels: 1. Lockers: September 15, 2015 105126 - Solid Plastic Lockers Page 1 of 2 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA a. b. 2. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 High impact, high density polyethylene (HDPE) formed under high pressure into solid plastic components with homogeneous color throughout, with smooth orange peel finish. Edges machined to accept assembly brackets. Color: To be selected from manufacturer’s full color range. COMPONENTS - LOCKERS A. B. C. D. E. 2.4 Locker Doors and Frames: 1/2 inch thick. Sides, Tops, Bottoms, Backs, and Shelves: 3/8 inch thick. Latch: Continuous type, manufactured from HDPE, capable of accepting various locking mechanisms, fastened to entire length of door. Door Hinge: Heavy duty extruded aluminum, full length, assembled onto door and locker front. Assembly Profile: Full height of lockers, PVC plastic, snap fit assembled onto locker sides. FABRICATION A. B. C. D. Fabricate locker components square and rigid, finish free from scratches and chips. Fabricate locker components for snap-together assembly or slide-together dovetail conections providing solid and secure, anti-racking construction. Fabricate adjacent lockers with common side panel. Fabricate locker units for assembly in maximum of three adjacent lockers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. 3.2 Install lockers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings. Set lockers on prepared 6” high concrete locker base. Set plumb, level, rigid, and aligned. Attach lockers to supporting construction with anchors best suited to substrate conditions. ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and latches to operate correctly. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 105126 - Solid Plastic Lockers Page 2 of 2 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 11 40 00 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT CONTENTS OF SECTION 11400 PART 1 - INTRODUCTION 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 SCOPE DEFINITIONS DESCRIPTION OF WORK RELATED WORK NOT PART OF THIS SECTION PRODUCT HANDLING APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS SUBMITTALS JOB CONDITIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 GENERAL MATERIALS FINISHES FABRICATION MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT COLD STORAGE ROOMS PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 DELIVERY INSTALLATION START-UP AND TESTING CLEAN-UP WARRANTIES PART 4 - ITEMIZED SPECIFICATIONS September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 1 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 11 40 00 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 1 - INTRODUCTION 1.1 SCOPE A. 1.2 The Work referred to in this Section consists of furnishing all labor and material required to provide and deliver all equipment, hereinafter specified, into the building, uncrate, assemble, hang, set-in-place, level and completely install exclusive of final utility connections. DEFINITIONS A. B. C. D. E. 1.3 All references to the terms: "Contractor", "Kitchen Equipment Contractor", "Foodservice Equipment Contractor", "KEC", or "FSEC" in this section of the Contract Documents shall be defined to mean the Foodservice Equipment Contractor. These terms when used in the Contract Documents shall be considered one and the same and may be referred to as if singular in number and masculine in gender. All references to the term "Owner" in the Contract Documents shall be defined to mean the Owner or the Owner's designated representative. The phrases "The FSEC shall" or "by the FSEC", as applicable, is understood to be included as a part of each sentence, paragraph or article of these Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated or specified. All references to the term "Work" mean the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, products, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. All references to the term: “Not In Kitchen Equipment Contract” (N.I.K.E.C.) shall be defined to mean work, materials or equipment not part of the scope of this section. Coordination of these items shall still be the responsibility of the General Contractor. DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. Furnish all labor, materials and products required to completely provide, deliver and install all foodservice equipment as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings. The Work shall be performed in such a manner as to complete the function for which it is designed and intended by the Consultant. The Work shall be in strict accordance with the Drawings and Specifications and coordinated with all field dimensions and conditions verified prior to any fabrication. The Work shall be coordinated with the respective construction trades performing preparatory work for the installation of equipment under this Contract, including, but not limited to: construction of pits, trenches, receptors; rough-in of plumbing/mechanical work; rough-in of ductwork; rough-in of electrical work; and rough-in of conduits, penetrations and sleeves. Perform all work and supply all materials in strict accordance with all state, federal and municipal laws, codes, ordinances, regulations and directions of inspectors having jurisdiction. If in the event any information contained in these Contract Documents does not conform to code the Contractor must immediately notify the Architect/Consultant. Inspect all preparatory work, including utility rough-ins, to insure proper installation. Supervise and inspect the utility connections to all foodservice equipment items. Secure and pay for all permits, licenses, inspections and tests required for the Work contained herein. Supply to the Owner two (2) copies of all certificates of compliance with inspections and tests required. September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 2 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA K. L. M. N. O. 1.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Coordinate with the respective trades all specific utility requirements (ie. voltage/cycle/phase, water, steam and gas pressure, etc.) so that equipment supplied will operate according to the manufacturer's specifications. Install all equipment so as to operate safely and efficiently. Provide additional vents, guards, deflectors and other accessories as required at no additional cost. Note such additions and modifications on submittals and shop drawings and bring to the attention of the Consultant by accompanying letter. Coordinate the requirements and installation but do not handle (unless specifically stated) items supplied “By Others”, noted on Contract Documents as "Not In Contract" (NIC), "Not In Kitchen Equipment Contract (NIKEC), “By Others” (B.O.), “By Vendor”, “By Owner”, etc. Show utility, space and other requirements, in submittal, as if item was supplied by this Contractor. Coordinate the requirements and installation of items noted on the Contract Documents as "Existing". Show utility, space and other requirements, in submittals, as if item was supplied by this Contractor. Trim and seal all items, directed by the Consultant and/or Board of Health, to insure a safe and sanitary operation. RELATED WORK NOT A PART OF THIS SECTION (unless otherwise shown or specified in these Contract Documents). See Article 1.2 above. KEC shall define the Work noted below and that portion shall be assigned by the General Contractor to other trades. A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 1.5 Electrical: Systems and services including wiring to and final connection of all foodservice equipment and components. All controls, starters, shut-offs, switches, etc. that are necessary for the complete and proper installation of the foodservice equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall provide and install all control circuits for fire, alarm, exhaust, refrigeration, defrost and waste systems. The Electrical Contractor shall interconnect and assemble all electrical components, wiring and systems of the foodservice equipment which requires field assembly. Plumbing: The Plumbing Contractor shall provide all systems and services including: water, direct and indirect waste, gas, steam, and cooling water to and the final connection of all foodservice equipment and components. All controls, valves, regulators, traps, etc. that are necessary for the complete and proper installation of the foodservice equipment. The Plumbing Contractor shall interconnect and assemble all plumbing components, piping and systems of the foodservice equipment which requires field assembly. Ventilating systems and services including: ductwork, curbs, fans and final connection to exhaust hoods. All controls, starters, shut-offs, switches, etc. that are necessary for the complete and proper installation of the foodservice equipment. Adequate backing in walls and structure in building to support the foodservice equipment when fully loaded. Masonry pits, trenches, curbs and bases for foodservice equipment. Flooring, wall and ceiling coverings and finishes. Conduit, chases, sleeves and penetrations required in the building structure for installation of foodservice systems. PRODUCT HANDLING A. B. C. D. All items shall be delivered, uncrated, assembled and set-in-place in a safe workmanlike manner. All items shall be at all times covered, protected and secured until final acceptance. All responsibility shall rest with the Contractor for any damage or loss incurred prior to final acceptance. The Contractor shall schedule his deliveries and movements upon the site to prevent delays in other Contractor's work and shall coordinate all on-site activities with the General Contractor. Items Listed As "Existing". The General Contractor shall give the Owner written notice ten (10) days prior to the disconnection of existing equipment. The Owner shall then have the right to remove any and all existing equipment from the site and retain ownership of said equipment. The General Contractor shall disconnect, protect, move and store all existing equipment items that are to be reused on this project. September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 3 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA E. F. 1.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 The Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall clean, refurbish, repair and restore to good working condition all existing items that are to be reused on this project. The F.S.E.C. shall reassemble and set-in-place all existing items that are to be reused as shown on plan. The General Contractor shall remove and dispose of all equipment not claimed by the Owner ten (10) days after the date of disconnection of said equipment. APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. 1.7 All items are to be manufactured and installed in compliance with the requirements of the governmental authorities having jurisdiction and to the latest current edition of the following standards: NSF Standards: Comply with the National Sanitation Foundation standards and criteria and provide the NSF "Seal of Approval" on each item. UL Standards: Comply with the Underwriters Laboratory standards and criteria and provide the "UL" Label for all items showing the UL Approval for the use intended by these Contract Documents. Where no labeling service is available, provide a complete index of the components used as selected from the UL "Recognized Component Index". AGA Standards: Comply with the American Gas Associations standards and criteria and provide the "AGA" Approval Label on all gas-fired items. All gas-fired items are to be designed and equipped to operate on the type of gas available at the site and shall contain 100% automatic safety shut-off devices. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI Z21-Series Standards for gas-burning equipment. Comply with ANSI B57.1 for compressed gas cylinder connections and with the applicable standards of the Compressed Gas Association for water connection air gaps and vacuum breakers. ASME Code: Comply with ASME Boiler Code Requirements for steam generating and steam heated equipment; provide ASME inspection, stamps and certification of registration with National Board. National Electrical Code: Comply with the NEC Volume 5 for electrical wiring and devices included with foodservice equipment. NFPA Standards: Comply with NFPA Bulletin 96 for exhaust systems and with NFPA Bulletins 13, 17, and 96 for fire extinguishing systems. Where these Contract Documents require mechanical, electrical or refrigeration work to be performed, such work shall be performed in strict conformance to the other portions of the Base Building Specification which sets forth standards for this type of work. Comply with all authorities having jurisdiction over this type of equipment and/or installation. Rulings and interpretations of the enforcing agencies shall be considered a part of the regulations. No extra charge will be paid for furnishing items required by the regulations or the authorities but not specified in the Contract Documents. SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. The following requirements may exceed the requirements stated in the Division 1 Sections for Submittals. Submittal requirements shall be as noted herein. Furnish the Architect/Consultant, in accordance with the project schedule, the following Submittals. Each Submittal shall be in electronic PDF Format. The number of copies of all submittals for distribution shall be determined by the Architect/Consultant and shall be provided by the Contractor upon request at no additional charge. Submittals shall be submitted as a complete package (ie. all shop drawings, product data sheets, samples, etc), no partial submittals will be accepted. The Consultant will not be held responsible for cross-checking information provided in incomplete or partial submittals. The Architect/Consultant shall check and review submittals for design concept only. The approval of Submittals, by the Architect/Consultant does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to comply with all Contract Requirements. Product Data Book: The Product Data Book shall be bound in hard cover. Each item shall be represented with a Product Data Cover Sheet (see sample) listing the following: Item No., quantity, description, manufacturer, model, specified accessories, utility requirements, special September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 4 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. 1.8 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 requirements, and notes. Each Product Data Sheet shall be followed by all the manufacturer's catalog and engineering data pertaining to the item. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall be submitted for all items specified for fabrication. These items shall be illustrated, detailed and dimensioned to a minimum scale of 3/4"=1'-0" for plan and elevation views and 1 1/2"=1'-0" for section views. Shop drawings shall specifically note all makes and models of components and all gauges, types and finishes of materials to be used. Rough-in Drawings: Electrical and mechanical Rough-in Drawings shall be submitted on separate sheets for each trade. Each drawing shall be detailed to 1/4"=1-0" scale and dimensioned showing each item's requirements and the exact points of penetration through floors, walls and ceilings. These drawings shall also show the exact point of connection and interconnection for each item. All dimensions shall be shown from fixed building structures (ie. center lines of columns). Foundation and Backing Drawings: Foundation and Backing Drawings shall be submitted detailing and locating any and all special foundations, structures and supports required for any items. Special Conditions Drawings: Special Conditions Drawings shall be submitted detailing and locating any and all special conditions required for any item. Sleeve, Conduit and Chase Drawings: Sleeve, Conduit and Chase Drawings shall be submitted detailing and locating any and all sleeves, conduit and chases required for any item. In the event rough-ins and/or building construction have been accomplished before award of the Foodservice Equipment Contract, the FSEC shall check and compare the site to the Contract Documents and furnish all equipment to suit existing conditions. No extra charges shall be allowed for changes required to adapt to existing conditions. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Before installation begins the Contractor shall submit three (3) bound sets of manufacturers Operation and Maintenance Manuals for each item. Included in with each bound set shall be a list of each item, the manufacturer's name and phone number and the local service agencies name and phone number. Samples: Samples of materials, products and fabrication methods shall be submitted for review upon request at no additional cost. JOB CONDITIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. Inspect the site immediately upon award of Contact and regularly during the construction of preparatory work to insure adequate and proper delivery and installation. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and the Architect/Consultant, in writing, immediately if any obstacles or discrepancies are discovered. The Contractor shall supervise, coordinate and inspect all preparatory work and assure no conditions at the site will hinder or obstruct the easy access of delivery and set-in-place of each item to its designated final location. Any removal and/or replacement of building structure necessary to deliver and set-in-place items, caused by lack of coordination or inaccurate information on the part of the FSEC, shall be done at the expense of the FSEC and at no additional cost to the Owner. All special handling including but not limited to: early delivery, door or window removal, hoisting and rigging shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. The Contractor shall physically check all stub-ups and rough-ins before slabs are poured and before floors, walls and ceilings are finished. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Consultant of any problems or discrepancies. If any corrections are required later to correctly install an item, the corrections will be made at the expense of the FSEC and at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall field check actual wall dimensions and rough-ins and be responsible for furnishing, fabricating and installing each item in accordance with the existing or finished conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 5 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.1 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 GENERAL A. B. C. D. 2.2 All equipment and all components of equipment shall be new and unused. All items shall be the current model of the manufacturer at the time of delivery. All parts that require lubrication and/or are subject to wear shall be easily accessible for maintenance, repair and replacement. All equipment shall be designed and manufactured for safe and convenient operation. MATERIALS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. If requested by the Architect/Consultant, the Contractor shall, submit a certified copy of the material's mill analysis. Stainless Steel (abbreviated "S/S"): All exposed S/S surfaces shall be Type 304, 18-8, with a No. 4 finish. All exposed S/S surfaces shall be uniform throughout in color, finish and appearance. A No. 2B finish shall be acceptable on surfaces not exposed to view. Stainless Steel Tubing: All S/S tubing and pipe shall be Type 304, 18-8, with a No. 4 finish. Galvanized Steel: All galvanized steel shall be electro-galvanized, cold-rolled, copper bearing steel. Aluminum: All aluminum shall be alloy Type 1110 with No. 204-CI finish for surfaces exposed to view. White Metal Castings: All white metal castings shall be corrosion resistant containing not less than 21% nickel. Castings shall be free from pit marks, checks and other imperfections. Castings shall be rough ground, polished and buffed to a bright luster. Plastic Laminates: All plastic laminates shall comply with NSF Standard 35 and NEMA #LD375. Plastic laminates shall be 0.05" thick, high pressure type with smooth texture, unless otherwise specified. Plastic laminates shall be adhered with water-proof adhesive under pressure in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Plywood: All plywood for laminate assemblies shall be five (5) or seven (7) ply water-resistant construction, finished to specified thickness. Cutting Boards: All cutting boards, unless otherwise specified, shall be NSF Approved, composition type, high density, non-toxic, non-cellular, self-sealing, proprietary rubber compound. Example: Tecknor Apex Co. "Sani-Tuff" or equal. All cutting boards, unless otherwise specified, shall be fastened by S/S pins or S/S clips (see details) and easily removable without the use of tools. All cutting boards, unless otherwise specified, shall be a minimum of 3/4" thick ( 1" minimum when located on or adjacent to warm or heated areas). Caulking and Sealants: All caulking and sealants shall be NSF Approved and considered nontoxic. All caulking and sealants shall be applied in a neat and smooth manner in either clear or approved color. Fasteners: All fasteners shall be stainless steel where exposed to view and corrosion resistant steel where not exposed to view. Where brass or chrome are fastened, fasteners are to be of brass and chrome respectively. Where two dissimilar metals are fastened the fasteners shall be of the higher grade metal. Rivets of any variety are not acceptable. Insulation: All insulation for heated areas shall be a minimum of one (1") inch thick fiberglass. All insulation for cold areas shall be polyurethane in form and thickness as specified. Breaker strips shall be provided where installing hot or cold units in counters, so as to prevent condensation and heat transfer. Metal Gauge: All metals are to be manufactured to the following minimum thickness’: USS GAUGE 12 Ga. 14 Ga. 16 Ga. 18 Ga. 20 Ga. September 15, 2015 Decimal Thickness Millimeter Thickness .1094" .0781" .0625" .0500" .0375” 2.78 1.98 1.59 1.27 0.95 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 6 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA P. Q. R. S. T. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Hardware: All hardware shall be of the highest quality with manufacturers name and model numbers submitted on shop drawings for approval. Locks: All locks shall be interchangeable core, master keyed system as manufactured by: Best Lock Corp. or an approved equal. All locks are to be keyed different, except where locks are in one item. All locks are to be keyed to one (1) master key. Verify lock/key requirements with Owner. Supply two (2) keys per lock and a total of four (4) master keys. Glass: All glass unless otherwise specified shall be bonded/laminated tempered safety glass. All exposed edges shall be ground smooth and polished and framed with a S/S trim channel edge. FINISHES A. B. C. D. 2.4 Stainless steel exposed surfaces shall be polished to a No. 4 Finish. Stainless steel unexposed surfaces shall be polished to a No. 2B Finish. The grain of material and polish shall run in the same direction wherever possible. Galvanized framework and exposed surfaces shall be cleaned, degreased, properly primed, and finished with two (2) coats of epoxy-based gray hammertone paint. Paint and other coatings shall be of an NSF Approved material suitable for use in a foodservice environment.Paint and other coatings shall be durable, non-toxic, non-dusting, non-flaking, and mildew resistant and shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Sound deadening shall be NSF Approved, evenly sprayed-on 1/8" thick with an aluminum sprayed-on finish. FABRICATION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. All fabricated items shall be fabricated in the same factory and shall be similar in construction details, materials, methods and appearance. Shop drawings must be submitted and reviewed for all fabricated items before any fabrication can begin. All finished field dimensions and conditions must be verified, by the Contractor, prior to fabrication. All fabricated items shall be reinforced, braced, and welded with the proper structure to insure stability, safety and strength. All fabricated tops, body panels and drainboards shall be constructed from single sheets of material, wherever possible with standard sheet sizes. All flat surfaces shall be secured to bracing members by weld or approved fasteners to eliminate all buckles, warps and unwanted movement. All fastening devices shall be unexposed, wherever possible. Where fasteners have to be exposed they shall be counter-sunk and ground smooth. METAL TOP CONSTRUCTION: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. All metal tops shall be 14 Ga. stainless steel, one piece welded construction. No hairline or bolted seams will be acceptable without prior written approval by the Consultant. All metal tops, where open or exposed, shall be reinforced with 1" X 4" 14 Ga. S/S hat channels spaced not more than 30" O.C. apart and fastened as required. All metal tops, where not open or exposed, shall be reinforced with 1 1/2" X 1 1/2" X 1/8" galvanized angle iron spaced and fastened as required. All metal tops, where specified, shall have integral back and/or side splashes. Splashes shall be the size and shape specified and detailed with radius horizontal and vertical corners and with closed ends. All edges shall be ground smooth free of burrs and shaped as detailed and specified. All metal tops shall be sound-deadened with an NSF Approved material, as specified in the "Materials" section of this specification. September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 7 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA I. J. K. L. M. GUSSETS: All gussets shall be Standard Keil #1020-0206-1283 or equal, stainless steel cylindrical fully enclosed sanitary type with set screws for securing leg. All gussets shall be continuously welded to the underside of the top's structural framework. LEGS for open tops and tables: All legs shall be 1 5/8" O.D. seamless, solid 16 Ga. stainless steel tubing. Legs shall not be placed more than 66" O.C. and not more than 30" front to back. LEGS for Cabinet Bodies: (see paragraphs 2.4.14) FEET: All feet shall be stainless steel and shall have enclosed bottoms. All feet shall fit up inside leg and shall be adjustable in height. 1. Feet for tubular legs: a. 2. O. Swivel Without Brake: Standard Keil #1153-4446-3000 Swivel With Brake: Standard Keil #1153-4445-3000 Casters for Cabinet Bodies: (see paragraphs 2.4.14) COUNTER AND CABINET CONSTRUCTION: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. All counters and cabinets shall be "Box Type" construction, without general interior framing, so that structural strength is achieved by the gauge of sheet metal and by integrally formed single angle or channel edges and corners. All counter and cabinet tops, bottoms and interior shelves shall be reinforced with underbracing, as detailed and specified. All counter and cabinet bodies shall be fully enclosed. Design and gauges of counter and cabinet bodies shall be as specified and detailed; 18 gauge material shall be a minimum. Counters and cabinets shall be provided with suitable pipe slots and chases, as required, to accommodate service and utility lines and mechanical connections. LEGS for counters and cabinets: Standard Keil #1072-0811-1755 CASTERS for counters and cabinets: a. b. Q. Swivel Without Brakes: Standard Keil #1151-4046-3000 Swivel With Brakes: Standard Keil #1151-4045-3000 CAFETERIA SERVING COUNTER CONSTRUCTION: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. R. (bolted to floor as directed by Architect) CROSS-RAILS: All cross-rails shall be 1 1/4" O.D. seamless, solid 16 Ga. S/S tubing continuously welded to legs at 10" above finished floor. CASTERS for tubular legs: 1. 2. 3. P. S/S Bullet Foot for movable items: Standard Keil #1012-1001-1144 S/S Flanged Foot for stationary items: Standard Keil #1012-1004-1144 a. N. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Bodies: See Itemized Specifications. All stress points in body shall be internally reinforced with steel channels and other reinforcing shapes. Tops: Serving counter tops shall be 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel with a No. 3 finish. All counter tops shall be one piece, continuous and finished without seams or joints. Tops shall be reinforced with channel bracing as required. Serving counters shall be mounted on 6 inch adjustable stainless steel legs. Serving counters shall have 12 inch wide, 14 gauge stainless steel, solid ribbed style trayslides as shown on plan. Trayslides shall be mounted on 8 inch 14 gauge stainless steel brackets with steel backing plates for reinforcement inside body the full height of cabinet. Student trayslides in elementary and middle schools shall finish at 30 inches above finished floor. Counter tops and trayslides shall have provisions to be locked together to form one continuous serving counter/trayslide system. REFRIGERATED BASE CONSTRUCTION: 1. See individual itemized specifications for refrigerated base requirements. September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 8 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA S. T. BREATHGUARDS AND CASEWORK: All breathguards and casework unless otherwise specified shall be fabricated from one inch square stainless steel tubing. All components shall be stainless steel including but not limited to hinges, brackets, fastening devices and trim. Protectors shall be laminated/bonded tempered safety glass with all edges ground smooth, polished and framed with S/S trim. All glass protectors shall be easily removable and cleanable. Items shall be fastened to counter tops from below so as to show no brackets or fastening devices. DRAINBOARD AND DISHTABLES: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. U. 2. 3. 4. 5. All shelves shall be 16 Ga. stainless steel, one piece welded construction. See details for specific applications. DOORS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. X. All sinks shall be 14 Ga. stainless steel, one piece welded construction and integral to the top of the unit. All sink compartments shall have one (1") inch radius cove horizontal and vertical corners with intersections meeting in spherical coves. All sink bottoms shall be pitched towards outlet and die-stamped to accommodate waste outlet fixture. All sinks with multiple compartments shall have continuous exteriors; openings between compartments or applied panels will not be accepted. All sinks shall be sound-deadened with an NSF Approved material, as specified in the "Materials" section of this specification. SHELVES: 1. W. All drainboards and dishtables shall be 14 Ga. stainless steel, one piece welded construction. No hairline or bolted seams will be accepted. All drainboards and dishtables shall be reinforced with 1" X 4" 14 Ga. S/S hat channels, spaced not more than 30" O.C. apart and fastened, as required. Front and ends, unless otherwise specified, shall be finished with a 3" high raised rolled edge (see standard detail). Drainboards and dishtables shall be pitched 1/8" per foot towards sinkbowls or dishwasher. Drainboards and dishtables over 2'-0" in length shall be supported with legs and/or crossbracing. All drainboards and dishtables, where specified, shall have integral back and sidesplashes. Splashes shall be the size and shape, as specified and detailed, with radius horizontal and vertical corners and closed ends. All drainboards and dishtables shall be sound-deadened with an NSF Approved material, as specified in the "Materials" section of this specification. SINKS: 1. V. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 All metal doors shall be: double pan type construction, structurally reinforced to prevent flexing, filled with an approved sound deadening insulation, and all corners fully welded. All metal doors shall be constructed of 18 Ga. S/S exteriors and 20 Ga. S/S interiors. All hinged doors shall be flush fitting type, mounted on concealed, 12 Ga. stainless steel, lift-off hinges. All sliding doors shall be self-closing and removable. Doors shall ride on high quality, ball bearing, nylon rollers in a 14 Ga. S/S overhead track. Doors shall be located and spaced from below by 1/4" dia. S/S pins welded to the cabinet body. The overhead track shall be concealed and equipped with limit stops to prevent telescoping of doors. All refrigerator doors shall be totally filled with polyurethane insulation without any voids. Doors shall be self-closing and equipped with a vinyl, grease-proof, magnetized gasket for a positive seal. All gaskets shall be easily removable for cleaning and/or replacement. DRAWERS: 1. All drawers shall be fabricated according to standard details. September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 9 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Y. 2. 3. 4. All welding shall be done by the heliarc method with welding rod of the same composition as the parts being welded. All welds shall be complete, strong, ductile and free from imperfections. All items shall be shop fabricated of one piece and shipped to the site completely assembled, whenever possible. Items that are too large to transport or deliver to their final location as one piece shall be constructed so that the field joints can be welded properly at the jobsite. All exposed welds shall be ground smooth and flush to harmonize with the adjoining material. All exposed welds shall be polished with the grain of the weld area blended to match the adjoining surfaces. All unexposed welds shall be rough ground and suitably coated with an approved metallic-based paint. BUTT AND CONTACT JOINTS: 1. 2. 3. 2.5 All drawers shall be constructed with a double pan, insulated, flush fitting front with an integral pull as detailed. All corners are to be fully welded. All drawer fronts shall be welded to a 14 Ga. S/S angle frame that will house and support the removable pan liner. All drawers shall be self-closing and ride on high quality, 150 lb. capacity, telescoping slides with S/S ball bearings, nylon rollers, vinyl bumpers and release catches for easy removal. St'd Keil #1425 Series. All drawers shall be provided with removable pan liners: Standard Keil Series #1481 (Stainless Steel) or Standard Keil Series #1480 (Kylite), as specified. All drawer fronts shall be equipped with an integral padlock hasp as detailed. WELDING: 1. Z. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Butt and contact joints shall only be used where designated and approved by the Consultant. All butt and contact joints shall be the "Bolted and Sealed Type" with an approved sealant, wherever possible. Material edges at the joint shall be straight, smooth and tight fitting. Overlapping materials, in no cases, will be accepted. MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT A. B. C. D. 2.6 All manufactured items and components parts shall be new and unused. All manufactured items shall be the manufacturers current model at the time of delivery. All manufactured items shall be provided with the manufacturers standard finish and accessories, unless otherwise specified. All manufactured items that require an electrical supply shall be UL listed, bear a UL label and be UL approved for the intended use. REFRIGERATED EQUIPMENT A. B. All refrigerated equipment and systems, self-contained and remote, shall be provide complete with all required electrical and refrigeration components to insure a proper and efficient operation. All refrigeration specifications are written to provide minimum requirements and scope of work. All refrigerated items shall be designed and installed to maintain the following general temperatures, unless otherwise specified: Type Refrigerator Freezer Walk-in Reach-in Undercounter +35 deg. F. +35 deg. F. +35 deg. F. -10 deg. F. -10 deg. F. -10 deg. F. September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 10 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA Cold Pans Work Rooms C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 2.7 +35 deg. F. +50 deg. F. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 0 deg. F. All refrigerated equipment with remote refrigeration systems shall be complete with thermostatic expansion valves at the evaporator. When the thermostatic expansion valve cannot be installed at the evaporator, it shall be located on the item, enclosed in a 20 Ga. S/S protective housing. All refrigerated items shall be equipped with a built-in, adjustable, calibrated dial thermometer. All refrigerated items, that are intended to operate at less than +35 deg. F., shall be equipped with an evaporator coil defrost system. The Contractor shall verify and provide manufacturer's certification that the equipment selected and specified herein is properly sized and engineered to meet the intended operating requirements. Refrigeration tubing shall be Type L, ACR hard drawn, degreased sealed copper and shall be installed with horizontal runs sloped 1" per 20 feet toward condensing units. All refrigerant tubing shall be properly hung supported. All vertical runs of more than 5'-0" shall be trapped at the bottom of the riser. Tubing shall be installed so that no refrigerant or oil can drain back into the coils from the suction line. All suction and refrigerant lines shall be insulated with a minimum 1/2" insulation approved for use in this application. Install a permanent suction line filter in each compressor suction line with pressure fitting located ahead of the filter to facilitate checking of pressure drop through the filter. COLD STORAGE ROOMS A. B. C. D. E. General: Cold Storage Rooms (Walk-ins) shall be constructed of pre-fabricated modular panels, size and shape as shown on plan. They shall be designed for easy and accurate field assembly, future enlargement by the addition of panels, or dismantling should relocation to an alternate site be desired. Construction shall be in strict compliance with NSF Standard 7. Panel Construction: All panels shall consist of interior and exterior metal surfaces precision roll formed to exact dimensions with vertical grooves spaced on 5 3/4" centers to enhance overall panel rigidity. The metal "skins" shall be placed into steel molds where liquid urethane is injected between them. The urethane shall be foamed-in-place (poured, not frothed) and, when completely heat-cured, shall bind tenaciously to the metal skins to form a 4 inch thick insulated panel. Panels (except reinforced ceiling types) shall contain 100% urethane insulation and have no internal wood or structural members between the skins. To insure tight joints, panel edges shall have foamed-in-place tongues and grooves with a flexible vinyl gasket on the interior and exterior of all tongue edges. Gaskets shall be resistant to damage from oil, fats, water and detergents and must be NSF-Approved. Finished panels will be 4" thick and will be provided in 23 inch and 46 inch widths to conform to project drawings. Panels 11 1/2 inch or 34 1/2 inch wide are to be furnished only if required to fit the allocated space. To assure perfect alignment and maximum strength, corner panels shall be one piece 90 Deg. angled construction and shall measure 12 inch X 12 inch. For units with multiple compartments, specially designed "tee" panels shall be provided to form partition wall to outside wall junctures. "Tee" panels shall measure 23 inch X 12 inch or 23 inch X 6 1/2 inch where required. All panels shall be interchangeable with like panels or standard door frame sections for fast and easy assembly. All panels shall be equipped with "Locking-Cam" style joining devices. The distance between locks shall not exceed 46 inches. Each device shall consist of a cam-action hooked locking arm placed in one panel and a steel rod positioned in the adjoining panel. When the arm is rotated, the hook shall engage over the rod and draw the panels tightly together with a cam action. Arms and rods shall be housed in individual steel pockets. Pockets on one side of the panel shall be connected across the width of the panel to pockets on the other side of the panel by the use of 2 inch wide steel straps set into the insulation. When panels are joined together, these straps shall form lock-to-lock-to-lock... connections for extra strength. Insulation: Insulation shall be foamed-in-place (poured, not frothed) urethane, fully heat cured and bonded to metal finishes. September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 11 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. N. O. P. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 The insulation shall be Underwriters Laboratories certified as having a flame spread of 25 or lower and smoke generation of 450 or lower when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84-76. Panels shall also, when tested by Factory Mutual in accordance with FM-4880, be approved as a Factory Mutual Class I building type. Panels shall meet 1998 CFC standards as set by the 1987 Montreal Protocol, employing a process that reduces CFC use by 60 percent or more. The "Poured-Foam" process shall utilize HCFC-141B exclusively, with an ozone depletion factor of .1 (one tenth that of such CFC foaming agents as R-11 and R-12). The insulation shall have a thermal conductivity ("K" factor) not to exceed 0.133 BTU/Hour/Square Foot/Degree Fahrenheit/Inch of Thickness across the entire width of the panel. Overall coefficient of heat transfer ("U" factor) shall not exceed 7.5 and the resistance to heat penetration ("R" factor) shall not be less than 30. The insulation shall have a 97% closed cell structure to prevent absorption of liquids. Floor Construction: Where pre-fabricated floor panels are required, they shall be of similar design to other panels and shall incorporate a fully die formed 1/4" NSF coved radius at all interior floor to wall junctures. Floor panels shall be capable of supporting evenly distributed loads up to 600 pounds per square foot and equipped with fully foamed-in-place integral interior ramps when and where shown. Where floorless units are required, a 1 3/4" high vinyl floor screed shall be provided to attach all wall panels to the finished building floor. Floor screeds shall incorporate NSF coves on interior and exterior sides and shall be mechanically fastened to fit flat against the finished floor. Floor screeds and wall panels shall have matching tongue and groove edges and cam lock together to form an air-tight seal leaving no exposed fasteners. Door Construction: Entrance doors are constructed similar to other panels and shall be flush mount, magnetic in-fitting type. Door sections shall be constructed to conform to Underwriters Laboratory Standards for electrical safety and shall bear all appropriate U.L. listing labels. The top and sides of the door shall be fitted with a thermoplastic gasket with a magnetic core. The magnetic force of the gasket shall keep the door in a closed position and form an airtight seal with the door frame. The bottom edge of the door shall be fitted with a flexible, dual-blade wiper gasket. Gaskets shall be replaceable and resistant to damage from oils, fats, water, detergents and sunlight. All gaskets shall be NSF-Approved. Construction of the door panel shall include a heavy, "U"-shaped channel-type reinforced steel frame around the entire perimeter of the door opening to prevent racking and twisting. Thermostatically controlled a anti-condensate heater wires shall be concealed behind the metal edge of the door jambs on all four sides. An additional heater shall be concealed beneath the exterior edges of the doorcap around its entire perimeter. Heaters shall be connected to an adjustable "Energy Saver Condensate Control" switch to provide sufficient heat to eliminate condensation and frost under various humidity conditions. Each door panel shall have an incandescent vapor-proof lamp on the interior side. A pilot light and toggle switch shall be mounted on the exterior. All interconnecting wires shall be installed in rigid conduit. A junction box shall be provided for 120 volt single phase service to the door panel. Each door panel shall have a 2 inch diameter flush-face dial-type thermometer. It shall provide readings in a range from minus 60 Deg. F. (-51.1 Deg. C.) to plus 80 Deg. F. (26.7 Deg. C.). Door hardware shall be satin finish aluminum (except for C.S.R. with S/S exteriors where polished aluminum shall be provided). Doors shall be mounted with two (2) heavy duty, spring loaded, self-closing cam lift hinges. Pull handle assembly shall incorporate a keyed cylinder lock and an inside safety release handle to prevent personnel entrapment. Positive door closing and sealing shall be assisted by a hydraulic closer device. Ceiling Support: Indoor cold storage rooms, between 15 feet and 25 feet wide shall be installed with self-supported ceiling panels, providing a column-free interior. This self-supporting ceiling system shall include steel “U” channels placed directly over ceiling panel joints. Ceiling panels are suspended from these channels by steel “hangers” spaced every 23 inches and secured with 3/8” dia. X 1½” bolts. The “U” channels shall transmit the weight of the ceiling to the wall panels where it shall be distributed evenly by load-bearing angles. Temporary support inside the Cold storage room must be provided when this supporting system is being installed. This self-supporting ceiling system is designed to support the ceiling panels only. Additional support structure must be added to accommodate evaporator coils and any other ceiling or wall hung equipment or shelving. September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 12 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA Q. R. S. 2.8 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Warranty: All parts of the Cold Storage Room structure (refrigeration systems and refrigeration components shall be covered under a separate warranty) shall be warranted against any defects in materials and/or workmanship under normal use and service. The manufacturer shall repair or replace any part of the structure which proves to be defective within a period of ten (10) years from the date of original installation. Mechanical (including hardware, gaskets, speed-lok assemblies) and electrical components shall be warranted to be free from defects under normal use and service for one (1) year from date of original installation. Installation: Cold Storage Rooms shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions and in accordance with all state and local codes. Trim pieces and closure panels of same material as exterior finish shall be provided to finish and enclose ends and top of structure. Provide access panels and louvered panels as required. PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Plumbing rough-ins, wherever possible, shall stub out of walls rather than stub-up through floor. Plumbing lines shall stub out as close to the item as possible to make the proper connection. No unnecessary exposed plumbing will be accepted. All horizontal plumbing lines shall be run at the highest elevation possible and not less than six (6) inches above the finished floor, wherever possible. Water inlets, wherever possible, shall be located above the positive water level to prevent siphoning. All plumbing products shall utilize “lead free” castings and comply with NSF Standard 61, Section 9. All drain lines are to be copper (no PVC will be accepted) with end cut to a 45 degree angle. All exposed plumbing shall be chrome plated with chrome plated escutcheons at all points of penetrations. Anti-siphon devices (ie. vacuum breakers, check valves, etc.) shall be provided with equipment, when required by code. Pressure reducing valves shall be provided for items that might reasonably be affected by adverse water pressure conditions. Provide suitable pipe slots, chases, drilling, punching and cutting to provide plumbing access of equipment. Faucets: Faucets shall be furnished according to the following schedule. Each faucet shall be supplied with a no-splash aerator and water saving devices, where required by code. The models listed refer to a faucet "Style", the actual base faucet and spout length must be verified and coordinated with each specified application. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Type 1: General Purpose Style - 8" O.C. Splash Mounted T & S Brass Model #B-231. Type 2: Pot Sink Style - 8" O.C. Splash Mounted T & S Brass Model #B-290. Type 3: Hand Sink Style - 8" O.C. Splash Mounted With Wrist Blade Handles T & S Brass Model #B-330 / B-WH-6. Type 4: Bar Sink Style - 4" O.C. Splash Mounted T & S Brass Model #B-1105. Type 5: General Purpose Style - 8" O.C. Deck Mounted T & S Brass Model #B-221. Type 6: Gooseneck Style - Single Hole Deck Mounted T & S Brass Model #B-301. Type 7: Fill Faucet - Single Hole Deck Mounted T & S Brass Model #B-710. Type 8: Mop/Service Style - 8" O.C. Wall Mounted T & S Brass Model #B-667-RC. Type 9: Pre-Rinse Style - 8" O.C. Splash Mounted T & S Brass #B-133-B-SWV With #B-107-C Spray Valve| and #B-109 Wall Bracket (Verify Length). Type 10: Pot Filler Style - Single Temp. Wall Mounted T & S Brass Model #B-605. September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 13 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA I. Drains and Wastes: Drains and wastes shall be furnished according to the following schedule: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. J. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Type 1: Drain (2") - Twist Handle W/O Overflow Standard Keil # 1750-1020-1000. Type 2: Drain (2") - Twist Handle W/ Overflow Standard Keil # 1770-1020-1000. Type 3: Drain (1 1/2") - Twist Handle W/O Overflow Standard Keil # 1750-1015-1000 Type 4: Drain (1 1/2") - Twist Handle W/ Overflow Standard Keil # 1770-1015-1000 Type 5: Drain (1 1/2") - Basket W/ Strainer W/O Overflow Standard Keil # 1838-1012-3251. Type 6: Drain (1 1/2") - Basket W/ Strainer W/ Overflow Standard Keil # 1840-1012-3251. Type 7: Drain (2") - Free Flow Standard Keil # 1836-1010-1000. Type 8: Drain (1 1/2) - Free Flow Standard Keil # 1832-1010-3000. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Electrical rough-ins, wherever possible, shall stub out of walls rather than stub-up through floor. Electrical lines shall stub out as close to the item as possible to make proper connection. No unnecessary exposed wiring will be accepted. All "Above Finished Floor" (AFF) dimensions shall be understood to mean "to the center of the outlet above the finished floor". All rectangular outlets shall be mounted horizontally unless otherwise noted. All materials, devices and components shall be UL Approved and labeled and shall be selected and installed in accordance with NEMA Standards and recommendations. All foodservice equipment shall be completely wired internally using wire, conduit and methods suitable for a wet environment. All items and circuits are to be properly grounded. All electrical circuits shall be run concealed, wherever possible. Only rigid steel conduit shall be used, zinc coated where unexposed and chrome-plated where exposed. All electrical items shall be provided with a terminal box for permanent connection or a cord and plug for interruptible connection, as indicated. All plugs and receptacles shall be NEMA Standard ground type. All electrical items and "built-in" components of items shall be completely and internally wired, in an approved manner, at the factory. All electrical switches, outlets and receptacles required, shall be internally wired and mounted at the factory. All electrical devices on or in equipment items shall be interconnected to a suitable terminal box or subpanel for power supply connection in the field. All surface mounted receptacles on fabricated equipment are to have T & S Brass Series B-1500 or equal housing complete with S/S cover and proper receptacle inside. All surface mounted switches on fabricated equipment are to be mounted in a Standard Keil # 2773-1210-1251 recessed housing with a stainless steel cover plate. All electrically heated equipment shall be internally wired to a thermostatic control and an "on-off" red neon light indicator, which shall be mounted in an easily accessible terminal box. All electrical controls, switches, safety cut-outs, disconnects, control panels, fuse boxes, and any other fittings and/or devices, not supplied as standard by the manufacturer or specifically specified, shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor. All electrical controls, switches safety cut-outs, disconnects, control panels, fuse boxes, and any other fittings and/or devices, supplied loose for field installation, shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor. Where specified for custom fabricated equipment, provide compartment with electrical sub-panel which shall be prewired in conduit concealed in cabinet body construction and connected to all electrical components built into or set upon said item. September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 14 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 16. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Electric sub-panels shall be UL Listed, 3-phase, 4-wire circuit breaker type with a ground buss main breaker and individual breakers for each service load. All buss shall be copper and the circuit breakers shall be the molded case, bolt-on type with thermomagnetic quick-make, quick-break trip. Multi-pole circuit breakers shall have an internal trip bar. The circuit breakers shall have an interrupting capacity of 10,000 amperes at 120 volts and there shall be a separate breaker for each connected load. Each breaker shall be sized for 125% of the connected load and a minimum of two (2) extra, single pole, 20 amp circuits breakers shall be provided. The loads shall be connected through the breakers in a phased sequence to balance the load on each phase. Main connection of the power supply to the panel shall be made by the Electrical Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY A. B. C. D. E. F. 3.2 The Contractor shall deliver all items and materials, in a timely manner, according to the Project Schedule. Schedule and coordinate all deliveries with the General Contractor in regard to the progress of construction and the access into the areas of the site. Transport, handle and store all items and materials in a safe workmanlike manner. Cover, protect and secure all items and materials at all times against damage and theft. Cover and protect the site against damage caused during delivery and installation of items and materials. All items are to be delivered, uncrated and placed in their final designated location, ready for utility connections. INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M. The Contractor shall install all items and materials, in a timely manner, according to the Project Schedule. Schedule and coordinate the installation with the General Contractor and other trades, as required. The Work shall be performed at a pace so as not to delay the Project Schedule. Provide a competent supervisor during the installation and coordinate and inspect the work of the other trades regarding the connections and installation of all items. Every precaution against injuries to persons or damage to property shall be taken by the Contractor at his own expense. The Contractor shall provide all cutting, welding, trimming, shimming and other modifications required to properly fit and install the equipment. The Contractor shall provide all cutting and other modifications to the equipment to allow access by other trades into and through the equipment. The Contractor shall not cut, modify, or otherwise alter the work of any other Contractor without prior consent of the Architect/Owner. All items are to be uncrated, assembled, set-in-place and leveled ready for final utility connections, unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. All items are to be secured and/or sealed properly to the building structure, when required, as directed by the Architect/Consultant. All items shall be installed as required by local health codes and inspectors including trimming and sealing all gaps and openings. All trimming and sealing shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner with methods and materials approved by the Architect/ Consultant. All openings for items which pass-through building structure shall be closely coordinated with the General Contractor and shall be trimmed and sealed as directed by the Architect/Consultant. The Contractor shall enclose and trim exhaust hoods and cold storage rooms, to adjacent equipment and/or building structure (ie. walls, columns, ceilings, etc.). Closure panels and trim September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 15 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA N. O. P. Q. R. pieces shall be fabricated from material which is same as and equal to the equipment item being trimmed. Closure panels shall be removable and shall include access doors and/or louvers as required. All wall and ceiling hung items, herein specified, shall be hung and secured by the Foodservice Equipment Contractor, unless otherwise specified. All exhaust hoods and ventilators, specified herein, shall be hung and secured by the Foodservice Equipment Contractor, unless otherwise specified. All fire suppression systems, specified herein, shall be completely installed, tested, certified and charged by the Foodservice Equipment Contractor, unless otherwise specified. Electrical connections, interconnections and "tie-ins" to other fire systems are not part of this Contractor's work. All cold storage rooms (walk-ins), specified herein, shall be erected by the Foodservice Equipment Contractor, unless otherwise specified. All masonry and tile work are not part of this Contractor's work. Provide and install complete refrigeration systems, charged, started and operating properly, including but not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. S. 3.3 Provide compressors, condensers, racks, coils, vibration eliminators, sight glasses (moisture indicating type), expansion valves, filters, oil separators, thermostats, defrost time clocks, defrost heaters, all controls, solenoids, liquid line driers, piping, and refrigeration grade copper tubing and fittings with all sweat joints using Safety-Silv No. 1200 or approved equal silver solder. Provide refrigeration gases as required and specified by the manufacturer to charge a complete operating system. Provide all electrical refrigeration components required for a complete system. All electrical connections, interconnections and control wiring are not part of this Contractor's work. Provide an evaporator coil defrost system for all freezers designed to operate at +35 deg. F. or less. All refrigeration components and systems shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Hang all blower coils per manufacturer's recommendation at the locations specified. Blower coil drain pans shall be pitched to the drain lines. Blower coils shall be hung using approved non-conductive, non-corrosive rod, fasteners and fish plates. Provide electrical heat tape wrap to protect condensate drain lines from freezing. Heat tape wrap shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible to start-up and test all refrigeration systems. A competent service mechanic shall be available for immediate response for the first eight (8) hours of operation. All items which have a "customer side" and a "work side" shall be installed with the operating controls facing the "work side". START-UP AND TESTING A. B. C. D. 3.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 The Contractor shall provide a trained individual to start-up and test all items to insure that all items have been installed properly and will operate as intended. Test and certify all systems, as required by and in accordance with all authorities having jurisdiction. Arrange for demonstrations and instructions for operating and maintaining equipment, as requested and at times selected by the Owner. Furnish to the Owner three (3) bound sets of operating and maintenance manuals for all items along with a directory of all manufacturers, local representatives and service agencies. CLEAN-UP September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 16 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. 3.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 The Contractor shall, on a daily basis, remove all crating, packing and installation debris from the site at his own expense. The Contractor shall, just prior to requisition for final payment, clean, protect and make ready for use all items. WARRANTIES A. B. C. D. The Contractor shall provide, to the Owner upon completion, warranty information and certification for all items. All manufactured items shall be furnished with a one (1) year parts and labor warranty which shall begin upon final acceptance by the Owner. All refrigeration systems shall be furnished with a start-up and a one (1) year service warranty on parts and labor which shall begin upon final acceptance by the Owner. All compressors, both hermetic and semi-hermetic, shall be covered by the manufacturer's additional four (4) year warranty. All installation work performed shall be guaranteed for labor and materials for a period of one (1) year which shall begin upon final acceptance by the Owner. PART 4 - ITEMIZED SPECIFICATIONS 4.1 GENERAL A. B. 4.2 The Itemized Specifications contained herein are an integral part of the Contract Documents and therefore must be used and coordinated with all other Contract Documents. The information contained herein (where exceeding the requirements of the Contract Documents) shall take precedence over information contained in the General Specifications and Contract Drawings. All items and components parts shall be new and unused. All items shall be the manufacturer’s current model at the time of delivery. All items shall be provided with the manufacturer’s standard finish and accessories, unless otherwise noted. Options and accessories specifically called for herein, shall be supplied in addition to those supplied as standard. ALTERNATES AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. B. It is the intent of these itemized specifications to establish a quality and performance standard. The manufacturer listed first under each item’s description shall be considered the prime manufacturer and has been selected to establish a standard minimum requirement for construction, performance, quality and capacity. Where applicable, approved alternate manufacturers have been listed. Any other manufacturer, other than those listed as prime or approved alternates, shall be considered a substitution. If a Bidder/Contractor chooses to provide equipment manufactured by an approved alternate manufacturer, this equipment must be equal to the prime in construction, performance, quality and capacity and shall be equipped with all accessories and options per specifications. The Bidder/Contractor shall verify and coordinate all space and mechanical requirements of the alternate equipment and shall bear the expense for any changes caused by the alternate equipment. 1. Any Bidder/Contractor choosing to offer a substitution to the prime or approved alternate manufacturers must submit a Request For Substitution Form at least fourteen (14) days prior to the Bid Date. The burden of proof of equality shall be upon the Bidder/Contractor. If a substitution is approved, an addendum will be issued prior to the Bid Date. A substitution can only be provided if it is approved by addendum prior to the Bid Date. The Owner shall be the sole judge of whether or not the substitution is equal in construction, performance, quality and capacity to that specified. The Bidder/Contractor September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 17 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 4.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 shall verify and coordinate all space and mechanical requirements of the equipment and shall bear the expense for any changes caused by the equipment substituted. Approval of an alternate or substitution shall not relieve the Contractor from any responsibility for compliance with all requirements of the Contract. The following companies (listed in alphabetical order) are the only manufacturers approved for items listed as “Fabricated”. Other manufacturers may be submitted for review and approval prior to award of contract. 1. 2. 3. 4.4 Florida Stainless Fabricators – Oviedo, Florida Emjac Industries, Inc. – Hialeah, Florida Custom Stainless Steel Equipment Co. – Hialeah, Florida ITEM DESCRIPTION A. WALK-IN REFRIGERATOR (+35 DEG F) 1. 2. Bally (Basis of Design) Model No: NSF Quantity: One (1) Lot Approved Alternates: American Panel, Thermo-Kool Provide the following options, accessories and modifications: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 3. Entrance door shall 34 inches wide and hinged as shown on plan. Door shall be equipped with: a. b. c. 4. 5. 6. B. All panels shall be four inch thick foamed-in-place polyurethane construction, see M.A. General Specification Section 2.7, Cold Storage Rooms. Item shall be size and shape as shown on plan. Overall height shall be 8”-6” Item shall be recessed in building slab depression; see M.A. Details and Architect’s Documents. Exposed exterior finish: 22 gauge type 304 stainless steel with No. 3 finish.. Unexposed exterior finish: 22 ga. galvanized steel. Interior wall finish: .026” white painted stucco embossed aluminum. Interior ceiling finish: .026” white painted stucco embossed aluminum. Floor finish: NSF Approved 1/8” Aluminum Diamond Plate. Three (3) heavy duty cam lift hinges. 1/8” thick aluminum diamond plate kickplates, 30” high inside and out. Vinyl strip air curtains. Provide LED Bulb with Jelly Jar Enclosure at door panel and two (2) additional 48” LED IRP 410-0149 light fixtures located per plan. Provide closure panels above cold storage rooms to enclose space to finished ceiling. Provide access panels and louvered panels as required. Provide closure panels to trim cold storage room to adjacent building walls or equipment. All panels shall be fabricated from same materials as adjacent wall panels. Manufacturer shall provide shop drawings for review before fabrication begins. LOW PROFILE EVAPORATOR 1. 2. 3. Bally (Basis of Design) Model No: BLP211MA-S1B_ECM Quantity: One (1) Item shall be part of a complete refrigeration system engineered by the manufacturer to operate properly for its intended use. Item shall include all parts/components (including but not limited to solenoids and thermostats) required to function as a part of a complete system. All refrigeration systems (both medium and low temp) shall be designed to run on and shall be charged with R-404A refrigerant. September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 18 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 4. C. All components of the refrigeration system shall be completely installed as part of the F.S.E.C. with the exception of final electrical connections and condensate drain lines. REMOTE CONDENSING UNIT, WALL MOUNTED/CANTILEVERED 1. 2. Bally (Basis of Design) Model No: BQHA010E6-HT3A Quantity: One (1) Provide the following options, accessories and modifications: a. b. c. d. e. 3. 4. D. Item shall be “Quiet Line” style. Item shall include a pre-assembled remote hermetic condensing unit enclosed in a UL Approved cover for outdoor use. Item shall be factory pre-wired to a UL-Approved electrical box with disconnect. Item shall include a manufacturer approved cantilever style wall mounting bracket set designed to meet code requirements for the intended use. Verify/coordinate wall backing and structural requirements. Item shall be part of a complete refrigeration system engineered by the manufacturer to operate properly for its intended use. Item shall include all parts/components required to function as a part of a complete system. All refrigeration systems (both medium and low temp) shall be designed to run on and shall be charged with R-404A refrigerant. All components of the refrigeration system shall be completely installed as part of the F.S.E.C. with the exception of final electrical connections and condensate drain lines. Item shall include a five (5) year extended compressor warranty. WALK-IN FREEZER (-10 DEG F) 1. 2. 3. Bally (Basis of Design) Model No: NSF Quantity: One (1) Lot Approved Alternates: American Panel, Thermo-Kool Provide the following options, accessories and modifications: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 4. 5. 6. 7. All panels shall be four inch thick foamed-in-place polyurethane construction, see M.A. General Specification Section 2.7, Cold Storage Rooms. Item shall be size and shape as shown on plan. Overall height shall be 8”-6” Item shall be recessed in building slab depression; see M.A. Details and Architect’s Documents. Exposed exterior finish: 22 gauge type 304 stainless steel with No. 3 finish.. Unexposed exterior finish: 22 ga. galvanized steel. Interior wall finish: .026” white painted stucco embossed aluminum. Interior ceiling finish: .026” white painted stucco embossed aluminum. Floor finish: NSF Approved 1/8” Aluminum Diamond Plate. Entrance door shall 34 inches wide and hinged as shown on plan. Door shall be equipped with: a. b. c. E. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Three (3) heavy duty cam lift hinges. 1/8” thick aluminum diamond plate kickplates, 30” high inside and out. Vinyl strip air curtains. Provide LED Bulb with Jelly Jar Enclosure at door panel and two (2) additional 48” LED IRP 410-0149 light fixtures located per plan. Provide closure panels above cold storage rooms to enclose space to finished ceiling. Provide access panels and louvered panels as required. Provide closure panels to trim cold storage room to adjacent building walls or equipment. All panels shall be fabricated from same materials as adjacent wall panels. Manufacturer shall provide shop drawings for review before fabrication begins. LOW PROFILE EVAPORATOR September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 19 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. F. Bally (Basis of Design) Model No: BLP211LE-S2B_ECM Quantity: One (1) Item shall be SmartVap Style Evaporator with SmartVap electric defrost feature. Item shall be part of a complete refrigeration system engineered by the manufacturer to operate properly for its intended use. Item shall include all parts/components (including but not limited to solenoids and thermostats) required to function as a part of a complete system. All refrigeration systems (both medium and low temp) shall be designed to run on and shall be charged with R-404A refrigerant. All components of the refrigeration system shall be completely installed as part of the F.S.E.C. with the exception of final electrical connections and condensate drain lines. REMOTE CONDENSING UNIT, WALL MOUNTED/CANTILEVERED 1. 2. Bally (Basis of Design) Model No: BQZA030L6-HT3A Quantity: One (1) Provide the following options, accessories and modifications: a. b. c. d. e. 3. 4. G. 2. 3. All components of the refrigeration system shall be completely installed as part of the F.S.E.C. with the exception of final electrical connections and condensate drain lines. Item shall include a five (5) year extended compressor warranty. InterMetro (Basis of Design) Model No: HP____PD Quantity: One (1) Lot Approved Alternate: Cambro Provide the following options, accessories and modifications: a. b. Item shall be rotationally molded polyethylene one-piece construction. Slotted design for air circulation. Item shall be size and shape as shown on plan. Verify/coordinate final field conditions. SHELVING 1. 2. InterMetro (Basis of Design) Model No: MetroMax i Quantity: One (1) Lot Provide the following options, accessories and modifications: a. b. 3. I. Item shall be “Quiet Line” style. Item shall include a pre-assembled remote scroll style condensing unit enclosed in a UL Approved cover for outdoor use. Item shall be factory pre-wired to a UL-Approved electrical box with disconnect. Item shall include a manufacturer approved cantilever style wall mounting bracket set designed to meet code requirements for the intended use. Verify/coordinate wall backing and structural requirements. Item shall be part of a complete refrigeration system engineered by the manufacturer to operate properly for its intended use. Item shall include all parts/components required to function as a part of a complete system. All refrigeration systems (both medium and low temp) shall be designed to run on and shall be charged with R-404A refrigerant. DUNNAGE RACK 1. H. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Each unit shall have “Open-Grid” type shelving; four (4) tier high. Each unit shall be equipped with four (4) 62 inch high post. Each post shall be equipped with adjustable bullet feet. Layout configuration shall be the size and shape as shown on plan. SPARE September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 20 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA J. K. SPARE SHELVING 1. 2. InterMetro (Basis of Design) Model No: MetroMax i Quantity: One (1) Lot Provide the following options, accessories and modifications: a. b. 3. L. M. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Each unit shall have “Open-Grid” type shelving; four (4) tier high. Each unit shall be equipped with four (4) 62 inch high post. Each post shall be equipped with adjustable bullet feet. Layout configuration shall be the size and shape as shown on plan. SPARE SPARE END OF SECTION - September 15, 2015 114000 - Foodservice Equipment Page 21 of 21 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 22 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Plumbing demolition. 6. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 7. Supports and anchorages. DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than plumbing and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and plumbing equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. 1.4 Welding certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and September 15, 2015 220500 - Common Work Results For Plumbing Page 1 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. D. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12. 2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C). D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C). 2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. September 15, 2015 220500 - Common Work Results For Plumbing Page 2 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.5 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish. C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass. D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass. 2.7 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. 2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: No exposed piping to be abandoned. 3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. 5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. September 15, 2015 220500 - Common Work Results For Plumbing Page 3 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter. 2. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. O. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. P. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. September 15, 2015 220500 - Common Work Results For Plumbing Page 4 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using leadfree solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. 3.5 Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. September 15, 2015 220500 - Common Work Results For Plumbing Page 5 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. 3.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. END OF SECTION 22 05 00 September 15, 2015 220500 - Common Work Results For Plumbing Page 6 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 22 05 23 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section Includes: 1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Bronze swing check valves. 3. Bronze gate valves. 4. Bronze globe valves. SUBMITTALS A. 1.3 Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves. B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller except plug valves. E. Valve-End Connections: 1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. 2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. One-Piece, Reduced-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Valve, Inc. September 15, 2015 220523 - General-duty Valves For Plumbing Piping Page 1 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. NIBCO INC. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig (2760 kPa). c. Body Design: One piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Seats: PTFE or TFE. g. Stem: Bronze. h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. i. Port: Reduced. B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. d. Hammond Valve. e. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. f. Legend Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Red-White Valve Corporation. j. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full. C. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. DynaQuip Controls. f. Hammond Valve. g. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. h. Milwaukee Valve Company. i. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. September 15, 2015 220523 - General-duty Valves For Plumbing Piping Page 2 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA g. h. i. j. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Seats: PTFE or TFE. Stem: Bronze. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. Port: Regular. BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Hammond Valve. f. Kitz Corporation. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell Valves. j. Red-White Valve Corporation. k. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. l. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze. B. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Kitz Corporation. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red-White Valve Corporation. i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. 2.4 BRONZE GATE VALVES A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves: September 15, 2015 220523 - General-duty Valves For Plumbing Piping Page 3 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. B. 2.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Hammond Valve. f. Kitz Corporation. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell Valves. j. Red-White Valve Corporation. k. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. l. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Hammond Valve. f. Kitz Corporation. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell Valves. j. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. k. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. BRONZE GLOBE VALVES A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. September 15, 2015 220523 - General-duty Valves For Plumbing Piping Page 4 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. B. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 c. Hammond Valve. d. Kitz Corporation. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Powell Valves. h. Red-White Valve Corporation. i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. j. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. NIBCO INC. d. Red-White Valve Corporation. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. September 15, 2015 220523 - General-duty Valves For Plumbing Piping Page 5 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. 3.4 If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball or gate valves. 2. Throttling Service: Globe, ball or butterfly valves. DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. 3.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronze disc. 3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim. 4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc. 5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS. 6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc. END OF SECTION 22 05 23 September 15, 2015 220523 - General-duty Valves For Plumbing Piping Page 6 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Equipment supports. DEFINITIONS A. 1.3 Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Powder-actuated fastener systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. September 15, 2015 220529 - Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment Page 1 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. 2.2 In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports. 3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 5. Empire Industries, Inc. 6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 8. Grinnell Corp. 9. GS Metals Corp. 10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 12. PHS Industries, Inc. 13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 14. Tolco Inc. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. 2.4 Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. 3. GS Metals Corp. 4. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd. 5. Thomas & Betts Corporation. September 15, 2015 220529 - Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment Page 2 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 6. 7. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Tolco Inc. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Powers Fasteners. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners. 2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. 2.7 Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. September 15, 2015 220529 - Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment Page 3 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750). 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16 (DN 100 to DN 400), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches (100 mm) of insulation. 4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200). 5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750). 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to DN 900), with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to DN 750), from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to DN 1050), if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500). 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20 (DN 20 to DN 500), if longer ends are required for riser clamps. H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping installations. I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg). b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg). c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg). September 15, 2015 220529 - Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment Page 4 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 8. 9. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 11/4 inches (32 mm). 2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. September 15, 2015 220529 - Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment Page 5 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick. b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. September 15, 2015 220529 - Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment Page 6 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. 3.6 Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. PAINTING A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm). B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 22 05 29 September 15, 2015 220529 - Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment Page 7 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 22 07 00 - PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section Includes: 1. Insulation Materials: a. Flexible elastomeric. b. Mineral fiber. c. Polyolefin. 2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Sealants. 6. Tapes. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. September 15, 2015 220700 - Plumbing Insulation Page 1 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180. G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. H. Polyolefin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534 or ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II, Grade 1 for sheet materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armacell LLC; Tubolit. b. Nomaco Inc.; IMCOLOCK, IMCOSHEET, NOMALOCK, and NOMAPLY. c. RBX Corporation; Therma-cell. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. 2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. September 15, 2015 220700 - Plumbing Insulation Page 2 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). TAPES A. 2.4 ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils (0.29 mm). 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. SECUREMENTS A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide with wing or closed seal. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.2 Comply with GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. September 15, 2015 220700 - Plumbing Insulation Page 3 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 C. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. D. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. E. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. L. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. M. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. N. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.3 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular September 15, 2015 220700 - Plumbing Insulation Page 4 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. September 15, 2015 220700 - Plumbing Insulation Page 5 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.5 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. September 15, 2015 220700 - Plumbing Insulation Page 6 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. D. 3.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. POLYOLEFIN INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install cut sections of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.7 FINISHES A. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. inspection of the completed Work. C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets. September 15, 2015 Vary first and second coats to allow visual 220700 - Plumbing Insulation Page 7 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.8 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing fieldapplied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance. 2. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article. C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.10 A. 3.11 A. INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE Domestic Cold, Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 2. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 3. Polyolefin: 1 inch (25 mm) thick. UNDERGROUND, FIELD-INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over insulation material. END OF SECTION 22 07 00 September 15, 2015 220700 - Plumbing Insulation Page 8 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 22 11 16 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section Includes: 1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building. 2. Specialty valves. 3. Escutcheons. 4. Sleeves and sleeve seals. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. 2.2 Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) and ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C) water tube, drawn temper. 1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-andsocket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. 5. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division. 2) NIBCO INC. 3) Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems. September 15, 2015 221116 - Domestic Water Piping Page 1 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA b. c. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end. PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. 2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. B. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219. 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Description: a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) at 180 deg F (82 deg C). b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Description: a. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solderjoint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric-Flange Kits: 1. Description: a. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) c. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. d. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. e. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. E. Dielectric Couplings: 1. Description: a. Galvanized-steel coupling. b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C). c. End Connections: Female threaded. d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic. September 15, 2015 221116 - Domestic Water Piping Page 2 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA F. 2.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Dielectric Nipples: 1. Description: a. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. b. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C) c. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. d. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. ESCUTCHEONS A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates. B. One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with setscrews. C. One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish. D. One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with setscrew or spring clips. E. Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew. F. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners. G. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge. 2.7 SLEEVES A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: coated, with plain ends. ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. 3.2 Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. September 15, 2015 221116 - Domestic Water Piping Page 3 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. E. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb. F. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. G. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. H. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. I. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance. J. Install piping to permit valve servicing. K. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. L. Install piping free of sags and bends. M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. N. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. O. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." D. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. F. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. September 15, 2015 221116 - Domestic Water Piping Page 4 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. 3.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping. B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping: 1. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling. 3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples. 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation. 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. 3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm). D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m). F. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.8 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. September 15, 2015 221116 - Domestic Water Piping Page 5 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA D. 3.9 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION A. 3.10 Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. SLEEVE INSTALLATION A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls. B. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated. C. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built. D. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. E. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. F. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals specified in this Section. G. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout. H. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated. I. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestop materials and installations. 3.11 A. 3.12 IDENTIFICATION Identify system components. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Piping Inspections: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: September 15, 2015 221116 - Domestic Water Piping Page 6 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 a. 3. 4. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Piping Tests: 1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. 2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.13 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. September 15, 2015 221116 - Domestic Water Piping Page 7 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.14 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller shall be the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B); wrought-copper solderjoint fittings. D. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) or ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) or ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C); copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints. 3.15 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. . 3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves. B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment. END OF SECTION 22 11 16 September 15, 2015 221116 - Domestic Water Piping Page 8 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 22 11 19 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties: 1. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves. 2. Drain valves. 3. Water hammer arresters. 4. Trap-seal primer valves. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. 1.3 Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa), unless otherwise indicated. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NSF Compliance: 1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components. 2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices : 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Honeywell Water Controls. e. Legend Valve. f. Leonard Valve Company. g. Powers; a Watts Industries Co. h. Symmons Industries, Inc. i. Taco, Inc. September 15, 2015 221119 - Domestic Water Piping Specialties Page 1 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 j. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. k. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. Standard: ASSE 1017. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa). Type: Thermostatically controlled water mixing valve. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. Connections: Threaded inlets and outlet. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperaturecontrol handle. Tempered-Water Setting: 95 deg F (deg C). Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm (L/s). Valve Finish: Chrome plated. DRAIN VALVES A. 2.3 Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves: 1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig (2760-kPa) minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain. WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS A. 2.4 Water Hammer Arresters: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. PPP Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F. TRAP-SEAL PRIMER VALVES A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. MIFAB, Inc. b. PPP Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. September 15, 2015 221119 - Domestic Water Piping Specialties Page 2 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. Standard: ASSE 1018. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum. Body: Bronze. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201. B. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. C. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. 3.3 Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above. ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves. B. Set field-adjustable flow of balancing valves. C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves. END OF SECTION 22 11 19 September 15, 2015 221119 - Domestic Water Piping Specialties Page 3 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 22 13 16 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes the following soil and waste, sanitary drainage and vent piping inside the building: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. 1.3 Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). SUBMITTALS A. 1.4 Field quality-control inspection and test reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. B. Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. 1. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosionresistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. C. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. September 15, 2015 221316 - Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 B. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated. C. Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints. 2. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller shall be: 1. Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary Sewers." B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." C. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers. D. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." E. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." F. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. G. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. H. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. I. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing. September 15, 2015 221316 - Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA J. 3.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Gasketed Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings. 2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp. C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION A. 3.5 General-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following: a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m), if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods. E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. F. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m). G. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m). September 15, 2015 221316 - Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 4. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. I. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m). 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Connect soil and waste piping to existing sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. B. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 2. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. END OF SECTION 22 13 16 September 15, 2015 221316 - Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 22 13 19 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Roof flashing assemblies. 4. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 5. Flashing materials. SUBMITTALS A. 1.3 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors. Include rated capacities, operating QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Josam Company; Josam Div. MIFAB, Inc. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. Watts Drainage Products Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. Size: Same as connected drainage piping Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head plug. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts: September 15, 2015 221319 - Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Page 1 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. C. Josam Company; Josam Div. Oatey. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. Watts Drainage Products Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout. Size: Same as connected branch. Type: Adjustable housing Body or Ferrule:Cast iron. Clamping Device: Not required. Outlet Connection: Inside calk. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with thread Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. Top Loading Classification: .Heavy Duty. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Josam Company; Josam Div. MIFAB, Inc. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. Watts Drainage Products Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, brass plug. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. Wall Access: Round, deep, chrome-plated bronze cover plate with screw. Wall Access: Round, nickel-bronze, copper-alloy, or stainless-steel wall-installation frame and cover. FLOOR DRAINS A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains : 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. September 15, 2015 Commercial Enameling Co. Josam Company; Josam Div. 221319 - Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Page 2 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 MIFAB, Inc. Prier Products, Inc. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. Watts Drainage Products Inc. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 Pattern: Floor Sanitarydrain. Body Material: Gray iron. Seepage Flange: Not required Anchor Flange: Required. Clamping Device: Not required Outlet: Bottom. Backwater Valve: Not required. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required Sediment Bucket: Not required Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze Top Shape: Square Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty Funnel: Not required Inlet Fitting: Not required Trap Material: Cast iron Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap. Trap Features: Trap-seal primer ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES A. Roof Flashing Assemblies: 1. Available Manufactrers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch- (1.6-mm) thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches (150 mm) from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting. 1. 2. 3. 2.4 Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap. MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings: 1. 2. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) side inlet. September 15, 2015 221319 - Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Page 3 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft. (20-kg/sq. m), 0.0625-inch (1.6-mm) thickness. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft. (15-kg/sq. m), 0.0469-inch (1.2-mm) thickness. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft. (30-kg/sq. m), 0.0938-inch (2.4-mm) thickness. B. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. C. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy. E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4 (DN 100). Use NPS 4 (DN 100) for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. Locate at minimum intervals of 75 feet (15 m) for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and smaller and 100 feet (30 m) for larger piping. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. b. c. 3. Radius, 30 Inches (750 mm) or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch (6.35-mm) total depression. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches (750 to 1500 mm): Equivalent to 1 percent slope. Radius, 60 Inches (1500 mm) or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-inch (25-mm) total depression. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. September 15, 2015 221319 - Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Page 4 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 4. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. G. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. H. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection. 1. 2. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. I. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. J. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. K. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. 2. 3. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches (250 mm), and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around pipe. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around sleeve. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches (200 mm) around specialty. C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess. September 15, 2015 221319 - Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Page 5 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 22 13 19 September 15, 2015 221319 - Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Page 6 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes the following: 1. Faucets for lavatories. 2. Flushometers. 3. Toilet seats. 4. Protective shielding guards. 5. Water closets. 6. Lavatories. 7. Service sinks. DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities. C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic. D. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic. E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. F. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures. C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. September 15, 2015 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures Page 1 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 D. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. E. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M. 2. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1. 3. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 4. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037. F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory faucets: 1. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 2. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 3. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 4. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS A. Lavatory Faucets, 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation. c. Chicago Faucets. d. Delta Faucet Company. e. Eljer. f. Elkay Manufacturing Co. g. Fisher Manufacturing Co. h. Kohler Co. i. Moen, Inc. j. Royal Brass Mfg. Co. k. Sayco; a Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Company. l. Speakman Company. m. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. n. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. o. American Standard Companies, Inc. p. Bradley Corporation. q. Brasstech Inc.; Newport Brass Div. r. Chicago Faucets. s. Delta Faucet Company. t. Elkay Manufacturing Co. u. Fisher Manufacturing Co. v. Moen, Inc. w. Speakman Company. x. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. 2. Description: Single-control mixing valve. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor. a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass b. Finish: Polished chrome plate c. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm (1.5 L/min.) d. Centers: 4 inches (102 mm) e. Mounting: Deck, exposed September 15, 2015 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures Page 2 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA f. g. h. i. j. k. l. 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Valve Handle(s): Lever Inlet(s): 3/8 (DN 10) tubing, with NPS 1/2 (DN 15) male adaptor Spout: Rigid type. Spout Outlet: Spray, 0.5 gpm (1.5 L/min.). Operation: Self-closing, metering. Drain: Grid Tempering Device: Thermostatic FLUSHOMETERS A. 2.3 Flushometers, : 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Coyne & Delany Co. b. Delta Faucet Company. c. Sloan Valve Company. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation. e. Sloan Valve Company. 2. Description: Flushometer for water-closet-type fixture. Include brass body with corrosion-resistant internal components, non-hold-open feature, control stop with check valve, vacuum breaker, copper or brass tubing, and polished chrome-plated finish on exposed parts. a. Internal Design: Diaphragm operation. b. Style: Exposed c. Inlet Size: NPS 1 (DN 25). d. Trip Mechanism: Oscillating, lever-handle actuator e. Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush (6.0 L/flush) f. Tailpiece Size: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) TOILET SEATS A. 2.4 Toilet Seats, 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Bemis Manufacturing Company. c. Centoco Manufacturing Corp. d. Church Seats. e. Eljer. f. Kohler Co. g. Olsonite Corp. h. Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inc.; Beneke Div. i. Sperzel. 2. Description: Toilet seat for water-closet-type fixture. a. Material: Molded, solid plastic b. Configuration: Open front without cover. c. Size: Elongated d. Hinge Type: SS, self-sustaining e. Class: Heavy-duty commercial. f. Color: White PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers, September 15, 2015 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures Page 3 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 2.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Engineered Brass Co. b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a Subsidiary of MVG Molded Products. c. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Plumberex Specialty Products Inc. e. TCI Products. f. TRUEBRO, Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and coldwater supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. WATER CLOSETS A. 2.6 Water Closets: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Barclay Products, Ltd. c. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. d. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products. e. Eljer. f. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. g. Kohler Co. h. Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc. i. Peerless Pottery, Inc. j. Sanitarios Azteca, S.A. de C.V. k. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc. l. St. Thomas Creations. m. TOTO USA, Inc. n. Water Management, Inc. 2. Description: Accessible, floor mounting, floor-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed for flushometer valve operation. 3. Style: Flushometer valve. a. Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design. Include bolt caps matching fixture. b. Height: Standard and Accessible (See drawing schedule). c. Design Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush (6 L/flush) d. Color: White LAVATORIES A. Lavatories: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Commercial Enameling Company. c. Eljer. d. Kohler Co. e. American Standard Companies, Inc. f. Barclay Products, Ltd. g. Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. h. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products. September 15, 2015 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures Page 4 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. 2.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 i. Eljer. j. Gerber Plumbing Fixtures LLC. k. Kohler Co. l. Mansfield Plumbing Products, Inc. m. Peerless Pottery, Inc. n. Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc. o. St. Thomas Creations. p. TOTO USA, Inc. Description: Accessible, fixture. a. Type: Slab b. Color: White c. Supplies: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) chrome-plated copper with stops. d. Drain: Grid e. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 by NPS 1-1/2 (DN 32 by DN 40) chrome-plated, castbrass P-trap; thick tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon. f. Protective Shielding Guard(s): SERVICE SINKS A. Service Sinks: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 3. g: a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Commercial Enameling Company. c. Eljer. d. Kohler Co. e. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products. 4. Description: Trap-standard- and wall-mounting, enameled, cast-iron fixture with roll-rim with two faucet holes in back and rim guard on front and sides. a. Color: White. b. Faucet: Sink c. Drain: Grid with NPS 2 (DN 50) outlet. d. Trap Standard: NPS 2 (DN 50) enameled, cast iron with cleanout and floor flange. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions. B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures. C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports. D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate. E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports. F. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. September 15, 2015 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures Page 5 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 G. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system. I. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system. J. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach. K. Install toilet seats on water closets. L. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. M. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves. N. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. O. Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated. P. Install escutcheons at piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms. September 15, 2015 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures Page 6 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION 22 40 00 September 15, 2015 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures Page 7 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 1.2 Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. Dielectric fittings. Mechanical sleeve seals. Sleeves. Escutcheons. Grout. HVAC demolition. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. Concrete bases. Supports and anchorages. DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. 1.4 Welding certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." September 15, 2015 230500 - Common Work Results For Hvac Page 1 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. C. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12. G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. 2. 2.3 CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. September 15, 2015 230500 - Common Work Results For Hvac Page 2 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA F. 2.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. B. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.5 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.6 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish. C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1. D. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass. September 15, 2015 230500 - Common Work Results For Hvac Page 3 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. 2. 3. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. noncorrosive, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HVAC DEMOLITION A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures. B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C. 3.2 Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality. PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. September 15, 2015 230500 - Common Work Results For Hvac Page 4 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. 2. 3. O. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials. Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. 3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. September 15, 2015 230500 - Common Work Results For Hvac Page 5 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using leadfree solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. 2. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. 2. M. 3.4 Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. September 15, 2015 230500 - Common Work Results For Hvac Page 6 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. 4. 3.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.6 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 3.7 Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. Use concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor HVAC materials and equipment. September 15, 2015 230500 - Common Work Results For Hvac Page 7 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.9 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 23 05 00 September 15, 2015 230500 - Common Work Results For Hvac Page 8 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 05 13 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: 1.15. D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. September 15, 2015 230513 - Common Motor Requirements For Hvac Equipment Page 1 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. H. Insulation: Class F. I. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters. 2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. September 15, 2015 230513 - Common Motor Requirements For Hvac Equipment Page 2 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 23 05 13 September 15, 2015 230513 - Common Motor Requirements For Hvac Equipment Page 3 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Equipment supports. B. See Division 23 Section(s) " Metal Ducts" and "Nonmetal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. 1.3 Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Powder-actuated fastener systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. September 15, 2015 230529 - Hangers And Supports For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 1 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. 2.2 In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports. 3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 5. Empire Industries, Inc. 6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 8. Grinnell Corp. 9. GS Metals Corp. 10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. 12. PHS Industries, Inc. 13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 14. Tolco Inc. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. 2.4 Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. 3. GS Metals Corp. September 15, 2015 230529 - Hangers And Supports For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 2 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 4. 5. 6. 7. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd. Thomas & Betts Corporation. Tolco Inc. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc. 5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Value Engineered Products, Inc. C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier. D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Powers Fasteners. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners. September 15, 2015 230529 - Hangers And Supports For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 3 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. 2.8 Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. September 15, 2015 230529 - Hangers And Supports For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 4 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 11/4 inches. 2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. September 15, 2015 230529 - Hangers And Supports For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 5 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping. September 15, 2015 230529 - Hangers And Supports For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 6 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 3.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. 3.6 Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. PAINTING A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. September 15, 2015 230529 - Hangers And Supports For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 7 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 END OF SECTION 23 05 29 September 15, 2015 230529 - Hangers And Supports For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 8 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 05 48 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes the following: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Freestanding spring isolators. 5. Housed spring mounts. 6. Elastomeric hangers. 7. Spring hangers. 8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops. 9. Pipe riser resilient supports. 10. Resilient pipe guides. 11. Restraining braces and cables. SUBMITTALS A. 1.3 Product Data: For each product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corporation. 4. Isolation Technology, Inc. 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Isolation. 9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the September 15, 2015230548 - Vibration And Seismic Controls For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 D. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. E. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. 1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation. 2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridgebearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO. F. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators. 1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment. G. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range. H. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. I. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. September 15, 2015230548 - Vibration And Seismic Controls For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 6. 7. 8. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded rod. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring coil. J. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions. K. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Equipment Restraints: 1. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch. B. Piping Restraints: 1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. D. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members. F. Drilled-in Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications. September 15, 2015230548 - Vibration And Seismic Controls For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. C. Adjust active height of spring isolators. D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation. END OF SECTION 23 05 48 September 15, 2015230548 - Vibration And Seismic Controls For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 A. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.2 A. Equipment labels. Warning signs and labels. Pipe labels. Duct labels. SUBMITTAL Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 A. EQUIPMENT LABELS Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering twothirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. Letter Color: White. Background Color: Black. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering twothirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. September 15, 2015 230553 - Identification For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 7. 8. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: White. C. Background Color: Black. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to threefourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions. 2.3 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: backing. September 15, 2015 Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive 230553 - Identification For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. 2. 2.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. DUCT LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Letter Color: White. C. Background Color: Black. D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to threefourths the size of principal lettering. G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. 2. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 A. 3.2 A. PREPARATION Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. September 15, 2015 230553 - Identification For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. 3.3 A. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. Near each valve and control device. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Chilled-Water Piping: a. b. 3.4 A. Background Color: White. Letter Color: Blue. DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Blue: For cold-air supply ducts. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. END OF SECTION 23 05 53 September 15, 2015 230553 - Identification For Hvac Piping And Equipment Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Contractor/CM shall use one of three TAB Contractors listed. Pricing shall be obtained from each vendor, one of whom shall be used in Contractor’s/CM’s GMP Contract, to perform TAB work for HVAC systems. B. Scope of TAB work is indicated in Part 3 - Execution. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 1.03 Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning Section 23 08 00 – Commissioning of HVAC. REFERENCES A. Comply with Section 01 42 00 – References for additional applicable references, abbreviations, definitions and acronyms. B. NEEB: Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems. C. AABC: National Standards for Total System Balance. D. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Application Handbook; latest edition: Testing, Adjusting, Balancing. E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (latest edition). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Owner’s agent to perform TAB work shall review Bid Documents and submit proposal to Bidder’s/Construction Manager at time of bidding indicated in Request for Proposals for Work. B. Owner’s agent to perform TAB work for HVAC systems shall review and become familiar with project documents, review HVAC installation as work progresses and provide monthly progress reports to Owner indicating Contractor’s/Construction Manager’s HVAC work has been performed per Section 23 08 00 – Commissioning HVAC. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Prequalified TAB Vendors: 1. Acccurate Balancing & Commissioning, Inc., 2824 Faun Run, Oviedo, FL 32765; Tel:561351-0245;. Contact; Robert Shorr. 2. Precision Air Balance, Inc., P. O. Box 101712, Cape Coral, FL 33910-1712; Tel: 239-5742400; Fax: 239-574-2400; Fax: 239-574-2400. Website: www.precision-air-balance.com. Contact: Mark Rusnock. September 15, 2015 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac Page 1 of 14 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 3. Bay To Bay Balancing, Inc., 933 Lee Rd., Suite 405, Orlando, FL 32810; Teo: 407-7048468; Fax: 407-704-8770; Email Address: [email protected]. 1.06 SCOPE OF SERVICES A. Scope of services shall include: 1. Review project documents to verify that HVAC systems are designed so that TAB may be accomplished. 2. Provide pre-TAB inspections of HVAC systems during construction to assure that systems are installed in conformance with project documents and approved shop drawings. 3. Perform TAB of HVAC systems in accord with industry standard to assure correct air/water flow rates and energy efficient operation. 4. Provide certified TAB report of HVAC systems in accord with this Section. 5. Provide coordination of TAB activities between Design Mechanical Engineer, Mechanical Contractor, and Energy Management and Control System (EMCS) Contractor. 6. Initiate conference calls and/or schedule meetings to resolve TAB issues and document solutions to TAB issues. a. If resolution is not possible or is not timely, schedule meeting(s) with appropriate parties and District staff (Project Manager). b. Within 15 calendar days after receipt of Construction Documents, TAB Contractor shall review and provide written design review report of deficiencies (errors, omissions, conflicts, etc.) that would preclude TAB. a. Schedule meeting(s) with Owner’s Project Manager and Design Mechanical Engineer to resolve noted deficiencies. b. Report shall address each item in Paragraphs 2.3 through 2.7 by itemizing each area reviewed and results. 9. Design Engineer shall incorporate resolution of reviewed items into Contract Documents prior to issuance to Contractor/Construction Manager. PART 2 2.01 PART 3 3.01 PRODUCTS Not Used. EXECUTION Pre TAB Inspection A. Coordinate inspection schedule with Mechanical Contractor and Owner’s Commissioning HVAC Agent. Provide written inspection schedule. Note Commissioning inspection, Substantial Completion and Final Completion milestones on TAB schedule. B. For each inspection, TAB Contractor shall sign in and out either at District’s field office or, if th field office does not exist, at District Facilities offices located at 1050 East 10 St., Stuart, FL 34996. C. Provide periodic inspections during construction and written pre-TAB punch lists within seven calendar days after each inspection. Frequency of inspections shall be determined by TAB Contractor to provide adequate inspection coverage but shall not be less than monthly during HVAC system installation. D. Inspection reports shall define area inspected and shall itemize TAB punch items. E. Inspections shall include following areas: 1. Comply with Section 23 08 00 – Commissioning HVAC. September 15, 2015 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac Page 2 of 14 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 2. Ductwork Systems (Outdoor, Supply, Return, Exhaust, Relief, etc.): Verify proper installation of duct fittings, balancing devices, access doors, turning vanes, transitions, flexible connections, etc. 3. Piping Systems (Chilled Water, Condenser Water, Make-up Water, etc.): Verify the proper installation of pipe fittings, balancing valves, Venturis, flexible connections, gage cocks, pressure gages, thermometers, etc. 4. HVAC Equipment: Verify that manufacturer, model number, power supply, motor horsepower, accessories, etc. are per approved shop drawings. 5. When shop drawings of different manufacturer than scheduled in project documents are approved, data per shop drawings shall be listed in TAB report as design data. 6. Verify that motor starter’s overload protectors are correct for motor’s rated load amperes. 7. Installation of HVAC Equipment: Verify that installation is per project documents and/or approved shop drawings. 8. Hydronic System Commissioning: Monitor cleaning, flushing, filling and chemical treatment. 9. Observe water samples being drawn and labeled. Advise Owner’s Project Manager if system commissioning is acceptable. 10. Obtain copy of chemical treatment test report and provide same in TAB report. 11. Distribute inspection schedule per Distribution List in Para. 3.2.C. 12. Distribute pre-TAB punch lists per the Distribution List in Para. 3.2.B. 13. Obtain complete set of approved HVAC shop drawings, addenda, architect supplement instructions, change orders, etc. from the Mechanical Contractor , 14. TAB Contractor is responsible for scheduling meetings with Mechanical Contractor to obtain construction schedules for pre-TAB inspections and to resolve TAB punch items. 15. Verify automatic temperature controls are operational, equipment and duct access panels are securely closed, isolation and balancing valves are operational, ceilings, plenums, windows and doors are closed or sealed for testing. 3.02 Distribution List A. Design Review Reports shall be emailed to following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Design Mechanical Engineer. Building Department. Design Architect. Owner’s Project Manager. Owner’s Commissioning HVAC Agent. B. Commissioning HVAC Equipment, Pre-TAB Inspection Schedule and TAB Work Schedule: 1. Owner’s Project Manager. 2. Owner’s TAB. 3. Owner’s Commissioning HVAC Agent. Information shall be used to verify Contractor’s compliance with Contract Documents. 4. Design Architect. 5. Design Mechanical Engineer. 6. Provide copy of schedules to General Contractor/CM. 7. Provide copy of schedules to Mechanical Contractor. C. Re-TAB Inspection Punch Lists and TAB Work Punch Lists: 1. Mechanical Contractor. 2. Owner’s Project Manager. This information shall be used to verify the compliance by the TAB Contractor with the TAB Contract. 3. Design Mechanical Engineer. 4. Design Architect. 5. General Contractor/CM. D. TAB Report, Monthly Status Reports and Revised TAB Test Reports: 1. Owner’s Project Manager. Provide six (6) copies of Final TAB Report (one copy of other reports). September 15, 2015 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac Page 3 of 14 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.03 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Building Department. Design Architect. Design Mechanical Engineer. General Contractor/CM. Mechanical Contractor. TAB WORK A. Coordinate TAB work schedule with Mechanical Contractor and provide written TAB work schedule. Note Substantial Completion and Final Completion milestones on TAB schedule. B. For each visit to project site, TAB Contractor shall sign in and out either at District’s field office or, if field office does not exist, at Distirct’s Facilities Administrative office. C. Provide written punch lists summarizing non-complying items as soon as they are discovered, but at least weekly. Punch lists shall clearly delineate responsible party (Mechanical Contractor or Design Mechanical Engineer) for each punch item. D. Punch items, relative to system performance, shall be documented by providing TAB test reports and plotting measured data on equipment performance curves. Punch items are responsibility of Design Mechanical Engineer, if HVAC systems have been installed per project documents and approved shop drawings. E. TAB Contractor shall coordinate with responsible party (Mechanical Contractor or Design Mechanical Engineer) to resolve punch items. However, resolution that modifies the HVAC system design, operational modes or performance levels shall be approved, in writing, by Owner’s Project Manager. F. After written notification of punch list repairs by Mechanical Contractor, TAB Contractor shall provide one re-TAB per item within contract. Additional TAB fees due to repeat TAB punch items and retesting are responsibility of Mechanical Contractor. G. TAB Contractor shall be responsible to clearly document additional fees and to provide documentation to Owner’s Project Manager. Documentation that is unclear, inaccurate or untimely will not be accepted. H. Provide personnel on continuous basis in order to complete TAB work in timely manner. I. Every effort shall be made to complete TAB work before District occupancy and/or Substantial Completion. After Owner’s occupancy, access to site may be restricted. Work schedules shall be modified accordingly. Work after normal business hours shall be coordinated with Owner’s Project Manager. J. Immediately inform Owner’s Project Manager of work progress, work schedules and potential problem areas, which may delay timely completion of TAB work. K. Distribute TAB work schedule and punch lists per Distribution List in Para. 3.02. L. TAB Contractor is responsible for scheduling meetings with appropriate parties to obtain construction schedules for TAB work and to resolve TAB punch items. M. Data for non-complying systems shall be provided so that affected parties are working with same information to outstanding punch items. N. Coordinate with Mechanical Contractor and Design Mechanical Engineer in order to resolve TAB punch items and provide written monthly status report. September 15, 2015 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac Page 4 of 14 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 O. Provide revised TAB test reports for incorporation into TAB report within 15 calendar days after outstanding punch items have been resolved. P. Punch items shall be resolved and TAB report shall be completed prior to Final Completion. Q. Distribute TAB report, monthly status reports and revised TAB test reports per the Distribution List in Para.3.02. 3.04 VERIFICATION OF MEASUREMENTS A. Owner shall have option of requesting verification of measurements in TAB report. Measurement verification shall involve 10% or less of measurements in TAB report. B. Owner shall select measurements to be verified and TAB Contractor shall retest, in presence of the Owner’s Project Manager, those measurements. C. To pass measurement verification, at least 90% of those measurements shall be within acceptable tolerance of Design value. D. Measurements that are out-of-tolerance shall be re-balanced to within acceptable tolerances. E. If measurement verification fails, TAB Contractor shall rebalance systems at no additional cost to District. Measurement verification shall be repeated with another set of measurements that shall be selected by Owner. F. TAB Contractor shall provide revised TAB test reports for the re-balanced systems within 15 calendar days of measurement verification. Distribute revised TAB test reports according to Distribution Lists in Para. 3.2. 3.05 TAB REPORT REQUIREMENTS A. Publish TAB report within 15 calendar days after Substantial Completion. Publishing of TAB report shall not be delayed for unresolved punch items. B. Distribute TAB report, monthly status reports and revised TAB test reports per Distribution List in Para. 3.2. B. Provide reports in hard cover, letter size, 3-ring binders with identification on front and binder. Include set of reduced HVAC floor plans with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with test reports. Number pages, i.e., Page X of XX. C. Provide report per following format: 1. Title Page. 2. Certification Page. 3. Table of Contents. 4. Summary of Non-complying Systems (ALL ITEMS). a. Itemize outstanding TAB punch items. b. Itemize out-of-tolerance parameters from each test report. (NO EXCEPTIONS). 5. Instrument Calibration Report. 6. Test reports for each building. 7. Test reports for the central cooling/heating plant. 8. Test reports for the chemical treatment of the hydronic systems. 9. Reduced set of HVAC floor plans (NO EXCEPTIONS). E. Central Station Air Handler Units (AHU). 1. Air handler unit CFM may be determined either by totaling individual CFMs from supply air grilles or by supply air duct traverse. 2. If design CFM (within -5%) cannot be achieved, air handler unit CFM shall be verified by supply air duct traverse; return air duct traverse is not acceptable. September 15, 2015 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac Page 5 of 14 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 3. When duct traverse is utilized, provide Duct Traverse Report in TAB report and note traverse locations on reduced set of HVAC floor plans. 4. Adjust fan RPM until either design CFM (-5%/+10%) is obtained or motor is at rated FLA. Do not use motor service factor. 5. Plot TAB data on manufacturer’s fan performance curve. Include fan performance curve in TAB report. The following information shall be provided: a. Plot design point b. Label data point DESIGN POINT. c. Plot measured CFM and RPM. Label data point OPERATING POINT. d. Plot system resistance curve. 6. If design CFM (-5%/+10%) cannot be obtained, provide specific recommendations in order to obtain design CFM. 7. Provide measured static pressure data at the following locations: a. Filter inlet pressure. b. Filter delta pressure. c. Coil (cooling/heating/reheat) delta pressure. d. Fan suction pressure. e. Fan discharge pressure. Determine value from fan performance curve based on CFM and RPM; measured values are not reliable. f. Provide Air Handler Unit Test Report. g. Provide Coil Test Report. Plot actual data on psychrometric chart and include psychrometric chart in TAB report. Provided following data: (1) Plot outdoor air DB/WB temperature. Label data point (OA). (2) Plot return air DB/WB temperature. Label data point (RA). (3) Plot coil-entering air DB/WB temperature. Label data point (CEA). (4) Plot coil-leaving air DB/WB temperature. Label data point (CLA). (5)For drawthru AHUs, the location of coil leaving air temperatures is after the coil but before the fan. (5) Measured data, when plotted on a psychrometric chart, shall represent consistent HVAC system processes. Inconsistent measured data shall be redone. h. Provide Air Outlet Test Report. Note any outlet not within ± 10% of design CFM and outlet(s) with objectionable noise level. i. Define area served using both drawing room number and actual room number. j. For variable air volume systems, provide Variable Air Volume Box Test Report. 8. Provide test reports and data in following order: a. Air Handler Unit Test Report. b. Fan Performance Curve. c. Coil Test Report. d. Psychrometric Chart. e. Air Outlet Test Report. f. Variable Air Volume Box Test Report. g. Duct Traverse Reports. 3.06 Fans (Outdoor, Supply, Exhaust, Relief, Etc.) A. Provide test reports in following order: 1. Fan Test Report. 2. Air Outlet Test Report: Provide for fans with multiple supply and/or exhaust grilles. Note outlet(s) with objectionable noise level. C. Adjust fan RPM until either design CFM (-5%/+10%) is obtained or motor is at rated FLA. Do not use motor service factor. D. If design CFM (-5%/+10%) cannot be obtained, provide fan suction and discharge static ressures to determine external static pressure. E. If design CFM (-5%/+10%) cannot be obtained, provide specific recommendations in order to obtain design CFM. September 15, 2015 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac Page 6 of 14 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.07 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Pumps (Primary Chilled Water, Secondary Chilled Water, Condenser Water, Hot Water, etc.) A. Determine pump head using pump flange gage taps in order for TAB data to correlate with the pump performance curve. B. Determine GPM using venturi. Provide venturi diameter and differential head. C. Adjust system-balancing valves (coils and pump discharge) until either design GPM (5%/+10%) is obtained or motor is at rated FLA. Do not use motor service factor. D. Plot TAB data on manufacturer’s pump performance curve. Include performance curve in TAB report. Provide following information: 1. Plot valve shut head. 2. Plot valve open head and GPM. Verify motor will not overload. 3. Plot impeller curve. 4. Plot final operating head and GPM. Label data point OPERATING POINT. 5. Plot design head and GPM. Label data point DESIGN POINT. 6. Plot system-operating curve. E. If design GPM (-5%/+10%) cannot be obtained, provide specific recommendations in order to obtain design GPM. F. Provide test reports and data in the following order: 1. Pump Test Report. 2. Pump Performance Curve. G. Water Coils: Adjust individual coils to within ± 10% of design GPM, as long as total system water flow is within -5%/+10% of design GPM. H. Noise 1. Provide Acoustical Test Report (8.10.X) for those areas that, during TAB work, appear to have an objectionable noise level. 2. Plot octave band acoustical data on NC curves in order to identify problem frequencies and to quantify the level of attenuation required. 3. For student occupied areas, NC levels shall be NC35 or less. I. Venturis: Provide calibration charts (GPM versus differential head loss) in TAB report. J. Balancing Valves and Combination Balancing/Shutoff Valves 1. Valves used to set GPM shall have adjustable memory stops. 2. Permanently mark the final position of each memory stop. K. Volume Dampers. 1. Dampers used to set CFM shall have locking quadrants. 2. Permanently mark the final position of each locking quadrant. 3. For externally insulated ducts, all volume dampers shall have 2” high standoffs for locking quadrants. 3.08 Report Forms A. Each test report shall bear name of person who recorded data, date when data was recorded, and licensed professional seal of supervisor. B. Test reports shall be computer generated and shall provide all data listed, as well as any required data not listed. C. Title Page shall include following information: 1. Date. 2. Project’s name and address. September 15, 2015 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac Page 7 of 14 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Project number (SBMC). Architect’s name and address. Design Mechanical Engineer’s name and address. General Contractor’s name and address. Mechanical Contractor’s name and address. TAB Contractor’s name, address and phone number. D. Certification Page 1. Project’s name and address. 2. Certification statement. 3. TAB Contractor’s name. 4. TAB Supervisor’s name. 5. Certification number. 6. Date. 7. Seal and signature of TAB Supervisor. E. Instrument Calibration Report 1. Instrument. 2. Manufacturer. 3. Model number. 4. Serial number. 5. Range. 6. Calibration date. F. Central Station Air Handler Unit Test Report 1. Air Handler Unit Data. a. Drawing Unit Symbol and Number. b. Manufacturer, model number and serial Number. c. Wheel type: Forward curve (FC), airfoil (AF), backward incline (BI). d. Wheel diameter (IN). e. Fan arrangement: Draw thru (DT), blow thru (BT). f. Fan discharge: Upblast front (UBF), upblast rear (UBR), top horizontal (TH), bottom horizontal (BH). g. Number of fan belts, manufacturer and size. h. Number of filters, type and size. i. Note if the filter pull strip and spacers are installed. If there are obvious leak paths around filters, AHU is not acceptable until leaks are repaired. 2. Motor Data. a. Manufacturer. b. Frame size. c. Nameplate HP, volts, amps, phase, RPM and service factor. d. Starter size and overload element capacity in amps. 3. Performance Data (Design and Actual). a. Supply air CFM. b. Outside air CFM. c. Fan RPM. d. Motor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. e. Motor FLA T1, T1, T3. f. Fan total static pressure, IN WC. g. Fan suction static pressure, IN WC (Actual). h. Fan discharge static pressure, IN WC (Actual). Refer to Article 8.2, A.5.e. i. Filter static pressure loss, IN WC. j. Cooling coil static pressure loss, IN WC. k. Heating coil static pressure loss, IN WC. l. Reheat coil static pressure loss, IN WC. m. AHU casing static pressure loss, IN WC. n. External static pressure loss, IN WC. o. Inlet guide vane position at design CFM (Actual). September 15, 2015 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac Page 8 of 14 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 p. Variable speed drive output at design CFM (Actual). q. Note any abnormal vibration. G. Coil Test Report. 1. Coil Data. a. AHU Drawing Unit Symbol and Number. b. Number of rows and fins per foot. c. Coil CFM. d. Face area, SF. e. Face velocity, FPM. 2. Air-side Performance Data (Design and Actual). a. Outside air CFM. b. Outside air DB and WB temperatures, °F. c. Return air CFM. d. Return air DB and WB temperatures, °F. e. Coil CFM. f. Coil entering air DB and WB temperatures, °F. g. Coil leaving air DB and WB temperatures, °F. h. Calculate coil capacity, BTUH (=4.5*CFM*DH). 3. Water-side Performance Data (Design and Actual). a. Coil GPM. b. Coil entering water temperature, °F. c. Coil leaving water temperature, °F. d. Coil head loss, FT (=2.31*PSID). e. Venturi diameter, IN (Actual). f. Venturi differential head, IN WC (Actual). g. Calculate coil capacity, BTUH (=500*GPM*DT). H. Fan (Outdoor, Supply, Exhaust, Relief, etc.) Test Report. 1. Fan Data. a. Drawing Unit Symbol and Number. b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number. c. Type: Ceiling, inline, roof, wall. d. Wheel type: Forward curve (FC), airfoil (AF), backward incline (BI). e. Wheel diameter, IN. f. Number of belts, manufacturer and size. 2. Motor Data. a. Manufacturer. b. Frame size. c. Nameplate HP, volts, amps, phase, RPM and service factor. d. Starter size and overload element capacity, amps. 3. Performance Data (Design and Actual). a. CFM. b. Fan RPM. c. Fan suction static pressure, IN WC (Actual). d. Fan discharge static pressure, IN WC (Actual). e. Fan total static pressure, IN WC. f. Motor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. g. Motor FLA T1, T2, T3. h. Note any abnormal vibration. I. Air Outlet Test Report. 1. Outlet Data. a. Drawing Unit Symbol and Number. b. Manufacturer. c. Drawing and actual room numbers (both room numbers). d. Type: Ceiling diffuser (CD), sidewall grille (SWG), exhaust grille (EG), return grille (RG), transfer grille (TG), etc. September 15, 2015 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac Page 9 of 14 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 e. Size, IN. 2. Performance Data. a. Design CFM. b. Actual CFM. c. Note all outlets that are not balanced within ±10% of design. (Actual CFM-Design CFM)/ Design CFM)*100. d. Note outlets with an objectionable noise level greater than 35 db in classrooms. J. Duct Heater Test Report. 1. Unit Data. a. Drawing Unit Symbol and Number. b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number. c. Design KW, volts, amps, phase and number of steps. 2. Performance Data (Actual). a. Volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. b. Amps T1, T2, T3. K. Unit Ventilator/Fan Coil Unit Test Report. 1. Unit Data. a. Drawing Unit Symbol and Number. b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number. c. Control valve: 2-way or 3-way, 2-position or modulating. d. Fan motor nameplate HP, volts, amps, phase, RPM and service factor. e. Electric heater KW, volts, amps, phase and number of steps. 2. Performance Data (Design and Actual). a. Outside air CFM. b. Fan motor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. c. Fan motor FLA T1, T2, T3. d. Coil GPM. e. Coil entering water temperature, °F. f. Coil leaving water temperature, °F. g. Venturi size, IN (Actual). h. Venturi differential head, IN WC (Actual). i. Heater volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. j. Heater amps T1, T2, T3. L. Pump Test Report. 1. Pump Data. a. Drawing Unit Symbol and Number. b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number. c. Design GPM, head, RPM and impeller diameter. d. Required NPSH. e. Seal type. 2. Motor Data. a. Manufacturer. b. Frame size. c. Nameplate HP, volts, amps, phase, RPM and service factor. d. Starter size and overload element capacity, amps. 3. Performance Data. a. Valve shut differential head, FT. b. Actual impeller diameter, IN. c. Valve open differential head, FT. Verify motor will not overload. d. Valve open GPM. e. Final suction pressure, PSIG. f. Final discharge pressure, PSIG. g. Final pump head, FT (=2.31*PSIG). h. Final pump GPM. i. Motor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. September 15, 2015 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac Page 10 of 14 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA j. k. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Motor amps T1, T2, T3. Note any abnormal vibration. M. Duct Traverse Test Report. 1. Duct Data. a. System/Branch. b. Size, IN. c. Area, SF. d. Design airflow, CFM. e. Design velocity, FPM. 2. Traverse Data. a. Duct static pressure, IN WC. b. Air temperature, °F. c. Traverse position, IN. d. Traverse velocity pressure, IN WC. e. Traverse velocity, FPM. f. Average duct velocity, FPM. g. Measured airflow, CFM. N. Chiller Test Report. 1. Chiller Data. a. Drawing Unit Symbol and Number. b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number. c. Chiller volts, amps and phase. d. Starter size and overload element capacity, amps. 2. Evaporator Data (Design and Actual). a. CHW temperature set point, °F. b. Entering/leaving CHW temperature, °F. c. Entering/leaving CHW pressure, PSIG. d. Differential CHW head, FT (=2.31*PSID). e. GPM. f. Capacity, TONS (=GPM*DT/24). g. Note: Test each chiller at full load. 3. Compressor Data (Design and Actual). a. Manufacturer, model number and serial number. b. Volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. c. Amps T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. 4. Air Cooled Condenser Data (Design and Actual). a. Number of fans. b. Fan motor HP, volts, amps and phase. c. Ambient temperature, °F. 5. Water Cooled Condenser Data (Design and Actual). a. Entering/leaving CW temperature, °F. b. Entering/leaving CW pressure, PSIG. c. Differential CW head, FT (=2.31*PSID). d. GPM. O. Cooling Tower Test Report. 1. Cooling Tower Data. a. Drawing Unit Symbol and Number. b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number. c. Fan motor HP, volts, amps, RPM, phase and service factor. d. Starter size and overload element capacity, amps. e. Number of fan belts, manufacturer and size. 2. Performance Data (Design and Actual). a. abnormal vibration. b. Entering/leaving CW temperature, °F. c. Design WB temperature, °F. d. Ambient DB/WB temperatures, °F. September 15, 2015 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac Page 11 of 14 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 e. GPM. f. Fan motor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. g. Fan motor amps T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. 3. Note any Temperature Control System Data (Actual). a. Single speed fan: Aquastat set point (°F) for fan on/off. b. Two speed fan: Aquastat set points (°F) for fan high/low/off. P. Heat Exchanger Test Report. 1. Heat Exchanger Data. a. Drawing Unit Symbol and . b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number. c. Design capacity, BTUH. d. Primary/secondary fluids. 2. Performance Data (Design and Actual). a. Primary entering/leaving temperatures, °F. b. Primary entering/leaving pressures, PSIG. c. Primary differential head, FT (=2.31*PSID). d. Primary GPM. e. Calculate primary capacity, BTUH (=500*GPM*DT). f. Secondary entering/leaving temperatures, °F. g. Secondary entering/leaving pressures, PSIG. h. Secondary differential head, FT (=2.31*PSID). i. Secondary GPM. j. Calculate secondary capacity, BTUH (=500*GPM *DT). Q. Variable Air Volume Box Test Report. 1. Box Data. a. Drawing Unit Symbol and Number. b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number. c. Fan HP, volts, amps and phase. d. Heater KW, volts, amps, phase and number of steps. 2. Performance Data (Design and Actual). a. Cooling CFM: Primary maximum/minimum. b. Heating CFM: Primary minimum/secondary/total. c. Heater volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. d. Heater amps T1, T2, T3. e. Fan volts T1-T2. f. Fan amps T1. R. Boiler (Space Heating) Test Report. 1. Unit Data. a. Drawing Unit Symbol and Number. b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number. c. Type. d. Fuel. e. Number of passes. f. Ignition type. g. Burner control. h. Power supply volts, amps and phase. i. Input/output, MBH. 2. Performance Data (Design and Actual) a. Entering/leaving HW temperatures, °F. b. Entering/leaving HW pressures, PSIG. c. Differential water head, FT (=2.31*PSID). d. GPM. e. Volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. f. Amps T1, T2, T3. September 15, 2015 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac Page 12 of 14 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 S. Make-up Water System Test Report. 1. Backflow Preventer. a. Manufacturer and model number. b. Type: Backflow preventer shall be reduced pressure type. c. Size, IN. d. Discharge funnel/air gap shall be installed. e. Discharge shall be piped to a floor drain (interior location) or to 12” AFG (exterior location). 2. Pressure Regulating Valve. a. Manufacturer and model number. b. Set point, PSI. Refer to Article 8.10, S.1.c. c. Size, IN. 3. Pressure Relief Valve. a. Manufacturer and model number. b. Set point, PSI. c. Size, IN. d. Discharge shall be piped to a floor drain (interior location) or to 12” AFG (exterior location). T. Expansion Tank Test Report 1. Full Acceptance Bladder Expansion Tank. a. Manufacturer and model number. b. Acceptance tank volume, GAL. c. Precharged pressure, PSIG. Set point of the pressure-regulating valve shall be equal to the tank precharge pressure. 2. Diaphragm expansion tanks are not acceptable. 3. Closed compression tanks are not acceptable. U. Surface Heater Test Report. 1. Unit Data. a. Mark. b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number. c. Design KW, volts, amps and phase. 2. Performance Data (Actual). a. Volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. b. Amps T1, T2, T3. V. Rooftop Unit Test Report. 1. Unit Data. a. Mark. b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number. c. Number of filters, type and size. 2. Evaporator Fan and Motor Data. a. Motor nameplate HP, volts, amps, phase, RPM and service factor. b. Number of fan belts, manufacturer and size. 3. Evaporator Fan Data (Design and Actual). a. Supply air CFM. b. Outside air CFM. c. Fan RPM. d. Motor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. e. Motor amps T1, T2, T3. f. Fan total static pressure, IN WC. g. Fan suction static pressure, IN WC (actual). h. Fan discharge static pressure, IN WC (actual). Determine value from fan curve based on CFM and RPM. Refer to Article 8.2, A.5.e. i. External static pressure, IN WC. j. Note any abnormal vibration. 4. Evaporator Coil Data (Design and Actual). September 15, 2015 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac Page 13 of 14 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 a. Coil CFM. b. Coil entering air DB/WB temperatures, °F. c. Coil leaving air DB/WB temperatures, °F. d. Coil capacity, BTUH (=4.5*CFM*DH). e. Coil circuiting: row split (intertwined) or face split. 5. Condensing Unit Data (Design and Actual). a. Number of compressors/circuits. b. Ambient temperature, °F. c. Compressor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. d. Compressor amps T1, T2, T3. e. Number of condenser fans (Actual). f. Condenser fan HP, volts, amps, phase, RPM (Actual). 6. Heater Data (Design and Actual). a. KW (Design). b. Volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. c. Amps T1, T2, T3. d. Number of steps. W. Condensing Unit Test Report. 1. Unit Data. a. Drawing Unit Symbol and Number. b. Manufacturer, model number and serial number. c. Number of compressors/circuits. 2. Compressor Data. a. Ambient temperature, °F. b. Compressor volts T1-T2, T2-T3, T3-T1. c. Compressor amps T1, T2, T3. 3. Condenser Fan Data. a. Number of fans. b. Fan HP, volts, amps, phase and RPM. X. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Test Report. 1. Drawing Unit Symbol and Number. 2. Manufacturer, model number and serial number. 3. Nameplate volts, amps and phase. 4. Outside air CFM. 5. Nameplate cooling capacity, BTUH. 6. Cooling mode volts and amps. 7. Nameplate heating capacity, KW. 8. Heating mode volts and amps. Y. Acoustical Test Report. 1. Indicate reference to Drawing Sheet Number and FISH room number for each space tested. 2. Noise level (dB re 10-12W) by octave band (63 Hz, 125 Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1000 Hz, 2000 Hz, 4000 Hz, 8000 Hz). 3. Plot noise levels on NC curve. 4. Note which systems are not within acceptable tolerance (NC35 or less in student occupied areas). END OF SECTION 23 05 93 September 15, 2015 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For Hvac Page 14 of 14 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Insulation Materials: a. b. c. d. e. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 1.2 Cellular glass. Flexible elastomeric. Mineral fiber. Polyolefin. Polystyrene. Fire-rated insulation systems. Insulating cements. Adhesives. Mastics. Sealants. Factory-applied jackets. Field-applied fabric-reinforcing mesh. Field-applied jackets. Tapes. Securements. Corner angles. SUBMITTALS A. 1.3 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. 2. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 1 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. G. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. 1. Comply with Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. H. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type II with factory-applied vinyl jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. September 15, 2015 CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. Johns Manville; Microlite. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 2 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA d. e. I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type III, without factory-applied jacket. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. L. Johns Manville; HTB 23 Spin-Glas. Owens Corning; High Temperature Flexible Batt Insulations. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factoryapplied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. K. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap. High-Temperature, Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type V, without factory-applied jacket. 1. J. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin-Glas. Owens Corning; High Temperature Industrial Board Insulations. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta Board. Roxul Inc.; Roxul RW. Thermafiber; Thermafiber Industrial Felt. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. 2. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 3. Type II, 1200 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type II, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 3 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA M. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory applied to the entire inside surface of preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to outside surface of insulation under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer, vapor-retarder jacket with self-sealing adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes running continuously along the longitudinal seam, exposing the absorbent cloth. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. N. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. Armacell LLC; Tubolit. Nomaco Inc.; IMCOLOCK, IMCOSHEET, NOMALOCK, and NOMAPLY. RBX Corporation; Therma-cell. Polystyrene: Rigid, extruded cellular polystyrene intended for use as thermal insulation. Comply with ASTM C 578, Type IV or Type XIII, except thermal conductivity (k-value) shall not exceed 0.26 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F after 180 days of aging. Fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2.2 CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation. Polyolefin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534 or ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II, Grade 1 for sheet materials. 1. P. Knauf Insulation; Permawick Pipe Insulation. Owens Corning; VaporWick Pipe Insulation. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. O. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Dow Chemical Company (The); Styrofoam. Knauf Insulation; Knauf Polystyrene. FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS A. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is tested and certified to provide a 1-hour fire rating by a NRTL acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 4 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 CertainTeed Corp.; FlameChek. Johns Manville; Firetemp Wrap. Nelson Firestop Products; Nelson FSB Flameshield Blanket. Thermal Ceramics; FireMaster Duct Wrap. 3M; Fire Barrier Wrap Products. Unifrax Corporation; FyreWrap. Vesuvius; PYROSCAT FP FASTR Duct Wrap. INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting ASTM C 449/C 449M. 1. and Finishing Cement: Comply with Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. 2.4 Insulating Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot. ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. B. Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2. C. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. 2. D. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 5 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. 2. E. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. 2. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. 2. 2.5 Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 97-13. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. G. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent- or water-based, synthetic resin adhesive with a service temperature range of minus 20 to plus 140 deg F. 1. F. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II. B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 6 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40. Vimasco Corporation; 749. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. Color: White. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-05/15. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 3 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 200 deg F. Solids Content: 63 percent by volume and 73 percent by weight. Color: White. SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. Vimasco Corporation; 750. Joint Sealants for Polystyrene Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. September 15, 2015 Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-70. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45/30-46. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Vimasco Corporation; 750. 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 7 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. Color: White or gray. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. Vimasco Corporation; 750. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. Color: Aluminum. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. Color: White. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 8 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 6. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2.8 Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. a. 8. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. a. 7. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. inch, in a Leno weave, for duct, equipment, and pipe. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2.9 Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; Mast-A-Fab. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894. FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing. C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. September 15, 2015 Johns Manville; Zeston. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 9 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA c. d. 2. 3. 4. D. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows. Tee covers. Flange and union covers. End caps. Beveled collars. Valve covers. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum-foil facing. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. F. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14. 1. E. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. Color: White. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. 5. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Polyguard; Alumaguard 60. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. September 15, 2015 Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film. 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 10 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA G. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. H. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. A. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. TAPES ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. Dow Chemical Company (The), Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip. 1. 2.10 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. Width: 3 inches. Thickness: 11.5 mils. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 2 percent. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. Width: 3 inches. Thickness: 6.5 mils. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 2 percent. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 11 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D. Width: 2 inches. Thickness: 6 mils. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 500 percent. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. Compac Corp.; 120. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. Width: 2 inches. Thickness: 3.7 mils. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. Elongation: 5 percent. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. F. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. Compac Corp.; 130. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. E. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape. Width: 3 inches. Film Thickness: 4 mils. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 2. 3. 4. 5. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Tape. Width: 3 inches. Film Thickness: 6 mils. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 12 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 6. 2.11 A. Tensile Strength: 55 lbf/inch in width. SECUREMENTS Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. B. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Childers Products; Bands. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2) 3) b. c. d. 2. AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series T. GEMCO; Perforated Base. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2) b. c. d. September 15, 2015 GEMCO; Nylon Hangers. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 13 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2) 3) b. c. d. 4. AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Insul-Hangers, Series TSA. GEMCO; Press and Peel. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) b. 5. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. GEMCO; R-150. Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2) GEMCO. Midwest Fasteners, Inc. C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,: a. b. c. d. 2.12 A. C & F Wire. Childers Products. PABCO Metals Corporation. RPR Products, Inc. CORNER ANGLES PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 14 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.2 Comply with GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. 2. 3. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 15 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 4. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. 2. 3. Draw jacket tight and smooth. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c. a. 4. 5. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.3 Vibration-control devices. Testing agency labels and stamps. Nameplates and data plates. Manholes. Handholes. Cleanouts. PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: penetrations. 1. 2. 3. 4. Install insulation continuously through roof Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 16 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. 2. 3. 4. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. 2. 3. 3.4 Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers. 1. 2. 3. 4. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels as follows: a. b. c. d. September 15, 2015 Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service temperature and with substrate. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 17 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA e. f. g. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. B. 2. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints. Insulation Installation on Pumps: 1. 2. 3. 3.5 Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels. 1. C. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel, at least 0.040 inch thick. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier. GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. 2. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 18 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Installation shall conform to the Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 19 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 5. 3.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. 2. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2. 3. 3.7 Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. D. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2. 3. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 20 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 4. C. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2. 3. 4. 3.8 Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. 2. D. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. 2. D. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 21 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. 4. E. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. 2. 3. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. b. c. d. e. f. 4. b. 5. 6. 7. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. F. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 22 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. b. c. d. e. 4. b. 6. 3.9 On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. 5. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. POLYOLEFIN INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. B. Seal split-tube longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 23 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. 4. C. 3. 4. A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 2. 3. 3. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, same thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, not to exceed 1-1/2-inch thickness. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polystyrene block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. D. Secure each layer of insulation with tape or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Orient longitudinal joints between half sections in 3 and 9 o'clock positions on the pipe. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor barriers, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive or tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps at all joints. Vapor barrier must be continuous. Before installing jacket material, install vapor-barrier system. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. 2. C. Install cut sections of polyolefin pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. POLYSTYRENE INSULATION INSTALLATION 1. B. Install mitered sections of polyolefin pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2. 3.10 Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of polyolefin sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. 2. D. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Install preformed insulation sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. 2. 3. Install preformed section of polystyrene insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 24 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.11 A. FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Draw jacket material smooth and tight. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at end joints. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. D. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 3.12 Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch- circumference limit allows for 2-inch- overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges. FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating. B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct. C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Fire-stop systems are Page 25 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.13 A. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 FINISHES Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. C. 3.15 A. Vary first and second coats to allow visual Inspect ductwork by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article. Inspect field-insulated equipment by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. Indoor, concealed return located in nonconditioned space. Indoor, exposed return located in nonconditioned space. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust. Indoor, exposed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust. Indoor, concealed oven and warewash exhaust. Indoor, exposed oven and warewash exhaust. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 26 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 11. 12. B. Outdoor, concealed supply and return. Outdoor, exposed supply and return. Items Not Insulated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 3.16 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Fibrous-glass ducts. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. Flexible connectors. Vibration-control devices. Factory-insulated access panels and doors. INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. B. Concealed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. C. Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. D. Concealed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. E. Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. F. Exposed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. G. Exposed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. H. Exposed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1 ½ inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 3.17 ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a duct system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. C. Concealed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. D. Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 27 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 E. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. F. Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. G. Exposed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. H. Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. I. Exposed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density. 3.18 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. 2. 3. 3.19 A. INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE Chilled Water and Brine, above 40 Deg F: Insulation shall be the following: 1. B. 3.20 A. OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE Chilled Water and Brine: Insulation shall be the following: Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Insulation shall be the following: 1. 3.21 Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Flexible elastomeric, 1 inch thick. 1. B. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. Underground piping. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the fieldapplied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 28 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed: 1. D. PVC: 20 mils thick. Piping, Exposed: 1. 3.22 None. Piping, Concealed: 1. F. None. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed: 1. E. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PVC: 20 mils thick. OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the fieldapplied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed: 1. D. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches: 1. E. Aluminum, Smooth with 4-by-1-Inch Box Ribs: 0.032 inch thick. Piping, Concealed: 1. 2. 3. I. Aluminum, Smooth with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.016 inch thick. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches: 1. H. Aluminum, Smooth with 4-by-1-Inch Box Ribs: 0.032 inch thick. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches: 1. G. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch thick. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches: 1. F. None. None. PVC: 20 mils thick. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch thick. Piping, Exposed: September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 29 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 3.23 A. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PVC: 20 mils thick. UNDERGROUND, FIELD-INSTALLED INSULATION JACKET For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over insulation material. END OF SECTION 23 07 00 September 15, 2015 230700 - Hvac Insulation Page 30 of 30 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-22: 1. 2. 3. 1.3 Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 185 psig. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 325 psig. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 325 psig. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. pressure drop based on manufacturer's test data. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment. 1. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 Include QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems." B. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components." 1.5 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed. September 15, 2015 232300 - Refrigerant Piping Page 1 of 9 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. F. Flexible Connectors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.2 Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket. End Connections: Socket ends. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch long assembly. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. VALVES AND SPECIALTIES A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. Packed-Angle Valves: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. C. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight-through or angle pattern. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel. Seat: Nylon. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure. Operator: Rising stem. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. Check Valves: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat. Closing Spring: Stainless steel. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal. September 15, 2015 232300 - Refrigerant Piping Page 2 of 9 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 6. 7. 8. 9. D. 6. 7. 8. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F. Superheat: Nonadjustable. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications). End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union. Working Pressure Rating: 450 psig. Straight-Type Strainers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. I. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene. End Connections: Threaded. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. H. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. End Connections: Threaded. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24, 115 or 208-V ac coil. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. Manual operator. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. G. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. End Connections: Copper spring. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. F. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. Service Valves: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel. End Connections: Socket or flare. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. Angle-Type Strainers: 1. Body: Forged brass or cast bronze. September 15, 2015 232300 - Refrigerant Piping Page 3 of 9 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. J. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 7. 8. 9. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. Desiccant Media: Activated charcoal. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications). End Connections: Socket. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495. 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.3 Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and neoprene gaskets. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. Desiccant Media: Activated charcoal. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications). End Connections: Socket. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. M. Body: Forged brass. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by filter screen. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm. End Connections: Socket or flare. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730. 1. L. Drain Plug: Brass hex plug. Screen: 100-mesh monel. End Connections: Socket or flare. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 1. 2. K. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. End Connections: Socket or threaded. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. REFRIGERANTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: September 15, 2015 232300 - Refrigerant Piping Page 4 of 9 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. Manufacturers: following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Atofina Chemicals, Inc. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC. Other manufacturers requesting approval shall comply with Spec Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures”. R-410A PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Suction Lines NPS 4 and smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints. B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed or soldered joints. C. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type K or L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints. D. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller Copper, Type L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with [brazed] [or] [soldered] joints. 2. NPS 2 to NPS 3 : Copper, Type K, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wroughtcopper fittings with brazed or soldered joints. 3. NPS 4 : Copper, Type K or L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints. E. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type K or L, drawn-temper tubing and wroughtcopper fittings with soldered joints. F. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: 1. 2. 3. 3.2 NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Copper, Type L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints. NPS 2 to NPS 3: Copper, Type K, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wroughtcopper fittings with brazed or soldered joints. NPS 4 : Copper, Type K or L, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints. VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS A. Install packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor. B. Install service valves for gage taps at strainers if they are not an integral part of strainers. C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection. September 15, 2015 232300 - Refrigerant Piping Page 5 of 9 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 D. Except as otherwise indicated, install packed-angle valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers. E. Install a full-sized, three-valve bypass around filter dryers. F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve. horizontal lines with coil at top. G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators. 1. 2. 3. Install solenoid valves in Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location. H. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15. I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube. J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for device being protected: 1. 2. 3. Solenoid valves. Thermostatic expansion valves. Compressor. K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve. L. Install flexible connectors at compressors. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings. B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. September 15, 2015 232300 - Refrigerant Piping Page 6 of 9 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. J. Refer to Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation. K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings. L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces. M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground. N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury. O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. Liquid lines may be installed level. P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb. Q. Install pipe sleeves at penetrations in exterior walls and floor assemblies. R. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." S. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation. T. Install sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation. U. Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and methods. V. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." B. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." September 15, 2015 232300 - Refrigerant Piping Page 7 of 9 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. D. 3.6 Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. Test refrigerant piping and specialties. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. a. b. c. d. September 15, 2015 Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. 232300 - Refrigerant Piping Page 8 of 9 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SYSTEM CHARGING A. Charge system using the following procedures: 1. 2. 3. 4. 3.8 Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. ADJUSTING A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat. B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure. C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature. D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established. END OF SECTION 232300 September 15, 2015 232300 - Refrigerant Piping Page 9 of 9 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.2 Rectangular ducts and fittings. Round ducts and fittings. Sheet metal materials. Sealants and gaskets. Hangers and supports. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. Division 23 Section "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous-glass ducts, thermoset fiber-reinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts. Division 23 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for mechanical equipment. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, ductmounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. 1.4 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. September 15, 2015 233113 - Metal Ducts Page 1 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. 2. 3. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up." D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for staticpressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. September 15, 2015 Lindab Inc. McGill AirFlow LLC. SEMCO Incorporated. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. 233113 - Metal Ducts Page 2 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. C. 2.3 Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. D. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Fabricate round ducts larger Than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. 2. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article. E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. G. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. September 15, 2015 233113 - Metal Ducts Page 3 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. D. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. Tape Width: 3 inches. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. Water resistant. Mold and mildew resistant. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. Service: Indoor and outdoor. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Application Method: Brush on. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. Water resistant. Mold and mildew resistant. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. Service: Indoor or outdoor. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. Type: S. Grade: NS. Class: 25. Use: O. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. 2. 3. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. September 15, 2015 233113 - Metal Ducts Page 4 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. 2. 3. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. September 15, 2015 233113 - Metal Ducts Page 5 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCT A. Install commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold grease, and sloped a minimum of 2 percent to drain grease back to the hood. B. Install fire-rated access panel assemblies at each change in direction and at maximum intervals of 20 feet in horizontal ducts, and at every floor for vertical ducts, or as indicated on Drawings. Locate access panel on top or sides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches from bottom of duct. C. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as allowed by applicable building codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 3.4 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": September 15, 2015 233113 - Metal Ducts Page 6 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 3.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class A. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class B. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. September 15, 2015 233113 - Metal Ducts Page 7 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. 2. 3. C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. 2. D. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. E. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. Coils and related components. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. September 15, 2015 233113 - Metal Ducts Page 8 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.8 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 START UP A. 3.9 Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel. B. Supply Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units: a. b. c. d. C. Return Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units: a. b. c. d. D. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. b. c. d. e. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12. SMACNA Leakage Class: 3. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units: a. b. c. d. F. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 3-inch wg. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12. Exhaust Ducts: 1. E. Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 3-inch wg. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. 2. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. PVC-Coated Ducts: a. b. 3. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. Stainless-Steel Ducts: September 15, 2015 233113 - Metal Ducts Page 9 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA a. b. 4. G. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) 2) b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1) 2) 3) c. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. b. c. 3. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1) 2) 3) 2. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) 2) 3) 4) b. September 15, 2015 Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. 233113 - Metal Ducts Page 10 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA c. H. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections." a. b. 2. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. b. c. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral. END OF SECTION 23 31 13 September 15, 2015 233113 - Metal Ducts Page 11 of 11 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 31 16 - NONMETAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. B. Related Sections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.2 Fibrous-glass ducts and fittings. Phenolic-foam ducts and fittings. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for nonmetal ducts. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for single- and double-wall, rectangular and round ducts. Division 23 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for mechanical equipment. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. 1.3 Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. SUBMITTALS A. 1.4 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up." B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." C. NFPA Compliance: 1. 2. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." September 15, 2015 233116 - Nonmetal Ducts Page 1 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIBROUS-GLASS DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Fibrous-Glass Duct Materials: Resin-bonded fiberglass, faced on the outside surface with fireresistive FSK vapor retarder and with a smooth fiberglass mat finish on the air-side surface. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. C. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. Johns Manville. Knauf Insulation. Owens Corning. Duct Board: Factory molded into rectangular boards. Round Duct: Factory molded into straight round duct and smooth fittings. Temperature Limits: 40 to 250 deg F inside ducts; 150 deg F ambient temperature surrounding ducts. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. Moisture Absorption: Not exceeding 5 percent by weight at 120 deg F and 95 percent relative humidity for 96 hours when tested according to ASTM C 1104/C 1104M. Permeability: 0.02 perms maximum when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A. Antimicrobial Agent: Compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL, and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems. Noise-Reduction Coefficient: 0.65 minimum when tested according to ASTM C 423, Mounting A. Required Markings: EI rating, UL label, and other markings required by UL 181 on each full sheet of duct board. Closure Materials: 1. Pressure-Sensitive Tape: Comply with UL 181A; imprinted by the manufacturer with the coding "181A-P," the manufacturer's name, and a date code. a. b. c. d. e. 2. Heat-Activated Tape: Comply with UL 181A; imprinted by the manufacturer with the coding "181A-H," the manufacturer's name, and a date code. a. b. c. d. e. 3. Tape: Aluminum foil-scrim tape imprinted with listing information. Minimum Tape Width: 2-1/2 inches; 3 inches for duct board thicker than 1 inch. Staples: 1/2-inch outward clinching, 2 inches o.c. in tabs, one tab per joint. Water resistant. Mold and mildew resistant. Tape: Aluminum foil-scrim tape imprinted with listing information. Minimum Tape Width: 3 inches. Heat-Sensitive Imprint: Printed indicator on tape to show proper heating during application has been achieved. Water resistant. Mold and mildew resistant. Two-Part Tape Sealing System: Comply with UL 181A; imprinted by the manufacturer with the coding "181A-M," the manufacturer's name, and a date code. a. September 15, 2015 Tape: Woven glass fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum. 233116 - Nonmetal Ducts Page 2 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA b. c. d. e. f. D. Minimum Tape Width: 3 inches. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. Water resistant. Mold and mildew resistant. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Fabrication: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Select joints, seams, transitions, elbows, and branch connections and fabricate according to SMACNA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," Chapter 2, "Specifications and Closure," and Chapter 4, "Fittings and Connections." Fabricate 90-degree mitered elbows to include turning vanes. Reinforcements: Comply with requirements in SMACNA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," Chapter 5, "Reinforcement" for channel- and tie-rod reinforcement materials, spacing, and fabrication. Preformed Round Duct: Comply with NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," Section VII, "Preformed Round Duct." PHENOLIC-FOAM DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. B. Duct Panel: CFC-free phenolic-foam bonded on both sides with factory-applied 0.001-inchthick, aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass scrim. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C. Knauf Insulation. Maximum Temperature: 158 deg F inside ducts or ambient temperature surrounding ducts. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.13 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. Permeability: 0.0002 perms maximum when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A. Antimicrobial Agent: Compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL, and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems. Noise-Reduction Coefficient: 0.65 minimum when tested according to ASTM C 423, Mounting A. Required Markings: UL label and other markings required by UL 181 on each full sheet of duct panel; UL ratings for closure materials. Closure Materials: 1. V-Groove Adhesive: Silicone. a. 2. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Pressure-Sensitive Tape: Comply with UL 181A; imprinted by the manufacturer with the coding "181A-P," the manufacturer's name, and a date code. a. b. c. d. September 15, 2015 Tape: Aluminum foil tape imprinted with listing information. Minimum Tape Width: 3 inches. Water resistant. Mold and mildew resistant. 233116 - Nonmetal Ducts Page 3 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. Polymeric Sealing System: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. D. Structural Membrane: Woven glass fiber. Minimum Tape Width: 3 inches. Sealant: Water based. Color: White. Water resistant. Mold and mildew resistant. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Fabrication: 1. 2. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Fabricate joints, seams, transitions, reinforcement, elbows, branch connections, access doors and panels, and damage repairs according to Knauf Insulation's "Knauf KoolDuct System Design Guide," Section 4, "Duct Construction," and Section 5, "Ductwork System General." Fabricate 90-degree mitered elbows to include turning vanes. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized steel with end connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. B. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. C. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. D. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. September 15, 2015 233116 - Nonmetal Ducts Page 4 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 E. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. F. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. G. Protect duct interiors from the moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." H. Install fibrous-glass ducts and fittings to comply with SMACNA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards." I. Install foam ducts and fittings to comply with Knauf Insulation's "Knauf KoolDuct System Design Guide." 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install hangers and supports for fibrous-glass ducts and fittings to comply with SMACNA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," Chapter 6, "Hangers and Supports." B. Install hangers and supports for phenolic-foam ducts and fittings to comply with Knauf Insulation's "Knauf KoolDuct System Design Guide," Section 5, "Ductwork System General." C. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. 2. 3. 4. D. 3.3 Install concrete inserts before placing concrete. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. 2. 3. C. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch duct as recommended by duct manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: September 15, 2015 233116 - Nonmetal Ducts Page 5 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. D. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. Coils and related components. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.4 When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. 2. E. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of ducts or duct accessories. Clean fibrous-glass duct with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. START UP A. 3.5 Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." DUCT SCHEDULE A. Indoor Ducts and Fittings: 1. Fibrous-Glass Rectangular Ducts and Fittings: a. b. 2. Minimum Flexural Rigidity: EI-475. Minimum Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inches. Fibrous-Glass Round Ducts and Fittings: a. September 15, 2015 Minimum Thickness: 1 inch. 233116 - Nonmetal Ducts Page 6 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. Phenolic-Foam Rectangular Ducts and Fittings: a. b. B. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Minimum Panel Thickness: 1-3/32 inches. Aluminum Cladding: Minimum 0.025 inch thick. Outdoor Duct and Fittings: 1. Phenolic-Foam Rectangular Ducts and Fittings: a. b. c. Minimum Panel Thickness: 1-3/32 inches. Aluminum Cladding: Minimum 0.032 inch thick. Polymeric Sealing System: Coat ducts, including gang-nail couplings, grip flanges, and couplings. END OF SECTION 23 31 16 September 15, 2015 233116 - Nonmetal Ducts Page 7 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 1.2 Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. Manual volume dampers. Control dampers. Fire dampers. Smoke dampers. Flange connectors. Turning vanes. Duct-mounted access doors. Flexible connectors. Flexible ducts. Duct accessory hardware. SUBMITTALS A. 1.3 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. 2. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and exposed ducts. D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts. September 15, 2015 233300 - Air Duct Accessories Page 1 of 13 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. Duro Dyne Inc. Greenheck Fan Corporation. Lloyd Industries, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. Ruskin Company. SEMCO Incorporated. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. Description: Gravity balanced. C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm. D. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg. E. Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange. F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum with sealed edges. G. Blade Action: Parallel. H. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked. I. Blade Axles: 1. 2. Material: Nonferrous metal. Diameter: 0.20 inch. J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension. L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings. M. Accessories: 1. 2. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations. September 15, 2015 233300 - Air Duct Accessories Page 2 of 13 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. 4. 5. Electric actuators. Chain pulls. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve. a. b. 6. 7. 8. 9. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage minimum. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted. Screen Material: Galvanized steel. Screen Type: Bird. 90-degree stops. MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. 2. 3. 4. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. Frames: a. b. c. 5. B. Multiple or single blade. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. Bearings: a. b. 8. Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness. Mitered and welded corners. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. Blades: a. b. c. d. 6. 7. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. McGill AirFlow LLC. METALAIRE, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. Ruskin Company. Trox USA Inc. Vent Products Company, Inc. Oil-impregnated bronze. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: September 15, 2015 233300 - Air Duct Accessories Page 3 of 13 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. 3. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. Size: 1-inch diameter. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly. Damper Hardware: 1. 2. 3. 2.4 Oil-impregnated bronze. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. Jackshaft: 1. 2. D. Multiple or single blade. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. Bearings: a. b. 8. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. McGill AirFlow LLC. METALAIRE, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. Ruskin Company. Trox USA Inc. Vent Products Company, Inc. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. Blades: a. b. c. d. e. 6. 7. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. September 15, 2015 233300 - Air Duct Accessories Page 4 of 13 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. Bearings: 1. 2. 3. 2.5 Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches. Opposed-blade design. Galvanized steel. 0.064 inch thick. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene edging. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. 1. E. Hat shaped. Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick. Mitered and welded corners. Blades: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D. Greenheck Fan Corporation. METALAIRE, Inc. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. Ruskin Company. Other manufacturers requesting approval shall comply with Spec Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures” Frames: 1. 2. 3. C. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Oil-impregnated bronze. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade. FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. B. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. Greenheck Fan Corporation. McGill AirFlow LLC. METALAIRE, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. PHL, Inc. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc. Ruskin Company. Vent Products Company, Inc. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL. September 15, 2015 233300 - Air Duct Accessories Page 5 of 13 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity. D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours. E. Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel. 1. 2. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements. G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated. H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors. I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring. J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links. K. Heat-Responsive Device: Electric resettable link and switch package, factory installed, 165 deg F rated. 2.6 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. Greenheck Fan Corporation. Nailor Industries Inc. PHL, Inc. Ruskin Company. B. General Requirements: Label according to UL 555S by an NRTL. C. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection. D. Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. E. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors. F. Leakage: Class I . G. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions. H. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application with factory-furnished silicone calking. September 15, 2015 233300 - Air Duct Accessories Page 6 of 13 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 I. Damper Motors: two-position action. J. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. K. Accessories: 1. 2. 2.7 Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz. Auxiliary switches for signaling or position indication. Test and reset switches, damper mounted. FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Description: Add-on, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. C. Material: Galvanized steel. D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. 2.8 TURNING VANES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Ductmate Industries, Inc. Duro Dyne Inc. METALAIRE, Inc. SEMCO Incorporated. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. September 15, 2015 233300 - Air Duct Accessories Page 7 of 13 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill. C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." E. Vane Construction: Single wall. F. Vane Construction: dimensions. 2.9 Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. B. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. Ductmate Industries, Inc. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. Greenheck Fan Corporation. McGill AirFlow LLC. Nailor Industries Inc. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc. Ventfabrics, Inc. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct." 1. Door: a. b. c. d. e. 2. 3. Double wall, rectangular. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Vision panel. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. b. c. d. September 15, 2015 Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 233300 - Air Duct Accessories Page 8 of 13 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. Pressure Relief Access Door: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 2.10 A. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel. Door: Double wall with insulation fill with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure class. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure ducts. Factory set at 10-inch wg. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range. Hinge: Continuous piano. Latches: Cam. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber. Insulation Fill: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board. DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc. Flame Gard, Inc. 3M. B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL. C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel. D. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall. E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F. F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative. 2.11 A. FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Ductmate Industries, Inc. Duro Dyne Inc. Ventfabrics, Inc. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. September 15, 2015 233300 - Air Duct Accessories Page 9 of 13 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. F. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire. 1. 2. 3. D. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. McGill AirFlow LLC. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire. 1. 2. 3. C. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch movement at start and stop. FLEXIBLE DUCTS 1. 2. 3. B. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct. 1. 2.12 Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. 2. 3. G. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F. Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire. 1. 2. 3. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. September 15, 2015 233300 - Air Duct Accessories Page 10 of 13 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA E. Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire. 1. 2. 3. F. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film. 1. 2. 3. 4. L. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film. 1. 2. 3. 4. K. Pressure Rating: 4-inch wg positive and 0.5-inch wg negative. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 175 deg F. Insulation R-Value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film. 1. 2. 3. 4. J. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, black polymer film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film. 1. 2. 3. 4. I. Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg positive or negative. Maximum Air Velocity: 5000 fpm. Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 435 deg F. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, springsteel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film. 1. 2. 3. 4. H. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of aluminum foil. 1. 2. 3. G. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Pressure Rating: 8-inch wg positive or negative. Maximum Air Velocity: 5000 fpm. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 250 deg F. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Flexible Duct Connectors: September 15, 2015 233300 - Air Duct Accessories Page 11 of 13 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 2.13 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. Non-Clamp Connectors: Adhesive plus sheet metal screws. DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. 2. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts. E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install fire dampers according to UL listing. H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. On both sides of duct coils. Upstream from duct filters. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. At drain pans and seals. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors; and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream September 15, 2015 233300 - Air Duct Accessories Page 12 of 13 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 7. 8. 9. 10. from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. Upstream from turning vanes. Control devices requiring inspection. Elsewhere as indicated. I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. J. Access Door Sizes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. K. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. M. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. N. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. O. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 120 inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. P. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. Q. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. R. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop of fans. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. END OF SECTION 23 33 00 September 15, 2015 233300 - Air Duct Accessories Page 13 of 13 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 34 13 - AXIAL HVAC FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes tubeaxial and vaneaxial fans. SUBMITTALS A. 1.3 Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TUBEAXIAL FANS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. American Fan Company. Barry Blower Div.; Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc. Greenheck. Loren Cook Company. Trane. Other manufacturers requesting approval shall comply with Spec Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures” D. Description: Fan wheel and housing, factory-mounted motor with belt drive or direct drive, an inlet cone section, and accessories. E. Housings: Galvanized steel with flanged inlet and outlet connections. September 15, 2015 233413 - Axial Hvac Fans Page 1 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 F. Wheel Assemblies: Cast or extruded aluminum with airfoil-shaped blades mounted on cast-iron wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid-steel key. G. Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. H. Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. I. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing. Inspection Door: Bolted door allowing limited access to internal parts of fan, of same material as housing. Mounting Clips: Horizontal ceiling clips welded to fan housing, of same material as housing. Horizontal Support: Pair of supports bolted to fan housing, of same material as housing. Vertical Support: Short duct section with welded brackets bolted to fan housing, of same material as housing. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork, of same material as housing. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for bolting to the discharge of fan or outlet cone, of same material as housing. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from outside of airstream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and provision for manual or automatic operation of same material as housing. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, of same material as housing. Inlet Cones: Round-to-round transition of same material as housing. Outlet Cones: Round-to-round transition of same material as housing. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. 2. J. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet. Motor Mount: Adjustable base. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning ball or roller bearings. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. Direct-Driven Units: Encase motor in housing outside of airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing. Factory Finishes: 1. 2. 3. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly. Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized;. a. b. September 15, 2015 Apply to finished housings. Apply to fan wheels. 233413 - Axial Hvac Fans Page 2 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 VANEAXIAL FANS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. D. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. American Fan Company. Barry Blower Div.; Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc. Greenheck. Loren Cook Company. Trane. Other manufacturers requesting approval shall comply with Spec Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures” Description: Fan wheel and housing, straightening vane section, factory-mounted motor with belt drive or direct drive, an inlet cone section, and accessories. 1. E. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Variable-Pitch Fans: Internally mounted electric actuator, externally mounted positive positioner, and mechanical-blade-pitch indicator. Housings: Aluminum or stainless steel. 1. 2. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Flanges. Guide Vane Section: Integral guide vanes downstream from fan wheel designed to straighten airflow. F. Wheel Assemblies: Cast aluminum with airfoil-shaped blades mounted on cast-iron wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid-steel key. G. Wheel Assemblies: Cast-aluminum hub assembly, machined and fitted with threaded bearing wells to receive blade-bearing assemblies with replaceable, cast-aluminum blades; factory mounted and balanced. H. Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. I. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet. Motor Mount: Adjustable base. Shaft Bearings: Radial, self-aligning ball or roller bearings. Accessories: 1. 2. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing. Inspection Door: Bolted door allowing limited access to internal parts of fan, of same material as housing. September 15, 2015 233413 - Axial Hvac Fans Page 3 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. J. Mounting Clips: Horizontal ceiling clips welded to fan housing, of same material as housing. Horizontal Support: Pair of supports bolted to fan housing, of same material as housing. Vertical Support: Short duct section with welded brackets bolted to fan housing, of same material as housing. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to ductwork of same material as housing. Backdraft Dampers: Butterfly style, for mounting with flexible connection to the discharge of fan or direct mounted to the discharge diffuser section of same material as housing. Stall Alarm Probe: Sensing probe capable of detecting fan operation in stall and signaling control devices. Control devices and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls." Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from outside of airstream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and provision for manual or automatic operation of same material as housing. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, of same material as housing. Inlet Cones: Round-to-round transition of same material as housing. Outlet Cones: Round-to-round transition of same material as housing. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. 2. K. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. Direct-Driven Units: Encase motor in housing outside of airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing. Factory Finishes: 1. 2. 3. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly. Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized;. a. b. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Apply to finished housings. Apply to fan wheels. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install axial fans level and plumb. September 15, 2015 233413 - Axial Hvac Fans Page 4 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Support floor-mounting units using spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration- and seismic-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base. C. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." D. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, the seismic force required by authorities having jurisdiction. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." E. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." F. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. G. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 22 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. Adjust belt tension. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. September 15, 2015 233413 - Axial Hvac Fans Page 5 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 9. 10. 11. B. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation, adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. Test and adjust controls and safeties. equipment. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and END OF SECTION 23 34 13 September 15, 2015 233413 - Axial Hvac Fans Page 6 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 34 16 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 1.2 Backward-inclined centrifugal fans. Forward-curved centrifugal fans. SUBMITTALS A. 1.3 Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKWARD-INCLINED CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ABB Fan Group North America. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company. Airmaster Fan Co. Ammerman; General Resource Corp. Bayley Fans; a division of Lau Industries, Inc. Carrier Corporation. Central Blower Company. Chicago Blower Corporation. Cincinnati Fan. September 15, 2015 233416 - Centrifugal Hvac Fans Page 1 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 CML Northern Blower Inc. Howden Fan Co. Industrial Air; a division of Lau Industries, Inc. Loren Cook Company. Madison Manufacturing. New Philadelphia Fan Co. New York Blower Company (The). Trane. D. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure. E. Housings: Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff; with doors or panels to allow access to internal parts and components. 1. 2. 3. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. Spun inlet cone with flange. Outlet flange. F. Backward-Inclined Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet and double-width-double-inlet construction with curved inlet flange, backplate, backward-inclined blades welded or riveted to flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws. G. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. 2. H. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings. 1. 2. I. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, Ll0 at 50,000 hours. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, Ll0 at 50,000 hours. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. J. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating of lubricating oil. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of diamondmesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning. Accessories: 1. Scroll Access Doors: gaskets. September 15, 2015 Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches and 233416 - Centrifugal Hvac Fans Page 2 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. K. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing. Variable Inlet Vanes: With blades supported at both ends with two permanently lubricated bearings of same material as housing. Variable mechanism terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double-width fans. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with opposed blades constructed of two plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings; with blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as housing. Inlet Screens: Grid screen of same material as housing. Spark-Resistant Construction: AMCA 99. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans. Weather Cover: Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. FORWARD-CURVED CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ABB Fan Group North America. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company. Airmaster Fan Co. Ammerman; General Resource Corp. Bayley Fans; a division of Lau Industries, Inc. Carrier Corporation. Central Blower Corporation. Chicago Blower Corporation. Cincinnati Fan. CML Northern Blower Inc. Howden Fan Co. Industrial Air; a division of Lau Industries, Inc. Loren Cook Company. Madison Manufacturing. New Philadelphia Fan Co. New York Blower Company (The). Trane. D. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure. E. Housings: Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff; with doors or panels to allow access to internal parts and components. 1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. September 15, 2015 233416 - Centrifugal Hvac Fans Page 3 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Spun inlet cone with flange. Outlet flange. F. Forward-Curved Wheels: Black-enameled or galvanized steel construction with inlet flange, backplate, shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow, mechanically secured to flange and backplate; cast-steel hub swaged to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws. G. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. 2. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with protective coating of lubricating oil. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range. H. Prelubricated and Sealed Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type ball bearings. I. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. J. Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. K. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of diamondmesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches and gaskets. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing. Variable Inlet Vanes: With blades supported at both ends with two permanently lubricated bearings of same material as housing. Variable mechanism terminating in single control lever with control shaft for double-width fans. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with opposed blades constructed of two plates formed around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings; with blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as housing. Inlet Screens: Grid screen of same material as housing. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans. Weather Cover: Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. September 15, 2015 233416 - Centrifugal Hvac Fans Page 4 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb. B. Support floor-mounting units using spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration- and seismic-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base. C. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." D. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, the seismic force required by authorities having jurisdiction. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." E. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." F. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. G. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance. C. Install line-sized piping from scroll drain connection, with trap with seal equal to 1.5 times specified static pressure, to nearest floor drain. D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." September 15, 2015 233416 - Centrifugal Hvac Fans Page 5 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA E. 3.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. B. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. Adjust belt tension. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. Test and adjust controls and safeties. equipment. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and END OF SECTION 23 34 16 September 15, 2015 233416 - Centrifugal Hvac Fans Page 6 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 34 23 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.2 Centrifugal roof ventilators. Centrifugal wall ventilators. Ceiling-mounting ventilators. In-line centrifugal fans. SUBMITTALS A. 1.3 Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards. C. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company. American Coolair Corp. Ammerman; General Resource Corp. Breidert Air Products. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc. Carnes Company HVAC. Central Blower Co. Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co.; a division of W. W. Grainger, Inc. September 15, 2015 233423 - Hvac Power Ventilators Page 1 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Delhi Industries Inc. Greenheck. Hartzell Fan, Inc. JencoFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products. Loren Cook Company. NuTone Inc. Penn Ventilation. Quietaire Corporation. D. Description: Direct- or belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories. E. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. 1. Hinged Subbase: maintenance. Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and F. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades. G. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features: 1. 2. 3. 4. H. Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. I. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 2.2 Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange. Overall Height: 16 inches. Sound Curb: Curb with sound-absorbing insulation matrix. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel. Burglar Bars: 1/2-inch- thick steel bars welded in place to form 6-inch squares. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel. Vented Curb: Unlined with louvered vents in vertical sides. CENTRIFUGAL WALL VENTILATORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Manufacturers: following: September 15, 2015 233423 - Hvac Power Ventilators Page 2 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company. American Coolair Corp. Ammerman; General Resource Corp. Breidert Air Products. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc. Carnes Company HVAC. Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co.; a division of W. W. Grainger, Inc. Greenheck. Hartzell Fan, Inc. JencoFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products. Loren Cook Company. NuTone Inc. Penn Ventilation. D. Description: Direct- or belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories. E. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venturi inlet cone. F. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades. G. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features: 1. 2. 3. 4. H. Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.3 Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. Wall Grille: Ring type for flush mounting. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall sleeve; factory set to close when fan stops. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops. CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 1. American Coolair Corp. 2. Ammerman; General Resource Corp. September 15, 2015 233423 - Hvac Power Ventilators Page 3 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Breidert Air Products. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc. Carnes Company HVAC. Dayton Electric Manufacturing Co.; a division of W. W. Grainger, Inc. FloAire. Greenheck. JencoFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products. Loren Cook Company. NuTone Inc. Penn Ventilation. D. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line applications. E. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. F. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service. G. Grille: Painted aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing. H. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in. I. Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2.4 Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light. Time-Delay Switch: Assembly with single-pole rocker switch, timer, and cover plate. Motion Sensor: Motion detector with adjustable shutoff timer. Ceiling Radiation Damper: Fire-rated assembly with ceramic blanket, stainless-steel springs, and fusible link. Filter: Washable aluminum to fit between fan and grille. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings. IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 1. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. 2. American Coolair Corp. 3. Ammerman; General Resource Corp. 4. Bayley Fans; a division of Lau Industries, Inc. 5. Breidert Air Products. 6. Carnes Company HVAC. 7. FloAire. 8. Greenheck. 9. Hartzell Fan, Inc. 10. JencoFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products. September 15, 2015 233423 - Hvac Power Ventilators Page 4 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 11. 12. 13. 14. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Loren Cook Company. Madison Manufacturing. Penn Ventilation. Quietaire Corporation. D. Description: In-line, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, mounting brackets, and accessories. E. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting. F. Direct-Driven Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing; with wheel, inlet cone, and motor on swing-out service door. G. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of fan housing. H. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub. I. Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.5 Volume-Control Damper: Manually operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections. Fan Guards: 1/2- by 1-inch mesh of galvanized steel in removable frame. Provide guard for inlet or outlet for units not connected to ductwork. Motor and Drive Cover (Belt Guard): Epoxy-coated steel. MOTORS A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install power ventilators level and plumb. B. Support units using spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration- and seismiccontrol devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base. C. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." D. Secure roof-mounting fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs. September 15, 2015 233423 - Hvac Power Ventilators Page 5 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 E. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. F. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." G. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. H. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." I. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." J. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. K. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." L. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. B. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. Adjust belt tension. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. Test and adjust controls and safeties. equipment. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and END OF SECTION 23 34 23 September 15, 2015 233423 - Hvac Power Ventilators Page 6 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 37 13 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. B. Related Sections: 1. 2. 1.2 Round ceiling diffusers. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. Perforated diffusers. Louver face diffusers. Linear bar diffusers. Linear slot diffusers. Adjustable bar registers and grilles. Fixed face registers and grilles. Linear bar grilles. Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volumecontrol dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. 2. B. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Round Ceiling Diffuser: 1. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. September 15, 2015 Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. Carnes. Hart & Cooley Inc. METALAIRE, Inc. 233713 - Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles Page 1 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA e. f. g. h. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Equalizing grid. Plaster ring. Safety chain. Wire guard. Sectorizing baffles. Operating rod extension. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers: 1. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. Carnes. Hart & Cooley Inc. Krueger. METALAIRE, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. Price Industries. Titus. Tuttle & Bailey. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. Material: Extruded Aluminum. Finish: Brushed Aluminum. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. Face Style: Four cone. Mounting: Surface. Pattern: Fixed. Dampers: Butterfly. Accessories: a. b. c. d. e. f. C. Nailor Industries Inc. Price Industries. Titus. Tuttle & Bailey. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. Material: Extruded Aluminum. Finish: Brushed Aluminum. Face Style: Four cone. Mounting: Duct connection. Pattern: Two-position horizontal. Dampers: Butterfly. Accessories: a. b. c. d. e. f. B. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Equalizing grid. Plaster ring. Safety chain. Wire guard. Sectorizing baffles. Operating rod extension. Perforated Diffuser: September 15, 2015 233713 - Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles Page 2 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Air Research Diffuser Products, Inc. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. Carnes. Hart & Cooley Inc. Krueger. METALAIRE, Inc. Nailor Industries Inc. Price Industries. Titus. Tuttle & Bailey. Warren Technology. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. Material: Extruded Aluminum. Finish: Brushed Aluminum. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. Duct Inlet: Round. Face Style: Flush. Mounting: Surface. Pattern Controller: Four louvered deflector patches. Dampers: Butterfly. Accessories: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Equalizing grid. Plaster ring. Safety chain. Wire guard. Sectorizing baffles. Operating rod extension. REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Fixed Face Register: 1. 2. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. c. Carnes. d. Dayus Register & Grille Inc. e. Hart & Cooley Inc. f. Krueger. g. Nailor Industries Inc. h. Price Industries. i. Titus. j. Tuttle & Bailey. Material: Extruded Aluminum. September 15, 2015 233713 - Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles Page 3 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. B. Finish: Brushed Aluminum. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core. Core Construction: Integral. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide. Mounting: Countersunk screw. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. Accessory: Filter. Fixed Face Grille: 1. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. Carnes. Dayus Register & Grille Inc. Hart & Cooley Inc. Krueger. Nailor Industries Inc. Price Industries. Titus. Tuttle & Bailey. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Material: Aluminum. Finish: Baked enamel, white. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core. Core Construction: Integral. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide. 8. 9. Mounting: Countersunk screw. Accessory: Filter. SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. September 15, 2015 233713 - Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles Page 4 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 23 37 13 September 15, 2015 233713 - Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles Page 5 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 37 14 - LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Fixed, extruded aluminum stationary air intake louvers with drainable blades, blank off panels, screen, attachments and accessories required for complete installation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K L. M. N. O. 1.03 Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 42 00 – References. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management. Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete. Section 04 20 00 – Unit Masonry. Section 05 10 00 - Structural Metal Framing. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. Section 07 42 13 - Metal Wall Panels. Section 07 60 00 - Flashing and Sheet Metal. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. Section 09 91 00 - Paints. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets. REFERENCES A. See Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, definitions, abbreviations and acronyms. B. ASCE (American Society of Civil Engineers): ASCE 7-10 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures. C. ASTM (American Society of Testing Materials): 1. ASTM B 209, Aluminum Sheet; alloy 303 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise required by metal producer for required finish. 2. ASTM B 221, Aluminum Extrusions; alloy 6063-T5 or T52. D. AAMA 2605.02 - High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. E. AMCA 500-L - Test Methods for Louvers. F. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices. G. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. H. Florida Building Code, 2010 Edition. I. 1.04 Miami-Dade county Building code Compliance Office (BCCO) Check List for Approval of Wall Louvers. SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. September 15, 2015 233713 - Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data including performance data. J. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating plans, elevations, sections and details of louver materials, construction, dimensions, accessories, and installation details. K. Submit signed and sealed structural calculations from structural engineer licensed in State of Florida or Notice of Approval from Florida Dept. of Community Affairs indicating Miami Dade Test Approval. D. Samples: Submit sample of louver to show frame, blades, screen, gutters, downspouts, vertical supports, sill, accessories, finish, and colors. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Louvers shall have AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. B. Ratings shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accord with AMCA 511 and comply with AMCA Certified Ratings Program. C. AMCA Certified Ratings Seal shall apply to air performance and water penetration ratings. D. Louvers specified shall be from one manufacturer. E. Louvers shall comply with AWS D1.2 – Structural Welding Code- Aluminum, AMCA Standard 500-L-99 for air performance, water penetration, and air leakage. F. Louvers shall be approved by Miami-Dade County BCCO for use in open structures that have ability to drain water that may penetrate. Approval based on tests and procedures performed in accord with BCCO test protocols PA-201, PA-202 and PA-203. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material. B. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoors, protected from damage and in accord with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Handling: Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Ruskin Manufacturing, 3900 Dr. Greaves Road, Kansas City, Missouri 64030; Tel: (816) 7617476; Fax (816) 765-8955; Website: www.ruskin.com. B. Airlite Company, LLC, Marietta, OH; Tel: 740-373-7676; Fax: 740-373-6666; Website: www.airolite.com. C. Construction Specialties, Inc., 49 Meeker Ave., Cranford, NJ 07016; Tel: 800-631-7379; Website: www.c-sgroup.com. D. Reliable Metal products, Inc., 1300 Enterprise Rd., P.O. Box 580; Geneva, AL 36340-0580.. E. Other manufacturers shall request product approval in accord with Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. September 15, 2015 233713 - Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.02 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 EXTRUDED ALUMINUM STATIONARY LOUVERS A. Design Basis: 1. Ruskin Model: EME520MD. 2. Miami-Dade Notice of Acceptance Number: 05-0812.07. 3. Frame: a. Material: Extruded aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5. b. Wall Thickness: 0.081 inch (2.1 mm), nominal. c. Depth: 5 inches (127 mm). d. Downspouts and caulking surfaces. 4. Blades: a. Style: Sight proof, double drainable, horizontally mounted. b. Material: Extruded aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5. c. Wall Thickness: 0.081 inch (2.1 mm), nominal. d. Centers: 2 inches (51 mm), nominal. 5. Bird Screen: a. Material: Aluminum. 0.50 inch by 0.063 inch (13mm x 1.6mm), intercrimp. b. Frame: Removable, rewireable. 6. Assembly: Factory assembled louver components. 7. Maximum Assembly Size: Unlimited width by 120 inches (3,048mm) high. B. Performance Data: 1. Based on testing 48 inch x 48 inch (1,219 mm x 1,219 mm) size unit in accord with AMCA 500. 2. Free Area: 44 percent, nominal. 2 3. Free Area Size: 6.99 square feet (0.65 m ). 4. Maximum Recommended Air Flow Thru Free Area: 1,327 fpm (396 m/min). 3 5. Air Flow: 9,276 cfm (263 m /min). 6. Maximum Pressure Drop (at 1,327 fpm): 0.25 inches w.g. (0.06kPa). C. AMCA Wind Driven Water Penetration Performance: 1. Based on testing 39 inch by 39 inch(1m x 1m) core area, 41 inch by 44 inch (1.04m x 1.12m) nominal size uit in accord with AMCA 500-L. 2. Wind Velocity: 29 mph (46.4 kph). 3. Rainfall Rate: 3 inches/hour (76mm/hour). 4. Air Volume: 7,236 cfm (205m³/min). 5. Core Velocity: 672 fpm (3.5 m/second). 6. Free Area Velocity: 1,327 feet per minute (396 m/min). 7. Water Resistance Effectiveness: 99.7% (AMCA Class A). 8. Discharge Loss Classification (Intake Test): Class 2 (.3 to .399). D. Miami-Dade Test Protocols Tested and Passed: 1. PA-201-94 Large Missile Impact Test. 2. PA-202-94 Uniform Pressure Test (for +/- 140 psf windload). 3. PA-203-94 Cyclic Wind Pressure Test. E. Design Load: Incorporate structural supports required to withstand wind load of +/-140 PSF (6.7kPa). 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Blank-Off Panels: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) aluminum sheet, factory installed with removable screws and neoprene gaskets. 2.04 FINISH A. Kynar 500 Fluoropolymer Coating: 1. Comform to AAMA 2605-02. 2. Apply coating following cleaning and pretreatment. 3. Cleaning: AA-C12C42R1X. September 15, 2015 233713 - Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 4. Dry louvers before final finish application. B. Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard colors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Inspect areas to receive louvers. Notify Contractor/CM of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent utilization of louvers. B. Proceed with installation only when unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Locate louvers at locations indicated and in accord with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install louvers plumb, level, in plane of wall, and in alignment with adjacent work. C. Use concealed fasteners to anchor louvers in openings. E. Install joint sealants per Section 07 92 13-Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean louver surfaces in accord with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Repair minor damaged surfaces. END OF SECTION 23 37 14 September 15, 2015 233713 - Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 233813 - COMMERCIAL-KITCHEN HOODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes commercial kitchen hoods. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. 2. 3. B. Filters/baffles. Fire-suppression systems. Lighting fixtures. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Show plan view, elevation view, sections, roughing-in dimensions, service requirements, duct connection sizes, and attachments to other work. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to confirm minimum code-required overhang. Indicate performance, exhaust and makeup air airflow, and pressure loss at actual Project-site elevation. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Piping Diagrams: Detail fire-suppression piping and components and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed piping. Show cooking equipment plan and elevation to illustrate fire-suppression nozzle locations. C. Welding certificates. D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that commercial kitchen hoods, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." E. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D 1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports; and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for joint and seam welding. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. September 15, 2015 233813 - Commercial-kitchen Hoods Page 1 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HOOD MATERIALS A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1. 2. Minimum Thickness: [0.0575 inch] . Finish: Comply with SSINA's "Finishes for Stainless Steel" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. a. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Finish shall be free from tool and die marks and stretch lines and shall have uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Grain shall run with long dimension of each piece. Concealed Stainless-Steel Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 2B finish (bright, coldrolled, unpolished finish). Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 2B finish (bright, cold-rolled, unpolished). Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 3 finish (intermediate polished surface). Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 4 finish (directional satin). Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 6 finish (dull satin). Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 7 finish (reflective, directional polish). Exposed Surfaces: ASTM A 480/A 480M, No. 8 finish (mirrorlike reflective, nondirectional polish). When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. B. Zinc-Coated Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated according to ASTM A 123/A 123M requirements. C. Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Elastomeric sealant shall be NSF certified for commercial kitchen hood application. Sealants, when cured and washed, shall comply with requirements in 21 CFR, Section 177.2600, for use in areas that come in contact with food. 1. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene, in diameter larger than joint width. D. Sound Dampening: NSF-certified, nonabsorbent, hard-drying, sound-deadening compound for permanent adhesion to metal in minimum 1/8-inch thickness that does not chip, flake, or blister. E. Gaskets: NSF certified for end-use application indicated; of resilient rubber, neoprene, or PVC that is nontoxic, stable, odorless, nonabsorbent, and unaffected by exposure to foods and cleaning compounds, and that passes testing according to UL 710. 2.2 GENERAL HOOD FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Welding: Use welding rod of same composition as metal being welded. Use methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metal. Make ductile welds free of mechanical imperfections such as gas holes, pits, or cracks. 1. Welded Butt Joints: Full-penetration welds for full-joint length. Make joints flat, continuous, and homogenous with sheet metal without relying on straps under seams, filling in with solder, or spot welding. September 15, 2015 233813 - Commercial-kitchen Hoods Page 2 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. 4. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Grind exposed welded joints flush with adjoining material and polish to match adjoining surfaces. Where fasteners are welded to underside of equipment, finish reverse side of weld smooth and flush. Coat concealed stainless-steel welded joints with metallic-based paint to prevent corrosion. B. For metal butt joints, comply with SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines." C. Form metal with break bends that are not flaky, scaly, or cracked in appearance; where breaks mar uniform surface appearance of material, remove marks by grinding, polishing, and finishing. D. Sheared Metal Edges: Finish free of burrs, fins, and irregular projections. E. In food zones, as defined in NSF, fabricate surfaces free from exposed fasteners. F. Cap exposed fastener threads, including those inside cabinets, with stainless-steel lock washers and stainless-steel cap (acorn) nuts. G. Fabricate pipe slots on equipment with turned-up edges sized to accommodate service and utility lines and mechanical connections. H. Fabricate enclosures, including panels, housings, and skirts, to conceal service lines, operating components, and mechanical and electrical devices including those inside cabinets, unless otherwise indicated. I. Fabricate seismic restraints according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," Appendix 1, "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment." J. Fabricate equipment edges and backsplashes according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines." K. Fabricate enclosure panels to ceiling and wall as follows: 1. 2. 3. 2.3 Fabricate panels on [all exposed] side(s) with same material as hood, and extend from ceiling to top of hood canopy and from canopy to wall. Wall Offset Spacer: Minimum of 3 inches. Wall Shelves and Overshelves: Fabricate according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," with minimum 0.0625-inch-thick, stainless-steel shelf tops. TYPE I EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] or a comparable product by one of the following: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 1. Captive-Aire Systems. 2. Other manufacturers requesting approval shall comply with Spec Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. September 15, 2015 233813 - Commercial-kitchen Hoods Page 3 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA D. Weld all joints exposed to grease with continuous welds, and make filters/baffles or grease extractors and makeup air diffusers easily accessible for cleaning. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment." Hoods shall be listed and labeled, according to UL 710, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Hoods shall be designed, fabricated, and installed according to NFPA 96. Include access panels as required for access to fire dampers and fusible links. Duct Collars Without Fire Dampers: Minimum 0.0598-inch-thick steel at least 3 inches long, continuously welded to top of hood and at corners. Duct-Collar With Fire Dampers: Collar and damper shall comply with UL 710 testing and listing required for the entire hood. a. b. c. d. 7. Collar: Minimum 0.0598-inch-thick stainless steel, at least 3 inches long, continuously welded to top of hood and at corners. Blades: Minimum 0.1046-inch-thick stainless steel, counterbalanced to remain closed after actuation. Blade Pivot and Spring: Stainless steel. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 212 deg F rated. Makeup Air Fire Dampers: Labeled, according to UL 555, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. b. c. d. e. E. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours. Frame: SMACNA [Type B], with blades in airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, [stainless] steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking or folded, minimum 0.034-inch-thick, galvanizedsteel sheet. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring. Fusible Link: Replaceable, [212 deg F] rated. Hood Configuration: Exhaust [and makeup air]. 1. 2. 3. Makeup air shall be introduced by [combination of induction and diffusion] inside canopy. If makeup air is not heated, insulate interior of makeup air plenum with highdensity insulation having maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. Makeup air shall be introduced through [front] of canopy through [perforated diffusers] Makeup air shall be introduced through laminar-flow-type, perforated metal panels on front of hood canopy. F. Hood Style: [Double-island canopy]. G. Filters/Baffles: Removable, [stainless-steel] [, with spring-loaded fastening]. Fabricate stainless steel for filter frame and removable collection cup and pitched trough. Exposed surfaces shall be pitched to drain to collection cup. Filters/baffles shall be tested according to UL 1046, "Grease Filters for Exhaust Ducts," by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. H. Lighting Fixtures: [Surface-mounted], [incandescent] fixtures and lamps with lenses sealed vaportight. Wiring shall be installed in conduit on hood exterior. Number and location of fixtures shall provide a minimum of 70 fc at 30 inches above finished floor. 1. 2. Light switches shall be mounted [in hood control panel]. Lighting Fixtures: [Incandescent] complying with UL 1598. September 15, 2015 233813 - Commercial-kitchen Hoods Page 4 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 I. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for hood controls. J. Hood Controls: [Hood] mounting control cabinet, [factory wired to control groups of adjacent hoods, and] fabricated of stainless steel. 1. 2. 3. K. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2.4 Exhaust Fan: On-off switches shall start and stop the exhaust fan. [Interlock exhaust fan with makeup air supply fan to operate simultaneously.] Interlock exhaust fan with fire-suppression system to operate fan(s) during fire-suppression-agent release and to remain in operation until manually stopped. Include red pilot light to indicate fan operation. Motor starters shall comply with Division 26 Section "Enclosed Controllers." Exhaust Fan Interlock: Factory wire the exhaust fan starters in a single control cabinet for adjacent hoods to operate together. High-Temperature Control: Alarm shall sound and cooking equipment shall shut down before hood discharge temperature rises to actuation temperature of fire-suppression system. Nominal Hood Length: Nominal Hood Width: < see drawings Canopy Height: < see drawings> Exhaust Airflow: < see drawings.> Exhaust-Air Pressure Loss: < see drawings.> Makeup Air Airflow: < see drawings.> Makeup Air Pressure Loss: < see drawings.> TYPE II EXHAUST HOOD FABRICATION A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] or a comparable product by one of the following: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 1. Captive-Aire Systems. 2. Other manufacturers requesting approval shall comply with Spec Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. D. Fabricate hoods according to NSF 2, "Food Equipment." E. Fabricate hoods to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards: Metal and Flexible." F. Hood Configuration: Exhaust [and makeup air]. 1. Makeup air shall be introduced by [combination of induction and diffusion] inside canopy. If makeup air is not heated, insulate interior of makeup air plenum with highdensity insulation having maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. September 15, 2015 233813 - Commercial-kitchen Hoods Page 5 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Makeup air shall be introduced through [front] of canopy through supply-air registers. Makeup air shall be introduced through laminar-flow-type, perforated metal panels on front of hood canopy. G. Hood Type: [Heat and vapor] removal. H. Hood Style: [Single-island canopy], [Double-island canopy] I. Condensate Hood Baffles: Removable, stainless-steel baffles to drain into a hood drain trough, and stainless-steel drain piping. J. Lighting Fixtures: [Surface-mounted], [incandescent] fixtures and lamps with lenses sealed vaportight. Wiring shall be installed in stainless-steel conduit on hood exterior. Number and location of fixtures shall provide a minimum of 70 fc at 30 inches above finished floor. 1. 2. K. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2.5 Light switches shall be mounted [in hood control panel]. Lighting Fixtures: [Incandescent] complying with UL 1598. Nominal Hood Length: < see drawings.> Nominal Hood Width: < see drawings.> Canopy Height: < see drawings.> Exhaust Airflow: < see drawings.> Exhaust-Air Pressure Loss: < see drawings.> Makeup Air Airflow: < see drawings.> Makeup Air Pressure Loss: < see drawings.> WET-CHEMICAL FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEM A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [the product indicated on Drawings] or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. D. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Ansul Incorporated; a Tyco International Ltd. Company. Badger Fire Protection. Kidde Fire Systems. Pyro Chem. Description: Engineered distribution piping designed for automatic detection and release or manual release of fire-suppression agent by hood operator. Fire-suppression system shall be listed and labeled for complying with NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems," by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. 2. 3. Steel Pipe, NPS 2 and Smaller: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40, plain ends. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300. Piping, fusible links and release mechanism, tank containing the suppression agent, and controls shall be factory installed. Controls shall be in stainless-steel control cabinet September 15, 2015 233813 - Commercial-kitchen Hoods Page 6 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 mounted on [hood] [or] [wall]. Furnish manual pull station for wall mounting. Exposed piping shall be covered with chrome-plated aluminum tubing. Exposed fittings shall be chrome plated. Liquid Extinguishing Agent: Noncorrosive, low-pH liquid. Furnish electric-operated gas shutoff valve Furnish electric-operated gas shutoff valve with clearly marked open and closed indicator for field installation. Fire-suppression system controls shall be integrated with controls for fans, lights, and fuel supply and located in a single cabinet for each group of hoods immediately adjacent. Wiring shall have color-coded, numbered terminal blocks and grounding bar. Spare terminals for fire alarm, optional wiring to start fan with fire alarm, red pilot light to indicate fan operation, and control switches shall all be factory wired in control cabinet with relays or starters. Include spare terminals for fire alarm, and wiring to start fan with fire alarm. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Complete field assembly of hoods where required. 1. 2. Make closed butt and contact joints that do not require filler. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment smooth, and polish to match adjacent finish. Comply with welding requirements in Part 2 "General Hood Fabrication Requirements" Article. B. Install hoods and associated services with clearances and access for maintaining, cleaning, and servicing hoods, filters/baffles, grease extractor, and fire-suppression systems according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Make cutouts in hoods where required to run service lines and to make final connections, and seal openings according to UL 1978. D. Securely anchor and attach items and accessories to walls, floors, or bases with stainless-steel fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. E. Install hoods to operate free from vibration. F. Install seismic restraints according to SMACNA's "Kitchen Equipment Fabrication Guidelines," Appendix 1, "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Kitchen Equipment." G. Install trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant. Fasten with stainlesssteel fasteners at 48 inches o.c. maximum. H. Install sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint backing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints. I. Install lamps, with maximum recommended wattage, in equipment with integral lighting. J. Set initial temperatures, and calibrate sensors. K. Set field-adjustable switches. September 15, 2015 233813 - Commercial-kitchen Hoods Page 7 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 L. Connect ducts according to requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Install flexible connectors on makeup air supply duct. Weld exhaust-duct connections with continuous liquidtight joint. M. Install fire-suppression piping for remote-mounted suppression systems according to NFPA 17A, "Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Perform tests and inspections. 1. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Test each equipment item for proper operation. Repair or replace equipment that is defective, including units that operate below required capacity or that operate with excessive noise or vibration. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Perform hood performance tests required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform fire-suppression system performance tests required by authorities having jurisdiction. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 233813 September 15, 2015 233813 - Commercial-kitchen Hoods Page 8 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 41 00 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes factory-fabricated air-filter devices and media used to remove particulate matter from air for HVAC applications. SUBMITTALS A. 1.3 Product Data: Include dimensions; required clearances and access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test method; fire classification; furnished specialties; and accessories for each unit indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with ARI 850. C. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the AAF International. Air Filter International. Airguard Industries, Inc. Barnebey & Sutcliffe Corp. Columbus Industries, Inc. CRS Industries, Inc.; CosaTron Div. D Mark Inc. Farr Co. Flame Gard, Inc. Flanders/CSC Corp. Flanders Filters, Inc. General Filters Inc. International Air Filtration Corporation. Koch Filter Corporation. LakeAir International, Inc. NiCon Filter Corp.; Continental Air Filter Div. September 15, 2015 234100 - Particulate Air Filtration Page 1 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 17. 18. C. D. 2. 3. 2. Media: Fibrous material formed into deep-V-shaped pleats and held by self-supporting wire grid. Media and Media-Grid Frame: Nonflammable cardboard. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners, and suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. Media: Flat-panel, multilayer filter with inlet layer of polyester fibers, layer of activatedcarbon granules bonded to fibers, layer of polyurethane foam, and housed in cardboard frame. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded galvanized steel with polyurethane gaskets and fasteners, capable of holding media and media frame in place and suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. Electronic Air Cleaners: Galvanized-steel assembly containing electronic agglomerator, prefilters, and independently supported and nested aluminum collection cells. 1. 2. 3. 4. G. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive. Frame: Cardboard frame with perforated metal retainer. Duct-Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized steel with gaskets and fasteners and suitable for bolting together into built-up filter banks. Activated-Carbon Panel Filters: Factory-fabricated unit with activated-carbon media. 1. F. Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel-type, disposable air Extended-Surface, Disposable Panel Filters: Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface filters with holding frames. 1. E. Purafil, Inc. Research Products Corp. Disposable Panel Filters: filters with holding frames. 1. 2. 3. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Ionizing Section: Alternately spaced grounded struts and charged ionizing wires. Collecting Section: Alternately grounded and charged plates, with insulators located out of airstream. Power Pack: Self-contained, prewired rectifying unit to convert 120-V, single-phase, 60Hz ac power to approximately 12,000-V dc for ionizer and 6000-V dc for collector; include overload protection, on-off switch, and pilot light showing operating status. Safety Accessories: Manual-reset safety switches and warning lights for filter plenum access doors, signal lights and safety switching upstream and downstream from unit within duct, and enameled high-voltage warning signs. Side-Service Housings: Factory-assembled, side-service housings, constructed of galvanized steel, with flanges to connect to duct system. 1. 2. 3. Integral Tracks: Accommodate 2-inch disposable or washable filters. Access Doors: Continuous gaskets on perimeter and positive-locking devices. Arrange so filter cartridges can be loaded from either access door. Sealing: Incorporate positive-sealing gasket material on channels to seal top and bottom of filter cartridge frames to prevent bypass of unfiltered air. September 15, 2015 234100 - Particulate Air Filtration Page 2 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. holding frames to substrate. B. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air. C. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling unit installations. D. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections. Anchor filter END OF SECTION 23 41 00 September 15, 2015 234100 - Particulate Air Filtration Page 3 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 238126 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. Units are designed for exposed or concealed mounting, and may be connected to ducts. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each unit indicated. Include performance data in terms of capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics. B. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.12004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." 1.4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials and workmanship within five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Carrier Air Conditioning; Div. of Carrier Corp. Lennox Industries Inc. Trane Co. (The); Unitary Products Group. York International Corp. September 15, 2015 238126 - Split-system Air-conditioners Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 5. 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Other manufacturers requesting approval shall comply with Spec Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. EVAPORATOR-FAN UNIT A. Concealed Unit Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on back of panel. 1. 2. 3. B. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated and complying with ASHRAE 62.1. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. Floor-Mounting, Unit Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends. 1. 2. 3. 4. Discharge Grille: Steel with surface-mounted frame Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber, duct liner. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated and complying with ASHRAE 62.1. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004. C. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with thermal-expansion valve. D. Water Coil: Copper-tube water coil, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch; leak tested to 300 psig underwater; and having a 2-position control valve. E. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, electric-resistance heating elements with refractory ceramic support bushings; automatic-reset thermal cutout; built-in magnetic contactors; manualreset thermal cutout; airflow proving device; and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection. F. Evaporator Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor. G. Fan Motor: Multispeed. H. Filters: 1 inch thick, in fiberboard frames with ASHRAE 52.2 MERV rating of 6 or higher. 2.3 AIR-COOLED, COMPRESSOR-CONDENSER UNIT A. Casing steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. B. Compressor: Hermetically sealed reciprocating or scroll type with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. 1. C. Refrigerant: R-410A Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler. September 15, 2015 238126 - Split-system Air-conditioners Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 D. Heat Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat. E. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. F. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. G. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F. H. Mounting Base: Polyethylene. I. Minimum Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings." 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan. B. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends. 1. Minimum Insulation Thickness: 1 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure. B. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch thick, reinforced concrete base; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base. C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base. D. Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in Division 07 Section “Roof Accessories” Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmiumplated fasteners. E. Install compressor-condenser components on restrained, spring isolators with a minimum static deflection of 1 inch Refer to Division 23 Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment” 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit. B. Connect supply and return water coil with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return connection. September 15, 2015 238126 - Split-system Air-conditioners Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 C. Connect supply and return condenser connections with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return connection. D. Install piping adjacent to unit to allow service and maintenance. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing. B. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. C. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new components, and retest. D. Test and adjust controls and safeties. equipment. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and END OF SECTION 238126 September 15, 2015 238126 - Split-system Air-conditioners Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 23 82 16 - AIR COILS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes electric air coils that are not an integral part of air-handling units. SUBMITTALS A. 1.3 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each air coil. Include rated capacity and pressure drop for each air coil. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC COILS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Brasch Manufacturing Co., Inc. Chromalox, Inc., Wiegand Industrial Division; Emerson Electric Company. Dunham-Bush, Inc. INDEECO. Trane. D. Coil Assembly: Comply with UL 1995. E. Heating Elements: Coiled resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromium; surrounded by compacted magnesium-oxide powder in tubular-steel sheath; with spiral-wound, copper-plated, steel fins continuously brazed to sheath. September 15, 2015 238216 - Air Coils Page 1 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 F. Heating Elements: Open-coil resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromium, supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing openings, and fastened to supporting brackets. G. High-Temperature Coil Protection: Disk-type, automatically reset, thermal-cutout, safety device; serviceable through terminal box without removing heater from duct or casing. 1. Secondary Protection: Load-carrying, manually reset or manually replaceable, thermal cutouts; factory wired in series with each heater stage. H. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, minimum 0.052 inch thick for slip-in mounting. I. Control Panel: Unit mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection. Include the following controls: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Magnetic contactor. Mercury contactor. Toggle switches; one per step. Step controller. Time-delay relay. Pilot lights; one per step. Airflow proving switch. J. Refer to Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for thermostat. K. Thermostats: Wall-mounted thermostats, with temperature range from 50 to 90 deg F, and 2.5 deg F throttling range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install coils level and plumb. B. Install coils in metal ducts and casings constructed according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible." C. Straighten bent fins on air coils. D. Clean coils using materials and methods recommended in writing by manufacturers, and clean inside of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris. E. Install piping adjacent to coils to allow service and maintenance. F. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." G. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: September 15, 2015 238216 - Air Coils Page 2 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate electric coils to confirm proper unit operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. END OF SECTION 23 82 16 September 15, 2015 238216 - Air Coils Page 3 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.2 Sleeves for raceways and cables. Sleeve seals. Grout. Common electrical installation requirements. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For sleeve seals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Not Used. C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. b. 2.2 For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. B. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements on Sheet E-1.0, provide fire wall sealant around electrical conduit fire wall penetrations to maintain firewall ratings as required by the architectural plans, by one of the following: a. b. c. d. September 15, 2015 Advance Products & Systems, Inc. Calpico, Inc. Metraflex Co. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 260500 - Common Work Results For Electrical Page 1 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2. 3. 4. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. Pressure Plates: Plastic. Include two for each sealing element. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise. H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry September 15, 2015 260500 - Common Work Results For Electrical Page 2 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing. I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.". J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. C. FIRESTOPPING D. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION 26 05 00 September 15, 2015 260500 - Common Work Results For Electrical Page 3 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 1.2 Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70. No aluminum conductors shall be used. B. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN. C. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Type AC and Type MC with ground wire. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the AFC Cable Systems, Inc. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 3M; Electrical Products Division. Tyco Electronics Corp. September 15, 2015 260519 - Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. B. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: conductors in raceway. C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. D. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainlesssteel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. E. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. F. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. Power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes. 3.3 Type THHN-THWN, single Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless in open ceiling or otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Division 26 Sections "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." September 15, 2015 260519 - Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. I. 3.4 Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces. E. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. F. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. G. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. H. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." I. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." J. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. K. Aboveground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. L. Underground Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.5 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations. September 15, 2015 260519 - Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. 3.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. FIRESTOPPING A. 3.7 Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, perform full power test for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Infrared Scanning: At least 14 days prior to Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of all panelboards and of each splice in cables and conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so breakers and splices are accessible to portable scanner. a. b. c. C. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. 2. 3. D. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard and splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. Test procedures used. Test results that comply with requirements. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 26 05 19 September 15, 2015 260519 - Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 26 05 23 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.2 UTP cabling. RS-232 cabling. RS-485 cabling. Low-voltage control cabling. Control-circuit conductors. Identification products. DEFINITIONS A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits. B. Open Cabling: Passing telecommunications cabling through open space (e.g., between the studs of a wall cavity). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control reports. C. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of an NRTL. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2. C. 1.5 Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. B. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits. September 15, 2015 260523 - Control-voltage Electrical Power Cables Page 1 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PATHWAYS A. Support of Open Cabling: NRTL labeled for support of Category 5e or Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. 2. 3. B. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used 1. 2.2 Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings. Straps and other devices. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep. BACKBOARDS A. 2.3 Description: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." UTP CABLE A. Manufacturers: following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. CommScope, Inc. Draka USA. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. KRONE Incorporated. Mohawk; a division of Belden CDT. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. Superior Essex Inc. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 3M. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP. 1. 2. 3. 4. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. b. c. d. e. f. September 15, 2015 Communications, General Purpose: Type CMP. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP complying with NFPA 262. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR or CMP, complying with UL 1666. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX or Type CMP. Multipurpose: Type MP or Type MPG. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. 260523 - Control-voltage Electrical Power Cables Page 2 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA g. 2.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR or Type MPP complying with UL 1666. UTP CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. Dynacom Corporation. Hubbell Premise Wiring. KRONE Incorporated. Leviton Voice & Data Division. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. Panduit Corp. Siemon Co. (The). Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd. B. UTP Cable Connecting Hardware: IDC type, using modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of the same category or higher. C. Connecting Blocks: 110 style for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare; integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated. 2.5 RS-232 CABLE A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.6 Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors. Polypropylene insulation. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage. PVC jacket. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned-copper drain wire. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors. Plastic insulation. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage. Plastic jacket. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned-copper drain wire. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262. RS-485 CABLE A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM or Type CMG. 1. 2. 3. 4. Paired, two pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors. PVC insulation. Unshielded. PVC jacket. September 15, 2015 260523 - Control-voltage Electrical Power Cables Page 3 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 5. B. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. Unshielded. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test. LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors. PVC insulation. Unshielded. PVC jacket. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.8 One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors. PVC insulation. Unshielded. PVC jacket. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors. PVC insulation. Unshielded. PVC jacket. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. One pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned-copper conductors. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. Unshielded. Plastic jacket. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test. CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, complying with UL 83. B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes, complying with UL 83. C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or Type TF, complying with UL 83. September 15, 2015 260523 - Control-voltage Electrical Power Cables Page 4 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.9 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Brady Corporation. HellermannTyton. Kroy LLC. Panduit Corp. Electromark. B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. B. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways. C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible. D. Pathway Installation in Equipment Rooms: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E. 3.2 Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is installed or in the corner of room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. Secure conduits to backboard if entering room from overhead. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. 2. 3. 4. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch panels. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. September 15, 2015 260523 - Control-voltage Electrical Power Cables Page 5 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 5. 6. 7. 8. C. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Open-Cable Installation: 1. 2. 3. F. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors: 1. E. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. UTP Cable Installation: 1. 2. 3. D. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. 2. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. b. c. 3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. b. c. 4. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: a. b. c. September 15, 2015 Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. 260523 - Control-voltage Electrical Power Cables Page 6 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 5. 6. 3.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Separation between Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. Separation between Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches. REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. 3.4 Remove abandoned conductors and cables. CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. Minimum Conductor Sizes: 1. 2. 3. 3.5 Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No 14 AWG. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits, No 14 AWG. FIRESTOPPING A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping." C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article. 3.6 GROUNDING A. For data communications wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. 3.8 Identify system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. Visually inspect UTP cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. September 15, 2015 260523 - Control-voltage Electrical Power Cables Page 7 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Test UTP cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not after cross connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. D. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit. E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 26 05 23 September 15, 2015 260523 - Control-voltage Electrical Power Cables Page 8 of 8 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.2 Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 15/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. September 15, 2015 260526 - Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by10 feet in diameter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at least 24 inches below grade. C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow. D. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 3.2 Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. B. Feeders and branch circuits. Lighting circuits. Receptacle circuits. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. Flexible raceway runs. Armored and metal-clad cable runs. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units. X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits supplying x-ray equipment. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, September 15, 2015 260526 - Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components. D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated. E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated. F. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. 1. 2. G. 3.3 Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal. Metal and Wood Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors. INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. C. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating, if any. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are specified in Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover. 1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service, unless otherwise indicated. Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with finished grade or floor. September 15, 2015 260526 - Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. 2. 3. E. 2. 3. 3.4 Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp. Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. F. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Test resistance for prevention of touch-potential differences between metal-enclosed electrical and communications equipment and similar equipment within arm's reach of same. B. Report measured resistances between metal enclosed equipment that exceed one ohm. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 September 15, 2015 260526 - Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. 2. 1.2 Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. Construction requirements for concrete bases. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For steel slotted support systems. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 1. 2. 3. C. 1.4 Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components. Equipment supports. Welding certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with NFPA 70. September 15, 2015 260529 - Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems Page 1 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 3. 4. 5. 6. Allied Tube & Conduit. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. ERICO International Corporation. GS Metals Corp. Thomas & Betts Corporation. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. Wesanco, Inc. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. b. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) 2) 3) September 15, 2015 Hilti Inc. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. MKT Fastening, LLC. 260529 - Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems Page 2 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 4) 2. b. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 4. 5. 6. 7. 2.2 Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. 3. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. Hilti Inc. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. MKT Fastening, LLC. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. D. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 11/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. September 15, 2015 260529 - Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems Page 3 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. E. 3.3 To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers and nuts or Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet anchorage requirements. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. B. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete." September 15, 2015 260529 - Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems Page 4 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA C. Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. 2. 3. 3.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09, painting Sections, for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 26 05 29 September 15, 2015 260529 - Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems Page 5 of 5 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. B. See Division 26 Section "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior ductbanks and manholes, and underground handholes, boxes, and utility construction. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. IMC: ANSI C80.6. C. EMT: ANSI C80.3. D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel. E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. 2. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886. Fittings for EMT: Steel or die-cast, set-screw or compression type. September 15, 2015 260533 - Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems Page 1 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. LFNC: UL 1660. B. Fittings for LFNC: UL 514B. 2.3 METAL WIREWAYS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. Cooper B-Line, Inc. Hoffman. Square D; Schneider Electric. B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type, or, in areas subject to occasional moisture contact, a Flanged-and-gasketed type. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: 1. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Hoffman. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. C. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners. D. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. 2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Prime coating, ready for field painting. 1. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: September 15, 2015 260533 - Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems Page 2 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA a. b. c. B. Thomas & Betts Corporation. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 1. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 2.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Butler Manufacturing Company; Walker Division. Enduro Systems, Inc.; Composite Products Division. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems Division. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. Panduit Corp. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division. Carlon BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum, Type FD, with gasketed cover. C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2. D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable, rectangular. E. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round. F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum or galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover. H. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. I. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint. Cabinets: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. September 15, 2015 260533 - Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems Page 3 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Exposed Conduit: Rigid steel conduit. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, or EMT. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40 PVC, direct buried. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFNC. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4X. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT or IMC. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: Rigid steel conduit or IMC. Includes raceways in the following locations: a. b. c. d. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Loading dock. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units. Mechanical rooms. Stage, corridors to stage, and material storage rooms. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit or IMC. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable: PVC Sch 40. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, in damp or wet locations. C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. 3.2 Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated. INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter. B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. September 15, 2015 260533 - Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems Page 4 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: 1. 2. 3. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above the floor. I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. K. Raceways for Optical Fiber and Communications Cable: Install as follows: 1. 2. 3. L. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. 2. M. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 50 feet. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install raceways in maximum lengths of 75 feet. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of raceway unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these requirements. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. 1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F temperature change. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation. September 15, 2015 260533 - Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems Page 5 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA N. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. O. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. P. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. Q. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor, unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts throughout the length of the elbow. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. b. 6. 3.4 Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit. FIRESTOPPING A. Refer to section 07 84 00 “Firestopping” END OF SECTION 26 05 33 September 15, 2015 260533 - Raceway And Boxes For Electrical Systems Page 6 of 6 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 1.2 Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. Warning labels and signs. Equipment identification labels. SUBMITTALS A. 1.3 Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. 1.4 Comply with ANSI A13.1. COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIALS A. 2.2 AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION Marker Tape: Vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated. C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches. D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, celluloseacetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, September 15, 2015 260553 - Identification For Electrical Systems Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm). E. Fasteners for Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. F. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. 2. 2.3 Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 mm)." EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label. B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor and Cable Identification: Use marker tape to identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data wiring connections. 1. 2. B. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and cable pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. Use system of designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels or baked-enamel warning signs. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: a. b. 2. C. Power transfer switches. Controls with external control power connections. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, September 15, 2015 260553 - Identification For Electrical Systems Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. b. c. d. e. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. 3.2 Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label, drilled for screw attachment. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and legend to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. Raceway boxes: Black permanent marker stating circuits contained. Receptacles: ¼" white letter on black tape label with supplying panel and circuit number. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. Transformers. Motor-control centers. Disconnect switches. Enclosed circuit breakers. Motor starters. Push-button stations. Power transfer equipment. Contactors. Raceway Boxes Receptacle outlet cover plates INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. F. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level dentification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit] conductors. 1. 2. Color shall be factory applied. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. b. c. September 15, 2015 Phase A: Black. Phase B: Red. Phase C: Blue. 260553 - Identification For Electrical Systems Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: a. b. c. Phase A: Brown. Phase B: Orange. Phase C: Yellow. END OF SECTION 26 05 53 September 15, 2015 260553 - Identification For Electrical Systems Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. 1.2 Time switches. Outdoor photoelectric switches. Indoor occupancy sensors. Outdoor motion sensors. Lighting contactors. Emergency shunt relay. See Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Field quality-control test reports. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Hubbell Lighting. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. Novitas, Inc. RAB Lighting, Inc. Sensor Switch, Inc. September 15, 2015 260923 - Lighting Control Devices Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 7. 8. D. TORK. Watt Stopper (The). General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit. 1. 2. 3. 4. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70. Mounting: a. b. c. 5. 6. 7. E. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when selected lighting level is present. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and movement in area of coverage. 1. 2. 3. 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in.. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10foot high ceiling. LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: following: C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. GE Industrial Systems; Total Lighting Control. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. Hubbell Lighting. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. MicroLite Lighting Control Systems. Square D; Schneider Electric. September 15, 2015 260923 - Lighting Control Devices Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 10. 11. 12. D. TORK. Touch-Plate, Inc. Watt Stopper (The). Description: Electrically operated and mechanically or electrically held, combination type with fusible switch or nonfused disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA type specified for the enclosure. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. B. When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose. 3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION A. 3.3 Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structureborne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators. WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch. September 15, 2015 260923 - Lighting Control Devices Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. 2. B. 3.5 Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2. B. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work. END OF SECTION 26 09 23 September 15, 2015 260923 - Lighting Control Devices Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section includes distribution panelboards and lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. IDENTIFICATION A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads and incorporating Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. C. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. 2. C. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. Perform infrared camera recordings and complete a pictorial and written report of all panelboards while under full power utilization at least 14 days prior to Scheduled Completion. Correct all connections showing atypical temperatures for the amperes applied. Replace all breakers showing atypical internal heating for the amperes applied. D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION 26 24 16 September 15, 2015 262416 - Panelboards Page 1 of 1 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. 1.2 Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. Wall-box motion sensors. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. Solid-state fan speed controls. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors. Communications outlets. See Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. 2. 3. 4. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour). September 15, 2015 262726 - Wiring Devices Page 1 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. Color shall be ivory. 1. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. 2.3 Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex). GFCI RECEPTACLES A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped. Color shall be ivory. B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. 2.4 Cooper; GF20. Pass & Seymour; 2084. SNAP SWITCHES A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A. Color shall be medium to dark gray. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. C. Pilot Light Switches, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. 2. D. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224 (four way). Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four way). Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way), 20AC4 (four way). Cooper; 2221PL for 120 V and 277 V. Hubbell; HPL1221PL for 120 V and 277 V. Leviton; 1221-PLR for 120 V, 1221-7PLR for 277 V. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-PLR for 120 V. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "ON." Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: September 15, 2015 262726 - Wiring Devices Page 2 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. 3. E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: Cooper; 1995. Hubbell; HBL1557. Leviton; 1257. Pass & Seymour; 1251. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary Contact, Center-Off Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle. 1. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. 2.5 Cooper; 2221L. Hubbell; HBL1221L. Leviton; 1221-2L. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle. a. b. c. d. F. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Cooper; 1995L. Hubbell; HBL1557L. Leviton; 1257L. Pass & Seymour; 1251L. WALL-BOX DIMMERS A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. Color shall be ivory. B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider or rotary knob]; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472. C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module. 1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness. E. Combination Wall-Switch Sensor and Dimmer: Provide combination device if available or two separate devices in the same control location to provide both occupancy sensing and diming control of the same set of incandescent lights. This situation is symbolized by the subscript "DMS" on the drawings. September 15, 2015 262726 - Wiring Devices Page 3 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. Wall-Switch Sensors: 1. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. 3. B. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.. Long-Range Wall-Switch Sensors for use in corridors: 1. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. 3. C. Hubbell; ATP1600WRP. Leviton; ODWWV-IRW. Pass & Seymour; WA1001. Watt Stopper (The); CX-100. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 110-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft.. Wide-Range Wall-Switch Sensors: 1. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. 3. 2.7 Cooper; 6111 for 120 V, 6117 for 277 V. Hubbell; WS1277. Leviton; ODS 10-ID. Pass & Seymour; WS3000. Watt Stopper (The); WS-200. Hubbell; ATP120HBRP. Leviton; ODWHB-IRW. Pass & Seymour; HS1001. Watt Stopper (The); CX-100-3. Description: Passive-infrared type, 120/277 V, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 150-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 1200 sq. ft. COMMUNICATIONS OUTLETS A. Telephone Outlet: 1. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. September 15, 2015 Cooper; 3560-6. Leviton; 40649. 262726 - Wiring Devices Page 4 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. B. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1 complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet: 1. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. 3. 2.8 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Cooper; 3562. Leviton; 40595. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e; and one Type F coaxial cable connector. WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. 2. 3. 4. B. 2.9 Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch thick, satin-finished stainless steel 0.04-inchthick. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations." Color shall be ivory. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weatherresistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS A. Type: Modular, flap-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used. B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. C. Service Plate: Rectangular, solid brass with satin finish. D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated. E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 Category 5e jacks for UTP cable. 2.10 A. FINISHES Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color. 1. 2. 3. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory, unless otherwise indicated in these specifications or required by NFPA 70 or device listing. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. TVSS Devices: Blue. September 15, 2015 262726 - Wiring Devices Page 5 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. Conductors: 1. 2. 3. 4. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. Existing Conductors: a. b. c. D. Device Installation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. E. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up where a metal cover is used and down where a plastic cover is used, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. September 15, 2015 262726 - Wiring Devices Page 6 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. G. Dimmers: 1. 2. H. 3.2 Install dimmers within terms of their listing. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. 3.3 Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with white-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. 2. B. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION 26 27 26 September 15, 2015 262726 - Wiring Devices Page 7 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.2 Fusible switches. Nonfusible switches. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs). Enclosures. DEFINITIONS A. NC: Normally closed. B. NO: Normally open. C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 Include plans, elevations, QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: September 15, 2015 262816 - Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3. 4. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. E. Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.2 Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment. NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. E. Accessories: 1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. 2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. September 15, 2015 262816 - Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Lugs: Suitable for number, size, and conductor material. MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product approved by manufacturer of existing panel as indicated on Drawings' panel schedules. B. Show pole quantities and voltage and ampere ratings of MCCBs and switches on Drawings. See Editing Instruction No. 6 in the Evaluations. C. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents. D. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings: 1. 2. 3. 4. Instantaneous trip. Long- and short-time pickup levels. Long- and short-time time adjustments. 2 Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I t response. F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5. G. Features and Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.4 Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered or remote-mounted and powered type with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor. ENCLOSURES A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. 2. 3. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12. September 15, 2015 262816 - Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components. D. Install fuses in fusible devices. E. Comply with NECA 1. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. 2. 3.3 Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. 2. C. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. END OF SECTION 26 28 16 September 15, 2015 262816 - Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 26 29 13 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ac, enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less, of the following types: 1. 2. 1.2 Across-the-line, manual and magnetic controllers. Multispeed controllers. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. 1. Include wiring diagrams. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. E. Load-current and overload-relay heater list. F. Load-current and list of settings of adjustable overload relays. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed controllers, minimum clearances between enclosed controllers, and for adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions and clearances. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of enclosed controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits to which they connect. B. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each enclosed controller with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and load. September 15, 2015 262913 - Enclosed Controllers Page 1 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 2.2 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the ABB Power Distribution, Inc.; ABB Control, Inc. Subsidiary. Danfoss Inc.; Danfoss Electronic Drives Div. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products. General Electrical Company; GE Industrial Systems. Rockwell Automation; Allen-Bradley Co.; Industrial Control Group. Siemens/Furnas Controls. Square D. ACROSS-THE-LINE ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS A. Manual Controller: NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A, with "quick-make, quick-break" toggle or pushbutton action, and marked to show whether unit is "OFF," "ON," or "TRIPPED." 1. B. Magnetic Controller: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing, across the line, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. C. Control Circuit: 120 V; obtained from integral control power transformer with a control power source of sufficient capacity to operate connected pilot, indicating and control devices, plus 100 percent spare capacity. Overload Relay: Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristic and NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristic. Provide with heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of specific motor to which they connect and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. Adjustable Overload Relay: Dip switch selectable for motor running overload protection with NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristic, and selected to protect motor against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing. Provide relay with Class II groundfault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip on starting. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination controller and disconnect switch. 1. 2. 3. 2.3 Overload Relay: Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristics and NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping characteristics. Relays shall have heaters and sensors in each phase, matched to nameplate, full-load current of specific motor to which they connect and shall have appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. Fusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to IEC 947-4-1, as certified by an NRTL. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means: NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfusible switch. Circuit-Breaker Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector with fieldadjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes. MULTISPEED ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS A. Multispeed Enclosed Controller: Match controller to motor type, application, and number of speeds; include the following accessories: September 15, 2015 262913 - Enclosed Controllers Page 2 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3. 2.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Compelling relay to ensure that motor will start only at low speed. Accelerating relay to ensure properly timed acceleration through speeds lower than that selected. Decelerating relay to ensure automatically timed deceleration through each speed. ENCLOSURES A. Description: Flush- or surface-mounting cabinets as indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2.5 Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. ACCESSORIES A. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated. B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty type. C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station with a factoryapplied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock control circuit open. D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. E. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connection. Provide adjustable undervoltage setting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. 3.2 Select features of each enclosed controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, controller, and load; and configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions. INSTALLATION A. For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks. B. Install freestanding equipment on concrete bases. C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Enclosed Controller Fuses: Install fuses in each fusible switch. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Fuses." 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify enclosed controller, components, and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." September 15, 2015 262913 - Enclosed Controllers Page 3 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures. B. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic-control devices where applicable. 1. 2. 3.5 Connect selector switches to bypass only manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in hand position. Connect selector switches with enclosed controller circuit in both hand and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, hightemperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. 2. B. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. 2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection, except optional tests, stated in NETA ATS, "Motor Control - Motor Starters." Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. END OF SECTION 26 29 13 September 15, 2015 262913 - Enclosed Controllers Page 4 of 4 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 26 51 00 - INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. Emergency lighting units. Exit signs. Lighting fixture supports. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures. B. See Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps. C. See Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, signed by product manufacturer. D. Field quality-control test reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In Lighting Fixture Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each lighting fixture is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. September 15, 2015 265100 - Interior Lighting Page 1 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Incandescent Fixtures: NEMA LE 5A. C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable. D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. I. Where LER is specified, test according to White Surfaces: 85 percent. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. b. 2. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless different thickness is indicated. UV stabilized. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated. Air-Handling Fluorescent Fixtures: For use with plenum ceiling for air return and heat extraction and for attaching an air-diffuser-boot assembly specified in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles." 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.3 Where LER is specified, test according to Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 1. J. Comply with UL 1598. Air Supply Units: Slots in one or both side trims join with air-diffuser-boot assemblies. Heat Removal Units: Air path leads through lamp cavity. Combination Heat Removal and Air Supply Unit: Heat is removed through lamp cavity at both ends of the fixture door with air supply same as for air supply units. Dampers: Operable from outside fixture for control of return-air volume. Static Fixture: Air supply slots are blanked off, and fixture appearance matches active units. BALLASTS A. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11; rapid-start type, unless otherwise indicated, and designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated. September 15, 2015 265100 - Interior Lighting Page 2 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Sound Rating: A. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. BF: 0.85 or higher. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. Electromagnetic Ballasts for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P, and having automatic-reset thermal protection. 1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. C. Ballasts for Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher for Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Electromagnetic type designed for use with indicated lamp types. D. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic type. 1. 2. 3. E. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and lamp type indicated. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Linear Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic type. 1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off. a. b. 2. 3. F. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and lamp type indicated. Ballasts for Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. G. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens. Low-Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. Sound Rating: A. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. BF: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures with Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Electronic type. 1. 2. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. September 15, 2015 265100 - Interior Lighting Page 3 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. H. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and lamp type indicated. Internal-Type Emergency Fluorescent Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 1. 2. 3. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously at a minimum output of 1100 lumens. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. Night-Light Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. a. b. 4. 5. I. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type. Minimum Starting Temperature: 0 deg F for single-lamp ballasts. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F (40 deg C). Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to minimize audible fixture noise. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. K. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029. Include the following features, unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. J. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Include the following features unless otherwise Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. Sound Rating: A. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 15 percent. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. Power Factor: .90 or higher. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. Protection: Class P thermal cutout. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type, with solid-state igniter/starter. Igniterstarter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C. 1. Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to 150 W. a. b. 2. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F (Minus 40 deg C). September 15, 2015 265100 - Interior Lighting Page 4 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3. 2.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Open-circuit operation shall not reduce average lamp life. EXIT SIGNS A. 2.5 Internally Lighted Signs: Comply with UL 924; White face – red letters; visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.6 Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, Ni-Cad type. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. LAMPS A. Low-Mercury Fluorescent Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1. B. T8 Rapid-Start, low-mercury, Fluorescent Lamps: Rated 32 W maximum, nominal length 48 inches (1220 mm), 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated. C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 13 W: 18 W: 26 W: 32 W: 42 W: 55 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum). D. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900 K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum. E. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.1372, with a minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. F. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K. G. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80 , and color temperature 4000] K. September 15, 2015 265100 - Interior Lighting Page 5 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.7 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channeland angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm). E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm). F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. 2.8 RETROFIT KITS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Comply with UL 1598 listing requirements. 1. 2. Reflector Kit: UL 1598, Type I. Suitable for two- to four-lamp, surface-mounted or recessed lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1598, Type II. Suitable for changing existing ballast, lamps, and sockets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each fixture. B. Comply with NFPA 70 for minimum fixture supports. C. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. 2. 3. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. D. Air-Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment. E. Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities. F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." September 15, 2015 265100 - Interior Lighting Page 6 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. END OF SECTION 26 51 00 September 15, 2015 265100 - Interior Lighting Page 7 of 7 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 27 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section Includes: 1. Sleeves for pathways and cables. 2. Sleeve seals. 3. Grout. 4. Common communications installation requirements. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For sleeve seals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SLEEVES FOR PATHWAYS AND CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Metal Thickness: a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch. b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch. 2.2 SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 3. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of pathway or cable. 4. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. September 15, 2015 270500 - Common Work Results For Communications Page 1 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 5. 2.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both communications equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS A. Communications penetrations occur when pathways, cables, wireways, or cable trays penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable, unless indicated otherwise. H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry 1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing. September 15, 2015 270500 - Common Work Results For Communications Page 2 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.". J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pathway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal pathway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for communications installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION 27 05 00 September 15, 2015 270500 - Common Work Results For Communications Page 3 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 271000 – COMMUNICATIONS STRUCTURED CABLING AND ITV SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. General: Prior to commencement of design, the Martin County School District, Educational Technology Department. Mr. Chris Hall and or Mr. Art Gagliardo must be contacted and approve the MDF/IDF, CER, CC, CP area design for size requirements. B. General: The overall and detailed Structure Cabling System (SCS) and Instructional Television System (ITV) including device locations, riser diagrams, installation details, mounting details, cabling routing, cabling and equipment supporting and all technical specifications apply to work of this section. C. General: Conduit/raceway material apply to work of this section, with the additions and modifications specified herein. Installation practices for Structure Cabling System as describe herein take precedence over any differing requirements specified in any other documents in the Bid documents set. D. General: For grounding and bonding for Telecommunications all the applicable electrical codes for grounding and bonding for telecommunications shall be met. E. STANDARDS • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and addenda ”Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements”, CSA T529 ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and addenda ”Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced TwistedPair” ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1: “Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-Pair 100 ohm Category 6 Cabling” ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 and addenda ”Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling and Components Standard” ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1: “Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 50/125 um Optical Fiber Cables” ANSI/TIA/EIA-569 A and Addenda “Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces”, CSA T530. ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568-2001 “ Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling” ANSI/TIA/EIA-606 A “Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings”, CSA T528. J-STD-607-A “Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications”. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7 ”Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant” ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A ”Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant” IEC/TR3 61000-5-2 - Ed. 1.0 and amendments. “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 5: Installation and mitigation guidelines - Section 2: Earthing and cabling” ISO/IEC 11801:2000 Ed 1.2 and amendments. ” Information technology - Generic cabling for customer premises” CENELEC EN 50173:2000 and amendments. ” Information Technology - Generic Cabling Systems” ANSI/NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code”, CSA C22.1. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 1 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA • • • • • • • • • • 1.2 A. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 BICSI Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual (TCIM) County Codes and Regulations. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) FCC -Federal Communications Commission ADA Requirements Occupational Safety and Health Regulations (OSHA) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Florida Statutes and Administrative Rules Manufacturers Product Cabling Catalogs Manufacturers Training Manuals (Design and Installation). ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviations: The following abbreviations or initials may be used: AC AFF AFG ANSI ARCH AWG BICSI CAB CAT3 CAT5 CAT5e CAT6 CC CCTV CER CO COAX CP EMS EMT FCC FCCP FO GE HH IEEE IMC IN ISO ITV JB LBS LED MO NEC NECA NEMA NFPA NIC # OFCI OFOI OSHA OTDR September 15, 2015 Above Counter Above finished floor Above finished grade American National Standards Institute Architectural American Wire Gauge Building Industry Consulting Services International Communications Cabinet Category 3 Category 5 Category 5e Category 6 Communications Closet Closed Circuit Television Communications equipment Room Communications Outlets Coaxial Cable Communications Panel Energy Management System Electrical Metallic Tubing Federal Communications Committee Flexible Classroom Consolidation Points. Fiber Optics Grounding equalizer Handhole Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Intermediate Metallic Raceway Inches International Standardization Organization Instructional Television System Junction Box Pounds Light Emitting Diode Multi-User Outlets National Electrical Code National Electrical Contractors Association National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Fire Protection Association Not in Contract Number Owner furnished Contractor Installed Owner Furnished Owner Insatlled Occupational Safety and Health Administration Optical Time Domain Reflectometer 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 2 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PB Pull Box PR Pair PVC Polyvinylchloride RCDD Registered Communications Distribution Designer RIC Rack-mount Interconnect Center RGC or GRC Rigid Galvanized Raceway RGS Rigid Galvanized Steel SCS Structured Cabling System SS Stainless steel TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/ Electronic Industries Association TEL Telephone TBB Telecommunication Bonding Backbone TGB Telecommunications Grounding Bus Bar TMGB Telecommunications Main Grounding Bus Bar TYP Typical UL Underwriters Laboratories UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair V Volt 1.3 A. 1.4 COMMUNICATIONS SYMBOL LEGEND Refer to Figure 1. LIST OF FIGURES Figure # 1: COMMUNCATIONS SYMBOL LEGEND Figure # 2: D2: Communications Outlet (CO) Figure # 3: D4: Communications Outlet (CO) Figure # 4: D6: Communications Outlet (CO) Figure # 5: Future Use Figure # 6: D21: Communications Outlet (CO) Figure # 7: D41: Communications Outlet (CO) Figure # 8: D2FO: Communications Outlet (CO) Figure # 9: ITV: Communications Outlet (CO) Figure # 10: D2: Industrial Communications Outlet (CO) Figure # 11: CAT 6 RJ45 Jack Pin Assignment Figure # 12: Typical (CO) Identification Figure # 13: Typical ITV Outlet Figure # 14: Horizontal Patch Panel Nomenclature Figure # 15: CO Flush Outlet Mounting Detail Figure # 16: J - Hook Mounting Figure # 17: CO Mounting Details in Labs at Instruction Table Figure # 18: D2: Floor Multi Service Communications Outlet (CO) Figure # 19: Communications Closet (CER) Layout Figure # 20: Communications Equipment Room CC Layout Figure # 21: CER/MDF Rack Elevation Figure # 22: CC/IDF Single Rack Elevation Figure # 23: CC/IDF Double Rack Elevation Figure # 24: CC/IDF Triple Rack Elevation Figure # 25: ITV Cabinet Elevation Figure # 26: CER/MDF, CC/IDF Grounding Bus Bar (TGB and TMGB) Figure # 27: Voice & ITV Connectivity In CER/MDF Figure # 28: Voice Connectivity In CC/IDF Figure # 29: Communications Swing-Out 2Ft WM Cabinet Figure # 30: ITV Outlet Mounting Detail Figure # 31: Communications in-ground hand- hole September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 3 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 DESCRIPTION A. General: Furnish, install, test, certify cables and connecting hardware complete with all accessories for an ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B.1 Category 6 Structured Cabling System (SCS) and an Instructional Television (ITV) system. The SCS shall be provided with a minimum Siemon System 6 20 year Channel Performance Warranty for the entire system from the manufacturer and a minimum of 3 years warranty for materials and labor from the cabling contractor. The ITV shall be provided with a minimum of 3 years warranty for materials and labor from the contractor. B. General: The goal of the project is to provide an enhanced SCS that shall serve as a vehicle for the transport of voice telephony, data and ITV throughout the building and from building to building from designated demarcation points to outlets located at various desk, workstation and other locations. C. General: The SCS and ITV systems shall support analog and digital signal applications on a common cabling platform. The applications that shall be supported include, but are not limited to: Data Processing - EIA-232-D, EIA-422A, EIA-423-A, RS-485, Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI), Ethernet 10BASE-T (IEEE 802.3i), 10BASE-F (IEEE 802.3j), 100 BASE-T (IEEE 802.3u), 1000BASET (IEEE 802.3ab), and 1000BASE-TX (ANSI/TIA/EIA-854) Voice Applications - Analog and Digital Telephony, Voice over IP and IP telephony. Video – Broadband and base band Analog Video, Digital Video, Video Conferencing. Other Applications: ISDN, ATM, ADSL. D. General: The SCS system shall utilize a network of unshielded twisted pair cables (UTP), Coax cables and fiber optic cables (FO) for Horizontal cabling, Backbone cabling and patch cords. FO Cables shall terminate on rack or wall mounted Fiber Distribution Centers as specified herein. UTP cables shall terminate on rack mounted modular patch panels and work area outlets as specified herein. ITV RG-6 Coaxial Drop Cables shall be installed from each classroom or specified outlet location to a point within an adjacent common hallway, and shall not exceed 150Ft. in length. Refer to Section 2.19 Paragraph L E. Labeling: All cables and terminations shall be identified at all locations according to the TIA/EIA 606, labeling and numbering and as specified herein. All cables shall be terminated in an alpha-numeric sequence at all termination locations. F. UTP Length Limitation: It is the contractor’s responsibility to stay under the 90 meter (295 ft) length limitation for UTP Horizontal Cabling. All cabling shall run in j-hooks keeping the cable runs as short as possible. No cable tray shall be installed. All Horizontal cable shall be placed without diagonal runs.(i.e. parallel to walls and ceiling grid) unless otherwise specifically approved by the owner. G. Warranty: The SCS shall be required to be under manufacturers warranty program for a complete channel configuration including cable, jacks, patch cords and patch panels and include cabling specifically approved for the channel configuration with the manufacturers components. Manufactures shall provide the warranty worst-case performance data for the installed cabling system, and the performance data indicated in the warranty documents/certificate. A twenty (20) year warranty available for the category 6 structured cabling system shall be provided for an end-to-end channel model installation which covers applications assurance, cable, connecting hardware and the labor cost for the repair or replacement thereof. Additional features of the warranty shall include: Compliance with Margin claimed by the manufacturers over category 6 channel specifications on all transmission parameters across the entire frequency range of 1-250 MHz as shown on the manufacturers catalogs and literature. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 4 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 H. Cabling Terminations: All terminations shall comply with, and be 100% tested to the ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B.2.1 Category 6 requirements at a minimum. It should be anticipated by all installers that all horizontal cable supporting data applications must meet at a minimum the Category 6 performance requirements for 100 meters as listed by the TIA standards for the channel. I. Patch Cords: All patch cords shall be 100% factory tested for compliance to the Category 6 standard. J. Installation: The installed SCS shall meet or exceed the performance specifications as listed by the selected manufacturers and the performance specifications as listed herein. The Contractor shall follow the Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures. K. Data Services: Wiring utilized for data communications shall originate at Owner provided switches, hubs and concentrators in vertical free standing equipment racks, and/or enclosed wall mounted vertical equipment racks located at individual Communications Closets (CC) or Communications Cabinets (CAB). L. Telephone Company Connectivity: Wiring utilized for telephone voice service shall originate at an RJ21X Demarcation Point in the CER where designated by the owner. Installation, termination and identification of wiring between the Demarcation Point, station outlets, CC’s, CAB’s and CER are part of the contract. M. Work Not Included: Data equipment (Active Electronics Equipment) is Owner Furnished and Owner Installed. Telephone equipment is Owner Furnished and Owner Installed (by a Telephone System Provider under separate contract). Demarcation Point is Telephone System Provider furnished and installed. N. A rack mount UPS shall be provided at the CER and at each CC and CAB. Refer to Figures showing rack elevations for UPS mounting. Verify with Owner actual model for each UPS. O. A rack mount Power Strip shall be provided at the CER and at each CC and CAB. Refer to Figures showing rack elevations for power strip mounting and part number. 1.6 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. General: The following qualifications shall be met unless specifically waived by the Owner for a designated contractor. B. General: The Contractor directly responsible for this work shall be a "Structured Cabling System Contractor" who is, and who has been, regularly engaged in the providing and installation of commercial and industrial telecommunications wiring systems of this type and size for at least the immediate past five years. Any Sub Contractor who will assist the SCS contractor in performance of this work, shall have the same training and certification as the SCS contractor. C. General: The contractor selected for the Project must be a Siemon Certified Installation & Design Co., and adhere to the engineering, installation and testing procedures and utilize the authorized manufacturers components and distribution channels in provisioning the Project. D. Certification: The contractor's Project Manager shall possess a current BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) certificate. All shop drawings submitted by the contractor shall bear the RCDD's stamp. E. The Contractor shall have an RCDD on Staff. Contract RCDD’s shall not be acceptable. F. The Installer team leader assigned for the project shall be BICSI registered Level II installer or proven qualified equal. G. Experience: The Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and size. The Contractor shall own September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 5 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 and maintain tools and equipment necessary for successful installation and testing of Category 6 premise distribution systems and have personnel who are adequately trained in the use of such tools and equipment. The Owner or engineer may elect to request submittal of additional financial, operational and administrative information of the contractor to demonstrate the required experience. H. The Contractor shall possess a State of Florida Low Voltage License. I. The Contractor shall maintain a permanent office within 150 miles of the project site. J. The SCS / ITV system contractor shall take full responsibility for the complete system, except that Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of all conduit/raceway systems UG or Internal and shall provide all floor penetrations for concrete cores between CC’s and CER’s as may be required for the SCS and ITV Systems. The supervision of that work shall be by the SCS contractor and shall have the sole source responsibility for the entire system. The SCS contractor shall make all wire terminations and install all devices. K. A resume of qualifications shall be submitted with the contractor’s bid indicating the following: 1. A list of recently completed projects of similar type and size with contact names and telephone numbers for each. 2. A list of test equipment proposed for use in verifying the integrity of the installed distributive information local area network system. 3. A technical resume of experience for the contractor’s engineer/RCDD and on-site foreman who will be assigned to the project. 4. Similar documentation for any subcontractor who will assist in the performance of this work. 5. Location of office from which installation and warranty work will be performed. L. All conduit/raceway shall be installed by a licensed electrical contractor using tradesmen who are skilled and experienced in the types of conduit installations indicated in the bid documents. M. ITV system: The SCS Contractor shall be an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of ITV systems of similar type as required for this installation. The SCS / ITV Contractor must provide one or more permanent employees who are certified as technicians in the installation, configuration, program, checkout, maintain and provide warranty service for the ITV System. The SCS / ITV Contractor shall provide all miscellaneous equipment, hardware, materials, labor, programming and incidentals required for a complete ITV Cable Distribution and Head-end system that is functional in every respect, whether or not those items are called for herein. 1.7 A. SUBMITTALS General: Submittals shall include Ten (10) copies of manufacturers cut sheets for all proposed equipment. One of the 10 copies shall be submitted to Mr. Chris Hall for the SCS System & Ms. Marilyn Gavitt for the ITV System, of the Martin County School Board at 500 E. Ocean Ave. Bldg. 24, Stuart, FL 34994. Cut sheets shall bear the printed logo or trademark of the manufacturer for each type of product being provided. Mark each copy of the data sheets for the specific product being provided with an identifying mark, arrow, or highlighting. The followings items shall be submitted. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Racks, Enclosures, Related Hardware & Accessories, Each Type Patch Cord Organizers and Cable Rings, Each Type Fiber Optic Patch Panels Protector Blocks, Each Type Wiring/Patch Blocks, Each Type Multi-pair Telephone Cable, Each Type Category 6 UTP Horizontal Cable (Solid Conductors) Category 6 UTP Patch Cable Cordage (Stranded Conductors) September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 6 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. ITV Coaxial cable, Each type ITV splitters, amplifiers, and other distribution equipment ITV headend equipment, including all components and racks. Fiber Optic Cable, Each Type Cable End Connectors, Each Type Patch Cables - Copper and Fiber Optic, Each Type Communications Outlets (COs) and Multi-User Outlets (MOs), Each Type Conduit & Fittings, Including Innerduct Floor boxes Cable Tray with all Fittings, Each Type Cable Runway with all Fittings, Each Type Wire Management Devices, Each Type Cable Wireway Telephone Surge Protectors Power Surge Protectors 24. 25. 26. 27. Firestopping Systems, Each Type Labeling Products for Cables and Conduits. All cable suspension j-hooks, cable fasteners, CAT6 cable suspension components. All grounding and surge suppression system components for the systems portion of the project. B. General: Submit Ten (10) copies of AutoCAD Pre-Installation/layout drawings for the entire SCS, including but not limited to CC’s and CER layouts and elevations of racks, Backbone routes and outlet assemblies, showing Components model numbers, complete part quantities & numbers, configurations, and the interrelationship and position of all components. One of the 10 copies shall be submitted to Mr. Chris Hall of the Martin County School Board at 500 E. Ocean Ave. Bldg. 24, Stuart, FL 34994. Drawings shall be a minimum of 24” X 36” in size. Pre-installation Drawings/layout are required regardless of changes made or not to the drawings from the original design. Drawings shall include diagrams of risers, connectivity, equipment, devices, outlet configurations, racks configurations and mounting techniques with the same level of detail as those shown herein but customized, expanded and detailed to the specific project part of this contract. Refer to Figures # 19 25 C. General: Submit Ten (10) copies of sketches in AUTOCAD or VISIO showing methods of support for pathways, terminal boards, racks, ladder racks and cables in CER, CC’s and throughout the school campus that are proposed by the contractor with a deviation from those specified herein or that are not identified herein. One of the 10 copies shall be submitted to Mr. Chris Hall for SCS System & Ms. Marilyn Gavitt for the ITV System, of the Martin County School Board at 500 E. Ocean Ave. Bldg. 24, Stuart, FL 34994. 1.8 EXAMINATION OF SITES AND TOTAL SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY A. Prior to providing a proposal for this work, the Contractor shall visit the proposed sites of work to become familiar with any condition that may in any manner affect the work to be performed. No allowances shall be made because of lack of knowledge of these conditions. B. The Contractor shall have total system responsibility to assure a fully operational system. Any additional labor and components required for the installation of a complete operating system but not specifically required by the bid documents shall be provided and the cost borne by the Contractor. C. The Contractor remains the owner of all components provided under this contract and is responsible for all risk of loss or damage to all components up to and including the date and time of Final Acceptance by the Architect, Engineer or the Owner’s authorized representative. After the date of Final Acceptance, the Owner will assume full ownership of the equipment. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 7 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1.9 A. 1.10 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 WORK EXTERNAL TO THE BUILDINGS General: Any work external to the confines of the buildings as shown herein shall be governed by the provisions of this specification. SUBSTITUTIONS AND ALTERNATES A. Specified Method: Where several brand names, make or manufacturers are listed as acceptable alternate, each shall be regarded as equally acceptable, based on the design selection but each must meet all specification requirements. Where a manufacturer's model number is listed, this model shall set the standard of quality and performance required. Where no brand name is specified, the source and quality shall be subject to Engineer's/Owners review and acceptance. Where manufacturers are listed, one of the listed manufacturers shall be submitted for acceptance. No substitutions are permitted. B. Product Certification: When a product is specified to be in accordance with a trade association or government standard requested by the Engineer, Contractor shall provide a certificate that the product complies with the referenced standard. Upon request of Engineer, Contractor shall submit supporting test data to substantiate compliance. C. Basis of Bid: Each bidder represents that his bid is based upon the manufacturers, materials, and equipment described herein. 1.11 A. CONTRACTOR’S RECORD DOCUMENTS The Structured Cabling System Contractor shall maintain a full set of contract documents at the job site at all times, consisting of specifications, drawings, addenda, pre-installation submittals, change orders, and Architectural directives. The record documents shall be updated by the Contractor, in red pen and on a daily basis, to show the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. 1.12 A. Final conduit routing. Final location of all handholes, pull boxes, and access doors. Location of all existing buried utilities encountered during the course of work on this project. Final location of all Communications Outlets (COs). Final location of all FCCP (Flexible Classroom Consolidation Points). Any changes to the work authorized by the Architect or Engineer. Any other pertinent information that may be of value to the Owner in operating and maintaining the system. The Contractor's record documents shall be available for viewing by the Architect, Engineer or the Owner at the site at any time, and shall be presented and reviewed by the Contractor at each construction progress meeting. The record documents shall be clearly marked "Record Set", shall be kept in a protected location, and shall not be used for general construction purposes. The record documents shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer at the close of the project. QUALITY ASSURANCE Materials shall be new and unused, of current manufacture and of the highest grade, free from defects. Materials shall be the best of their respective kinds. All work shall be accomplished in a workmanlike manner in keeping with the best practices and highest standards of the telecommunications industry. B. Protect materials and equipment from physical or environmental damage during shipping, storage September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 8 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 and installation. Equipment and materials shall be received at the site in new condition and shall be maintained in new condition throughout the installation process. Damaged or deteriorated equipment and materials will not be acceptable. The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and condition of all materials and equipment, whether stored or installed, until final acceptance by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner. C. All materials, equipment and devices shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of UL where UL standards are established for those items, and the requirements of NFPA 70. D. All like items of material or equipment shall be the same product of the same manufacturer. E. All materials and equipment shall be a standard catalogued product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of similar products. F. All products shall be the manufacturer and model or part number specified. Bid shall be for new equipment only. Newly manufactured (containing used or rebuilt parts), remanufactured, rebuilt, reconditioned, newly remanufactured, used, shopworn, demonstrator or prototype equipment is not acceptable and will be rejected. If required by the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall provide a written certification from the manufacturer referencing the serial number each item of equipment and stating that the equipment is new. G. Where a model or part number is indicated in error for any reason, the Contractor shall verify the intent of the Architect/Engineer prior to providing a proposal, and shall provide the product intended by the Architect/Engineer. Where a manufacturer has updated or improved a product subsequent to issuance of the bid documents by the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall provide the updated or improved product at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.13 COORDINATION A. The SCS contractor shall be responsible for coordination with the electrical contractor for specific locations of all conduit, power outlets, floor boxes, etc being provided by the electrical contractor. B. Grounding: The SCS Contractor shall be responsible for installing the grounding busbars, TGBs and TMGBs. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for connecting the TMGBs to the main electrical service ground. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for grounding all materials he installs e.g. backbone conduit . The SCS Contractor shall be responsible for grounding all materials that he installs e.g. racks, protector blocks, cable runway, etc. The SCS contractor is also responsible for completing the grounding and bonding of the telecommunications systems as shown herein in the telecommunications grounding and bonding diagram. C. Firestopping: The SCS Contractor shall be responsible for fire stopping sleeve assemblies he installs to obtain a UL rating. D. Backbone conduit: The electrical contractor shall be responsible for all backbone conduit. This is to include all interior and exterior conduit and conduit pathways shall include all pullboxes, pulltape, pullstrings, conduit markings, etc. All conduit shall be installed according to the ground and underground conduit specifications included herein. Provide end bushings on all conduit. The Structured Cabling Contractor shall be responsible for all wire raceways, cable runway tray, and/or any other requirements for routing and securing cable in the main communications equipment room (CER) and communications closets (CC). E. Communications Outlets: The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing all conduit and back boxes associated with the communications outlets. F. Cable Hangers: The SCS Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing all J-hook type cable hangers as specified herein. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 9 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA G. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Plywood Backboards: The Electrical Contractor or General Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of all backboards as required to provide a complete system. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for rough-in of electrical conduit prior to installation of backboards. All power conduit shall be concealed behind all backboards. Backbone conduit shall be exposed. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLETS A. General: Communications outlets that contain copper services shall be equipped with 8-position modular jacks (RJ45 type) utilizing T568B wiring and “F” type TV connectors to be provided as indicated herein. All outlet cabling shall terminate on appropriate termination blocks at their associated CC or CAB. With the exception of ITV RG-6 Cable Drops. Refer to section 2.19-L Refer to Figures # 1 - 11 for copper Communications Outlet (CO) configurations. B. General: Communications outlets that contain fiber optic services shall be equipped with SC type connectors for Multimode or Singlemode. All outlet fiber optic cabling shall terminate on appropriate Fiber distribution Centers at their associated CC or CAB. The outlet/connector box shall have the ability to secure the optical fiber cable and provide for a minimum of 1.18 inch (30 mm) bend radius. A minimum of 3.28 ft (1 m) of fiber optical cable or buffered optical fibers shall be accessible for termination purposes. The communications outlet shall be capable of housing copper and fiber optic cabling services. Refer to Figure # 8 for FO copper Communications Outlet (CO) configurations C. Wall outlets: shall consist of single gang wall plates. Provide blank module inserts for all unused module locations. Refer to Figures # 2 - 9. D. Multi-service wall outlets: Shall consist of double gang wall plate for communications inside the 2gang wall box. Provide blank module inserts for all unused module locations. Multi-service wall outlets shall be installed 6” below the ceiling grid. Refer to Figure # 8. E. Multi-service floor outlets: Shall consist of single gang wall plate for communications inside the floor box. Provide blank module inserts for all unused module locations. F. Modular furniture outlets: Shall consist of modular furniture faceplate capable of housing up to (4) 8position modular connectors. Provide blank module inserts for all unused module locations. G. Raceway outlets: Shall consist of single gang plates suited for the selected raceway. Provide blank module inserts for all unused module locations. H. Power Pole Outlets: Shall snap directly into the standard cutouts in most power poles. Include any spacers or adapters to ensure a proper fit. Coordinate adapter with power pole provided prior to ordering. Provide a blank device plate for each spare or unused jack. I. 8-position modular jacks: CAT 6 jacks shall meet or exceed the following electrical and mechanical specifications: Refer to Figure # 11 for Jack pin assignments. Electrical Specifications: 1. Insulation resistance: 500 MΩ minimum. 2. Dielectric withstand voltage 1,000 VAC RMS, 60 hz minimum, contact-to-contact and 1,500 VAC RMS, 60 hz minimum from any contact to exposed conductive surface. 3. Contact resistance: 20 MΩ maximum. 4. Current rating: 1.5 A at 68°F (20°C) per IEC publication 512-3, Test 5b 5. ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer 6. UL verified for EIA/TIA electrical performance 7. Comply with FCC Part 68 September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 10 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Mechanical Performance: 1. Plug Insertion Life: 750 insertions 2. Contact Force: 3.5 oz (99.2 g) minimum using FCC-Approved modular plug. 3. Plug Retention Force: 30 lb (133 N) minimum between modular plug and jack. 4. Temperature Range: -40 to 150F (-40 to 66C) J. Design Selection: SIEMON SYSTEM 6. Refer to CO configurations provided herein for specific product part numbers. K. Fiber optic connector: Multimode 50/125 µm SC type connector field installable. Multimode connectors shall be beige in color. Connectors shall meet or exceed the following transmission and mechanical specifications: 1. 2. 3. 4. Maximum loss of 0.2 dB Maximum attenuation per each mated field-installed SC connector pair shall not exceed 0.75 dB per ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-34 method. Return Loss ≥ 20 dB on 50/125 µm performed at 23°C ± 5°C. Connectors shall sustain a minimum of 500 mating cycles without violating specifications. L. Connector Design Selection: Siemon Anaerobic SC Type Pt # FC2-SC-MM-B80 M. Fiber optic Adapter: Multimode SC Angled adapter shall be of a one piece construction. It shall maintain the nominal 0.5 inch (12.7 mm) center spacing when mounted in an optical fiber telecommunications outlet. Multimode Adapters shall be Gray in color. Refer to Figure # 8 N. Outlet Labeling: Each Faceplate on all outlets shall be identified with permanent machine generated labels, meeting the EIA/TIA 606 requirements, matching the numbering plan indicated herein. All labeling must be permanent. All labeling shall be a minimum 12 pt. in size. All labeling systems shall be submitted to the engineer for approval prior to fabrication. Refer to Figure # 12 for Outlet Identification. O. Performance marking: Connecting hardware should be marked to designate transmission performance at the discretion of the manufacturer or the approval agency. The markings, if any, shall be visible during installation. It is suggested that such markings consist of: “Cat 3” or “3” for category 3 components “Cat 6” for category 6 components Performance markings are in addition to, and do not replace, other markings required by listing agencies or those needed to satisfy electrical code or local building code requirements. P. Connecting Hardware Performance: All CAT 6 connecting hardware, E.G. RJ45 jacks, RJ45 ports in patch panels, shall be utilized in a channel configuration meeting or exceeding the following specifications at 250 Mhz: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.2 A. NEXT (dB) at 250 MHz - 46.0 dB or exceed Insertion Loss (dB) at 250 MHz - 0.32 dB or less FEXT (dB) at 250 MHz - 35.1 dB or exceed Return Loss (dB) at 250 MHz – 16.0 dB or exceed CATEGORY 6 DATA AND VOICE HORIZONTAL CABLE General: Data pairs shall be extended between the outlet location and its associated CER, CC or CAB. The cable shall consist of 4 pair 23 gauge, solid copper conductors, Certified to the Category 6 September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 11 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 standards. UL Verified for EIA/TIA electrical performance Comply with FCC Part 68. Cables shall be terminated on each of the 8-position modular jacks provided at each outlet. Voice jacks shall also utilize this cable type. Only virgin materials shall be used. Cable selection shall be based upon meeting a Siemon Channel Performance for DATA/Voice drops. B. Jacket: Cable jacket shall comply with Article 800 NEC for use as a plenum cable where required by code or by the Authority having jurisdiction for this project. All cables shall bear the U.L. CMP marking. Cable pairs shall be insulated with FEP. Cables utilizing 2+2 construction shall not be acceptable. Plenum-rated cables shall use 100% FEP for the insulation except where it is proven that the cable constructed with alternate materials meets or exceeds the electrical performance of FEP. All cables shall bear the UL and fire rating markings. C. All Category 6 Cables for Horizontal distribution shall be color Blue. D. Properties: Electrical Characteristics for CAT6 horizontal UTP cable tested on 100 m length shall meet or exceed the following specifications: Frequency Insertion Loss NEXT PSNEXT ELFEXT PSELFEXT Return Loss Delay Delay Skew E. 10 MHZ 6.0 56.3 57.3 47.8 44.8 25.0 < 545 < 45 100 MHZ 19.8 44.3 42.3 27.8 24.8 20.1 < 538 < 45 200 Mhz 29.0 39.8 37.8 21.8 18.8 18.0 N/A < 45 250 Mhz 32.8 38.3 36.3 19.8 16.8 17.3 < 536 < 45 DB DB DB DB DB DB NSec NSec Performance marking: 100Ω UTP cabling runs should be marked to designate transmission performance at the discretion of the manufacturer or the approval agency at both ends after installation. It is suggested that such markings consist of: “Cat 6” for category 6 cable Performance markings are in addition to, and do not replace, other markings required by listing agencies or those needed to satisfy electrical code or local building code requirements. F. 2.3 Design Selection: Siemon System 6. Pt # 9C6R4-E3-06-RBA. CATEGORY 6 PATCH PANELS A. General: Equipment racks shall be equipped with 19" rack mounted, 8-position modular jacks (RJ-45 type), non-keyed, patch panels for termination of all copper horizontal cables. B. Work Area Outlets patch panels shall be fully loaded with jacks to meet the Category 6 standard and shall be modular-to- S310, wired for T568B pin outs for the cables serving the Work Area Outlets. Patch panels shall be provided in 24 or 48 port configurations. Punch down (4) pair per jack port. Refer to Figure # 11. C. Design Selection: SIEMON SYSTEM 6. HD6-24/48 - Rack configurations provided herein for specific product part numbers. Refer to Figure # 21-24. D. Patch Panel Labeling: Designation strips for each port shall be provided on the patch panel with permanent machine generated labels, meeting the EIA/TIA 606 requirements, matching the numbering plan indicated herein. All labeling must be permanent. All labeling shall be a minimum 12 pt. in size. All labeling systems shall be submitted to the engineer for approval prior to fabrication. Refer to Figure # 14. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 12 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 E. Category 6 Modular Patch Cords and Work-area Cords: 2.4 A. 1. Data Work Stations Cords: Provide Qty. 1 Category 6 Modular Work Area cord for each copper Cat 6 data Channel to be used at the WORK AREA locations. Furnish patch cords to Owner, verify all cords length and quantities with school district project manager and provide signed copy of receipt to engineer at project substantial completion. Color selection desired is Black. Field built or assembled patch cords will not be acceptable. Design selection: Siemon MC6-8-Txx-01. 2. Data Patch Cords: Provide Qty. 1 Category 6 Modular patching cord for each copper Cat 6 data Channel to be used at the Patch Panel locations for CER, CC’s or CAB’s. Furnish patch cords to Owner, verify all cords length and quantities with school district project manager and provide signed copy of receipt to engineer at project substantial completion. Color selection desired is Black. Field built or assembled patch cords will not be acceptable. Design selection: Siemon MC6-8-T-xx-01. 3. All Data cords shall be round, and consist of 24 AWG copper, stranded conductors insulated with high density polyethylene and jacketed with flame retardant PVC. Cords shall be a component part of the proposed CAT 6 channel solution and have been tested as such. Category 6 Channel Performance. Channel (CH) Performance: All CAT 6 products shall be utilized meeting or exceeding the performance specifications at 10 Mhz, 100 Mhz, 200 Mhz and 250 Mhz for the two link types: Channel for Data/Voice drops, Channel specifications: Frequency Insertion Loss NEXT PSNEXT ELFEXT PSELFEXT Return Loss Delay Delay Skew 2.5 10 MHZ 6.3 56.6 54.0 43.3 40.3 19.0 < 555 < 50 100 MHZ 21.3 39.9 37.1 23.3 20.3 12.0 N/A N/A 200 Mhz 31.5 34.8 31.9 17.2 14.2 9.0 N/A N/A 250 Mhz 35.6 33.1 30.2 15.3 12.3 8.0 N/A N/A DB DB DB DB DB DB NSec NSec COPPER BACKBONE CABLING A. General: a 25 Pair Copper backbone (Riser/tie) cabling shall be provided between CER and CC’s and CAB’s. All voice grade wire and cable place underground shall be solid twisted pair, multi-conductor, ASP-filled core cable, PE-89 Type. Cable jacket shall be aluminum steel polyethylene (ASP). Conductors shall be dual insulated with foam skin and plastic, and surrounded by filling compound. The cable shall be resistant to mechanical damage, lightning damage or damage from wildlife. Indoor cables above ground shall bear the appropriate markings for the environment in which they are installed and shall be CAT3 cables. B. The multi-pair copper cables shall meet the following specifications: 1. Gauge: 24 AWG 2. DC Resistance: 27.3Ω/1000 ft (8.96Ω/100m), maximum 3. Mutual Capacitance (at 1khz) 4. Impedance: 100(25 pair) 5. Buried/Underground Cable Attenuation (db/1,000 ft [305m]): at 1.0 MHz: 6.4 (25 pair), maximum 6. Aerial Cable Attenuation (db/1,000 ft [305m]): September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 13 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 at 1.0 MHz: 6.7 (25 pair), maximum C. 2.6 Design Selection: Indoor: General Cable CMR jacket Category 3 - 25 Pair Pt# 2133033. OSP: General Cable PE89 Type Category 3 - 25 pair - Pt# 7525785 direct burial grade telephone cable. Run continuous with no splices. Ground shield each end. SITE COPPER CABLE PROTECTION UNITS A. General: All site copper circuits shall be provided with protection between each building with an entrance cable protector chassis. All building-to-building circuits shall be routed through this protector. Protector shall be connected with a #6 AWG copper bonding conductor between the protector ground lug and the CC, CAB or CER ground point. Refer to Figures # 27 & 28. B. Modules: Each protector chassis shall be provided with plug-in protector modules for each pair terminated on the chassis. Design Selection: Primary protector, Commscope Systemax - 489ACA1-xxx 110 style 100, 50 or 25 pair protector block with 110 block input and 110 block output. Provide with 100% Loading of solid state protector units, Circa – Pt # 3B1S-300BAL C. 2.7 FIBER OPTIC BACKBONE AND HORIZONTAL CABLING A. General: Multi-mode and Single mode fiber optic cabling shall be provided between CER and CCs or CAB’s. Cables placed below grade shall be certified by the manufacturer for that environment. Cables installed in vertical risers between floors shall be U.L. listed riser type cable. Cables installed in plenum spaces shall be listed for that environment. B. Multimode Cable Construction: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. Number of fibers: Qty. 12 strand from CER/MDF to CC’s/IDF’s and CAB’s. Qty. 4 strand from CER/MDF, CC/IDF or CAB to D2FO’s (CO’s) Core/Cladding: 50/125 micron Buffering: 900 micron Fiber shall be optimized for VCSEL system. Fiber shall exceed TIA/EIA 492.AAAC and IEEE802.3 10Gigabit Standards and specifications. Sheath construction: Non-metallic Multimode Fiber Optic cables Minimum optical specifications: Fiber Type Wavelength Max Attenuation (Db/Km) Min Bandwidth (Mhz.Km) Gigabit Ethernet Min distance (m) D. MM 50/125 850/1300 3.5/1.0 1500/500 900/600 Singlemode Cable Construction: 1. Number of fibers: Qty. 12 strand from CER/MDF to CC’s/IDF’s and CAB’s. 2. Core/Cladding: 8.3/125 micron 3. Buffering: 900 micron 4. Fiber shall be optimized for VCSEL system. Fiber shall exceed TIA/EIA 568-B.3 and 10Gigabit Standards and specifications. 5. Sheath construction: Non-metallic September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 14 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA E. Singlemode Fiber Optic cables Minimum optical specifications: Fiber Type Wavelength Max Attenuation (Db/Km) Min Bandwidth (Mhz.Km) Gigabit Ethernet Min distance (m) F. 2.8 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SM 8.3/125 1310/1550 .5/.5 Unlimited 5000/NA Design Selection: Indoor/Outdoor, 12 Strand Multimode Fiber – Siemon – 50/125 Micron XGLO 10G300 Pt# SPL-9F5LJ1-12D, 12 Strand Singlemode Fiber – Siemon – 8.3/125 Micron XGLO Pt# SPL-9F8LJ1-12D. Indoor 4 Strand Multimode Fiber – Siemon - 50/125 Micron XGLO 10G300 Pt# 9BB5(R)004C-T312A EQUIPMENT RACKS A. General: Each CC and the CER shall be equipped with 19" EIA racks floor mounted to house ownerprovided equipment and contractor provided termination bays for the multiple cable types. SCS Contractor will provide and install Qty. (1) set of Chatsworth Pt# 15053-703 - 4 Post Chatsworth Server Racks W/ Isolation Pads to be installed within the CER. Floor mounted racks shall be mounted on an isolation pad and utilize non-conductive washers to secure the rack to the floor. Floor mounted open racks shall be secured from the top rail to the backboard in the room with a length of cable runway to prevent movement. Wall racks shall be securely fastened to the wall studs with at least 1/4" hardware. All racks shall be bonded to the CC and CER ground bar using a standard ground lug and #6 jacketed green cable. Refer to Figure # 21 – 24 for rack elevations. B. General: Where wall mounted cabinets (CAB’s) are acceptable per these specifications provide 7’x2’x3’ or 2’x2’x2’ enclosed wall supported cabinets as required to house owner-provided equipment and contractor provided termination bays for the multiple cable types. All cabinets shall be bonded to the CAB’s ground bar using a standard ground lug and #6 jacketed green cable. Refer to Figure # 29 for cabinet elevations. C. Plywood backboards shall be installed in each CC and the CER on walls mounted 6” A.F.F. Rooms shall have all walls covered except the areas adjacent to the door light switch space. Plywood shall be 8’ tall and minimum ¾” AC with the best side out. All imperfections shall be sealed and sanded prior to painting with 2 coats of fire-retardant paint. (Color to be Gray) Coordinate color selection with the Owner/Architect. 2.9 FIBER OPTIC TERMINATION A. Rack Mounted Panels: Fiber optic cabling shall be terminated in fiber distribution centers. Fiber distribution centers shall be provided complete with fully loaded SC style coupler plates. All Fiber distribution centers shall be rack mounted in a standard EIA 19" rack. Refer to Figures # 21 - 24 B. General: Provide protector boots in all unused couplers on the panel. Panel shall include strain relief points where fiber optic cable strength members shall be securely attached. C. Labels: Labeling for fiber cabling shall be by CC or CAB number, plus the color suffix designating which fiber is terminated. Labels shall also be provided at any exposed cable location 20' on center and at all CC’s, CAB’s and CER locations. Identification shall include to and from information. D. Labels: Identify each duplex SC adapter, with a colored blank tab. Provide matching color blank tabs at opposite end terminations to identify fiber pairs. Label front cover to indicate source and each destination. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 15 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 E. Design Selection: Backbone and Horizontal Fiber Enclosures – Siemon Pt# FCP3-DWR W/ Adapter Plate Pt# RIC-F-SC6-02. Horizontal Fiber Enclosures – Siemon Pt#’s RIC3- 36, 48 or 72-01, As required based upon Fiber Count and density for that particular CER, CC or CAB, W/ Adapter Plates Siemon Pt# RIC-F-SC8-02. F. Accessories: At each CC and CAB in the project provide Qty. (1) – 2 Meter duplex fiber optic patch cord with SC connectors at one end and LC connectors at the other end matching the fiber cable and equipment connectors. For the CER, provide Qty. (1) – 2 Meter duplex fiber optic patch cord with SC connectors at one end and LC connectors for each CC and CAB. Contact the Owner 8 weeks prior to substantial completion of the project to verify connectors and patch cord lengths for the required patch cords. All patch cords shall match the fiber optic cable grade to which they will be connected as specified herein. G. Design Selection: For Multimode - Siemon Pt# FJ2-LCSC5L-02AQ. 2.10 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTOR A. As described on 2.1 – Para. L section above. B. Singlemode Fiber Backbone: Qty. (6) Six Strands of the (12) shall be terminated on both ends within the CER’s, CC’s or CAB’s. And shall be Installed on the appropriate adapter plate on the extreme right side of the FCP3-DWR leaving approx. 10Ft. of slack for future terminations. C. Design Selection: Adapter Plates- Siemon Pt# RIC-F-SC12-01, Connectors- Siemon Pt# FC2SC-SM-B06. 2.11 VOICE TERMINATION A. TELCO DEMARCATION POINT: Adjacent to the Service Provider demarcation Orange or Blue Backboard with service provider RJ21X, provide and install Qty. (1) RELTEC Pt# R183A3 (green) Backboard W/ Qty. (1) Siemon Pt # S66M4-2W (Primary) and Qty. (1) 6Ft. 25 Pair Category 3 ISP factory assembled cable W/ M-M Connectors between Service Provider RJ21X and Siemon Pt# S66M4-2W(Primary). Refer to Figure # 2A B. CONNECTION FROM PRIMARY: From Primary Siemon Pt# S66M4-2W Block, install Qty. (1) 25 Pair Category 3 ISP Factory Assembled Cable W/ M-Raw to CER Rack and terminate all pairs on Siemon HD5-24 Patch Panel in a Single Pair Configuration for pins 4 & 5. Refer to Figure # 27 C. VOICE BACKBONE CONNECTIVITY: At each CC and CAB – Provide and install Qty. (1) 25 Pair Category 3 ISP Cable from “Protected Side” of BET to CC Rack or CAB and terminate all pairs on Siemon HD5-24 Patch Panel in a Single Pair Configuration for pins 4 & 5. Provide and Install Qty. (1) 25 Pair Category 3 ISP Cable from “Protected Side” of BET’s in CER for each CC and CAB to CER Rack and terminate all pairs on Siemon HD5-24 Patch Panel in a Single Pair Configuration for pins 4 & 5. Refer to Figure # 21 – 24 & 28 D. CROSS CONNECTS: All cross-connects for FACP, Elevators, Intrusion Detection Panels and NBX’s are to be performed by MCSD ET Personnel only. 2.13 A. CABLE SUPPORT SYSTEM Velcro tywraps: Horizontal cables shall be fastened by Velcro tywraps from CC’s or CAB’s to outlets Fire retardant Velcro tywraps shall be used in plenum environments. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 16 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA B. 2.14 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Cable Runway: Cable runway for Telecommunications Rooms minimum 12”. Cable Runway Radius Drop shall be provided to protect Horizontal cable when mounted/dropped to/from cable runway. CABLE TRAY A. Classification: Cable trays are classified into three categories: Standard cable tray, Basket type cable tray and Runway type cable tray. Standard cable trays are classified into two sub-categories: Ladder Type and Spine Type. D. General: No cable tray shall be used for horizontal and backbone cabling. Runway cable tray is to be installed in the CER and CC’s. 2.15 RUNWAY CABLE TRAY AND FITTINGS A. Materials: ASIM A36 steel bar. B. Finish & Size: Equipment: Black Baked Powder painted surface treatment using Polyester coating. C. Cable management tray width: 12, 18 or 24 inches as required to support cable bundles on top no more than 3” in diameter across the full width of the cable runway. D. Fittings: Cable management fittings and hardware recommended by Manufacturer. Provide drop-off, 90° and tees as required for the equipment served and support of the cable. E. Installation: Cable management system to be installed using support components as recommended by the Manufacturer. F. Loading: Cable management system to be installed and supported per Manufacturer’s suggested span load criteria. G. Approved Manufacturers: B-line, Chatsworth. 2.16 PLYWOOD BOARDS IN TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOMS A. Terminal Boards: plywood boards shall be 8 foot high and 4 FT wide. Boards shall be 3/4 inch A/C grade exterior plywood painted on both sides with two coats of fire resistant paint. Color as indicated by the owner/ Architect. B. Terminal Board Conduits: Conduits at Terminal board locations shall be neatly racked on a Kindorf Type rack secured to wall above and below terminal boards. 2.17 COMBINED POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS FLOOR BOX September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 17 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 A. General: This specification covers a box system used for bringing power and low-voltage devices to one location in an on grade or above grade concrete floor only on carpeted areas and stage areas. Floor boxes shall not be installed in tile floors. The system shall consist of an in-the-floor box, mounting brackets, dividers and power devices, trim ring, modular inserts and device faceplates for a complete installation. The system shall provide all plates and bezels to mount Structured Cabling System devices. The box shall be of such form and dimensions as to be adapted to the specific use and location, type of device or fixtures to be used, and number and size of conductors and cables, size and number of conduits connecting thereto. B. General. Provide cast iron boxes for slab on grade applications, and steel boxes for slab above grade applications. Outlets in slab on grade shall conform to Federal Specifications No. WC-526b, Type 1, with threaded conduit hubs. C. Carpet Locations: In carpeted areas, carpet flanges shall be installed to protect carpet edges where flush floor boxes are installed. D. Construction: All assemblies shall be designed and installed to maintain grounding continuity, fireproofing and watertight integrity. Connections to boxes in slabs on grade shall be made tight or sealed to prevent entrance of moisture. E. Accessories: Box trim, service fittings and flanges, receptacle brackets, communications brackets, and other accessories shall be as required to provide a complete installation. F. Special Consideration: Flush caps removed to provide service fittings shall be turned over to the Owner. G. Voice Data Connections: Category 6 modular jack inserts are to be used in conjunction with telecommunication mounting housings (i.e., faceplate, mounting bezel or communication bracket). CAT 6 Modular jack inserts shall be of the same manufacturer as is for all other Cat 6 elements in the project. H. This floor box shall have been examined and tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to Standard UL514A and/or UL514C and Canadian Standard C22.2, No. 18-92 and bear the U.S. and Canadian UL Listing Mark. This floor box shall also conform to the standards set in the National Electrical Code, Section 300-21. This floor box shall also have been evaluated by UL to meet the applicable U.S. and Canadian safety standards for scrub water exclusion when used on carpet covered floors. I. Basis of design. The in-floor box described shall be Walker RFB4 manufactured by The Wiremold Company. Floor boxes of other manufacturers may be considered, if equal in functionality and quality, by written approval of the specifying engineer and shall meet all the performance standards specified herein. 2.18 GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEM AND CONDUCTORS A. Communications bonding and grounding shall be in accordance with the NEC and NFPA as well as EIA/TIA J-STD 607A standard. Backbone and entrance cables shall be grounded in compliance with ANSI/NFPA 70 and local requirements and practices. Figure # 6 shows the Telecommunications Grounding and Bonding system. B. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB): The TMGB serves as the dedicated extension of the building grounding electrode system for the telecommunications infrastructure. The TMGB shall be located in the CER. Refer to figure # 26. C. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB): The TGBs are the grounding connection points for telecommunications systems and equipments in the area served by CC’s and CAB’s. Refer to figure # 26. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 18 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 D. Telecommunication Bonding Backbone (TBB): The TBB is a conductor that interconnects all Telecommunications Grounding Busbars (TGBs) with the Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB). E. Grounding Equalizer (GE). The GE interconnects multiple TBBs. F. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications. The Bonding Conductor for telecommunications shall bond the TMGB to the service equipment (power) ground and shall be, as a minimum, the same size as the TBB. G. The TBBs, GE and Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications are not intended to serve as the only conductors providing a ground fault current return path. The intended function of the TBBs, GE and Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications is to reduce or equalize potential differences between telecommunications systems. H. Sizing of TBB and GE. The TBB and GE shall be a copper conductor. Interior water piping or the metallic cable shield shall not be used as a TBB. The minimum TBB or GE conductor size shall be a No 6 AWG. The TBB and GE should be sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of conductor length up to a maximum of 3/0 AWG. The TBB may be insulated. If the TBB or GE is insulated, the insulation shall meet the fire ratings of its pathway and shall be listed for the space in which it is intended to be placed, such as CM, CMR or CMP. The sizing of the TBB or GE is not intended to account for the reduction or control of electromagnetic interference. 2.19 TBB OR GE LENGTH LINEAR M (FT) TBB/GE SIZE (AWG) Less than 4 (13) 4 – 6 (14 – 20) 6 – 8 (21 – 26) 8 – 10 (27 – 33) 10 – 13 (34 – 41) 13 – 16 (42 – 52) 16 – 20 (53 – 66) Greater than 20 (66) 6 4 3 2 1 1/0 2/0 3/0 ITV SYSTEM A. Provide factory assembled cabinet as follows: Cabinet is to be installed in the TV Production Room and shall be Chatsworth Products Model -11900-724 Cube-iT Plus 24” High X 24” Deep Wall Mountable Enclosure W/ Tinted Front Door. Provide Qty. 2 Chatsworth Products Model – 4074-700 Black 15” Deep Single Sided Shelf and Power Strip Model 12820-707 125V – 20 Amp W/ surge protector and Circuit breaker. Refer to Figure # 25 B. Single channel modulator, agile output, Blonder-Tongue model AM-60-860. Attach all Audio, Video and RF Cables, adjust A/V Levels. Verify proper operation and Set RF Output to Channel 21 or as specified by owner and adjust RF Levels. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 19 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 C. 8 port passive combiner, blonder-tongue model OC-8d, mount in cabinet (with faceplate towards cabinet rear), hook-up, connect to RG6 Cable feeding to Headend System. D. Professional grade factory made jumpers (field or shop made not acceptable). Provide RCA jumpers and RG-6 with screw-on “F” connector swivel ends for audio/video as required. E. Provide Y-cable for stereo to mono RCA audio connections as required F. Combo Zenith DVD/VCR Player XBV613 Mount in cabinet, or locate as directed by owner, hook-up, and tune to system settings/verify proper operation. G. Provide RCA jack to F-type connection adapters as required on video/audio components and cables. (Pico-MACOM RCA-F or as required). H. Provide PC to Television Scan Converter, Extron electronics VSC-500, As may be required. Check W/ Owner prior to any Submittal, Contact Ms. Marilyn Gavitt of MCSB. Locate as directed by owner. Locate near PC to be used for TV broadcast. I. By others (Not in contract): satellite dish receiver/electronics – reserve space in cabinet. J. Qty. 2 RG- 6 coax cables, run concealed in conduit from ITV system headend to studio production equipment location, provide slack and connectorize at each end. These shall serve as Primary and Spare Coaxial Cables from the Production Eqt. to the Headend. The Headend is typically located within the CER termination where the CATV Service Provider installs the Demarc. K. RG-6 Drop Cable shall be installed “Home run”, with drop lengths not to exceed 150Ft. from the designated TV outlet location within a classroom, or location as specified to an adjacent and accessible area within the common hallways. ITV Outlets These drops shall terminated on directional Multi-Taps in the following configurations 2, 4, or 8 Port Taps. These Multi-Taps shall be permanently mounted to the building structure, and located not greater than 12” above ceiling level for ease in maintenance and access. It is recommended that the design and placement of these Multi-Taps be located and installed where consideration has been given to minimize and equalize the amount of cable lengths to each of the ITV outlet locations without exceeding the 150Ft. Maximum. RG-6 cables at the ITV Outlet will terminate on Siemon MX–F81 connector same as SCS outlets and wall plates. L. All RG-6 Cables must be terminated “F” with the use of Linear Compression Type Connectors, including all Coaxial Patch / Jumper Cables. Recommended “F” connectors are PPC, EX6 Series Universal F Connectors. The required Cable Preparation, and Compression tools must be used with the installation of these products. Hex Crimp Type connectors shall not be allowed under any circumstance. The recommended RG-6 Cable to be used shall be Belden 1694A RG-6 Coax. M. RG-6 Jumpers from Classroom Faceplate to TV or Receiver W/ Screw on “F” connector must be provided. These Jumpers can be either Factory or Field Made to custom lengths or typical 4’ to 6’ depending on application. The RG6 “F” Type connector must utilize Linear Compression Type Connectors, Recommended “F” connectors are PPC, EX6 Series Universal F Connectors. A 10% spare count of Jumpers will be provided to Owner upon completion of ITV Project. N. The use of RG-11 Cable may be used in the system design of the Trunk/Distribution portion of the ITV System, however, the maximum distance in its use is limited to lengths up 500FT. All RG-11 Cables must be terminated “F” with the use of Linear Compression Type Connectors. The Recommended Multi-Taps for use with RG-11 Distribution System are as follows – Toner Cable Eqt. TGT Series i.e TGT2-XX, TGT4-XX and TGT8-XX (where XX = Tap Value). The recommended splitters would also be Toner Cable Eqt. DSU Series. The Recommended “F” connectors are PPC, EX11 Series Universal F Connectors. The required Cable Preparation and Compression tools must be used with the installation of these products. Hex Crimp Type connectors shall not be allowed under any circumstance. The recommended RG-11 Cable shall be Belden, = Pt#. 9064 for indoor use only, and Belden, = Pt# 9764 Burial / UG use only. O. If the system design of the Trunk/Distribution portion of the ITV System has any distribution leg within either a Loop or Star Topology in excess of and greater than 500Ft., Hardline (CATV Rated) Cables September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 20 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 must be substituted in all cases regardless of the lengths of all other legs. This pertains to whether Trunk/Distribution cables are to be installed to other CC’s that require Inter or Intra building topologies. The Recommended Cables to be used for the Hard line installation shall be Commscope P3 .500 (½” ) or larger as design and distribution requirements may require. The Recommended Multi-Taps for use with a Hardline Distribution System are as follows, Toner SMT-102-XX, SMT-104XX and SMT108-XX (where XX = Tap Value). The recommended Line Splitters or Directional Couplers would also be Toner Cable Eqt. - Line Splitters = TGSP-X , Directional Couplers = TGDC-X (where X =2 or 3 way splitter or Value in the case of Dir. Couplers. Cable selection - depending on installation environment, Indoor vs. Underground in conduit installations, the appropriate selection of Jacketed versus Jacketed Flooded cables shall be used. P. A hybrid design and use of a combination of RG-11 & Hardline Trunk/Distribution Cabling may be considered and used if the design and balance of system levels to the Drop System allows. For example; a cable routing between the Headend at CER and any CC exceeds the 500Ft maximum for use of RG-11 Cable. Then the requirement of Hardline Cable must be used at minimum between these two points. The distribution system beyond this point may support the use of a Higher Loss Cable such as the RG-11 to provide adequate signal to the Multi Taps feeding the RG-6 Drop System. The key consideration in this scenario is whether this design will support the system level requirements passively (without amplification) or actively (with Amplification). Considerations and criteria for design are as follows, implement an ITV System design that limits the use of more than 1 Main Amplifier within the Headend if possible, and design the rest of the system with the use of passive devices. Amplifiers can only be located and installed within CER’s & CC’s. All Hardline Cables shall be terminated with Long pin 5/8” Housing Connectors for that specific cable size and type. Recommended Manufacturer PPC or equivalent. Q. Headend and related equipment to be provided - The headend equipment is to be located and installed at or within the CER where the CATV Service Provider installs its Cables and facilities into the building and providing the demarc. It is the owners responsibility to coordinate the installation of those facilities with the local service provider. The minimal signal level required from the Cable Company at the demark shall be 20Dbmv at its highest frequency and should be relatively flat across the spectrum with a slope/tilt of not greater than 6DB across the band. The ITV contractor shall provide and install the following equipment. Single Channel 21 Deletion Filter (or other Channel as may be designated by the owner). The recommended filter = Microwave Filter Company Inc. 3272 Series Wall Mountable Unit Part# W3272-21 W/ Passband Extender Module # 10500. All necessary Cable Jumpers, Directional Coupler of the appropriate Tap Value for the injection of the MCSD Locally Originated Channel 21, into the ITV Systems Main Amplifier at a nominal value equal to the Mid-band level provided by the Cable Company. Establish the Input and Output levels of the Amplifier as per Manufacturers Specifications. The recommended Amplifier = Quality RF Products QDAX–86033Q2W which is a 54-860 MHz two way capable Distribution Amplifier (W/ return bandwidth = 540MHz). Install all necessary passive devices for attachment to Trunk Distribution Cables as required. Should the design require additional amplifiers within the network, the same manufacturers equipment shall be utilized. R. Cable - All Cables, Drop, Trunk Distribution Shall be capable of Passing 5MHz to 1Ghz, and the design criteria should be based and calculated for design upon the Loss characteristics of the Cable at 54Mhz and 750Mhz . S. Passive Devices- Directional Taps, Couplers, Splitters, Equalizers, Attenuators Shall be capable of Passing 5MHz to 1GHz . Calculate and design for all flat losses of these devices at 750Mhz T. Signal Specifications – The system must be capable of delivering a signal level of + 3 to 10DBmV on all channels at the ITV Outlet with a measured Signal to Noise ratio of 43DB September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems + or better. Page 21 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.20 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 BASIS OF DESIGN A. SCS system: The basis of design for the SCS system is the Siemon System 6 solution. Alternate or substitute product manufacturers are not acceptable. B. ITV system: The basis of design for the ITV system is the solution with the manufacturers provided herein. Alternate or substitute product manufacturers are acceptable. Use of an alternate or substitute product, whether or not it is stated as "acceptable" herein, does not relieve the Contractor of their responsibility to comply fully with the entirety of the Project Documents. 2.21 A. UNSPECIFIED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL Any item of equipment or material not specifically addressed in this document and required to provide a complete and functional SCS installation shall be provided in a level of quality consistent with other specified items. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 WORKMANSHIP A. Components of the SCS and ITV systems shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner consistent with the best telephone, data and TV practices and in accordance with all applicable codes and standards, the respective manufacturer’s written recommendations, and the specifications as described herein. B. Wiring color codes shall be strictly observed and terminations shall be uniform throughout the building. C. Identification markings and systems shall be uniform. D. T568B wiring code shall standardize all twisted pair wiring. E. Physical integrity of cables shall pass not only electronic testing but visual inspection as well by the Owner and/or the Engineer. 3.2 A. 3.3 A. JOB-SITE CONDITIONS The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to any building, equipment, furnishings, or other property of the Martin County School District that are caused by the Contractor or his subcontractors. The Contractor shall, as directed by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner’s Authorized Representative, repair or replace any damaged item at the Contractor’s expense. Any item which the Architect/Engineer or the Owner’s Authorized Representative allows to be repaired shall be restored to the condition which existed prior to the damage occurring, or better. DAILY CLEANUP Upon completion of the work on a task-by-task basis, and as a minimum on a daily basis, the Contractor shall reconnect any utilities, equipment, or appliances removed in the course of work and replace all furniture, etc., moved for the performance of the work. Debris and rubbish caused by the work shall be removed and the premises left vacuum clean. All furniture, work surfaces, computers and the like shall be wiped down to remove dust generated by the work. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 22 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.4 A. 3.5 A. 3.6 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 FINAL CLEANUP Prior to the Substantial Completion Inspection, perform final cleanup of all work and all areas in which work was performed. All work areas shall be left vacuum clean. All raceway, faceplates, jack assemblies, racks, panels, data equipment, and the like shall be wiped down to remove dust accumulated during the course of the project. All painted surfaces such as backboards shall be touched up with paint to remove scuff marks, pencil marks, scratches, etc. All factory surfaces shall be touched with matching paint. DELIVERY Protect materials and equipment from physical or environmental damage during shipping, storage and installation. Equipment and materials shall be received at the site in new condition in original factory sealed cartons, and shall be maintained in new condition throughout the installation process. Damaged or deteriorated equipment and materials will not be acceptable. The Contractor shall be responsible for receiving and storing of all equipment and materials, and shall be responsible for the safety and condition of all materials and equipment, whether stored or installed, until Final Acceptance by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE ROUTING AND INSTALLATION A. General: Cable routing and Installation practices shall be in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA, BICSI’s Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM), Customer-Owned Outside Plant Manual (CO-OSP) and BICSI’s Telecommunications Cabling Installation Manual (TCIM). B. The contractor shall install a complete set of supporting J-hooks and other supporting hardware for this system as part of the contract. All supporting hardware shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval prior to installation. Hardware shall also be utilized by other systems work. C. Plenum Spaces and cable routing: The majority of the wiring in this building will be installed above ceilings. All communications cabling used throughout this project shall comply with the requirements as outlined in the National Electric Code (NEC) article 800. All cabling shall bare the CMR, MPR OR OFNR (RISER) and or appropriate markings for ducted "air return" applications, and for cable run in conduit above grade. Cable shall bare CMP, MPP or OFNP (plenum) markings for all non-ducted return air applications or as required by local and/or State code requirements. Cable shall be outdoor type for cable run in conduit below grade. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to verify with local and State code enforcement officers where plenum and non-plenum cables are required. All cable shall bare the appropriate markings for the environment in which they are installed. D. Cable bundles: In suspended ceiling, if conduits are not installed the Contractor shall not exceed manufacturers recommended cable loading capacities for the “J” Hook Cable support system utilized. Cable Bundle can be secured with Cable ties snug, but not deforming the cable geometry. Cable ties shall be Velcro type. Conventional Bridal rings shall not be allowed for cable support. The contractor shall adhere to the manufacturers' requirements for bending radius and pulling tension of all cables. Fiber Optic Cables shall be bundled and supported independently. E. J-hooks: From CER to CC and CAB or from CER, CC and CAB to outlets provide a minimum of two hangers at any corners or 90 degree turns. Attachment shall be to the building structure including walls randomly supported at 3, 4 or maximum of five (5) foot intervals. Ceiling suspension wire or independent tie wire shall not be allowed in any space for cable support. Use of ceiling tiles, grid or hanger wires for support of cables shall be prohibited. Where cable is run above the ceiling in areas without walls, all thread rod shall be used (minimum 1/4", however sized to support the intended weight) with the appropriate CAT 6 hanger for cross-room support. Support rods shall be level and plumb after cable installation. The J-hooks shall feature a wide base loop with smooth curves to eliminate snag potential and cable deformation. Listings: J-hooks shall be in accordance with NEC, ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001 requirements for structured cabling systems. All cable supports shall be U.L. listed. Refer to Figure # 16 September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 23 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 F. Clic fasteners: Horizontal cables may be suspended by "CLIC" fasteners with cable inserts in TR’s on the plywood area where ladder tray or rack management is not available. Listings: "CLIC" fasteners shall be in accordance with NEC, ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2001 requirements for structured cabling systems. Above the plywood area J-hooks or D-rings should be used. G. Velcro Tywraps: Horizontal cables shall be fastened by Velcro tywraps from end to end in addition to the J-hooks or other approved supports. Velcro Tywraps shall be spaced 12 FT on centers. Fire retardant Velcro tywraps shall be used in plenum environments. Non CAT6 compliant tie-wraps are not acceptable H. Protection: Sealing of openings between floors, through rated fire and smoke walls, existing or created by this contractor for cable pass through shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Sealing material and application of this material shall be accomplished in such a manner, which is acceptable to the local fire and building authorities having jurisdiction over this work. Creation of such openings as are necessary for cable passage between locations as shown on the contract documents shall be the responsibility of this contractor's work. Any openings created by or for this contractor and left unused shall also be sealed as part of this work. Penetration rating shall equal structure rating. I. Damage: The contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any surfaces or work disrupted as a result of his work. Repair of surfaces including painting and ceiling tile replacement shall be included as part of this contract. J. Avoiding EMI : To avoid EMI, all pathways shall provide clearances of at least 4 feet (1.2 meters) from motors or transformers; 1 foot (0.3 meter) from conduit and cables used for electrical-power distribution ; and 5 inches (12 centimeters) from fluorescent lighting. Pathways shall cross perpendicular to fluorescent lighting and electrical-power cables and conduits. The Contractor shall not place any distribution cabling alongside power lines, or share the same conduit, channel or sleeve with electrical apparatus. 3.7 A. 3.8 A. 3.9 CAT 6 CABLE INSTALLATION Installation of Category 6 UTP cable shall be in accordance with EIA/TIA guidelines for Category 6. Cable installation and terminations that do not comply shall be replaced by the contractor. 1. The maximum pulling tension shall not exceed 25 pounds to avoid stretching the conductors. The contractor shall use a 25 lb breakaway swivel attached between the pull rope and the UTP CAT6 cable to ensure that no more than 25 lb of tension is exerted on the pulled cable. 2. The minimum bending radius of the cable shall not be less than 4x the outside diameter of the cable. 3. The cable shall be installed without kinks or twists and the application of cable ties shall not deform the cable bundle. 4. Strip back only as much cable jacket as is required to terminate the cable and the amount of untwisting in a pair as a result of the termination shall not exceed 0.5 in. SERVICE SLACK All CAT6 cable runs shall contain 6 foot service slack above ceiling prior to the termination point at the workstation side. Service slack at CER, CC and CAB shall consist of a 10 foot slack section. All station cables shall be located and placed neatly in the cable runway above the equipment rack in an extended large diameter loops or in a neat figure 8 configuration. Cables shall be rather loose fastened with velcro Tywraps. FIRE AND SMOKE PARTITION PENETRATIONS September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 24 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 A. Conduit sleeves shall be provided as a means of routing cables between various communications rooms and multi floor buildings. Openings in sleeves and conduits used for the SCS system cables and those which remain (empty) spare shall be sealed with a U.L. approved fireproof, removable safeing material. B. Sleeves which pass vertically from floor to floor shall be sealed in a similar manner using an approved re-enterable system. Penetration rating shall equal structure rating. C. Additional penetrations through rated assemblies necessary for passage of SCS wiring shall be made using an approved method and permanently sealed after installation of cables. 3.10 CROSS CONNECTS/PATCHING A. All copper Cross-connects will be performed by the Owner and telecom service providers. B. All copper RJ45 / RJ45 Patching within CER, CC’s and CAB’s will be performed by the Owner or network service providers. 3.11 A. 3.12 FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION Installation of Fiber Optic Cables shall be in accordance with EIA/TIA 568B guidelines. Cable installation and terminations that do not comply shall be replaced by the contractor. 1. The bend radius for intrabuilding 2 and 4-fiber horizontal optical fiber cable shall not be less than 25 mm (1 in) under no-load conditions. When under a maximum tensile load of 222 N (50lbf), the bend radius shall not be less than 50 mm (2 in). 2. The bend radius for intrabuilding optical fiber backbone shall not be less than that recommended by the manufacturer. If no recommendation is known, then the applied bend radius shall not be less than 10 times the cable outside diameter under no-load conditions and no less than 15 times the cable outside diameter when the cable is under tensile load. 3. The bend radius for interbuilding optical fiber backbone shall not be less than that recommended by the manufacturer. If no recommendation is known, then the applied bend radius shall not be less than 10 times the cable outside diameter under no-load conditions and no less than 20 times the cable outside diameter when the cable is under tensile load up to the rating of the cable, usually 2670 N (600lbf). STRUCTURED CABLE SYSTEM PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION. A. General: Contractor shall protect all Structured Cabling System materials from damage during construction. B. Racks and connecting hardware protection. Racks shall be covered with fabric or plastic after mounting to prevent dust, debris and other foreign materials having contact with SCS devices. C. Cables: Contractor shall protect at all times all fiber optic and copper cables from damage during installation. All cables shall maintain the physical integrity as manufactured for testing and delivery to the owner. All damaged cables shall be replaced at no additional cost to the owner. 3.13 CABLE RUNWAY INSTALLATION A. Inspection: Examine area for clearances, to allow proper installation of the runway. Check existing building steel and other supporting structures to establish the type of tray hangers to be used and at the proper spans. Consult the field engineer for questionable areas or conflicts. B. Installation Criteria: Install cable runway in accordance with manufacturer's data, written instructions, NEC, NEMA and as specified herein. C. All cable runway components shall be the product of a single manufacturer. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 25 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 D. Support: Cable runway support shall be by means of welded angle brackets to structural components, brackets shall be as manufactured by the Cable runway manufacturer. E. Grounding: All cable runways and conduits shall be grounded in accordance with the National Electric Code, and/or as shown herein. F. Make changes in height and direction with standard cable runway fittings. G. Coordination: Coordinate installation of cable runway with other trades for clearances, to avoid conflicts. A minimum of 300 mm (12 in) access headroom shall be provided and maintained above the cable runway system. A minimum of 150 mm (6 in) access headroom shall be provided and maintained at one side if wall mounted and two sides if mounted on racks or supported from the deck. Care shall be taken to ensure that other building components (e.g., air conditioning ducts, pipes, structural elements) do not restrict access. When crossing other building components with the cable runway the above specified clearances shall be maintained. 3.14 COMBINED POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS FLOOR BOX INSTALLATION A. Completeness: Work shall include installing box, device mounting bracket, devices, device plates, labels and blank plates for a complete in-the-floor system. B. Installation Responsibilities: The Electrical contractor shall have installation responsibility for the floor box, power and all box accessories. The SCS contractor shall have installation responsibility for the communications cabling. C. Adjustment: Where floor or fill depth is 3 inches or more, adjustable boxes with maximum vertical and angular adjustment for after concrete pour shall be used. After pour is complete, boxes shall be set and readjusted to provide a smooth surface conforming to the elevation and slope of the surrounding finished floor. The box shall contain four locations to accommodate leveling for preconcrete pour adjustment and shall provide four leveling screws for the pre-pour adjustment. D. Installation procedures and practices shall be in strict accordance with applicable codes and standards. Prior to and during installation, refer to system layout drawing containing elements of the systems. Installer shall comply with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. E. Electrical Security: The boxes shall be electrically continuous and connected to electrical outlets, boxes, and cabinets, in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3.15 A. 3.16 COMMUNICATIONS PLYWOOD BACKBOARD INSTALLATION Plywood Backboards shall be provided in all Telecommunications rooms on walls mounted 6” A.F.F. Rooms shall have all walls covered except the areas adjacent to the door light switch space. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS A. General: Installation requirements specified herein takes precedence over division 16 specification sections. B. The TBB, GE and the Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications shall be installed and protected from physical and mechanical damage. C. The TBB and GE conductors shall be continuous and routed in the shortest possible straight line path following telecommunications pathways designed for the backbone cabling. D. The Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications shall be continuous and routed in the shortest possible straight line path to the service equipment (power) ground. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 26 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 E. The TBB, GE and the Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications shall be installed without splices. Where splices are necessary, the number of splices should be a minimum and they shall be accessible and located in telecommunications spaces. Joined segments of a TBB, GE or the Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications shall be connected using exothermic welding, irreversible compression-type connectors, or equivalent. All joints shall be adequately supported and protected from damage. F. Connections of the TBB, the GE and the Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications to the TGB or TMGB shall utilize exothermic weld connections, listed compression two hole lugs or other irreversible compression type connector. G. The TGB or TMGB shall be as close to the electrical power panel as is practicable and shall be installed to maintained clearances required by applicable electrical codes. That electrical power panel ACEG bus or the panel enclosure shall be bonded to the TGB or TMGB. H. The bonding conductor between a TBB and a TGB shall be continuous and routed in the shortest possible straight-line pattern. I. All metallic raceways for telecommunications cabling located within the same room or space as the TGB or TMGB shall be bonded to the TGB or TMGB using a minimum No 6 AWG conductor. J. The TGBs and TMGB shall be insulated from their support. A minimum of 50 mm (2 inches) separation from the wall is recommended to allow access to the rear of the busbar. K. All connectors used for bonding to the metal frame of a building shall be listed for the intended purpose. The TGBs and TMGB shall be bonded to the steel metal frame using a minimum No 6 AWG conductor. L. The primary protector grounding conductor shall be connected to the TMGB or TGB. A minimum of 300 mm (1 FT) separation shall be maintained between this insulated conductor and any dc power cables, switchboard cable, or high frequency cables, even when placed in rigid metal conduit or EMT. M. When the outside plant cables in the CER incorporate a cable shield isolation gap, the cable shield on the building side of the gap shall be bonded to the TMGB or TGB. N. Where backbone cables incorporate a shield or metallic member, this shield or metallic member shall be bonded to the TMGB or TGB. O. Telecommunications primary protectors for the interbuilding backbone cables shall be bonded to the TMGB or TGB. P. Short metallic pathways (e.g. wall and floor sleeves) are not required to be bonded. 3.18 A. 3.19 A. B. INNERDUCT Install backbone fiber optic cables in 1-1/2” innerduct continuously between each CC and CER. Pull telephone backbone, RG-11 coax ITV backbone and innerduct at same time. Install fiber optic backbone after installation of innerduct is complete. See specifications for cleaning & sweeping out conduit to be reserved for future use. BACKBONE CONDUIT Run all backbone cabling in backbone conduit pathways. The contractor agrees to use the conduit as required to properly install all cabling indicated, without damage to cabling. At cash register locations, mount waterproof “D2” CO in Hubbell SA6686 service pedestal. Provide Hubbell S13 blank stainless steel plate for back of pedestal. Provide factory coated rigid conduit turning up into pedestal, factory coated rigid elbow turning under floor then run 1” Schedule 80 PVC September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 27 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 homerun conduit under floor to nearest wall, turn up concealed in wall to 4” above floor, convert to EMT, then run concealed up in wall and overhead above ceiling to serving CC. C. Provide sleeve conduit with 6’-0” long section of Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeve where conduit penetrates foundation/foundation wall. Sleeve size 4” for 2” conduits, 6” for 3” & 4” conduits. DO NOT run conduit UNDER foundation wall. D. Provide 2” conduit for future satellite connection. Stub conduit into 12”x12”x4” NEMA 3R enclosure on exterior wall at 3’-0” A.F.F. 3.20 A. 3.21 SLEEVES The SCS contractor shall provide and install 1” or 2” sleeves through full height walls as required for free-routed cables depending upon SCS volume and requirements. ITV System shall have separate an independent Sleeves installed in all circumstances. ABOVEGROUND CONDUIT A. The contractor is solely responsible for determining final conduit routing in the field. The contractor shall coordinate the final routing of conduits to avoid conflicts with other utilities and obstacles, while minimizing changes in direction and overall conduit length. All conduit shall be run overhead for floor boxes and free-standing casework. Obtain approval of engineer prior to any changes in routing. B. Conduits run indoors shall be run concealed overhead above ceilings unless located in spaces without ceilings, in an unfinished space such as equipment rooms or in spaces specifically indicated by the engineer to have exposed conduit installations. Indoor conduit shall be EMT with steel fittings. Die cast EMT fittings are not allowable. Fittings in exposed indoor locations shall be steel set screw type. Support exposed conduit at a minimum of 4’-0” on center with 2-hole heavy duty galvanized steel hardware. Do not run conduits below slab except as specifically indicated by the engineer. C. Support conduit directly from building structure using approved hardware. Do not support conduit from other systems components or supports unless specifically approved by the engineer. Route all conduits as high as possible. Where conduit is exposed run hard against wall or underside of roof/floor deck. Run all conduits parallel/perpendicular and plumb with building lines. D. Conduit bodies such as “LB” fittings are not allowable. E. Pullboxes for backbone conduits shall be as indicated herein. Pull boxes for CO conduits shall be 4” wide x 4” long x 2-1/8” deep NEMA 1 galvanized steel with screw cover. Where CO conduits are tightly racked with uniform spacing, wider pull boxes may be provided to serve multiple conduits. Terminate conduits at opposite ends of pullboxes. Do not terminate conduits at right angles to each other except as specifically indicated by the engineer. F. Provide pullboxes, as described in section 5 above, of the same type and size for each run of conduit at every 100 feet on center and at each end of conduit runs containing a total of two 90 degree bends or a combination of lesser bends totaling 180 degrees (minimum requirements – provide whether specifically indicated or not). Conduit runs containing more than two 90 degree bend without a pullbox are not allowable. Factory conduit elbows and all other bends shall have a minimum radius of six times the internal conduit diameter. Conduit offsets and pullboxes required to suit field conditions and to conform to these requirements shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Where conduit and pullboxes are located above non-accessible ceilings for soffits (example plaster, metal, or gypsum board), install an 18” x 18” all aluminum ceiling access door in ceiling directly below each such pullbox. Access doors shall be CESCO W-A, all aluminum construction and fasteners. Provide access doors factory primed for painting. Finish paint with two coats enamel after installation to match existing ceiling, soffit, or wall. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 28 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 H. Terminate all conduit ends with plastic insulating bushings. Bushings must fit tightly on conduit connector threads. Install all bushings prior to pulling cable. Install 3/8” marked pull tape (Carlon TL382) along with required cabling. Leave 10’-0” of pull tape slack at each end and tape excess into roll and conceal within pullbox and slotted wireway limits. I. Identification: identify all indoor communications conduit, pullboxes above lay-in ceilings, access doors, in roof space, and in all exposed locations with blue paint at every pullbox and on conduit at each coupler (paint entire coupler). Identify all outdoor communications backbone conduit pullboxes. Paint with 1” tall letter stencil (color blue) the words “telecom” on each pullbox cover. Lettering shall be level and square and at center of pullbox cover. J. Refer to Figure # 14,15,17 & 30 for outlet boxes and conduits mounting details. 3.22 SITE INGROUND CONDUIT A. General: All underground raceways (with exception of raceways installed under floor slab) shall be installed in accordance with Section 300-5 of the NEC except that the minimum cover for any conduit or duct bank shall be two feet, unless otherwise indicated. B. Stubs: Spare conduit stubs shall be capped and accurately dimensioned on as-built drawings. C. Separation: All conduit run underground, or stubbed above floor shall be separated with plastic interlocking spacers manufactured specifically for this purpose, or shall be strapped to Kindorf channel supported by conduit driven into ground or tied to steel. D. Description: Underground duct lines shall be of individual conduits. Conduits shall be encased in concrete. The conduit shall be of plastic, PVC Schedule 40. The conduit used shall not be smaller than 4 inches in diameter, inside. The concrete encasement surrounding the duct bank shall be reinforced as shown and rectangular in cross-section, having a minimum concrete thickness of 2 inches. Conduit shall be separated by a minimum concrete thickness of 2 inches. E. General: The concrete work shall conform to Section on "Concrete". The top of the concrete envelope shall be not less than 18 inches below grade. Concrete shall be installed in a continuous pour to eliminate joints in the duct run. Duct lines shall have a continuous slope downward toward manholes and away from buildings with a pitch of not less than 3 inches in 100 feet. Changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of curvature of 25 feet, except that manufactured bends may be made up on one or more curved or straightened sections or combinations thereof. Manufactured bends shall have a minimum radius of 48 inches. F. Conduits: Conduits shall terminate in end-bells where duct lines enter manholes. Provide 4 to 6 inch reducers as required. Separators shall be of pre-cast concrete, high impact polystyrene, steel or any combination of these. The joints of the conduits shall be staggered by rows so as to provide a duct line having the maximum strength. During construction partially complete duct lines shall be protected from the entrance of debris, such as mud, sand and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs. As the duct line is completed, a testing mandrel not less than 13 inches long with a diameter 1/4 inch less than the size of the stiff bristles shall be drawn through until the conduit is clear of all particles of earth, sand or gravel; conduit plug shall then be immediately installed. G. Conduit: Plastic conduit, fittings and joints shall not have been stored in the sun or weather, in any excessively heated space, or unevenly supported during storage. Use and installation shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code requirements for the installation of non-metallic rigid conduit. Plastic conduit shall be protected against the direct rays of the sun prior to installation. Conduit shall be Carlon Type EB, Queen City Plastics, or accepted substitution. Conduit shall be U.L. listed and conform to NEMA Standard TC6-1972. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 29 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 H. PVC Joints: PVC joints shall be solvent welded. Threads shall not be permitted on PVC conduit, except for rigid steel to PVC couplings. Installation of PVC conduit shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. I. Trench: Trenches for duct banks shall be completely dry before setting conduits or pouring concrete. Well pointing as required shall be provided if necessary to keep trench dry. J. Excavation: Backfilling shall be in layers not more than 8 inches deep, and shall be thoroughly tamped. The first layer shall be earth or sand, free from particles that would be retained on a 1/4 inch sieve. The succeeding layers shall be excavated material having stones no larger than would pass through a 4-inch ring. The backfill shall be level with adjacent surface, except that in sodded or paved areas, a space equal to the thickness of the sod or paving shall be left. K. Finish: The surface disturbed during the installation of duct shall be restored to its original elevation and condition if not refinished in connection with site work. L. Plugging: All unused conduit openings shall be plugged or capped with a suitable device designed for the purpose; caulking compound shall not be used for plugging conduit openings. M. Counterpoise: Provide two #4 AWG bare stranded copper counterpoise conductors above all Telecomm ductbanks. Terminate in all handholes and bond. Counterpoise shall run to building and be grounded at building service ground. N. Inground Pull box. Refer to Figure # 31 for Communications inground pull box or handhole 3.23 TRAINING A. Subsequent to Substantial Completion but prior to Final Completion, the Contractor shall provide onsite training to Owner’s personnel on the operational use of the features of the system and the use of all equipment provided. The cost of training shall be included in the cost of the system. One copy of the training material shall be supplied to the Owner’s Authorized Representative at no additional cost. B. The contractor shall provide one 4 hour training session for the SCS system to familiarize the owner with the locations of all CC’s, conduit/raceways routes, cable and jack labeling and numbering systems, data and voice connections. The RCDD shall be present for and participate in not less than 2 hrs of user training C. The contractor shall provide one 2 hour training session to familiarize the owner with the ITV system including cables and headend equipment. D. The training shall include a review of the as-built drawings, a review of the system verification and acceptance documentation, and guidelines for basic trouble-shooting and operation of the structured cabling system and LAN equipment. E. The Contractor shall provide an additional eight (8) hours of follow-up training on the systems when requested by the Owner at any time during the warranty period. F. Training shall, as a minimum, be provided to the School’s Technology Coordinator and Media Coordinator. The School Principal shall be invited to participate in the training. The Owner’s Authorized Representative and the Architect/Engineer shall be notified prior to training and may participate in training at their discretion. G. The instruction shall be presented in an organized and professional manner by personnel who are thoroughly familiar with the SCS and ITV systems installation and who have demonstrated expertise in the equipment specified for installation under the project. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 30 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA H. 3.24 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 The Contractor shall provide documentation of training (including names of personnel present at each training session) to the Architect/Engineer at the Final Completion Inspection. The documentation shall be signed-off by the School’s Technology Coordinator or Principal. The documentation shall be three-hole punched and ready for insertion in the O&M. AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION A. As-built documentation shall be provided as part of the contract. As-built drawings shall be a complete set of Autocad Release 14/2002 floor plans with all outlets shown and numbered as installed. The original project floor plan disks shall be obtained from the Owner. All cable routings (trunk lines) and elevations of the CER and each CC and CAB indicating outlet, tie, and riser cable terminations shall be required. All addendum information or project revisions resulting in drawing changes that occur during the construction period shall be documented and included in the as-built material. All required as-built documentation is mandatory and shall be required prior to project closeout. A set of prints with all changes shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. Upon completion of the Engineer's review, the Contractor shall provide updated disks and a reproducible mylar set of drawings, which include final As-built conditions and the Engineer's review comments, if any. B. Contractor shall provide Excel software spreadsheet that defines the telecommunications outlet number, location, number of voice, data and special jacks. This database shall also provide the outlet patch panel connection to the riser/inter-floor cable, equipment, and telephone company demarcation circuit pairs as part of the as-built documentation. C. The project’s RCDD shall affix his/her stamp to the contractor’s as-built drawings, indicating that he/she has reviewed and approved the drawings as being complete, accurate, and representative of the system as actually installed. 3.25 TESTING OF COPPER CABLING A. General: Horizontal and backbone cabling shall be verified in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and the addendum for CAT6. B. General: The SCS Contractor shall set the wiring tester for a channel configuration for DATA which includes the patch cord, patch panel, UTP Cable, work-area jack and work-area cord, and a permanent link configuration for VOICE. C. General: In the event the Engineer elects to be present during the tests, provide notification to the engineer two weeks prior to testing. D. General: The Owner may elect to conduct third party independent testing and certification for all or part of the copper and fiber optic cabling. The contractor will be notified 4 weeks or earlier prior to testing. The contractor will be notified of those links and channels failing the third party testing for corrective action, which may include replacement at no additional expense to the Owner. E. General: The Project’s RCDD shall sign off on all copper and fiber optic cable test results, indicating that he/she was in responsible charge of all cable testing procedures and that all cables were tested in compliance with the contract documents and met or exceeded the requirements stated herein. F. Testing Equipment: Tester shall be as manufactured by Agilent, Fluke, IDEAL or Wavetek. Tester shall be 100% Level III compliant with ANSI/EIA/TIA 568B specifications for testing of the CAT 6 cabling. No tester will be approved with out meeting these requirements. G. Each Data jack in each outlet shall be tested at a minimum to the CATEGORY 6 compliance in a channel configuration to verify the integrity of all conductors and the correctness of the termination sequence. Prior to Testing UTP runs, the tester shall be calibrated per manufacturer guidelines. The correct cable NVP shall be entered into tester to assure proper length and attenuation readings. September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 31 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 H. Documentation of cable testing shall be required. The SCS contractor shall provide the results of all CATEGORY 6 cable tests in electronic format as well as two hard bound copies in 3-ring binders. Provide text files on CD. Provide a separate text file for each building in the project. Each test page shall be separated by standard page break (one test per page). The test results shall include: 250 MHz sweep tests, continuity, polarity checks, wire map, Attenuation, NEXT, PSNEXT, FEXT, PSFEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, ACR, Return Loss, Delay Skew, and the installed length for CATEGORY 6 cables. Cables not complying with the EIA/TIA 568B CATEGORY 6 tests shall be identified to the engineer for corrective action which may include replacement at no additional expense to the Owner. I. Any Fail, Fail*, Pass* or WARNING test result yields a Fail for the channel or permanent link under test. In order to achieve an overall Pass condition, the result for each individual test parameter must be Pass. All test results shall come from a tester with the permanently enabled marginal reporting feature. J. Test results shall show and comply with the margin claimed by the manufacturers over category 6 channel specifications on all transmission parameters across the entire frequency range of 1-250 MHz as shown on the manufacturers catalogs and literature. K. General: Copper Riser cabling for VOICE shall be tested for length, continuity, polarity checks, wire map. The SCS Contractor shall provide the results of all Copper Riser cable tests in electronic format (CD). L. Trained technicians who have successfully attended an appropriate training program and have obtained a certificate as proof thereof shall execute the tests. 3.26 TESTING OF FIBER OPTIC CABLING. A. General: fiber optic Horizontal and Backbone cabling shall be verified in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and the addendum for fiber optic cabling testing. B. General: Each strand in fiber optic cables shall be tested for correctness of termination, overall transmission loss, and defects using an approved Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) and a power meter. Tests shall be performed for each strand of fiber in two-way averaging measurement of the fiber In the event the Engineer elects to be present during the tests, provide notification to the engineer two weeks prior to testing. C. Testing Equipment: Tester (power meter) shall be as manufactured by Agilent, Fluke, Noyes, IDEAL, GN NETTEST, Tektronix or Wavetek. D. Fiber Testing shall be I.A.W. TIA/EIA-526-14 method B, one jumper reference. System loss measurements (both calculated and measured) shall be provided at 850 and 1300 nanometers in both directions for multimode cables and at 1310 and 1550 nanometers for singlemode. Test shall be provided for each strand. E. Fiber Optic links shall be tested to comply with the following loss budget for the different link types. Link Type Loss (dB) Wavelength (nm) Length (m) Horizontal, MM  2.0 850 or 1300  90 Backbone, MM  3.5/km + 0.75/conn + 0.3/s pl 850  2000 September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 32 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA Backbone, SM Centralized,MM PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05  1.5/km + 0.75/conn + 0.3/s pl 1300  2000  1.0/km + 0.75/conn + 0.3/s pl 1310  3000  1.0/km + 0.75/conn + 0.3/s pl 1550  3000  3.3 850 or 1300  90 F. Lengths shall be verified with an OTDR or Light Source/Power Meter with length testing capacity. G. Certification report shall be provided listing both the calculated and measure loss for each fiber optic strand and submitted with the test results as called for above. Provide test results in text format on CD as well as (1) hard bound copy in 3-ring binder. Documentation of testing shall include: Wavelength, fiber type, fiber manufacturer and cable model number, cable manufacturers’ attenuation specifications, cable manufacturers’ bandwidth specifications, Measurement direction, Test equipment and serial numbers (with date of last calibration), date of each test, reference setup, Name of technician(s) performing testing. H. OTDR trace(s) shall be submitted with request for substantial completion. I. Per IEEE 802.3z, for Gigabit Ethernet, The maximum channel attenuation shall be: Application Maximum Channel Attenuation (dB) 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX 3.27 50/125 um 3.2 4.0 INSTRUCTIONAL TELEVISION SYSTEM (ITV) INSTALLATION A. Provide a system of ITV cabling as indicated herein. All coaxial connections shall be installed by trained technicians with professional grade tools specifically sized for each connector type used. Finished connectors shall be symmetrical with no distortion and no braids showing. B. Provide an ITV System headend as indicated herein. The installed system shall comply with all standards set forth in FCC. Rules, Part 76. The installation shall be in strict accordance with all applicable codes and standards, the manufacturer’s printed instructions, and the bid documents. C. Coordinate all work with the Owner. D. The SCS Contractor (System Provider) and his certified technician(s) shall provide full factory startup of the ITV System and shall perform the following minimum services: 1. Install the system cabinet(s) coordinating the placement of all components with the Owner, Architect, Engineer, Structured Cabling System Contractor and other trades. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions. 2. System Testing/Signal Level Tuning: A full system and cable plant test shall be performed after the installation of the ITV cabling and headend is fully complete. The system shall be tested complete by the ITV System Provider from the headend to the outlets. The ITV System Provider shall perform a "burn-in" of the headend system by leaving all active components September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 33 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 powered and operational for at least three days prior to the official testing and certification. 3.28 A. 3.29 3. Contractor shall adjust, tune and otherwise calibrate the overall system as specified on the contract documents and shall perform an operational test of all headend components. The test shall include the simultaneous use of all components and simultaneous distribution of all UHF and VHF channels over the system. This test shall be performed for a minimum of 8 hours. 4. Should such a demonstration of performance show that the ITV System Provider has not properly balanced the system and that picture degradation is present or that output gain is not as specified, the ITV System Provider shall make all necessary changes or adjustments and a second performance demonstration shall be scheduled. 5. First Day of Owner Operation: The contractor shall have a certified technician present at the site for the first day of Owner operation following the cutover to train/assist school personnel and to verify/fine tune system operation. The certified technician shall make follow-up visits as required to bring the system into full operating condition to the satisfaction of the school principal, the School District, and the Engineer. ITV Coaxial Cable Testing: Test each cable and passive device for continuity, attenuation and designed signal losses . Measure each ITV Outlet for the specified signal level of +3 to +10DBmV on all channels. Measure and insure that the specified 43DB or better signal to noise ratio is achieved. Insure that all unused Tap Ports or “F” connectors are properly terminated W/ 75 Ohm Terminator. Check each cable and connector for proper installation and termination. Re-make all connectors that are not properly installed. Verify proper grounding at service entrance and at all surge suppression devices. Perform all signal level testing as specified herein. WARRANTY A. Contractor warrants all work performed by him directly and all work performed for him by others. All materials, equipment and workmanship incorporated in the work shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a period of three years from the date of Substantial Completion of the project. B. In addition, The Structured Cabling System Contractor and The Structured Cabling System Manufacturer shall provide a minimum of 20-year warranty for the completed Category 6 Structured Cabling System. The 20-year warranty shall commence on the date of Final Completion and Final Acceptance by the Engineer and the Owner. The installed system shall be SIEMON “System 6” warranty. C. The Structured Cabling System Contractor shall provide all necessary documentation to the Structured Cabling System Manufacturer required to properly register the system with the manufacturer for warranty purposes. The Structured Cabling System Manufacturer shall issue certificates of warranty signed by a permanent employee of the Structured Cabling System Manufacturer who is authorized by the senior officers of the company to certify Category 6 cabling systems. Original certificates of warranty shall be provided to the Owner, with copies to the Engineer. D. Any work, material or equipment which during the warranty period is, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or the Owner’s Authorized Representative, defective or inferior and not in accordance with the contract documents, shall be made good at no additional cost to the Owner, including any other work which may have been damaged because of such deficiencies. The Contractor shall be the contact person and the person responsible for coordinating all warranty work for the Owner. E. When equipment cannot be repaired at the site, the Contractor shall be completely and solely responsible for the coordination and completion of equipment repairs, including pickup at the project site, transportation and shipping costs to and from the repair site, and reinstallation and reintegration into the system. Equal or better loaner equipment shall be provided and installed by the Contractor September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 34 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 any time equipment cannot be repaired at the site, so that the system is maintained in continuous working order as before the equipment failed. F. 3.30 A. 3.31 The services of a qualified technician shall be available to make necessary warranty repairs in a timely manner during the warranty period. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION After Final Checkout of system operation, and with the Final Checklist, Final Compliance Cable Test Results, and the O&M Manuals in hand, the Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer in writing and with a completed copy of the Final Checklist. Within five (5) working days after receipt of the completed Final Checklist, the Architect/Engineer will conduct an on-site inspection. The Contractor project manager and project senior technician shall be present for the Substantial Completion Inspection. The Contractor will be given thirty (30) consecutive working days to correct punch list items generated by the Architect/Engineer as a result of the Substantial Completion Inspection. CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTATION A. Operation & Maintenance Manuals: B. Prior to the Substantial Completion Inspection, complete Operation & Maintenance (O&M) Manuals. Submit O&M Manuals to the Architect at the Substantial Completion Inspection. C. The instruction manuals shall contain sufficient information to permit school personnel to operate the system with or without assistance from the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall provide O&M Manuals covering all equipment and materials furnished under this contract. The O&M Manuals shall contain all information necessary for the operation, maintenance, parts procurement, and parts replacement for the structured cabling system. The information shall include detailed documentation for firmware configuration. E. Format: Provide 8-1/2" x 11" loose leaf 3-ring binders with clear vinyl overlay designed to receive identification inserts. Furnish identification on the front cover and the back spline as follows: Operating & Maintenance Manual Project Name Contractor F. Project Information: On the front page, enclosed in a 3-ring clear plastic sheet protector, provide the following information: Project Name Contractor Name Contractor’s Project Manager Contractor’s Project Number Owner’s Project Number or Purchase Order Number G. Contact list with name, address, contact person, phone number, and fax number for the each of the following: Structured Cabling System Contractor Conduit subcontractor Manufacturer of all Equipment September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 35 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 H. Other Local source(s) of supply for parts and repair I. Index: On the second page, enclosed in a 3-ring clear plastic sheet protector, provide an index indicating the following section numbers and titles. J. Sections: All sections shall be separated with an appropriate tabbed section divider with the appropriate number and title (typed) as follows: Section 1 – Cuts Sheets: Manufacturer’s original data/cut sheets for each system component. Section 2 – Equipment List: Typed list of each item of equipment with brief description, serial number, and part number. Enclose in a 3-ring clear plastic sheet protector. Section 3 – Factory Manuals: Manufacturer’s printed Installation and Operating Manuals for each item of LAN equipment. Provide 3-ring zip-lock pockets for each manual not factory 3-ring punched. Do not include manuals loose or inserted in binder pockets. Section 4 - Warranties: Copy of Contractor’s warranty. Copy of Manufacturer’s printed warranty for each item of equipment. Enclose in a 3-ring clear plastic sheet protector. Section 5 – Transmittal of Loose Items: Copy of transmittal to the school of all loose items such as patch cords, wire management rings, spare parts, etc. signed-off by the Owner’s Project Manager. Enclose in a 3-ring clear plastic sheet protector. Section 6 - Documentation of Training: Documentation of training signed-off by the School’s Technology Coordinator or Principal (insert in manuals at Final Completion inspection). Enclose in a 3-ring clear plastic sheet protector. Section 7 - Cable Tests: Executive summary of test results for all Category 6, fiber optic, ITV, and voice backbone cabling. 3.32 A. ACCEPTANCE General: The project shall be considered complete and ready to be turned over to the Owner after the completion of the following items: 1. Submission and Approval of all copper and fiber optic certified test reports. 2. Submission of all written warranties. 3. Delivery of final documentation. END OF SECTION 271000 September 15, 2015 271000 - Communications Structured Cabling And Itv Systems Page 36 of 36 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 28 05 13 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1.2 Coaxial cabling. RS-232 cabling. RS-485 cabling. Low-voltage control cabling. Control-circuit conductors. Fire alarm wire and cable. Identification products. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used: a. b. c. Nominal OD. Minimum bending radius. Maximum pulling tension. B. Shop Drawings: Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. C. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. D. Source quality-control reports. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2. B. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. Smoke-Developed Index: 300 or less. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. September 15, 2015 280513 - Conductors And Cables For Electronic Safety And Security Page 1 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PATHWAYS A. Support of Open Cabling: NRTL labeled for support of cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. 2. 3. B. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings. Straps and other devices. Cable Trays: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. 2. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors, and protected against corrosion by electroplated zinc galvanizing, complying with ASTM B 633, Type 1, not less than 0.000472 inch thick. a. b. c. d. e. C. Basket Cable Trays: 6 inches wide and 2 inches deep. Wire mesh spacing shall not exceed 2 by 4 inches. Trough Cable Trays: Nominally 6 inches wide. Ladder Cable Trays: Nominally 18 inches wide, and a rung spacing of 12 inches. Channel Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 4 inches wide. Slot spacing shall not exceed 4-1/2 inches o.c. Solid-Bottom Cable Trays: One-piece construction, nominally 12 inches wide. Provide with solid covers. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 1. 2.2 Cable Management Solutions, Inc. Cablofil Inc. Cooper B-Line, Inc. Cope - Tyco/Allied Tube & Conduit. GS Metals Corp. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep. BACKBOARDS A. 2.3 Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry". COAXIAL CABLE A. Manufacturers: following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Alpha Wire Company. Belden CDT Inc.; Electronics Division. Coleman Cable, Inc. CommScope, Inc. September 15, 2015 280513 - Conductors And Cables For Electronic Safety And Security Page 2 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 5. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Draka USA. B. General Coaxial Cable Requirements: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz. C. RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D. RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATVR. 1. 2. 3. 4. E. 3. No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 40 percent aluminum braid. PVC jacket. RG59/U (Plenum Rated): NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. 2. 3. H. No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid. Jacketed with black PVC or PE. Suitable for indoor installations. RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV. 1. 2. G. No. 20 AWG, solid, silver-plated, copper-covered steel conductor. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. Triple shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 95 percent aluminum braid; covered by aluminum foil with grounding strip. Color-coded PVC jacket. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM. 1. 2. 3. 4. F. No. 14 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 60 percent aluminum braid. Jacketed with sunlight-resistant, black PVC or PE. Suitable for outdoor installations in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus 85 deg C. No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; foam fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 65 percent aluminum braid. Copolymer jacket. NFPA and UL compliance, listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655, and with NFPA 70 "Radio and Television Equipment" and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles. Types are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. CATV Cable: Type CATV, or CATVP or CATVR. CATV Plenum Rated: Type CATVP, complying with NFPA 262. CATV Riser Rated: Type CATVR; or CATVP, CATVR, or CATV, complying with UL 1666. CATV Limited Rating: Type CATVX. September 15, 2015 280513 - Conductors And Cables For Electronic Safety And Security Page 3 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 2.4 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE A. Manufacturers: following: 1. 2. 3. B. 2.5 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Aim Electronics; a brand of Emerson Electric Co. Leviton Voice & Data Division. Siemon Co. (The). Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms. RS-232 CABLE A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Plenum-Type Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.6 Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. Polypropylene insulation. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage. PVC jacket. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain wire. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. Plastic insulation. Individual aluminum foil-polyester tape shielded pairs with 100 percent shield coverage. Plastic jacket. Pairs are cabled on common axis with No. 24 AWG, stranded (7x32) tinned copper drain wire. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262. RS-485 CABLE A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CM or CMG. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Plenum-Type Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.7 Paired, 2 pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. PVC insulation. Unshielded. PVC jacket. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. Paired, 2 pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned copper conductors. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. Unshielded. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test. LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE A. Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. September 15, 2015 280513 - Conductors And Cables For Electronic Safety And Security Page 4 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. 1 pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors. PVC insulation. Unshielded. PVC jacket. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. Plenum-Type, Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 2.8 1 pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned copper conductors. PVC insulation. Unshielded. PVC jacket. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262. Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D. 1 pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned copper conductors. PVC insulation. Unshielded. PVC jacket. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1581. Plenum-Type, Paired Lock Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 1 pair, twisted, No. 18 AWG, stranded (19x30) tinned copper conductors. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation. Unshielded. Plastic jacket. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262, Flame Test. CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. Class 1 Control Circuits: UL 83. B. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, or in raceway power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes complying with UL 83. C. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type TW or TF, complying with UL 83. 2.9 Stranded copper, Type THHN-THWN, in raceway complying with FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE A. Manufacturers: following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Comtran Corp. Draka USA. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corporation. West Penn Wire/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies. B. General Wire and Cable Requirements: NRTL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760. C. Signaling Line Circuits: Twisted, shielded pair, not less than 14 AWG. September 15, 2015 280513 - Conductors And Cables For Electronic Safety And Security Page 5 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 1. D. A. Circuit Integrity Cable: Twisted shielded pair, NFPA 70, Article 760, Classification CI, for power-limited fire alarm signal service Type FPL. NRTL listed and labeled as complying with UL 1424 and UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating. Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded insulation. 1. 2. 3. 2.10 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 16 AWG, minimum. Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum. Multiconductor Armored Cable: NFPA 70, Type MC, copper conductors, Type TFN/THHN conductor insulation, copper drain wire, copper armor with outer jacket with red identifier stripe, NTRL listed for fire alarm and cable tray installation, plenum rated, and complying with requirements in UL 2196 for a 2-hour rating. IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS Manufacturers: following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the Brady Corporation HellermannTyton. Kroy LLC. Panduit Corp. B. Comply with UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. B. Factory sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results. C. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7. B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points. C. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." for installation of conduits and wireways. D. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible. September 15, 2015 280513 - Conductors And Cables For Electronic Safety And Security Page 6 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA E. Pathway Installation in Equipment Rooms: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. F. 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints. INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C. Open-Cable Installation: 1. 2. 3. D. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors: 1. 2. 3. E. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets or terminals. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, and terminals. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's instructions as to allowable pulling tension. Monitor cable pull tensions. Install plenum-rated cable only. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas. Coil cable 72 inches long shall be neatly coiled not less than 12 inches in diameter below each feed point. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation: 1. 2. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X. Install corrosion-resistant connectors with properly designed O-rings to keep out moisture. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches. September 15, 2015 280513 - Conductors And Cables For Electronic Safety And Security Page 7 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.3 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 FIRE ALARM WIRING INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 72. B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 1. 2. C. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. Fire alarm circuits and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system shall be installed in a dedicated raceway system. This system shall not be used for any other wire or cable. Wiring Method: 1. 2. 3. Cables and raceways used for fire alarm circuits, and equipment control wiring associated with the fire alarm system, may not contain any other wire or cable. Fire-Rated Cables: Use of 2-hour, fire-rated fire alarm cables, NFPA 70, Types MI and CI, is not permitted. Signaling Line Circuits: Power-limited fire alarm cables shall not be installed in the same cable or raceway as signaling line circuits. D. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as recommended by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. E. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made. F. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and another for supervisory circuits. Colorcode audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits. Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes and covers red. G. Risers: Install at least two vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system. Separate risers in close proximity to each other with a minimum one-hour-rated wall, so the loss of one riser does not prevent the receipt or transmission of signals from other floors or zones. H. Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the fire alarm control panel and the transmitter. Install number of conductors and electrical supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function. 3.4 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS A. Minimum Conductor Sizes: 1. 2. 3. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits, No. 14 AWG. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control and signal circuits, No. 16 AWG. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm and signal circuits, No. 12 AWG. September 15, 2015 280513 - Conductors And Cables For Electronic Safety And Security Page 8 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA 3.5 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Perimeter Security Systems" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. B. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Intrusion Detection" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. C. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Access Control" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. D. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Video Surveillance" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. E. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "PLC Electronic Detention Monitoring and Control Systems" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. F. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. G. Comply with requirements in Division 28 Section "Refrigerant Detection and Alarm" for connecting, terminating, and identifying wires and cables. 3.6 FIRESTOPPING A. 3.7 Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." GROUNDING A. 3.8 For low-voltage wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." IDENTIFICATION A. 3.9 Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. Visually inspect cable jacket materials for UL or third-party certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding, and bonding. Coaxial Cable Tests: Comply with requirements in Division 27 Section "Master Antenna Television System." B. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. September 15, 2015 280513 - Conductors And Cables For Electronic Safety And Security Page 9 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 END OF SECTION 28 05 13 September 15, 2015 280513 - Conductors And Cables For Electronic Safety And Security Page 10 of 10 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 28 31 11 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 1.01 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish equipment, accessories, and material required for installation of intelligent reporting microprocessor controlled, digital addressable fire detection and emergency voice alarm communication system. Equipment shall include alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, control panels, auxiliary control devices, annunciators, power supplies, and wiring as indicated. Material and equipment necessary for functional operation of system, not specified or described herein, shall be deemed part of work. B. Digital Addressable Fire Alarm System: 1. System shall comply with NFPA Standard 72 for Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as noted. 2. System shall be electrically supervised and monitor integrity of conductors. 3. System shall be labeled by Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory such as UL and shall be listed by their re-examination service. 4. C. Fire alarm system shall be active/interrogative type system where each addressable device is repetitively scanned, causing signals to be sent to main fire alarm control panel (FACP) indicating what devices and associated circuitry is functional. Loss of signal at FACP shall result in trouble indication from that remote device. D. Emergency Voice Alarm Communication: 1. System shall digitally stores message sequences, and notify building occupants that fire or life safety or other life safety condition has been reported. 2. Message generator shall be capable of automatically distributing up to eight simultaneous, unique messages to appropriate audio zones within facility based on type and location of initiating event. E. Fire Control Center (FCC): 1. FCC shall also support emergency manual audio zones, and shall include provision for system operator to override automatic messages system wide or in selected zones. 2. System shall support additional, alternate FCC’s capable of simultaneous monitoring of system events. 3. Alternate FCC’s shall also support approved method of transferring control functions to alternate FCC when necessary. 4. FCC’s shall be individually capable of assuming audio command functions such as emergency paging, audio zone control functions and firefighter’s telephone communication functions. F. Each designated zone shall transmit separate and different alarm, supervisory and trouble signals to FCC ad designated personnel in other buildings at site via multiplex communication network. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. Section 01 31 00 – Project Coordination. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management. September 15, 2015 283111 - Digital, Addressable Fire-alarm System Page 1 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 F. Section 01 91 00 – Commissioning. H. I. J. K. L. 1.03 Section 07 84 00 – Fire Stopping. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants. Section 26 05 19 – Low Voltage Electrical Power Cables. Section 26 05 33 – Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems. Section 28 05 13 - Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security. REFERENCES. A. See Section 01 42 00 References for additional reference standards, definitions, abbreviations and acronyms. B. Definitions: 1. Addressable: Combined hardware and software systems associated with Fire Alarm Control Panel and field devices which will permit identification and control of individual device (initiating or signal/control device). 2. Alarm Initiating Device: Manual station, smoke detector or heat detector. 3. Alarm Signal: Signifies state of emergency requiring immediate action. Pertains to signals such as operation of manual station and operation of sprinkler flow switch. 4. Style “D” Initiating Circuits: (Class A) 4-wire circuits arranged and electrically supervised so a single break or single ground fault condition will be indicated by trouble signal at fire alarm control panel (FACP) and circuit will continue to be capable of operation for intended service in faulted condition regardless of break or ground fault condition. 5. Style “B” Initiating Circuits: (Class B) Circuits electrically supervised so single break or single ground fault condition will be indicated by trouble signal at fire alarm control panel (FACP) regardless of break or ground fault condition. Receipt of alarm conditions with single ground shall be provided. 6. Hard-Wired System: Alarm, supervisory, and initiating devices directly connected through individual dedicated conductors, to central control panel without use of multiplexing circuits or devices. 7. Multiplex System: One using signaling method characterized by simultaneous or sequential transmission, or both, and reception of multiple signals in communication channel, including means for positively identifying each signal. 8. FA: Fire Alarm System including equipment, devices, wiring and accessories. 9. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel. 10. Supervisory Signal: Indicates abnormal status or need for action regarding fire suppression or other protective system. 11. Trouble Signal: Indicates that fault such as open circuit or ground, has occurred in system. 12. Zone: Initiating device or combination of devices connected to single alarm-initiating device circuit. Zone for addressable systems refers to each identifiable, unique device address. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Characteristics: 1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from reporting devices shall be encoded on NFPA Style 6 (Class A) signaling line circuits (SLC). 2. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style D) as part of addressable device connected by SLC circuit. 3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style Z) as part addressable device connected by SLC circuit. 4. On Style 6 or 7 (Class A) configurations, single ground faults or open circuits on system signaling line circuit shall not cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or ability to report alarm. 5. Alarm signals arriving at FACP shall not be lost following primary power failure (or outage) until alarm signal is processed and recorded. 6. Speaker circuits may be controlled by NAC outputs built into amplifiers, which shall function as addressable points on digital audio loop. 7. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) speaker circuits shall be arranged with minimum of September 15, 2015 283111 - Digital, Addressable Fire-alarm System Page 2 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 one circuit per floor of building or smoke zone, whichever is greater. 8. Audio amplifiers and tone generating equipment shall be electrically supervised for normal and abnormal conditions. 9. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) speaker circuits and control equipment shall be arranged such that loss of any speaker circuit will not cause of other speaker circuits. 10. Two-way emergency telephone communication circuits shall be supervised for open and short circuit conditions. 11. Provide minimum of one speaker circuit per smoke zone. 12. Speaker circuits shall be electrically supervised for open and short circuit conditions. If short circuit exists on speaker circuit, it shall not be possible to activate that circuit. 13. Audio amplifiers and tone generating equipment shall be electrically supervised for abnormal conditions. Digital amplifiers shal provide built-in speaker circuits, field configurable as four Class B (Style Y), or two Class A (Style Z) circuits. 14. Digital amplifiers shall be capable of storing up to tw minutes of digitally recorded audio messages and tones. Digital amplifiers shall also be capable of supervising connections to associated dightal message generator, and upin loss of that connection shall be capable of one of the following system responses: a. Digital amplifier shall automatically broadcast stored audio message. b. Digital amplifier shall switch t mode where local bus input on digital amplifier shall accept inputs to initiate broadcasts of stored messages. Bus input shall be connected to NAC on local FACP for purpose of providing alternative means of initiating emergency message during communication fault conditions. c. Speaker circuits shall be either 25 VRMS or 70 VMS. Speaker circuits shall have 20% spare capacity for future expansion or increased power output requirements. d. Two way emergency telephone (Fire Fighter Telephone) communication shall be supported between audio command center and minimum of seven (7) Fire Fighter Telephone locations simultaneously on telephone riser. e. Provide connection of FFT voice communication to speaker circuits to allow voice paging over speaker circuit from telephone handset. f. Digital audio message generator shall use reliable, non-moving parts, and support digital storage of minimum 16 up to 32 minutes, and shall support programming options to string audio segments together to create up to 1000 messages, or to loop messages and parts of messages to repeat for predetermined cycles or indefinitely. B. When fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of system initiating devics, the following function shall immediately occur: 1. System alarm LED shall flash. 2. Local piezo electric signal in control panel shall sound. 3. Minimum 640 character display shall indicate information associated with fire alarm condition, including type of alarm point and location within protected premises. 4. Printing and storage equipment shall log information associated with each new fire alarm control condition, along with time and date of occurrence. 5. System output programs assigned via control-by-event interlock programming shall be activated by particular point in alarm shall be executed, the associated system outputs (notification appliances and relays) shall be activated. 6. Audio portion of system shall sound proper audio signal (consisting of tone, voice, or tone and voice) to appropriate zones. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures. B. Submit letter from manufacturer confirming the bidder is authorized installer and distributor of proposed equipment for continuous twenty-four (24) month period prior to date of bid. Submit certificate of completion of installer’s service training from system manufacturer. C. Provide list of three (3) successful fire alarm installations, of similar scope and configuration with project names and contact person for each installation. September 15, 2015 283111 - Digital, Addressable Fire-alarm System Page 3 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 D. Provide statement confirming that E. Shop Drawings: 1. System operation and supervision description of each circuit type, sequence of operation, for manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. 2. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming. 3. System riser diagrams with device addresses, conduit sizes, cable wire type and sizes. 4, Indicate power, signal, and control wiring color coding, equipment diagrams with terminals and wiring connections. 5. Battery Backup: Size calculation. 6. Duct Smoke Detectors: performance and installation details indicating detectors are listed for range of velocity, temperature, and humidity during HVAC system operation. 7. HVAC ductwork coordination drawings shall be to scale, indicating duct detector locations and access points. Locate smoke detectors in accord with manufacturer’s written recommendations 8. Voice/Alarm Signaling Center: Indicate equipment rack or console layout, grounding schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single line connection diagram. 9. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet location showing address of each addressable device with size and routes of cables and conduits. G. Provide letter from manufacturer of equipment, which certifies equipment has been installed according to factory intended practices that components used in system are compatible and that system is operating satisfactorily. H. Manuals shall include: 1. Complete operating and maintenance manuals with technical data sheets. Submittal and approval shall be concurrent with shop drawings. 2. Wiring diagrams indicating internal wiring for each device and interconnections between equipment items. 3. Clear and concise description of operation giving clear, detailed information to properly operate system and equipment. 1.06 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE A. Installer shall, at Owner’s request, make available annual service contracts, after warranty period, to provide annual factory authorized service contracts for F/A system. B. Location: 1. At least one (1) office and at least one (1) maintenance office have been in service for continuous twenty-four (24) month period prior to date of bid including address of maintenance office. 2. Address of marketing office and maintenance office shall be within 120 mile radius of project site. Identify number of technicians certified on equipment being bid and work locations. 3. Installer shall respond to Owner’s request for service within 24-hours. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. See Section 01 42 00 – References for additional reference standards, definitions, abbreviations and acronyms. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. Factory-authorized and trained installer performing work shall be currently licensed by State of Florida for Fire Alarm work. 2. Manufacturer's authorized installer shall have completed ten (10) projects of equal scope, giving satisfactory performance and have been furnishing and installing alarm systems for at least five (5) years. September 15, 2015 283111 - Digital, Addressable Fire-alarm System Page 4 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 3. Manufacturer's representative shall be bonded to assure Owner of performance and satisfactory service during warranty period. 4. Installed system shall have manufacturer's service representative located within 120-mile radius of project. C. Comply with 2010 Edition, Florida Building Code (FBC), Chapter 11 – Accessibility, and Florida Fire Prevention Code (FFPC), local ordinances and regulations and local fire official having jurisdiction over project. D. National Electrical Code, 2008 Edition. E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Provide fire alarm and detection systems in accord with: 1. NFPA 13 - Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 17 - Dry Chemical Systems. 3. NFPA 17A – Wet Chemical Systems. 4. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC), 2008 Edition. 5. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code, 1996 Edition. 6. NFPA 90A – Air Conditioning Systems. 7. NFPA 92A – Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, Large Areas. 8. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code. F. Listing and Labeling Agency: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 1. UL 50 – Cabinets and Boxes. 2. UL 268 – Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 3. UL 268A – Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications. 4. UL 864 – Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 5. UL 521 – Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Systems. 6. UL 228 – Door Closers-Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 7. UL 464 – Audible Signaling Appliances. 8. UL 38 – Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. 9. UL 346 – Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 10. UL 1076 – Control Unit for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Systems.. 11. UL 1481 – Power Supplies Fire Protective Signaling Systems 12. UL 1971 – Visual Notification Appliances. G. Factory Mutual (FM). Provide FM-Approved fire alarm systems and components: H. Manufacturer shall be IS 9001 certified and meet BS EN9001: ANSI/ASQC Q9001-1994. I. Software Modifications: 1. Factory trained and authorized technician shall perform system software modification, upgrades or changes required to modify FA system. 2. Modifications include addition or deletions of devices, circuits, zones, changes to system operation, and custom label changes for devices or zones. 3. System structure and software shall place no limit on type or extent of software modifications on-site. 4. System modifications shall not require power-down or loss of system fire protection during modifications. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Comply with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals. B. Provide two (2) year warranty of installed system against defects in material and workmanship from date of project substantial completion. C. Labor and material shall be provided by warranty at no added expense to Owner during norSeptember 15, 2015 283111 - Digital, Addressable Fire-alarm System Page 5 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 mal working hours. D. Warranty period shall begin on date of project substantial completion. Warranty work response time shall be 24 hours from time of Owner’s request. E. Warranty shall not apply to equipment, subjected to misuse, abuse, negligence, accident or unauthorized modification. PART 2 2.01 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURER A. Fire Alarm panels, devices and accessories shall be manufactured by Notifier by Honeywell; 12 Clintonville Rd., Northfield , CT 06472-1653; Tel: 203-484-7161, 800-289-3473; Fax: 203484-7118; Website: www.notifier.com. B. Owner’s existing FA system is Notifier. New or replacement products shall be compatible with existing systems. No substitutions will be permitted. 2.02 MANUAL PULL STATIONS A. Description: Double action non-break glass, addressable type, fabricated metal or plastic, and finished in red color with molded, raised letter operating instructions of contrasting color. Address of unit shall be field-settable without special tools. B. Station Reset: Key or wrench operated, double pole, doubles throw, switch rated for the voltage and current at which it operates. Stations have screw terminals for connections. 2.03 DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS A. Notifier DNRW InnovairFlex: Intelligent Non-Relay Photoelectirc Duct Smoke Detector. B. Comply with UL 268, “Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.” Include the following features: 1. Factory Nameplate: Serial number and type identification. 2. Operating Voltage: 24-V d.c. maximum. 3. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them normal operation. 4. Plug-In Arrangement: Detector and associated encapsulated electronic components are mounted in a module that connects to a fixed base with a twist-locking plug connection. The plug connection requires no spring for secure mounting and contact maintenance. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring. 5. Visual Indicator: Connected to indicate detector has operated. 6. Addressability: Detectors include a communication transmitter and receiver having a unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP. Device shall contain integral LED which shall flash each time the device is interrogated. C. Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: Include the following features and characteristics. 1. Sensor: An infrared detector light source with matching silicon cell receiver. 2. Addressable Duct Smoke Detector: Photoelectric-type, with sampling tube of design for outdoor use. 2.04 AREA THERMAL (HEAT) DETECTORS A. Notifier Model FST-851A Low Profile Intelligent Photoelectric Sensor with Model B210LP(A) base. September 15, 2015 283111 - Digital, Addressable Fire-alarm System Page 6 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 B. Addressable Thermal Detector: Rate compensated/fixed temperature type with plug in base and alarm indication lamp. Detectors have a communication transmitter and receiver with unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP. 2.05 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL PULL STATIONS A. Notifier Model NBX-12LX Addressable Manual Pull Stations: Dual action activation pull station that includes addressable interface to control panel. 2.06 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Wall Horn/Strobe: 1. Indoor Wall Horn/Strobe on gypsum board wall surfaces: Notifier Model #P2W, 2-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, white. 2. Indoor Wall Horn/Strobe on masonry wall surfaces: Notifier Model #P2R, 2-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, red. 3. Exterior Wall Horn/Strobe: Notifier Model #P4RK, 4-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, red. B. Ceiling Horn/Strobe: 1. Indoor Ceiling Strobe: Notifier Model #PC2W, 2-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, white 2. Exterior Ceiling Strobe: Notifier Model #PC4RK, 4-wire horn/strobe, standard cd, white C. Wall Strobe: 1. Outdoor Ceiling Strobe: Notifier Model #SCRK, strobe, standard cd, red. D. Ceiling Strobe: 1. Interior ceiling mounted: Notifier Model #SW, strobe, standard cd, white. 2. Exterior ceiling mounted: Notifier Model #SR, standard cd, strobe, red. E. Wall Horn: 1. Interior wall mounted: Notifier Model #HR, horn, red red. 2. Exterior wall mounted: Notifier Model #HRK, horn, red. F. System Operation: 1. SpectrAlert Advance Fire Alarm Horn shall operate on 24-V d.c. power. 2. When operating, horns shall provide sound pressure level of 90 dB (min), measured 10 feet from bell. 3. Provide flush mounted gasketed weatherproof units outdoors. Visual Alarm Devices shall mount on cover horn, or share common enclosure. 4. Arrange units to monitor and/or control one or more systems components that are not otherwise equipped for multiplex communication. 5. Units shall transmit identification and status to FACP using communication transmitter and receiver with unique identification and capability for status-reporting to FACP. G. Visual Alarm Devices: 1. ADA approved strobe lights with clear polycarbonate lens and xenon flash tube. Mount lenses on aluminum faceplate. 2. “FIRE” is engraved in minimum 1-inch high letters on lens. 3. Lamps have minimum peak intensity of 75 candela. Strobe leads are factory-connected to screw terminals. 4. Combination device consist of factory combined audible and visual alarm units in a single mounting assembly. H. Zone addressable Modules: Provide zone addressable interface modules and relays as required to interconnect or control auxiliary functions such as kitchen hood, gas solenoid connections, cooking equipment connections. 2.06 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) September 15, 2015 283111 - Digital, Addressable Fire-alarm System Page 7 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 A. Notifier Model NFS2-3030 Intelligent Addressable Fire Alarm System control panel in CABC4 with display DVC audio in CA-1 second tier. 1. Primary Input power: AMPS-24, 120VAC, 50/60 Hz, 4.5 A maximum. 2. DC Output: a. Main 24 VDC: Up to 5.0 A. b. Aux 24 VDC: Up to 5.0 A. c. 5 VDC: Up to 0.15.0 A. 3. Battery Charger Range: 7 AH – 200 AH. Use separate cabinet for batteries over 26 AH. 4. Float Rate; 27.6 V. B. Programming shall be by installer through use of portable computers. Program shall be capable of field updates without factory programmed hardware or firmware. C. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind lexan plastic or tempered glass cover in stainless steel or aluminum frame. Install frame in location observable from FACP. Include interpretation and appropriate response for display and signals, and briefly describe functional operation of system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. 2.07 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY A. Notifier Model AMPS-24: 110-120 VAC, 50/60 Hz input, 5 A power source: maximum. 1. Unit shall provide B. Emergency power supply Cabinet: Notifier Model BB-25, BB-100 or BB-200 Battery Backbox in CAB-4 series enclosure. 2.08 WIRE A. Acceptable Manufacuturers: 1. West Penn Wire, 2833 Est Chestnut St. , Washington, PA 15301; Tel: 800-245-4964; Fax: 724-222-6420; Website: www.westpenn-wpw.com. 2. Keystone Wire and Cable, 2516 NW 19thth St., Bldg.O, Pompano Business Center, Pompano Beach, FL 33069; Tel: 800-843-2460, 954-977-3800; Fax: 954-977-9603; Website: www.keystonewire.com. 3. Other manufacturers shall comply with Section 01 25 13 – Product Substitution Procedures. B. Wire Size: 1. Line-Voltage: Line voltage conductors shall be solid copper conductors with 600 V-rated insulation. #12 AWG, minimum. 2. Number and sizes of wire shall be as recommended by Fire Alarm manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.63mm) 19-strand copper for initiation device circuits and signaling line circuits, and not less than 14 AWG (1.63mm) 19-strand copper notification appliance circuits. C. Wire shall be installed in EMP or flexible metal conduit (minimum conduit size 3/4"). 1. Wire shall not fill more than 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are located in single conduit. D. Fire Alarm conduit within buildings shall be included with installer’s bid in accord with Division 26. Underground conduit between buildings shall be included with electrical contractor’s bid. E. Wiring for strobes shall be separated from initiating device wiring by use of separate raceways. Splices are not permitted. F. 2.09 Wiring between buildings or for direct burial: West Penn Wire Co. Aquaseal Water Resistant Cable. TAGS September 15, 2015 283111 - Digital, Addressable Fire-alarm System Page 8 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 A. Tags For Identifying Tested Components: Comply with NFPA 72H. Fire alarm function boxes shall be painted bright red, including inside, outside and cover. 2.10 SURGE SUPPRESSION A. Surge Protectors: Ditek Corp., One Ditek Center, 1720 Starkey Rd., Largo, FL 33771; Tel: 800-753-2345, 727-812-5000; Fax; 727-812-5001; Website: www.ditekcorp.com. 1. Equipment Panel (Dedicated Circuit Surge Protective Device): Ditek Model DTK-HW120HW 2. Alarm Dialer Surge Protector: Ditek Model DTK-MRJ31XSCPWP. B. Signaling Line Circuit Protector: Edco SLCP30 manufactured by Emerson Network Power, 328 Water St., Binghamton, NY 13901; Tel: 607-721-8840, 800-288-6191; Fax:607-6228713; Website: [email protected]. 2.11 REMOTE GRAPHIC ANNUNCIATOR A. Remote annunciator shall provide visible remote annunciation to primary Notifier control panel. For renovation projects, installer shall replace existing unit(s). 2.12 CONTROL MODULES A. Control Modules: Notifier Model FCM-1(A) Intelligent Addressable Control Module. Module supervises Class B (Style Y) or Class A (Style Z) notification control circuits. 2.13 FIRE ALARM RELAYS A. Relay Modules: Notifier Model FRM-1(A) Intelligent Addressable Relay Module. B. Provide fire alarm relays for control of designated equipment. Relays shall be provided in separate enclosure not inside equipment motor starter, unit housing, etc. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install system per NEC, NFPA 72, Florida Fire Prevention Code, and manufacturer’s written installation instructions. B. Fire Alarm Primary and Secondary Power Supply Disconnects and Junction Boxes: Paint red and label "FIRE ALARM." Provide with lockable handle or cover. 3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semi-flush in recessed back boxes with operating handles as indicated. Devices shall be mounted at 48" above finished floor to top of device per ADA requirement unless otherwise noted. B. Smoke Detectors: Install ceiling-mounted detectors not less than four inches from sidewall to the near edge. Install detectors located on wall at least four inches but not more than 12 inches below ceiling. For exposed solid joist construction, mount detectors on bottoms of joists. On smooth ceilings, install detectors not over 30 feet apart in any direction. Install detectors no closer than five feet from air registers. C. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install device such that entire lens is 80 inches above finished floor per ADA requirements. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with device-operating mechanism concealed behind grille or as indicated. Combine audible and visual alarms at same location into single unit. September 15, 2015 283111 - Digital, Addressable Fire-alarm System Page 9 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 D. Visual Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn or as combination unit. Install device so entire lens is 80 inches AFF per ADA requirements. E. Cell of masonry block in which door hold open device boxes are located shall be filled with concrete. 3.03 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Division 26 except as indicated. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with fire alarm system to terminal blocks. C. Mark each terminal according to the wiring diagrams of the system. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. Wire nut connections are unacceptable. Leave minimum of 8" wire make-up length at each device. Make up length shall be measured after device is connected or splice is made. D. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where circuit tap is made. E. No fire alarm conductors shall be installed below grade with exception of conductors routed from building to building. Other wiring shall be installed concealed overhead. F. Terminals and terminations shall be above ground. 3.04 GROUNDING A. Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize to greatest extent possible ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. B. Provide 5-ohm ground and ground rod at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. Provide #10 AWG grounding conductor in each conduit completely bonded to FACP grounding conductor. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pretesting: Upon completing installation of system, align, adjust, and balance system and perform complete pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, conformance of system to project requirements, B. Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results. C. Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide letter certifying nstallation is complete and fully operable, including names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests. D. Final Test Notice: Provide a ten-day minimum notice in writing to Architect, Engineer, Fire Official and Owner when system is ready for final acceptance testing. E. Minimum System Tests: Test system according to procedures outlined in NFPA72H, Chapters2 and 4, and NFPA72E, Chapter8. Minimum required tests are as follows. 1. Verify absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground. September 15, 2015 283111 - Digital, Addressable Fire-alarm System Page 10 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 2. Megger test conductors other than those intentionally and permanently grounded with electronic components disconnected. Test for resistance to ground. Report readings less than 1-megohm for evaluation. 3. Test conductors for short circuits utilizing an insulation testing device with each circuit pair, short circuit at far end of the circuit. 4. Measure circuit resistance with ohmmeter. Record circuit resistance of each circuit on Project Record Drawings. 5. Verify control unit is in normal condition as detailed in manufacturer's operating and maintenance manual. 6. Test initiating and indicating circuits for signal transmission under open circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10-percent of initiating and indicating devices. Observe signal transmission according to class of wiring used. 7. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and response at control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion. 8. Test system for specified functions according to manufacturer's operating and maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at each station including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at devices required to be affected by item under all system sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator indications. Observe voice audio for routing, clarity, quality, freedom from noise and distortion, and volume level. 9. Test both primary power and secondary power. Verify, by test, secondary power system is capable of operating system for period and manner specified. F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by deficiencies. Verify by system test that total system meets project requirements and applicable standards. G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide written record of inspections, tests, and detailed test results in form of test log. Submit log upon the satisfactory completion of tests. H. Tag equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily completed. 3.06 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels and adjusting controls and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to site for this purpose. 3.07 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide services of factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate system and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below. 1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in the location of devices, boxes, procedures and schedules involved in operating, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintaining of system. Provide eight hours training. Training shall include complete project inspection with Owner's authorized representative to identify device locations, junction box locations and surge suppression module locations. 2. Schedule training with Owner seven working days in advance. September 15, 2015 283111 - Digital, Addressable Fire-alarm System Page 11 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 END OF SECTION 28 31 11 September 15, 2015 283111 - Digital, Addressable Fire-alarm System Page 12 of 12 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. B. 1.2 RELATED WORK A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. 1.3 C. D. E. Comply with Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures. Submit Product data, including manufacturer’s specifications, chemical analysis, with recommended dilution, application directions, and safety precautions. Submit sample copy of applicator’s warranty for review. Submit documentation of Applicator’s experience evidence with copies of current local and state licenses and current Certified Operator-in-Charge certificate. Submit evidence of at least 5 continuous years of successful operation in pest control and termite treatment. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. D. E. F. 1.6 Use of chlordane, heptachlor, aldrin, or dieldrin is not allowed. SUBMITTALS A. B. 1.5 Section 013100 - Project Coordination. Section 012513 – Product Substitution Procedures. Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures. Section 013553 - Security Procedures. Section 014200 - References. Section 014500 - Quality Control. Section 017800 - Closeout Procedures. Section 033000 - Concrete. Section 310000 - Earthwork. Section 311000 - Site Clearing. Section 312200 - Grading. Section 312100 - Off-Gassing Mitigation. BANNED TREATMENT SYSTEMS A. 1.4 Termiticide and herbicide application to soil under new buildings areas for protection of structures from subterranean insects. Treatment areas shall include slabs-on-grade, interior and exterior foundation perimeter, areas around pipes and conduits penetrating slabs on fill, and where exterior foundation walls abut paving, sidewalk slabs, or other permanent surfacing. Comply with Section 014500 – Quality Control. Work shall be performed by bonded installer whose principal business is pest control and termite treatment and can show evidence of 5 continuous years of successful operation in this field. Applicator shall be licensed in accord with State of Florida and Collier County Requirements to apply soil treatment solution. Comply with applicable Federal, State and local laws, codes, and ordinances over use of soil poisons. Comply with State and Federal Environmental Protection Agency regulations for termiticides. Installer shall be registered with Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services as provider of pest control services. STORAGE AND PROTECTION September 15, 2015 313116 - Termite Control Page 1 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA A. B. C. 1.7 Avoid surface flow or over spray of toxicant from application site when soil or fill is excessively wet or after heavy rains. Unless treated areas are to be immediately covered, take precautions to prevent disturbances of treatment by human or animal contact. Provide warning signs and instruct workers to use protective measures for their safety. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. B. 1.8 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Submit documents per Section 017800 - Closeout Procedures. Submit warranty, notarized and signed by duly authorized officer or principal. WARRANTY A. Upon completion of soil treatment, furnish Owner written warranty, from applicator, to include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Application was made at concentration, rates, and methods complying with manufacturer’s written instructions. Effectiveness of treatment is warranted for not less than 5 years without additional cost to Owner, by means of 5-year repair and replacement bond. Upon evidence of subterranean termite activity, retreat area at no additional charge to Owner. Additional treatment shall be sufficient to prevent termites from attacking building or its contents. Upon occurrence of damage to building or to its contents within warranty period, retreat soil and replace damage at no cost to Owner. Warranty bond shall be non-cancelable by product applicator. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED SOIL TREATMENT PRODUCTS A. B. C. D. 2.2 Bayer: Environmental Science, product: Premise 75. EPA Registration No. 432-1332. FMC Corporation: Dragnet SFR. EPA Registration No. 279-3062. Mfr: Syngenta Crop Protection, Inc., product: Demon Max. EPA Registration No. 100-1218. BASF: Termidor SC. EPA Registration No. 7969-210.: SUBSTITUTION A. Comply with Section 012513 – Product Substitution Procedures for other manufacturers requesting product approval. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. B. C. D. Apply termiticide mixture after subgrade has been made ready for placement of floor slab vapor barrier, and as soon as practical before placement of concrete slabs and caps on masonry piers. Piling, pile caps, grade beams, foundation walls, and below grade waterproofing shall have been completed. Soil Conditions: Apply termiticide mixtures when moisture content soil is sufficiently low to allow uniform distribution of chemical throughout specified areas. Application Under Slabs on Fill: 1. 2. 3. Apply termiticide mixtures uniformly to areas beneath concrete slabs-on-grade, including beneath walkways and entrance platforms and beneath sidewalks within 5 feet of buildings. Apply at rate per manufacturer’s written instructions. Ground areas beneath concrete slabs-on-grade and paving abutting building slabs shall be similarly treated for distance not less than 3 feet from building. September 15, 2015 313116 - Termite Control Page 2 of 3 MARTIN COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT JENSEN BEACH ES – KITCHEN RENOVATIONS JENSEN BEACH, FLORIDA E. Application Along Foundation Walls, Pipes, and Conduits: 1. 2. 3. F. G. 3.2 PROJECT MANUAL MCSD 1001-0-2016JC FLA Project No. 4176-05 Treat critical areas along both sides of exterior and interior foundation walls, columns, and around utility pipes, conduits, ducts and other similar items extending through soil beneath and next to new construction, to depth, width, and rate per manufacturer’s written instructions. Mix chemical with soil as it is placed against walls and utility lines. Apply at rate per manufacturer’s written instructions. Application to Masonry Foundation Walls: Treat voids of unit masonry foundation walls, top of course occurring at or just above grade level, with additional treatment Apply at rate per manufacturer’s written instructions. Retreatment of Disturbed Soil: Retreat soil surfaces disturbed after treatment and before placement of slabs and covering structures. CLEAN UP A. B. C. Comply with applicable state and federal laws for disposal of pesticide, spray mixture, or rinsate. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for disposal of materials and empty containers. Do not allow supplies of chemicals to remain on site unattended. END OF SECTION September 15, 2015 313116 - Termite Control Page 3 of 3